manualshive.com logo in svg

Subaru 2006 Legacy, Manual

The 2006 Subaru Legacy is a reliable and versatile vehicle equipped with advanced features. To get the most out of your vehicle, make sure to download the free manual from manualshive.com to access important information and maintenance guidelines. Stay informed and maximize your driving experience with the Subaru Legacy manual.

Share
Download
background image

GD(H4SO)-7

List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

P1571

Reference Code Incompatibility

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-208, DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBIL-
ITY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

P1572

Imm Circuit Failure (Except 
Antenna Circuit)

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-208, DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT 
ANTENNA CIRCUIT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

P1574

Key Communication Failure

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-208, DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE, 
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

P1576

EGI Control Module EEPROM

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-208, DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, 
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

P1577

IMM Control Module EEPROM

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-208, DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, 
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

P1578

Meter Failure

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-208, DTC P1578 METER FAILURE, Diagnostic Trouble 
Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

P2096

Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System 
Too Lean Bank 1

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-209, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
TEM TOO LEAN BANK 1, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>

P2097

Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System 
Too Rich Bank 1

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-211, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
TEM TOO RICH BANK 1, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>

P2101

Throttle Actuator Control Motor Cir-
cuit Range/Performance

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-213, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL 
MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code 
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

P2102

Throttle Actuator Control Motor Cir-
cuit Low

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-215, DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL 
MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

P2103

Throttle Actuator Control Motor Cir-
cuit High

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-217, DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL 
MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>

P2109

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor “A” 
Minimum Stop Performance

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-219, DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR “A” MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code 
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

P2122

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/
Switch “D” Circuit Low Input

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 
Detecting Criteria.>

P2123

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/
Switch “D” Circuit High Input

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-223, DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 
Detecting Criteria.>

P2127

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/
Switch “E” Circuit Low Input

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-225, DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 
Detecting Criteria.>

P2128

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/
Switch “E” Circuit High Input

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-227, DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 
Detecting Criteria.>

P2135

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/
Switch “A”/“B” Voltage Correlation

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-229, DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “A”/“B” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code 
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

P2138

Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/
Switch “D”/“E” Voltage Correlation

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-231, DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH “D”/“E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code 
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

P2227

Barometric Pressure Circuit 
Range/Performance

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-233, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT 
RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>

P2228

Barometric Pressure Circuit Low

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-234, DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT 
LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

P2229

Barometric Pressure Circuit High

<Ref. to GD(H4SO)-235, DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT 
HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>

DTC

Item

Index

asieps_tobira.book  7 ページ  ２００９年１０月２６日　月曜日　午前９時１６分

Summary of Contents for 2006 Legacy

Page 1: ...abel 3 Model number plate Applied models before 30th August 2005 5 Emission control label FMVSS label U S model CMVSS label Canada model 2 Vehicle identification number V I N 4 Tire inflation pressure...

Page 2: ...DIFFERENTIAL T TYPE VA1 TYPE VA2 TYPE Model number plate Applied models before 30th August 2005 1 Transmission serial No 2 MT type label 1 Type white paint ID 00136 2 1 ID 00056 1 1 Type label 1 Type...

Page 3: ...e LEGACY 5 L Body type L Sedan P Wagon 6 6 Displacement 6 2 5 L AWD 8 3 0 L AWD 7 1 Grade 1 i 2 i Limited 4 R 5 R Limited 6 R L L Bean 7 GT Limited or GT spec B 8 GT 8 6 Restraint or GVWR Class 6 Manu...

Page 4: ...Limited or 2 5 GT spec B black interior D OUTBACK 2 5 XT Limited black interior E 2 5 GT H 2 5 i K 2 5 i Limited S OUTBACK 2 5 i T OUTBACK 2 5 i Limited U OUTBACK 3 0 R V OUTBACK 3 0 R Limited X OUTB...

Page 5: ...OHC W 2 5 L DOHC Turbo 8 10 ACA Detailed specifications Used when ordering parts See the parts catalog for details Code Reduction gear ratio LSD XJ 4 111 None T1 3 900 None JP 4 111 Viscous XU 3 272 V...

Page 6: ...RECOMMENDED MATERIALS RM Page 1 Recommended Materials 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 7: ...onsible for poor performance result ing from the use of parts except for genuine parts 5 PROTECTING VEHICLE UNDER MAIN TENANCE Make sure to attach the fender cover seat covers etc before work 6 ENSURI...

Page 8: ...e the plate lift whose attachment does not reach the supporting locations 1 Supporting locations 3 Swing arm lift 5 Plate lift 2 Pantograph jack 4 Rigid rack 6 Attachment NT 00086 a a b 1 2 3 4 5 6 6...

Page 9: ...NT 4 Note NOTE A Front B Rear 1 Front crossmember 2 Rear differential NT 00072 1 2 A B asieps_tobira book 4...

Page 10: ...ation CAUTION Use the T hook for rear tie down Do not use the hook other than T hook otherwise it can be removed when transporting vehicles CHAIN DIRECTION AT TIE DOWN CONDITION NOTE Pull the chains L...

Page 11: ...and highest arch point before and after tie down Difference of measured values sinking vol ume should be within 50 mm 1 97 in and make sure to fix the vehicle securely 1 Chain pulling range at tie dow...

Page 12: ...to prevent hook or vehicle damage resulting from excessive weight Do not tow other vehicles with a front tie down hook Make sure the vehicle towing is heavier than the vehicle being towed FRONT Remov...

Page 13: ...del Rope Check if both front and rear wheels are rotated nor mally AT model driving conditions Driving speed 30 km h 19 MPH or less Allow driving distance 30 km 19 miles or less Raising the front whee...

Page 14: ...steering does not work be careful for the heavy steering effort When engine is stopped Since the servo brake does not work be careful that the brake is not applied effectively When engine is stopped...

Page 15: ...free roller system 1 Set the free roller on the floor of rear wheel side securely according to the wheel base and rear tread of the vehicle 2 Let the vehicle ride on the tester and free roller gently...

Page 16: ...his procedures after measuring the balance of each single tire Set the vehicle so that the front and rear wheels are the same height Release the parking brake during measure ment Rotate each wheel by...

Page 17: ...NT 12 Note NOTE asieps_tobira book 12...

Page 18: ...IDENTIFICATION ID Page 1 Identification 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 19: ...used when performing mainte nance repair or diagnosis of Subaru LEGACY Applicable model 2006MY BL BP The manuals contain the latest information at the time of publication Changes in the specification...

Page 20: ...HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS HU Page 1 How to Use This Manuals 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 21: ...iring harnesses To prevent unexpected deployment turn the igni tion switch to OFF and disconnect the ground cable from battery then wait at least 20 seconds before starting work 7 AIRBAG AND SEAT BELT...

Page 22: ...it 16 HOSE REMOVAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 1 Hose Removal Installation Pre Procedures Be careful to inspect hoses so as not to use dam aged or deformed hoses Using such hoses could cause leakage or l...

Page 23: ...of hoses or leakage from hoses Check that hoses are securely fixed by the clamps Inspect the hose clips and clamps according to the following points and replace any parts that are damaged or defective...

Page 24: ...NOTE NT Page 1 Note 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 25: ...9 Height mm in 1 190 46 9 1 145 45 1 1 Wheelbase mm in 2 670 105 1 Tread Front mm in 1 495 58 9 Rear mm in 1 490 58 7 Minimum road clearance mm in 215 8 5 220 8 7 215 8 5 Model 2 5 L SOHC 2 5 L DOHC t...

Page 26: ...5 L DOHC turbo 3 0 L DOHC Ignition timing at idling BTDC MT 10 AT 15 MT 12 AT 17 15 Spark plug Type and manufacturer NGK FR5AP 11 NGK ILFR6B NGK ILFR6B Generator 12V 110A Battery Type and capacity 5H...

Page 27: ...Helical Gear ratio 1 000 1 000 1 000 Final reduction Type of gear Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid Hypoid Gear ratio 4 111 4 444 4 444 3 583 3 272 Reduction gear Rear Transfer reduction Type of gear Helica...

Page 28: ...filter 4 2 4 4 3 7 4 3 4 5 3 8 5 7 6 0 5 0 When replacing engine oil only 4 0 4 2 3 5 5 5 5 8 4 8 Transmission gear oil 2 US qt Imp qt 3 5 3 7 3 1 3 5 3 7 3 1 ATF 2 US qt Imp qt 9 5 10 0 8 4 9 8 10 4...

Page 29: ...ain airbag Sunroof Navigation DVD Model Wagon 2 5 L DOHC turbo 3 0 L DOHC 2 5 GT 2 5 GT Limited 3 0 R L L Bean 3 0 R Limited 5MT 5AT 5MT 5AT 5AT Curb weight C W Front kg lb 848 1 875 878 1 940 862 1 9...

Page 30: ...gon 2 5 L DOHC turbo 3 0 L DOHC 2 5 GT 2 5 GT Limited 3 0 R 3 0 R Limited 3 0 R L L Bean 5MT 5AT 5MT 5AT 5AT Curb weight C W Front kg lb 848 1 875 878 1 940 862 1 905 864 1 910 892 1 970 894 1 975 892...

Page 31: ...1 5 2 5 5 5 Power package 1 8 4 0 3 1 6 8 4 9 10 8 Side airbag 1 9 4 2 1 9 4 2 3 8 8 4 Curtain airbag Sedan model 0 4 0 9 5 3 11 7 5 7 12 6 Curtain airbag Wagon model 0 5 1 1 5 0 11 0 5 5 12 1 Sunroof...

Page 32: ...SPC 16 OUTBACK SPECIFICATIONS asieps_tobira book 16...

Page 33: ...PRECAUTION PC Page 1 Precaution 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 34: ...performance Unleaded gasoline In order to reduce air pollution use unleaded gasoline for the vehicle equipped with catalytic converter Using leaded gasoline may damage the catalytic converter 3 LUBRIC...

Page 35: ...ture Engine oil Manual transmission oil rear differential gear oil and AT front differential gear oil Fluid Recommended materials Alternative Remarks Automatic transmission fluid Subaru ATF Type HP ID...

Page 36: ...a None Compressor oil DENSO OIL 8 None Grease Application point Recommended materials Item number Alternative Supplementary lubricants Oxygen sensor Bolts etc Spray type lubricant Grease MT main shaft...

Page 37: ...ion case Cylinder block Converter case DOHC camshaft cap Turbo model Cylinder head plug Turbo model Oil pump Except for 3 0 L model THREE BOND 1215 004403007 DOW CORNING No 7038 Transmission oil pan A...

Page 38: ...RM 6 Recommended Materials RECOMMENDED MATERIALS asieps_tobira book 6...

Page 39: ...PRE DELIVERY INSPECTION PI Page 1 Pre delivery Inspection 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 40: ...store the ve hicle to its normal condition Check the vehicle before delivery is in normal condition Check the vehicle or parts for any damage occurred during transportation or storage Check the vehicl...

Page 41: ...ock the release lever 3 Open and close the trunk lid to see that there are no abnormal conditions 8 Operation check of trunk lid release lever Operate the trunk lid release lever to check that the tru...

Page 42: ...essory power supply socket Check that the front accessory power socket operates normally 35 Lighting system Check that the lighting system operates normally 36 Wiper deicer Check that the wiper deicer...

Page 43: ...he customer attach a 20 A fuse A as shown in the figure 4 AIR CONDITIONER HARNESS CONNEC TION Disconnect the air conditioner harness immediately after vehicle delivery to protect the air conditioner c...

Page 44: ...outer handles to ensure that doors will open 7 OPEN CLOSE OPERATION CHECKS OF TRUNK LID 1 Operate the trunk lock release lever to check that the trunk lid opens normally 2 Open and close the trunk lid...

Page 45: ...ormally 10 OPERATION CHECK OF FUEL LID OPENER LOCK RELEASE LEVER Operate the fuel lid opener to check that the fuel lid is unlocked normally Check that the filler cap is se curely closed 11 ACCESSORY...

Page 46: ...ry out a brake line test to identify brake fluid leaks and check the brake oper ation After that refill the brake fluid tank with the specified type of fluid 15 ENGINE OIL Check the engine oil amount...

Page 47: ...Then add the necessary amount of the specified AT front differential oil 4AT model 5AT model 18 ENGINE COOLANT Check that the engine coolant level on the reservoir tank is normal If the amount of engi...

Page 48: ...en all the door windows 2 Remove the key from the ignition switch and close all the doors including rear gate 3 Press the rear gate and trunk open button for more than one second Check if the trunk is...

Page 49: ...e key in ignition key lock 5 times in 10 seconds 4 When finished step 3 open and close the driver s door once within 10 seconds NOTE When opening and closing of the door is not avail able within 10 se...

Page 50: ...or dirt 2 Check that each seat provides full functionality in sliding and reclining Check all available functions of the rear seat such as a trunk through center arm rest 3 Check the passenger s seat...

Page 51: ...ace the battery If any noises are observed im mediately stop the engine and check and repair the abnormal components 29 EXHAUST SYSTEM Listen to the exhaust noise to see if no noises are observed Chec...

Page 52: ...nition switch to ON 2 While brake pedal is not depressed check if the select lever does not move from P range 3 While brake pedal is depressed check if the se lect lever moves from P range 4 Set the s...

Page 53: ...rate of water spray must be approx 20 25 2 5 3 6 6 US gal 4 4 5 5 Imp gal per minute When spraying water on areas adjacent to the floor and wheel house increase the pressure When spraying water on are...

Page 54: ...ters NOTE It is better to determine an inspection pattern in order to avoid missing an area since the total in spection area is wide Do not repair the body paint unless absolutely necessary Also if th...

Page 55: ...stem 22 11 Engine Coolant 24 12 Clutch System 26 13 Transmission Gear Oil 27 14 Automatic Transmission Fluid 28 15 Front Rear Differential Gear Oil 30 16 Brake Line 32 17 Brake Fluid 34 18 Disc Brake...

Page 56: ...Overall width mm in 1 730 68 1 Overall height at C W mm in 1 475 58 1 Compartment Length mm in 1 840 72 4 Width mm in 1 445 56 9 Height mm in 1 190 46 9 1 145 45 1 1 Wheelbase mm in 2 670 105 1 Tread...

Page 57: ...4AT 5MT 5AT Clutch type DSPD TCC DSPD TCC Gear ratio 1st 3 454 2 785 3 166 3 540 2nd 2 062 1 545 1 882 2 264 3rd 1 448 1 000 1 296 1 471 4th 1 088 0 694 0 972 1 000 5th 0 780 0 738 0 834 Rev 3 333 2 2...

Page 58: ...L DOHC turbo 5MT 4AT 5MT 5AT Fuel tank 2 US gal Imp gal 64 16 9 14 1 Engine oil Total capacity Overhaul 2 US qt Imp qt 4 8 5 2 4 3 5 0 5 3 4 4 Filling amount of engine oil 2 US qt Imp qt When replaci...

Page 59: ...trol Power package Side airbag Curtain airbag Sunroof Navigation DVD Model Sedan Wagon 2 5 L DOHC turbo 2 5 L SOHC 2 5 GT Limited 2 5 GT spec B 2 5 i 2 5 i Limited 5MT 5AT 5MT 5MT 4AT 5MT Curb weight...

Page 60: ...20 3 355 1 550 3 420 1 555 3 435 1 558 3 440 1 585 3 500 1 588 3 505 Gross axle weight ratio G A W R Front kg lb 1 040 2 295 1 040 2 295 1 040 2 295 1 040 2 295 1 040 2 295 1 040 2 295 1 040 2 295 1 0...

Page 61: ...010 4 435 Option Vehicle Dynamics Control Power package Side airbag Curtain airbag Sunroof Navigation DVD Model Sedan Wagon 2 5 L DOHC turbo 2 5 L SOHC 2 5 GT Limited 2 5 i 2 5 i Limited 5MT 5AT 5MT 4...

Page 62: ...g lb 1 060 2 340 1 060 2 340 1 060 2 340 1 060 2 340 1 060 2 340 1 060 2 340 1 060 2 340 1 060 2 340 Gross vehicle weight G V W kg lb 2 010 4 435 2 010 4 435 2 060 4 545 2 060 4 545 2 060 4 545 2 060...

Page 63: ...ection consists of SCT that are broken down into SC that are divided into sections for each com ponent The specification maintenance and other information for the components are included and the diagn...

Page 64: ...r to parts catalogue Example HU 00017 14 9 8 7 6 10 4 10 22 11 19 17 15 13 12 18 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 10 9 12 13 19 18 20 17 16 24 10 25 5 4 4 4 3 3 3 2 1 21 15 23 T7 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T4 T5 T5 T8 T6...

Page 65: ...vice procedure appropriate reference is provided for each parts Example A Component D Cautions G Tightening torque B Process E Tool number of special tool H Illustration C Reference F Name of special...

Page 66: ...used in these manuals are described in the SI units and conventional units are described in Item SI units Conventional unit Remarks Force N Newton kgf 1 kgf 9 80655 N Mass Weight kg g kg g Capacity 2...

Page 67: ...tive Crankcase Ventilation DOHC Double Overhead Camshaft RH RH Right Hand DVD Digital Versatile Disc Rr Rear ECM Engine Control Module SOHC Single Overhead Camshaft EGR Exhaust Gas Recirculation SRS S...

Page 68: ...SPECIFICATIONS SPC Page 1 LEGACY 2 2 OUTBACK 9 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 69: ...AL Reservoir Tank 11 Remove the bolts which hold the radiator main fan shroud to the radiator 12 Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE...

Page 70: ...Main Fan and Fan Motor COOLING D ASSEMBLY Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly Tightening torque 5 N m 0 5 kgf m 3 6 ft lb Tightening torque 3 4 N m 0 35 kgf m 2 5 ft lb CO 00098 CO 00102 asi...

Page 71: ...move the air intake duct Ref to IN H4SO 8 REMOVAL Air Intake Duct 10 Remove the bolts which hold the radiator sub fan shroud to the radiator 11 Remove the radiator sub fan motor assembly from undernea...

Page 72: ...r Sub Fan and Fan Motor COOLING D ASSEMBLY Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly Tightening torque 5 N m 0 5 kgf m 3 6 ft lb Tightening torque 3 4 N m 0 35 kgf m 2 5 ft lb CO 00098 CO 00097 asi...

Page 73: ...nect the over flow hose 2 Push in the hook A and pull the reserve tank in the direction of the arrow to remove B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal C INSPECTION Make sure the engine...

Page 74: ...mp speed Discharge pressure 6 000 rpm 225 4 kPa 23 mAq Engine coolant temperature 80 C 176 F Impeller diameter mm in 76 2 99 Number of impeller vanes 8 Pump pulley diameter mm in 60 2 36 Clearance bet...

Page 75: ...peed Low Low Speed Low Speed High Speed High High Speed High Speed High Speed During acceleration 20 69 km h 12 43 MPH During deceleration 11 64 km h 7 40 MPH OFF OFF Low Speed High Speed Low High Spe...

Page 76: ...NENT 1 WATER PUMP 1 Water pump ASSY 4 Thermostat Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Gasket 5 Gasket T1 First 12 1 2 8 9 3 Heater by pass hose 6 Thermostat cover Second 12 1 2 8 9 T2 12 1 2 8 9 CO 002...

Page 77: ...hose A AT model 6 Radiator hose A 16 ATF hose B AT model Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 7 Engine coolant reservoir tank cap 17 ATF pipe AT model T1 5 0 5 3 6 8 Over flow hose 18 ATF hose C AT mode...

Page 78: ...extremely hot after driv ing Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified...

Page 79: ...back pressure in exhaust system Clean or replace l Insufficient clearance between piston and cylinder Adjust or replace m Slipping clutch Correct or replace n Dragging brake Adjust o Defective radiato...

Page 80: ...e 1 General Description 2 2 Oil Pressure System 6 3 Engine Oil 8 4 Oil Pump 10 5 Oil Pan and Strainer 15 6 Oil Pressure Switch 18 7 Engine Oil Filter 19 8 Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General...

Page 81: ...to ME H4SO 40 TIMING BELT REMOVAL Timing Belt 5 Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster 6 Remove the belt idler No 2 7 Remove the cam sprocket LH using ST ST 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH NOTE CA...

Page 82: ...A010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH NOTE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET WRENCH 499207100 can also be used Tightening torque 78 N m 8 0 kgf m 57 9 ft lb 6 Install the belt idler No 2 Tightening torque 39 N m 4 0 kgf m 28 9 ft...

Page 83: ...3 Make sure the impeller is not deformed or dam aged 4 Inspect the clearance between impeller and pump case Clearance between impeller and pump case Standard 0 4 1 6 mm 0 016 0 063 in 5 After water p...

Page 84: ...diator cap is functioning properly if it holds the service limit pressure for 5 6 seconds Specified pressure 93 123 kPa 0 95 1 25 kg cm2 14 18 psi Service limit pressure 83 kPa 0 85 kg cm2 12 psi CAUT...

Page 85: ...r main fan motor connec tor A and sub fan motor connector B 8 Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from thermo stat cover 9 Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses from ATF pipes AT model Plug the ATF pipe to...

Page 86: ...side of radiator be fitted into the radiator lower cushions on body side 3 Install the radiator upper brackets and tighten the bolts Tightening torque 12 N m 1 2 kgf m 8 9 ft lb 4 Connect the radiato...

Page 87: ...on Fluid C INSPECTION 1 Remove the radiator cap fill the radiator with en gine coolant and then install the tester to the instal lation position of cap 2 In the following cases apply a pressure of 157...

Page 88: ...tall the thermostat and gasket to water pump as a unit Then install the thermostat cover NOTE When reinstalling the thermostat use a new gas ket The thermostat must be installed with the jiggle pin fa...

Page 89: ...he valve begins to open and when the valve is fully opened During the test agitate the water for even temper ature distribution The measured value should meet the specification NOTE Leave the thermost...

Page 90: ...0 11 12 13 14 F109 3 4 1 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 5 6 7 F27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 1 2 7 4 5 6 16 7 1 2 3 4 5 21 22 E...

Page 91: ...eration of the radiator fan relay NOTE When performing a forced operation radiator fan relay check using the Subaru Select Moni tor the radiator main fan and sub fan will repeat low speed revolution h...

Page 92: ...emove the main fan relay 2 from A C relay holder 2 Measure the resistance of harness between sub fan motor connector and main fan relay 2 connector Connector terminal F16 No 1 F27 No 5 Is the resistan...

Page 93: ...f the ECM connector Check the DTC Repair the trouble cause Ref to EN H4SO diag 33 Read Diagnos tic Trouble Code DTC 20 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 1 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Remove main fan relay...

Page 94: ...RCUIT OF MAIN FAN RELAY 2 1 Remove the main fan relay 2 from A C relay holder 2 Measure the resistance between main fan relay 2 terminal and chassis ground Connector terminal F27 No 4 Chassis ground I...

Page 95: ...within 40 sec onds 5 Wait for one minute after the engine stops open the radiator cap If the engine coolant level drops add engine coolant into radiator up to the filler neck position 6 Perform the pr...

Page 96: ...ion must be increased from 25 to 40 Find point A where the 25 line of engine coolant concentration inter sects with the 40 curve of the necessary engine coolant concentration and read the scale on the...

Page 97: ...le from the battery 4 Lift up the vehicle 5 Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank pressure sensor 6 Disconnect the pressure hose from the fuel tank pressure sensor 7 Remove the fuel tank pressur...

Page 98: ...l level sensor as a single unit therefore refer to Fuel Level Sensor for removal procedures Ref to FU H4SO 52 REMOVAL Fuel Level Sensor B INSTALLATION The fuel temperature sensor and fuel level sensor...

Page 99: ...2 Drain Filter A SPECIFICATION Canister is a non disassembled part so do not re move the drain filter from canister Refer to Canister for removal and installation pro cedures Ref to EC H4SO 5 REMOVAL...

Page 100: ...to Center Exhaust Pipe for removal procedures Ref to EX H4SO 7 REMOVAL Center Exhaust Pipe B INSTALLATION The rear catalytic converter is integrated into center exhaust pipe as a single unit therefore...

Page 101: ...Disconnect the drain valve connector B 7 Remove clip C 8 Remove the canister from body B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Check that there is no damage or dust on the quick c...

Page 102: ...OL DEVICES 6 EGR Valve A REMOVAL Refer to the FU section for the removal proce dures Ref to FU H4SO 26 REMOVAL EGR Valve B INSTALLATION Refer to the FU section for the installation proce dures Ref to...

Page 103: ...rol solenoid valve then remove the purge control solenoid valve B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque Purge control solenoid valve attachment bolt 19 N m 1 9 kgf m 1...

Page 104: ...REMOVAL Fuel Filler Pipe 2 Disconnect the evaporation hose from the shut valve 3 Remove the shut valve from the fuel filler pipe B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torq...

Page 105: ...O 7 REMOVAL Air Intake Chamber 2 Fit the depression in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp to unlock 3 Remove the PCV hose assembly ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS B INSTALLATION NOTE Replace with a ne...

Page 106: ...INTAKE INDUCTION IN H4SO Page 1 General Description 2 2 Air Cleaner Element 4 3 Air Cleaner Case 5 4 Air Intake Chamber 7 5 Air Intake Duct 8 6 Resonator Chamber 9 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 107: ...14 Drain Valve A SPECIFICATION Canister is a non disassembled part so do not re move the drain valve from canister Refer to Canister for removal and installation pro cedures Ref to EC H4SO 5 REMOVAL C...

Page 108: ...o Front Exhaust Pipe for the removal procedures Ref to EX H4SO 4 REMOVAL Front Exhaust Pipe B INSTALLATION The front catalytic converter is integrated into the front exhaust pipe as a single unit ther...

Page 109: ...ES 7 Fuel Level Sensor A REMOVAL Refer to the FU section for the removal proce dures Ref to FU H4SO 52 REMOVAL Fuel Level Sensor B INSTALLATION Refer to the FU section for the installation proce dures...

Page 110: ...om the pressure con trol solenoid valve 5 Disconnect the evaporation hose B from the pressure control solenoid valve 6 Remove the bolts C which secure the bracket to the fuel tank 7 Remove the pressur...

Page 111: ...order and pro tect them from dust and dirt Before removal installation or disassembly be sure to clarify the failure Avoid unnecessary re moval installation disassembly and replacement Vehicle compon...

Page 112: ...Fuel Sub Level Sensor A REMOVAL Refer to the FU section for the removal proce dures Ref to FU H4SO 53 REMOVAL Fuel Sub Level Sensor B INSTALLATION Refer to the FU section for the installation proce d...

Page 113: ...cting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Erroneous idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection...

Page 114: ...ve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch connector 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and variable v...

Page 115: ...M Erroneous idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34...

Page 116: ...ve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch connector 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and variable v...

Page 117: ...ion Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04027 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 1...

Page 118: ...p 3 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and front oxygen A F sensor connector 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY AND FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of har...

Page 119: ...1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41 40 43...

Page 120: ...e current more than 0 2 A Repair the poor contact of connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Poor contact in front oxygen A F sensor connector Poor contact in ECM connector Go to step 4...

Page 121: ...ef to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04027 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19...

Page 122: ...ata of front oxygen A F sensor heater current using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to...

Page 123: ...spection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04028 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 E BATTERY OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY 50 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT B327 E23 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 C4 B4 A29 B1 ECM 1 3 4 2 E23 B13...

Page 124: ...ground Connector terminal B136 No 4 Chassis ground Does the voltage change by shaking the ECM harness and connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Go to step 4 4 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM 1...

Page 125: ...s Terminals No 1 No 2 Is the resistance less than 30 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between rear oxygen sen sor and ECM con nect...

Page 126: ...nspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04028 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 E BATTERY OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY 50 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT B327 E23 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 C4 B4 A29 B1 ECM 1 3 4 2 E23 B1...

Page 127: ...r 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Read the data of rear oxygen A F sensor heater current using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure...

Page 128: ...iring or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIA...

Page 129: ...peration procedures refer to the General Scan Tool Instruction Manual Is the measured value 73 3 106 6 kPa 550 800 mmHg 21 65 31 50 inHg when the ignition is turned ON and 20 0 46 7 kPa 150 350 mmHg 5...

Page 130: ...ing CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Insp...

Page 131: ...Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and oil switching sole noid valve connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and oil switching solenoid...

Page 132: ...ling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Ins...

Page 133: ...nal E67 No 1 Engine ground E67 No 2 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the short circuit between ECM and oil switching solenoid valve connector 2 CHECK OIL SWITCHING SOL...

Page 134: ...ing CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Insp...

Page 135: ...Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and oil switching sole noid valve connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and oil switch ing solenoid...

Page 136: ...ling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Ins...

Page 137: ...nal E68 No 1 Engine ground E68 No 2 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the short circuit between ECM and oil switching solenoid valve connector 2 CHECK OIL SWITCHING SOL...

Page 138: ...ing Engine stalls Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode...

Page 139: ...TC displayed Check the appro priate DTC using the List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4SO diag 70 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC...

Page 140: ...driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 3...

Page 141: ...on nector Go to step 2 2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM connector and chassis ground while engine is idling Connector terminal B135 No 26 Chassis ground Is the voltage more...

Page 142: ...0 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 7 Repair the ground short circuit between ECM and mass air flow sen sor connector 7 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of mass air flow s...

Page 143: ...r driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag...

Page 144: ...e circuit has returned to a nor mal condition at this time Go to step 2 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from...

Page 145: ...N After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mod...

Page 146: ...M Measure the voltage between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 19 Chassis ground Does the voltage change by shaking the ECM harness and connector Repair the poor contact of...

Page 147: ...tor terminal B134 No 29 E21 No 2 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 9 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and manifold absolute pressure sensor connector 9 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check po...

Page 148: ...ON After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mo...

Page 149: ...or contact of ECM connector Contact the SOA service center 4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 6 Chassis ground Is the v...

Page 150: ...sensor connector Repair the poor contact of manifold absolute pressure sensor connector Replace the mani fold absolute pres sure sensor Ref to FU H4SO 24 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 10 CHECK HAR...

Page 151: ...OM Erroneous idling Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mo...

Page 152: ...SPLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check DTC using List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4SO diag 70 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0...

Page 153: ...ing performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO...

Page 154: ...contact of coupling connector Poor contact of joint connector 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND ECM CON NECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector fro...

Page 155: ...ving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PR...

Page 156: ...emperature sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal B3 No 4 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between intake air tempera ture sensor...

Page 157: ...or terminal B3 No 5 Engine ground Is the resistance less than 5 Replace the intake air temperature sensor Ref to FU H4SO 25 Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temper ature Sensor Repair the har ness and con...

Page 158: ...rformance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDUR...

Page 159: ...ontact of coupling connector Poor contact of joint connector 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors f...

Page 160: ...erformance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDU...

Page 161: ...sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal E8 No 2 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between ECM and engine coolant tempera ture senso...

Page 162: ...inal E8 No 1 Engine ground Is the resistance less than 5 Replace the engine coolant temperature sen sor Ref to FU H4SO 19 Engine Coolant Temperature Sen sor Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In...

Page 163: ...IAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28...

Page 164: ...esistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis gr...

Page 165: ...ion Mode WIRING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 1...

Page 166: ...18 E57 No 6 B134 No 29 E57 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL 1 Connect the ECM co...

Page 167: ...TOM Engine does not return to idle CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to...

Page 168: ...f Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4SO diag 70 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0125 Go to step 2 2 CHECK THERMOSTAT Does the thermostat...

Page 169: ...LE SYMPTOM Engine does not return to idle CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode...

Page 170: ...e Code DTC Go to step 2 2 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Measure the resistance between engine cool ant temperature sensor terminals when the engine coolant is cold and after warmed up Termin...

Page 171: ...No 1 CHECK VEHICLE Was the vehicle driven or idled with the engine partially sub merged under water In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0128 Go to step 2 2 CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY...

Page 172: ...to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04027 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9...

Page 173: ...ONNEC TOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from ECM and front oxygen A F sensor connector 3 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and front oxygen A F sensor connec...

Page 174: ...f to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04027 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19...

Page 175: ...YGEN A F SENSOR CONNEC TOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Disconnect the connector from front oxygen A F sensor 3 Measure the voltage of harness between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector...

Page 176: ...spection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04027 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6...

Page 177: ...NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0133 Go to step 2 2 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM NOTE Check the following items Loose installation of front portion of exhaust pipe onto cylinder heads Lo...

Page 178: ...Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04027 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 1...

Page 179: ...1 B135 No 8 E22 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 2 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and front ox ygen A...

Page 180: ...pection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04028 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 E BATTERY OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY 50 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT B327 E23 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 C4 B4 A29 B1 ECM 1 3 4 2 E23 B135...

Page 181: ...COUPLING CONNECTOR Does water enter the connec tor Dry the water thor oughly Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect t...

Page 182: ...following items Loose installation of portions Damage crack hole etc of parts Looseness and improper fitting of parts be tween front oxygen A F sensor and rear oxy gen sensor Is there any fault in ex...

Page 183: ...spection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04028 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 E BATTERY OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY 50 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT B327 E23 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 C4 B4 A29 B1 ECM 1 3 4 2 E23 B13...

Page 184: ...COUPLING CONNECTOR Does water enter the connec tor Dry the water thor oughly Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect th...

Page 185: ...following items Loose installation of portions Damage crack hole etc of parts Looseness and improper fitting of parts be tween front oxygen A F sensor and rear oxy gen sensor Is there any fault in ex...

Page 186: ...nspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04028 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 E BATTERY OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY 50 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT B327 E23 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 C4 B4 A29 B1 ECM 1 3 4 2 E23 B1...

Page 187: ...xygen sensor con nector Connector terminal B135 No 4 E23 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 3 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and rear oxygen sen sor connector 3 CHECK HARNES...

Page 188: ...E Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04028 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 E BATTERY OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY 50 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT B327 E23 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 C4 B4 A29 B1 ECM 1 3 4 2 E23...

Page 189: ...f to EN H4SO diag 26 Subaru Select Moni tor General scan tool For detailed operation procedures refer to the General Scan Tool Instruction Manual Is the voltage more than 490 mV Go to step 7 Go to ste...

Page 190: ...Measure the voltage between rear oxygen sensor harness connector and chassis ground Connector terminal E23 No 3 Chassis ground Is the voltage 0 2 0 5 V Replace the rear oxygen sensor Ref to FU H4SO 3...

Page 191: ...or disconnection of hose on air intake system Repair the air intake system Go to step 3 3 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE WARNING Place NO FIRE signs near the working area Be careful not to spill fuel Measure the...

Page 192: ...5 Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temper ature Sensor 6 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 Start the engine and warm up engine until coolant temperature is greater than 60 C 140 F 2...

Page 193: ...Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE...

Page 194: ...OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check DTC using List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4SO diag 70 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to...

Page 195: ...repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING...

Page 196: ...s the circuit has returned to a nor mal condition at this time 2 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Remove the access hole lid 3 Disconnect the connector from fuel pump 4 Turn the...

Page 197: ...repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRIN...

Page 198: ...n fuel pump connector and chassis ground Connector terminal R58 No 2 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between ECM and fuel pump connector Go to...

Page 199: ...p connector and ECM Connector terminal R58 No 3 B135 No 30 Is the resistance less than 1 Replace the fuel temperature sen sor Ref to EC H4SO 9 Fuel Temperature Sen sor Repair the har ness and connec t...

Page 200: ...tart Erroneous idling Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection...

Page 201: ...OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check DTC using List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4SO diag 70 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to...

Page 202: ...rformance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDUR...

Page 203: ...rature sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal B134 No 23 Engine ground B134 No 29 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the ground short circuit between ECM...

Page 204: ...erformance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDU...

Page 205: ...TURE SENSOR AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the voltage between oil temperature sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal E75 No 2 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 4 V Go to step 4 Repair...

Page 206: ...39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 18 22 23 24 25 26 B137 D 1 2 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 2...

Page 207: ...n 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector ter...

Page 208: ...39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 18 22 23 24 25 26 B137 D 1 2 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 2...

Page 209: ...No 3 B134 No 28 E57 No 4 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL 1 Connect the ECM connecto...

Page 210: ...Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC AU DTC P0302 CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE DETECTED NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC P0304 Ref to EN H4SO diag 174 DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED Diagnostic Proc...

Page 211: ...g or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM...

Page 212: ...asure the resistance between ECM con nector and engine ground on faulty cylinders Connector terminal 1 E5 No 1 Engine ground 2 E16 No 1 Engine ground 3 E6 No 1 Engine ground 4 E17 No 1 Engine ground I...

Page 213: ...cuit of har ness between ECM and fuel injector After repair replace the ECM Ref to FU H4SO 36 Engine Control Module ECM Go to step 8 8 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Measure t...

Page 214: ...el Fuel additive used or not Visually check spark plug Visually check spark plug cord Condition of en gine oil 16 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM Is there any fault in air intake system Repair the air intake...

Page 215: ...OTE Check the follow ing items Spark plug Spark plug cord Fuel injector Compression ra tio Go to DTC P0171 Ref to EN H4SO diag 154 DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN BANK 1 Diagnostic Proce dure with Diagnos t...

Page 216: ...NOTE Check the follow ing items Spark plug Fuel injector Skipping timing belt teeth Go to DTC P0171 Ref to EN H4SO diag 154 DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN BANK 1 Diagnostic Proce dure with Diagnos tic Tro...

Page 217: ...mance Knocking occurs CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag...

Page 218: ...CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN KNOCK SEN SOR AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the resistance between ECM and knock sensor connector Connector terminal B134 No 15 E14 No 1 B134 No 29 E14 No 2 Is the resistance less t...

Page 219: ...rmance Knocking occurs CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag...

Page 220: ...hort circuit of har ness between knock sensor con nector and ECM connector NOTE The harness be tween both con nectors are shielded Repair the short circuit of har ness covered with shield 3 CHECK INPU...

Page 221: ...CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspect...

Page 222: ...ECM connector NOTE The harness be tween both connec tors are shielded Repair the ground short circuit of har ness with shield Go to step 3 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CRANK SHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND ECM...

Page 223: ...of engine to start CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34...

Page 224: ...y Go to step 3 Tighten the crank shaft position sen sor installation bolt securely 3 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET Remove the timing belt cover Are crank sprocket teeth cracked or damaged Replace the crank spr...

Page 225: ...lure of engine to start CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO dia...

Page 226: ...r and ECM connector NOTE The harness be tween both connec tors are shielded Repair the ground short circuit of har ness with shield Go to step 3 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND EC...

Page 227: ...M Engine stalls Failure of engine to start CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode...

Page 228: ...SENSOR AND ECM CONNEC TOR Measure the resistance of harness between camshaft position sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal E15 No 1 Engine ground Is the resistance less than 10 Repair...

Page 229: ...ation bolt tightened securely Go to step 8 Tighten the cam shaft position sen sor installation bolt securely 8 CHECK CAM SPROCKET Remove the timing belt cover Ref to ME H4SO 39 Timing Belt Cover Are c...

Page 230: ...m CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspec...

Page 231: ...WER SUPPLY OF EGR VALVE 1 Disconnect the connector from EGR valve 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON 3 Measure the voltage between EGR valve connector and engine ground Connector terminal E18 No 2 Engin...

Page 232: ...O 26 EGR Valve 7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN EGR VALVE AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between EGR valve and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 10 Chassis ground B134 No 9 Chassis...

Page 233: ...nspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04042 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 B327 B138 E2 B21 B21 E2 E23 E22 1 2 6 4 E E 1 3 4 2 B135 B B136 C E 4 1 3 1 2 3 4 E23 FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR JOINT CON NECTOR REAR OXYGEN...

Page 234: ...pipe and front catalyt ic converter Between front catalytic converter and rear catalytic converter Loose part and improper installation of front oxygen A F sensor or rear oxygen sensor Is there any fa...

Page 235: ...tor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4SO diag 26 Subaru Select Moni tor Is the voltage more than 490 mV Go to step 9 Go to step 6 6 CHECK REAR OXYGEN S...

Page 236: ...TE For MT model depress the clutch pedal Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4SO diag 26 Subaru Select Moni tor Is the voltage 250 m...

Page 237: ...Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04043 5 3 6 4 2 1 B47 SBF 7 E4 1 2 E2 B21 41 48 D29 R68 1 2 R213 R15 1 5 R1 B97 14 15 R1 B97 R67 R4...

Page 238: ...the drain valve NOTE Drain valve operation can be executed using Subaru Select Monitor For procedure refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 44 Compulsory Valve Operation C...

Page 239: ...a in it Repair or replace the canister Ref to EC H4SO 5 Canister Go to step 10 10 CHECK FUEL TANK Remove the fuel tank Ref to FU H4SO 41 Fuel Tank Is the fuel tank damaged or is there a hole of more t...

Page 240: ...Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDUR...

Page 241: ...ESS BETWEEN DRAIN VALVE AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from drain valve and ECM 3 Measure the resistance of harness between drain valve connector and c...

Page 242: ...tage more than 10 V Go to step 7 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between main relay and drain valve Poor contact of coupling conn...

Page 243: ...ing Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CE...

Page 244: ...ore than 10 V Go to step 4 Go to step 3 3 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of ECM connector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM Ref to...

Page 245: ...ria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Insp...

Page 246: ...the fuel flap Is the fuel filler cap tightened securely Go to step 3 Securely install the fuel filler cap 3 CHECK PRESSURE VACUUM LINE NOTE Check the following items Disconnection leakage and clogging...

Page 247: ...ting Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO C...

Page 248: ...e ECM harness and connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Contact the SOA service center 4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM and chas sis ground Connector terminal B...

Page 249: ...CM and rear wir ing harness con nector 9 CHECK FUEL TANK HARNESS 1 Disconnect the connector from fuel tank pressure sensor 2 Measure the resistance of fuel tank har ness Connector terminal R213 No 7 R...

Page 250: ...ting Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO C...

Page 251: ...ce the ECM Ref to FU H4SO 36 Engine Control Module ECM 4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM and chas sis ground Connector terminal B135 No 32 Chassis ground Is the voltage less...

Page 252: ...ank harness Connector terminal R213 No 4 R47 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 10 Repair the open circuit in fuel tank cord 10 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact in fuel tank pressure s...

Page 253: ...Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04043 5 3 6 4 2 1 B47 SBF 7 E4 1 2 E2 B21 41 48 D29 R68 1 2 R213 R15 1 5 R1 B97 14 15 R1 B97...

Page 254: ...k the drain valve NOTE Drain valve operation can be executed using Subaru Select Monitor For procedure refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 44 Compulsory Valve Operation...

Page 255: ...a in it Repair or replace the canister Ref to EC H4SO 5 Canister Go to step 10 10 CHECK FUEL TANK Remove the fuel tank Ref to FU H4SO 41 Fuel Tank Is the fuel tank damaged or is there a hole of more t...

Page 256: ...Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04043 5 3 6 4 2 1 B47 SBF 7 E4 1 2 E2 B21 41 48 D29 R68 1 2 R213 R15 1 5 R1 B97 14 15 R1 B97 R67 R46 7 6 C17 C28 R1...

Page 257: ...cuted using Subaru Select Monitor For procedure refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 44 Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Does the drain valve operate Go to step 6 Re...

Page 258: ...replace the fuel tank Ref to FU H4SO 41 Fuel Tank Go to step 10 10 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON TROL SYSTEM Are there holes of more than 0 5 mm 0 020 in dia cracks c...

Page 259: ...ling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Ins...

Page 260: ...enoid valve Connector terminal B137 No 29 E4 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and purge control sole noid valve connec tor NOTE In this ca...

Page 261: ...dling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE In...

Page 262: ...3 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of ECM connector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM Ref to FU H4SO 36 Engine Control Module ECM 4 C...

Page 263: ...DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT HIGH DTC DETECTING CONDITION Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur GENERAL DESCRIPTION Ref to GD H4SO 153 DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CI...

Page 264: ...0 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A DTC DETECTING CONDITION Immediately at fault recognition GENERAL DESCRIPTION Ref to GD H4SO 159 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteri...

Page 265: ...g 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12...

Page 266: ...o to step 2 2 CHECK AIR CLEANER ELEMENT 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Check the air cleaner element Is the air cleaner element excessively clogged Replace the air cleaner element Ref to IN H4SO...

Page 267: ...CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21...

Page 268: ...witch to ON 2 Start and idle the engine 3 Check the following items Loose installation of intake manifold and throttle body Cracks of intake manifold gasket and throttle body gasket Disconnection of v...

Page 269: ...Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04020 B136 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26 33 34 35...

Page 270: ...OTE Place the inhibitor switch in each position AT model Depress and release the clutch pedal MT model Check the security alarm is not sounding Does the starter motor oper ate Repair the battery short...

Page 271: ...ING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 2...

Page 272: ...witch to ON 2 Start and idle the engine 3 Check the following items Loose installation of intake manifold and throttle body Cracks of intake manifold gasket and throttle body gasket Disconnection of v...

Page 273: ...es not start Engine stalls CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO...

Page 274: ...4 5 6 7 8 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 42 43 44 45 46 47 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 2...

Page 275: ...ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from the ECM and electronic throttle control 3 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and electronic t...

Page 276: ...ecutive driving cycles with fault occur GENERAL DESCRIPTION Ref to GD H4SO 179 DTC P0692 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH Di agnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Radiator fan does no...

Page 277: ...CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspecti...

Page 278: ...3 3 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B136 No 31 Chassis ground B136 No 6 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 4 Repair...

Page 279: ...ON After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mo...

Page 280: ...ansmis sion harness connector terminals Connector terminal T2 No 1 No 2 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 6 Repair the short circuit in transmis sion harness or replace the neu tral position sw...

Page 281: ...CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspect...

Page 282: ...ector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Contact the SOA service center 5 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis ground Conn...

Page 283: ...rter motor ground line NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit in harness between inhibitor switch connector and starter motor ground line Poor contact in starter motor con nector Poo...

Page 284: ...ION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection M...

Page 285: ...e less than 1 Go to step 5 Repair the open circuit in transmis sion harness or replace neutral switch 5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND NEUTRAL SWITCH CONNECTOR 1 Disconnect the connector from ECM 2 Mea...

Page 286: ...EN 04042 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 B327 B138 E2 B21 B21 E2 E23 E22 1 2 6 4 E E 1 3 4 2 B135 B B136 C E 4 1 3 1 2 3 4 E23 FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR JOINT CON NECTOR REAR OXYGEN SENSOR ECM OXYGEN SENSOR RELA...

Page 287: ...nt oxygen A F sensor connector Connector terminal B135 No 8 E22 No 3 B135 No 9 E22 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 3 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the follo...

Page 288: ...3 4 2 B135 B B136 C E 4 1 3 1 2 3 4 E23 FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR JOINT CON NECTOR REAR OXYGEN SENSOR ECM OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY B134 8 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 2 1 3 4 16 30 19 20 22 28 29 9 17 18...

Page 289: ...1 Connect the connector to ECM 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON 3 Measure the voltage between ECM con nector and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 8 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 4...

Page 290: ...After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode...

Page 291: ...NTROL SOLENOID VALVE AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and pressure control solenoid valve con nector Connector terminal B136 No 28 R68 No 2 Is the resistance less than 1...

Page 292: ...CK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of pressure control sole noid valve connector Is there poor contact of the pressure control solenoid valve connector Repair the poor contact of pres sure control sol...

Page 293: ...er repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIR...

Page 294: ...POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of ECM connector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM Ref to FU H4SO 36 Engine Control Module ECM 4 CHECK HA...

Page 295: ...TION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection...

Page 296: ...n hose Replace the drain hose Go to step 3 3 CHECK DRAIN VALVE OPERATION 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect the test mode connector at the lower portion of instrument panel on the driver s si...

Page 297: ...BLE SYMPTOM Erroneous idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4S...

Page 298: ...tor 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PCV DIAGNO SIS CONNECTOR AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between PCV diagnosis connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 30 Chassis ground...

Page 299: ...diag 263 DTC P1498 EGR SOLE NOID VALVE SIGNAL 4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION LOW INPUT Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC CV DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION HIGH I...

Page 300: ...UNCTION LOW IN PUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria Ref to GD H4SO 205 DTC P1496 EGR SO LENOID VALVE SIGNAL 3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION LOW INPUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria...

Page 301: ...29 26 SBF 7 B134 ECM B47 E18 3 4 1 2 5 6 1 3 4 5 6 2 MAIN RELAY BATTERY EGR VALVE B134 8 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 2 1 3 4 16 30 19 20 22 28 29 9 17 18 25 21 23 24 32 31 26 27 33 34 B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 1...

Page 302: ...4 B134 No 9 E18 No 1 DTC P1496 B134 No 10 E18 No 4 DTC P1498 B134 No 20 E18 No 6 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 3 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following it...

Page 303: ...UNCTION HIGH IN PUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria Ref to GD H4SO 205 DTC P1497 EGR SO LENOID VALVE SIGNAL 3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION HIGH INPUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criter...

Page 304: ...29 26 SBF 7 B134 ECM B47 E18 3 4 1 2 5 6 1 3 4 5 6 2 MAIN RELAY BATTERY EGR VALVE B134 8 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 2 1 3 4 16 30 19 20 22 28 29 9 17 18 25 21 23 24 32 31 26 27 33 34 B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 1...

Page 305: ...ch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from EGR valve 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Measure the voltage between ECM con nector and chassis ground Connector terminal DTC P1493 B134 No 8 Chassis grou...

Page 306: ...r Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04020 B136 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26...

Page 307: ...the security alarm is not sounding Does the starter motor operate when ignition switch is turned to ST Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open or ground sh...

Page 308: ...2 No 12 B47 E2 B21 2 1 4 6 5 3 E 3 6 B134 B135 A D B137 C B136 B 3 4 1 2 5 6 B47 No 13 B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 B135 5 6 7 8 2...

Page 309: ...AND MAIN FUSE BOX CONNECTOR 1 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 2 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 5 Chassis ground Is the resistance less t...

Page 310: ...2 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 B327 B138 E2 B21 B21 E2 E23 E22 1 2 6 4 E E 1 3 4 2 B135 B B136 C E 4 1 3 1 2 3 4 E23 FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR JOINT CON NECTOR REAR OXYGEN SENSOR ECM OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTE...

Page 311: ...arness between ECM and front ox ygen A F sensor connector Poor contact in front oxygen A F sensor connector Poor contact in ECM connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR CONNEC...

Page 312: ...p 11 11 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE WARNING Place NO FIRE signs near the working area Be careful not to spill fuel Measure the fuel pressure Ref to ME H4SO 25 INSPECTION Fuel Pressure WARNING Release fuel pre...

Page 313: ...Turn all the accessory switches to OFF 5 Open the front hood 6 Measure the ambient temperature 7 Read the data of mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or...

Page 314: ...ygen sensor harness connector and engine ground or chassis ground Connector terminal E23 No 3 Engine ground Is the voltage 0 2 0 5 V Replace the rear oxygen sensor Ref to FU H4SO 34 Rear Oxygen Sen so...

Page 315: ...sor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4SO diag 26 Subaru Select Moni...

Page 316: ...2 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 B327 B138 E2 B21 B21 E2 E23 E22 1 2 6 4 E E 1 3 4 2 B135 B B136 C E 4 1 3 1 2 3 4 E23 FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR JOINT CON NECTOR REAR OXYGEN SENSOR ECM OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTE...

Page 317: ...arness between ECM and front ox ygen A F sensor connector Poor contact in front oxygen A F sensor connector Poor contact in ECM connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR CONNEC...

Page 318: ...11 11 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE WARNING Place NO FIRE signs near the working area Be careful not to spill fuel 1 Measure the fuel pressure Ref to ME H4SO 25 INSPECTION Fuel Pressure WARNING Release fuel pr...

Page 319: ...Turn all the accessory switches to OFF 5 Open the front hood 6 Measure the ambient temperature 7 Read the data of mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or...

Page 320: ...ygen sensor harness connector and engine ground or chassis ground Connector terminal E23 No 3 Engine ground Is the voltage 0 2 0 5 V Replace the rear oxygen sensor Ref to FU H4SO 34 Rear Oxygen Sen so...

Page 321: ...sor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4SO diag 26 Subaru Select Moni...

Page 322: ...Detecting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Erroneous idling Poor driving performance Engine stalls WIRING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34...

Page 323: ...ground Connector terminal B362 No 5 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the power supply short circuit of harness between ECM and electronic throttle control Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARN...

Page 324: ...nce less than 1 Go to step 10 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground...

Page 325: ...n ECM con nector and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B134 No 29 E57 No 3 B134 No 18 E57 No 6 B134 No 28 E57 No 4 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 17 Repair the open ci...

Page 326: ...gnal using Subaru Select Monitor NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4SO diag 26 Subaru Select Moni tor Is the voltage 1 64 1 7...

Page 327: ...en ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 5 Chassis ground B136 No 15 Chassis ground B137 No 1 Chassis ground B137 No 2 Chassis ground B137 No 3 Chassis ground B137 No 7 Chassis...

Page 328: ...34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 18 22 23 24 25 26 B137 D 1 2 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 18 22 2...

Page 329: ...ECM 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Measure the voltage between electronic throttle control relay connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B362 No 5 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 1...

Page 330: ...5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 18 22 23 24 25 26 B137 D 1 2 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 18 22 23 24 25 26 7 32 33 34 35 B136 C 5...

Page 331: ...CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT OF ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY POWER SUP PLY 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Measure the voltage between electronic throttle control relay connector and chassis ground Con...

Page 332: ...6 27 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10...

Page 333: ...HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 29 Chassis ground B135 No 31 Chassis ground Is th...

Page 334: ...nce of accelerator pedal position sensor Terminals No 4 No 3 Check the measured value is within the specifi cation with the accelerator pedal depressed Is the resistance between 0 5 and 2 5 k Repair t...

Page 335: ...26 27 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 1...

Page 336: ...connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Connect the ECM connector 2 Measure the resistance between accelera tor pedal position sensor connector and chas sis grou...

Page 337: ...6 27 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10...

Page 338: ...open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 31 Chas...

Page 339: ...al position sensor Terminals No 3 No 5 2 Check the measured value is within the specification with the accelerator pedal depressed Is the resistance between 0 28 and 1 68 k Repair the poor contact of...

Page 340: ...26 27 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 1...

Page 341: ...onnector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Connect the ECM connector 2 Measure the resistance between accelera tor pedal position sensor connector and chas sis groun...

Page 342: ...pection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31...

Page 343: ...etween ECM con nector and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B134 No 18 E57 No 6 B134 No 28 E57 No 4 B134 No 19 E57 No 5 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 5 Repair the ope...

Page 344: ...r and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B134 No 29 E57 No 3 B134 No 18 E57 No 6 B134 No 28 E57 No 4 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 12 Repair the open circuit of harnes...

Page 345: ...the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 16 Repair the short circuit to sensor power supply 16 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON TROL HARNESS 1 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 2 Disconnect the connector...

Page 346: ...31 26 27 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4...

Page 347: ...or terminal B135 No 23 B315 No 5 B135 No 21 B315 No 3 B135 No 31 B315 No 2 B135 No 22 B315 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS...

Page 348: ...l erator pedal posi tion sensor 11 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance of accelerator pedal position sensor with depressing the accelera tor pedal Terminals No 2 No 6 Is the...

Page 349: ...rt circuit of har ness between ECM connector and accelerator pedal position sen sor connector 17 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Di...

Page 350: ...ESCRIPTION Ref to GD H4SO 234 DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory...

Page 351: ...UTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO di ag 43 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO diag 34 PRO CEDURE Inspection...

Page 352: ...4 Electrical Component Location A LOCATION 1 ENGINE Control module 1 Engine control module ECM 3 Test mode connector 4 Data link connector 2 Malfunction indicator light EN 03145 1 2 4 3 1 EN 01147 EN...

Page 353: ...1 Mass air flow and intake air tem perature sensor 3 Engine coolant temperature sen sor 5 Knock sensor 6 Camshaft position sensor 2 Manifold absolute pressure sensor 4 Electronic throttle control 7 C...

Page 354: ...EN H4SO diag 10 Electrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS EN 02977 1 EN 01971 2 3 EN 02179 EN 01972 4 5 EN 00010 6 EN 00011 7 EN 00012 asieps_tobira book 10...

Page 355: ...TICS 1 Front oxygen A F sensor 3 Front catalytic converter 4 Rear catalytic converter 2 Rear oxygen sensor 1 Fuel level sensor 3 Fuel tank pressure sensor 4 Fuel sub level sensor 2 Fuel temperature se...

Page 356: ...EN H4SO diag 12 Electrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS EN 03147 2 1 EN 03003 3 EN 03132 4 asieps_tobira book 12...

Page 357: ...cation ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS Solenoid valve actuator emission control system parts and ignition system parts 1 Purge control solenoid valve 3 Ignition coil and ignitor ASSY 4 Fuel injector 2 EGR valve EN...

Page 358: ...EN H4SO diag 14 Electrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS EN 01975 1 EN 01976 2 EN 03105 3 EN 03106 4 asieps_tobira book 14...

Page 359: ...H4SO diag 15 Electrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS 1 Pressure control solenoid valve 3 Drain valve 4 Drain filter 2 Canister EN 04017 1 2 3 4 EN 02980 1 EN 02981 4 3 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 360: ...h 4 Fuel pump relay 7 Radiator sub fan relay 2 Fuel pump 5 Electronic throttle control relay 8 Radiator main fan relay 2 3 Main relay 6 Radiator main fan relay 1 9 Starter EN 03149 3 2 7 8 6 9 1 4 5 E...

Page 361: ...ubaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor Refer to Read Diagnostic Trouble Code for detailed operation procedure Ref to EN H4SO diag 33 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC For...

Page 362: ...ump and fuel pump relay 12 EGR valve 3 Engine does not return to idle 1 Engine coolant temperature sensor 2 Electronic throttle control 3 Manifold absolute pressure sensor 4 Mass air flow and intake a...

Page 363: ...ature sensor 2 Manifold absolute pressure sensor 3 Engine coolant temperature sensor 2 4 Crankshaft position sensor 3 5 Camshaft position sensor 3 6 Fuel injection parts 4 7 Electronic throttle contro...

Page 364: ...GENERAL DESCRIPTION GD H4SO Page 1 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 2 2 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria 8 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 365: ...ermostat Engine Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regu lating Temperature P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response Bank 1 Sensor 1 P0171 System Too Lean Bank 1 Complete diagnosis for drive cycle B or...

Page 366: ...nder 4 Misfire Detected Complete diagnosis for drive cycle A or C P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent P0483 Fan Rationality Check P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower Than Expected P0507 I...

Page 367: ...P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range Performance P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected Bank 1 Sensor 1 P0139 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response Bank 1 Sensor 2 P0171 System Too Lean Bank 1...

Page 368: ...onnecting the bat tery terminals 7 DRIVE CYCLE F 1 Check that the engine coolant temperature at engine start is 30 C 86 F or less 2 Warm up the engine until the engine coolant temperature exceeds 95 C...

Page 369: ...BARU SELECT MONITOR OBD MODE 1 On the Main Menu display screen select the Each System Check and press the YES key 2 On the System Selection Menu display screen select the Engine Control System and pre...

Page 370: ...1 Sensor 1 P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 2 P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 2 P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected Bank1 Sensor2 P0182 Fuel Temperature Se...

Page 371: ...Positive Crankcase Ventilation Blow by Function Problem P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input P1560 Back Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range Performance...

Page 372: ...LFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON Malfunction Indicator Light 3 Malfunction indicator light does not go off Ref to EN H4SO diag 50 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO OFF Malfunction Indi...

Page 373: ...alfunction indicator light blinks at a cycle of 1 Hz when the diagnosis system detects the misfire which might damage the catalyst 4 Turn the ignition switch to OFF and connect the test mode connector...

Page 374: ...COMBINATION METER IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26 33 34 35 Step...

Page 375: ...the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and combi nation meter con nector Poor contact of coupling connector 5 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of combination meter con nector Is t...

Page 376: ...8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ECM COMBINATION METER IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23...

Page 377: ...ON METER B135 B 8 i3 B38 ECM B75 B76 1 1 B136 C E 3 B72 SBF 6 6 MAIN SBF No 5 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY B135 B136 B C B72 B75 2 1 3 4 6 2 i10 B38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 19 20 2 1 3 4 6 7...

Page 378: ...ch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 3 Measure the resistance of harness between test mode connector and ECM Connector terminal B76 No 1 B136 No 6 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4...

Page 379: ...38 ECM B75 B76 1 1 B136 C E 3 B72 SBF 6 6 MAIN SBF No 5 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY B135 B136 B C B72 B75 2 1 3 4 6 2 i10 B38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 19 20 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18...

Page 380: ...links when test mode connec tor is connected 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM CON NECTOR AND TEST MODE CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 3 Measure the resista...

Page 381: ...lect the Each System Check and press the YES key 2 On the System Selection Menu display screen select the Engine Control System and press the YES key 3 Press the YES key after the information of en gi...

Page 382: ...thers Ambient air temperature C F Hot Warm Cool Cold Place Highway Suburbs Inner city Uphill Downhill Rough road Others Engine temperature Cold Warming up After warming up Any temperature Others Engin...

Page 383: ...ing out of fuel Yes No c Intentional connecting or disconnecting of harness connectors or spark plug cords Yes No What d Intentional connecting or disconnecting of hoses Yes No What e Installing of ot...

Page 384: ...ic data 2 MODE 02 Powertrain freeze frame data 3 MODE 03 Emission related powertrain DTC 4 MODE 04 Clear Reset emission related diagnostic information 5 MODE 06 Request on board monitoring test result...

Page 385: ...nifold absolute pressure kPa 0C Engine revolution rpm 0D Vehicle speed km h and MPH 0E Ignition timing advance 0F Intake air temperature C and F 10 Air flow rate from mass air flow sensor g sec 11 Thr...

Page 386: ...ding code for troubleshooting result about emission in the first time 8 MODE 09 Refer to data of vehicle specification V I N calibration ID diagnosis frequency etc TID CID Test value Test limit 81 01...

Page 387: ...tion Data A ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION Measuring condition After engine is warmed up Gear position is in N or P range Turn the A C to OFF Turn all the accessory switches to OFF Remarks Specification Eng...

Page 388: ...nect the diagnosis cable to data link connector CAUTION Do not connect any scan tools except Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool 5 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF and Subaru Select Mo...

Page 389: ...le signal Throttle Opening Angle 2 0 Rear oxygen sensor voltage Rear O2 Sensor V 0 1 0 7 V Battery voltage Battery Voltage V 12 14 V Mass air flow voltage Air Flow Sensor Voltage V 1 26 V Injection 1...

Page 390: ...itch signal Blower Fan Switch OFF input At OFF Light switch signal Light Switch OFF input At OFF A C middle pressure switch signal A C Mid Pressure Switch OFF input At OFF Air conditioner compressor r...

Page 391: ...ge system Incomplete Test of secondary air system Secondary air system No Test of A C system refrigerant A C system refrigerant No Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor Incomplete Test of oxygen sensor...

Page 392: ...ta Freeze frame data DTC Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank1 Normal CLOSE or initial OPEN Engine load data Engine Load Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp C or F...

Page 393: ...signal Knocking Signal Provided or None When knocking signal is input Crankshaft position sensor signal Crankshaft Position Signal Provided or None When crankshaft position sen sor signal is input Ca...

Page 394: ...permission signal Torque Control Permission ON or OFF When AT coordinate permis sion signal is input Electronic throttle control motor relay signal ETC Motor Relay ON or OFF When electronic throttle...

Page 395: ...se vehicle to jump off free rollers In order to prevent the vehicle from slipping due to vibration do not place any wooden blocks or similar items between the rigid racks and vehicle Since the rear wh...

Page 396: ...the corre sponding DTC appears on the display screen NOTE For detailed operation procedure refer to the SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION MANUAL For details concerning DTC refer to List of Di agnostic T...

Page 397: ...D position AT model or 1st gear MT model and drive the vehicle at 5 to 10 km h 3 to 6 MPH NOTE For AWD model release the parking brake The speed difference between front and rear wheels may light the...

Page 398: ...rical control modules using a tapered pin with a diameter of less than 0 64 mm 0 025 in Do not insert the pin more than 5 mm 0 20 in into the part 6 Before removing the ECM from the located posi tion...

Page 399: ...light may illuminate when performing driving test with jacked up or lifted up condition but this is not a system malfunction The reason for this is the speed difference between the front and rear whe...

Page 400: ...an intermittent injection sys tem where the electro magnetic injection valve fu el injector opens for a short period of time depending on the quantity of air required for one cycle of operation In act...

Page 401: ...open 4 17 Power supply B134 19 5 5 GND sensor B134 29 0 0 Electronic throttle control motor B137 5 Duty waveform Duty waveform Drive frequency 500 Hz Electronic throttle control motor B137 4 Duty wave...

Page 402: ...s OFF 12 14 A C switch B136 24 ON 10 13 OFF 0 ON 12 14 OFF 0 Ignition switch B135 19 10 13 12 14 Neutral posi tion switch AT B136 31 ON 0 OFF 12 0 5 For AT model switch is ON when select lever is shif...

Page 403: ...14 Blower fan switch B135 16 ON 0 OFF 10 13 ON 0 OFF 12 14 A C middle pressure switch B136 33 ON 0 OFF 10 13 ON 0 OFF 12 14 Oil switching solenoid valve RH Signal B137 25 0 Duty waveform Drive frequen...

Page 404: ...essed 12 14 When brake pedal is released 0 Cruise control main switch B135 12 ON 0 OFF 5 ON 0 OFF 5 Cruise control command switch B135 24 When operating nothing 3 5 4 5 When operating RES ACC 2 5 3 5...

Page 405: ...tools except Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool 6 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF and Subaru Select Monitor switch to ON 7 On the Main Menu display screen select the Each System Che...

Page 406: ...oper ation check Fuel Pump Compulsory radiator fan relay operation check Radiator Fan Relay Compulsory air conditioning relay operation check A C Compressor Relay Compulsory purge control sole noid v...

Page 407: ...line Ref to EN H4SO diag 60 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE ECM Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure 4 Inspection of ignition control system Ref to EN H4SO diag 62 IGNI...

Page 408: ...21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26 33 34 35 12 20 32 31 6 No 21 B225 MAIN SBF SBF 6 E 15 13 16 14 ECM B136 B72 2 3 B14 M B12 B106 B25 P N 11 2 1 2 1 MT MT BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH STARTER RELAY B122...

Page 409: ...r motor Ref to SC H4SO 6 Starter Go to step 5 5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY AND IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR 1 Disconnect the connector from ignition switch 2 Measure the power supply voltage between i...

Page 410: ...is ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Go to step 13 Repair the open or ground short cir cuit of harness between ECM and ignition switch 13 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IN HIBITOR SWITCH 1 Turn the...

Page 411: ...l switch Connector terminal B136 No 31 B25 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 19 Repair the open or ground short cir cuit of harness between ECM and neutral switch 19 CHECK NEUTRAL SWITCH G...

Page 412: ...6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B137 5...

Page 413: ...ltage between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 5 Chassis ground B135 No 19 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Go to step 4 Repair the open or ground short cir cuit...

Page 414: ...3 11 12 13 14 15 24 25 26 16 17 18 19 20 21 27 28 29 30 31 5 3 19 B21 E2 E12 SBF 7 15A 32 49 33 47 1 2 3 4 B137 18 26 6 3 4 1 2 B47 E 1 2 B225 ECM BATTERY IGNITION COIL IGNITOR ASSEMBLY MAIN RELAY REL...

Page 415: ...connector Blown out of fuse 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IGNITION COIL AND IGNITOR ASSEMBLY AND ECM 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Measure the resistance between the igni tion coil and ignitor assemb...

Page 416: ...m Open circuit of harness between ECM and ignition coil and ignitor as sembly connector Poor contact of coupling connector 7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG NITION COIL AND IGNITOR ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR...

Page 417: ...EDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04023 5 3 B97 MAIN SBF No 12 SBF 6 E 3 6 B72 B362 B136 No 11 FUEL PUMP RELAY FUEL PUMP FUEL PUMP CONDENSER ECM BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH B136 B72 1 3 4 5 6 2 R142...

Page 418: ...n fuel pump connector and chassis ground Connector terminal R58 No 5 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Replace the fuel pump Ref to FU H4SO 50 Fuel Pump Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN...

Page 419: ...nector terminal B136 No 12 B362 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 8 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and fuel pump relay connector 8 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of...

Page 420: ...ection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04024 E6 E17 E5 E16 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 10 9 8 11 42 48 43 44 45 B137 E5 E16 E6 E17 B21 E2 SBF 7 B47 1 2 4 6 3 5 B47 3 4 1 2 5 6 E B137 B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16...

Page 421: ...TOR 1 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 2 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and fuel injector connector Connector terminal 1 B137 No 8 E5 No 1 2 B137 No 9 E16 No 1 3 B137 No 10 E6 No 1 4...

Page 422: ...ubaru Select Monitor or general scan tool because the circuit for Subaru Select Monitor may be damaged EN 00037 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 14 16 Terminal No Remarks Terminal No Remarks 1 Power s...

Page 423: ...with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0077 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Cir cuit High Bank 1 Ref to EN H4SO diag 95 DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLE NOID CIRCUIT HIGH BANK 1 Diagnostic Procedure with...

Page 424: ...ostic Trouble Code DTC P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1 Ref to EN H4SO diag 137 DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLT AGE BANK 1 SENSOR 1 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Troub...

Page 425: ...gnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High Bank 1 or Single Sensor Ref to EN H4SO diag 182 DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR Diagn...

Page 426: ...f to EN H4SO diag 226 DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT HIGH Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermit tent Ref to EN H4SO diag 226 DTC P0464 F...

Page 427: ...de DTC P1420 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sol Valve Circuit High Ref to EN H4SO diag 256 DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CONTROL SOL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC...

Page 428: ...MUM STOP PERFORMANCE Diagnostic Procedure with Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC P2122 Throttle Pedal Position Sensor Switch D Circuit Low Input Ref to EN H4SO diag 295 DTC P2122 THROTTLE PEDAL POSITION SE...

Page 429: ...A F Sensor Ref to FU H4SO 34 REMOVAL Rear Oxygen Sensor B INSTALLATION 1 Install the front oxygen A F sensor and rear ox ygen sensor Ref to FU H4SO 32 INSTALLA TION Front Oxygen A F Sensor Ref to FU...

Page 430: ...olt which holds center exhaust pipe to hanger bracket 8 Remove the front and center exhaust pipe as sembly from the vehicle CAUTION The front and center exhaust pipe assemblies are very heavy Be caref...

Page 431: ...pipe assem bly to the vehicle 4 Temporarily tighten the nuts which hold front ex haust pipe to cylinder heads 5 Tighten the bolt which holds the center exhaust pipe to exhaust pipe NOTE Use a new gask...

Page 432: ...ctor 2 Rear oxygen sensor connector 11 Connect the battery ground cable to the bat tery C INSPECTION 1 Check the connections and welds for exhaust leaks 2 Make sure there are no holes or rusting A Fro...

Page 433: ...cription EXHAUST 1 General Description A COMPONENT EX 02139 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T5 T1 T1 T4 T4 29 28 23 19 17 16 10 11 14 13 15 24 27 26 25 T2 12 T3 T3 T7 T7 5 9 5 5 4 3 5 5 2 8 18 20 7 6 7 6 1 22 T6 22 21...

Page 434: ...disconnect the ground cable from the battery 1 Gasket 14 Rear catalytic converter 26 Front catalytic converter upper cover 2 Spring 15 Center exhaust pipe rear lower cover 3 Chamber 27 Front catalytic...

Page 435: ...e lubricant to the mating area of cushion rubber 4 Remove the rear exhaust pipe bracket from cushion rubber B INSTALLATION 1 Apply a coat of spray type lubricant to the mating area of cushion rubber 2...

Page 436: ...st pipe to center exhaust pipe Tightening torque 18 N m 1 8 kgf m 13 0 ft lb C INSPECTION 1 Check the connections and welds for exhaust leaks 2 Make sure there are no holes or rusting 3 Check the cush...

Page 437: ...ushion rubbers and then remove the muffler B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Use a new gasket and self locking nut Tightening torque 48 N m 4 9 kgf m 35 4 ft lb LH side RH si...

Page 438: ...an System 7 3 Engine Coolant 12 4 Water Pump 14 5 Thermostat 17 6 Radiator 19 7 Radiator Cap 22 8 Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor 23 9 Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor 25 10 Reservoir Tank 27 11 Engine...

Page 439: ...uit High Bank 1 Ref to GD H4SO 23 DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH BANK 1 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Crite ria P0082 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Cir cuit Low Bank 2 Re...

Page 440: ...ty Detected Bank 1 Sensor 1 Ref to GD H4SO 64 DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED BANK 1 SENSOR 1 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detect ing Criteria P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Bank...

Page 441: ...rouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P0341 Camshaft Position Sensor A Cir cuit Range Performance Bank 1 or Single Sensor Ref to GD H4SO 112 DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE PERFORMANCE...

Page 442: ...o GD H4SO 163 DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Cri teria P0512 Starter Request Circuit Ref to GD H4SO 165 DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRC...

Page 443: ...1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal 1 Cir cuit Malfunction Low Input Ref to GD H4SO 201 DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION LOW INPUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P1...

Page 444: ...Trouble Code DTC Detecting Crite ria P2109 Throttle Pedal Position Sensor A Minimum Stop Performance Ref to GD H4SO 219 DTC P2109 THROTTLE PEDAL POSITION SEN SOR A MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE Diagnostic...

Page 445: ...High NG When the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch remains OFF even though the intake valve tried to enter low mode oil switching solenoid valve duty is small this is judged as a High...

Page 446: ...eted 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 B DTC P0028 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT R...

Page 447: ...in deceleration etc 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis continuously after 50 seconds or more have passed since the engine started 1 Element cover...

Page 448: ...en malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR C...

Page 449: ...minal voltage at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING...

Page 450: ...emory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor heater contr...

Page 451: ...l voltage at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYC...

Page 452: ...emory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor heater contr...

Page 453: ...s 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the dia...

Page 454: ...ear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT...

Page 455: ...V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagn...

Page 456: ...ear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT...

Page 457: ...ure AD value is Low whereas it seemed to be High from the viewpoint of engine condition or when it is High whereas it seemed to be Low from the engine condition 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDIT...

Page 458: ...N When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Intake manifold pressure sensor process Estimate the pressure from engine load ISC feedback Not all...

Page 459: ...ccurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time when the following conditions are established are more than 2 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is c...

Page 460: ...a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time when the following conditions are established are more than 2 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK i...

Page 461: ...76 Ref to GD H4SO 22 DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW BANK 1 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria L DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH BANK 2 NOTE For th...

Page 462: ...ncreases Judge as a high side NG when the air flow voltage indicates a large val ue regardless of running in a state where the air flow voltage decreases Judge air flow sensor property NG when the Low...

Page 463: ...ke manifold pressure 53 3 kPa 400 mmHg 15 7 inHg High side error 1 Output voltage 2 66 V Engine speed 600 900 rpm Throttle opening angle 2 44 Intake manifold pressure 40 0 kPa 300 mmHg 11 8 inHg High...

Page 464: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 465: ...dge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6...

Page 466: ...GD H4SO 29 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 asieps_tobira book 29...

Page 467: ...udge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6...

Page 468: ...GD H4SO 31 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 asieps_tobira book 31...

Page 469: ...n the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0...

Page 470: ...INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE ISC feedback Not allowed to calculate the amount of feedback 9 ECM OP...

Page 471: ...n the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0...

Page 472: ...INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE ISC feedback Not allowed to calculate the amount of feedback 9 ECM OP...

Page 473: ...ndition 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis when the vehicle speed condition is completed after idling from starting the cooled en gine 1 Air flow...

Page 474: ...ITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When...

Page 475: ...cuit of the intake air temperature sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Air f...

Page 476: ...are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is complet...

Page 477: ...cuit of the intake air temperature sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Air f...

Page 478: ...are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is complet...

Page 479: ...5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a m...

Page 480: ...fixed at 70 C 158 F ISC Feedback Calculate target engine speed as engine coolant temperature 70 C 158 F ISC learning Not allowed to learn Air conditioner control Not allowed to turn the air conditione...

Page 481: ...5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a m...

Page 482: ...fixed at 70 C 158 F ISC Feedback Calculate target engine speed as engine coolant temperature 70 C 158 F ISC learning Not allowed to learn Air conditioner control Not allowed to turn the air conditione...

Page 483: ...4 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is p...

Page 484: ...tecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame da...

Page 485: ...24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 486: ...tecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame da...

Page 487: ...utput property Judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature does not rise in driving conditions where it should 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagno...

Page 488: ...ous driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear...

Page 489: ...fixed at 70 C 158 F ISC Feedback Calculate target engine speed as engine coolant temperature 70 C 158 F ISC learning Not allowed to learn Air conditioner control Not allowed to turn the air conditione...

Page 490: ...to judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature does not decrease when it should 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis only once after starting t...

Page 491: ...formed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the...

Page 492: ...an the estimated engine coolant temperature and the difference between them is large Judge as OK when the engine coolant temperature becomes to 70 C 158 F and the difference is small before judging NG...

Page 493: ...ATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For tes...

Page 494: ...e as NG when the continuous time of completing any malfunction criteria below is more than 1 second Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 second Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a...

Page 495: ...performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor heater control Not allowed to turn on the heater A F main learning Not allowed to calculate the A F main learning compensation factor A F sub learning No...

Page 496: ...ge as NG when the continuous time of completing any malfunction criteria below is more than 1 second Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 second Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as...

Page 497: ...performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor heater control Not allowed to turn on the heater A F main learning Not allowed to calculate the A F main learning compensation factor A F sub learning No...

Page 498: ...ed ventilation holes are diagnosed When the holes are clogged the A F output variation becomes slow comparing with the actual A F variation because oxygen which reaches the zirconia layer is insuffici...

Page 499: ...ions All secondary parameters enable condi tions 1 second or more Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 563 mmHg 22 2 inHg Closed loop control with main feedback Operating Front oxygen...

Page 500: ...INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen sensor A F sensor main learning compensation Not allowe...

Page 501: ...C METHOD Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes more than 5 seconds Time Needed for Diagnosis 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illu...

Page 502: ...ycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor heater control Not allowed to turn on the heater A F main learning Not allowed to calculate the A...

Page 503: ...unuity NG of oxygen sensor If the oxygen sensor voltage reading is not within the probable range considering the operating conditions judge as NG 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A Electromotive force C Rich E...

Page 504: ...cond Low side 2 Closed loop control at the oxygen sensor In operation Misfire detection every 200 rotations 5 times Front oxygen A F sensor compensation coefficient Not in limit value Battery voltage...

Page 505: ...LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Sub feedback control Not allowed 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the f...

Page 506: ...e is large rich when recovering from a deceleration fuel cut Lean rich diagnosis response 1 Measure the response time for oxygen sensor output changes when the A F ratio changes to lean to rich If the...

Page 507: ...celeration Pay attention to the oxygen sensor voltage for the timing of the deceleration Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions Battery voltage 10 9 V A F sub feedback control condition Completed Dece...

Page 508: ...e of rear oxygen sensor output voltage is short during fuel shut off in deceleration Carry out the NG judgment only after the fuel shut off in deceleration Even without deceleration fuel cut judge as...

Page 509: ...Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Sub feedback control Not allowed 9...

Page 510: ...from 0 25 V lean to 0 55 V rich EN 02210 Fuel cut on deceleration Execute the malfunction judgement in 2 seconds from recovery of fuel cut on deceleration Rear oxygen sensor V 0V 6s 120s 0 25V 0 3V 0...

Page 511: ...nse time diagnosis value threshold value normal 2 Do not judge as a normal condition Judge as OK when the criteria below are met 13 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times i...

Page 512: ...eded for Diagnosis 200 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Normality Judgment When the following conditions are establi...

Page 513: ...6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE Sub feedback control Not allowed 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC...

Page 514: ...nation Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions A F main learning system In operation Engine coolant temperature 75 C 167 F Amount of...

Page 515: ...g cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear...

Page 516: ...Enable Conditions A F main learning system In operation Engine coolant temperature 75 C 168 F Amount of intake air Value from Map 5 Intake air change during 0 5 engine revs 0 02 g 0 001 oz rev Learni...

Page 517: ...a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE...

Page 518: ...her is NG judge as NG If both are OK Judge as OK and clear the NG Drift Diagnosis Normally fuel temperature is lower than engine coolant temperature When the fuel temperature becomes higher than the e...

Page 519: ...L DRIVING CYCLE Always perform diagnosis after 20 seconds have passed since the engine started Judgment Value Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value Fuel level 9 6 2 2 54 US gal 2 11 Imp gal After engin...

Page 520: ...s completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 10 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 11 FA...

Page 521: ...the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 2 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a ma...

Page 522: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 523: ...n the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 2 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a m...

Page 524: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 525: ...he following table After engine start oil temperature characteristic diagnosis timer judgment value t t 1882940 43302 Ti t 1882940 Ti The lowest coolant temperature after starting the engine Time Need...

Page 526: ...en Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE Oil temperature sensor pro...

Page 527: ...llowing conditions are not established Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idli...

Page 528: ...llowing conditions are not established Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idli...

Page 529: ...24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 530: ...tecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame da...

Page 531: ...24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 532: ...tecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame da...

Page 533: ...TP 1 5 times misfire 180 Interval Difference Method MT 1 800 rpm or less AT None 360 Interval Difference Method whole range 720 Interval Difference Method 3 000 rpm or less 2 Misfire every time FTP 1...

Page 534: ...29 5 221 8 71 32 4 243 9 57 36 4 273 10 75 39 9 299 11 78 44 5 324 13 14 MT Vehicle speed 64 4km h 40 MPH rpm 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6400 kPa mmHg inHg 31 6 237 9 3...

Page 535: ...d omg 3 etc 180 Interval Difference Method A Ignition order B Crankshaft position speed Diagnostic value domg 180 omg 1 omg 0 omg 5 omg 1 4 Judge as a misfire in the following cases domg 180 judgment...

Page 536: ...dg ment domg 360 Judgment value Judge as misfire Diagnostic value domg 720 omg 1 omg 0 omg 5 omg 4 Misfire judg ment domg 720 Judgment value Judge as misfire Judgment Value Judge that malfunction occu...

Page 537: ...driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 Judgment Value Judge that mal...

Page 538: ...Code DTC Detecting Criteria AV DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC P0301 Ref to GD H4SO 96 DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MIS FIRE DETECTED Diagnostic Trouble C...

Page 539: ...is continuously 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Abnormality Judgment Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 1 second or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 second M...

Page 540: ...ycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 541: ...is continuously 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Abnormality Judgment Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 1 second or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 second M...

Page 542: ...ycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 543: ...n sensor Judge as NG when the crank signal is not input even though the starter was rotated 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION A Camshaft signal B Crankshaft signal 1 Crankshaft position senso...

Page 544: ...he malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When th...

Page 545: ...ensor output properties Judge as NG when there is a problem in the number of crankshaft signals for every revolution 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A Camshaft signal B Crankshaft signal 1 Crankshaft position...

Page 546: ...criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cy...

Page 547: ...ensor Judge as NG when the number of camshaft signals remains abnormal 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously A Camshaft signal B...

Page 548: ...ria are established 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle...

Page 549: ...roperty Judge as NG when the camshaft line signal input timing is shifted from the crankshaft signal because of tim ing belt tooth chip etc 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A Camshaft signal B Crankshaft signa...

Page 550: ...ontinuous driving cy cles 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving...

Page 551: ...relay 2 Detecting circuit 5 EGR valve 7 Battery power supply 3 Switching circuit Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions After engine starting 40 seconds or more Engine coolant temperature 75 C 167 F...

Page 552: ...as PMOF1 which is observed when enable conditions are es tablished and set the EGR target step to 50 steps nearly full open 2 Label the intake manifold pressure value as PMON which is observed after o...

Page 553: ...ow When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed A Deceleration fuel cut E Intake...

Page 554: ...8 FAIL SAFE A F main learning Not allowed Knock learning Not allowed EGR control Operation prohibited 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 Memorize the diagn...

Page 555: ...n sensor B Deterioration 3 Catalytic converter C Output waveform from the front oxygen A F sensor Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 563 mmHg 2...

Page 556: ...he criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 30 55 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION...

Page 557: ...change using the fuel tank pressure sensor When in 0 04 inch diagnosis perform in the order of mode Z mode A mode B mode C and mode D When in 0 02 inch diagnosis per form in the order of mode A mode...

Page 558: ...ing the intake manifold pressure to the fuel tank If the tank pressure cannot be reduced it is diagnosed as large leak 5 25 seconds Mode C Pressure increase check advanced OK judgment Wait until the t...

Page 559: ...oint compensation When the pressure in the tank is high wait until it returns to 0 point Near 0 mmHg 0 12 seconds Mode B Negative pressure introduced Decrease the pressure in the tank to the target va...

Page 560: ...air pressure Normally the solenoid is set to OFF The valve opens and closes mechanically in accordance with the pressure difference between tank and atmospheric air or tank and canister The valve is f...

Page 561: ...and the part below Y is charged with canister pressure If the atmospheric air pressure port is A tank pressure port is B and canister pressure port is C the air flows according to pressure difference...

Page 562: ...cting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION When B C solenoid OFF When Solenoid is ON 1 Valve a Atmospheric pressure c Canister b Fuel tank a Atmospheric pressure b Fuel tank c Canister EN 01718 A B C a b c 1...

Page 563: ...050 6000 rpm Fuel tank pressure 4 00 kPa 30 mmHg 1 18 inHg Intake manifold relative vacuum relative pres sure 26 7 kPa 200 mmHg 7 87 inHg Vehicle speed 32 km h 20 MPH Fuel level 9 6 54 4 2 2 54 14 37...

Page 564: ...anister purge operation 120 seconds or more After engine starting 120 seconds or more Fuel temperature 10 70 C 14 158 F Fuel level 9 6 54 4 2 2 54 14 37 US gal 2 11 11 97 Imp gal Intake manifold relat...

Page 565: ...leakage diagnosis is can celled Diagnostic method Purge control solenoid valve functional diagnosis is performed by monitoring the tank pressure in mode Z Normality Judgment Judge as OK and change to...

Page 566: ...in 2 continuous driving cy cles When judgment for purge control solenoid valve stuck open NG is made end the evaporative diagnosis Cancel the evaporative diagnosis when the OK NG judgment for purge c...

Page 567: ...US gal 0 44 Imp gal for 40 seconds or more Judge as normal when all are established Leak Diagnosis DTC P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected Small Leak P0457 Evaporative Emission Co...

Page 568: ...ime Mode D Measure amount of negative pressure change Monitor the tank pressure change amount when using mode D In this case the tank pressure increases nears atmospheric pressure because evaporation...

Page 569: ...elled Mode C Negative pressure maintained Stop the introduction of negative pressure Wait until the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 cal culation Change to Mode D either when the tank pr...

Page 570: ...sec P2 0 9 1 3 kPa 7 9 6 mmHg 0 28 0 38 inHg Judgment Value Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value P1 Value from Map 7 Threshold value Map Fuel level vs evpdset Map 7 Malfunction criteria limit for eva...

Page 571: ...s Fuel level 0 seconds 30 seconds 80 seconds 100 seconds 150 seconds 200 seconds 10 L 2 6 US gal 2 2 Imp gal 0 1 kPa 1 mmHg 0 03 inHg 0 47 kPa 3 5 mmHg 0 139 inHg 0 56 kPa 4 2 mmHg 0 165 inHg 0 56 kPa...

Page 572: ...rs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Bobbin 8 Magnetic plate 14 Retainer 2 Coil 9 Shaft 15 D...

Page 573: ...ear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Pressure control solenoid valve...

Page 574: ...fers from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Bobbin 8 Magnetic plate 14 Retainer 2 Coil 9 Shaft 15...

Page 575: ...lear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Pressure control solenoid valv...

Page 576: ...NENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis continuously after 60 seconds or more have passed since the engine started Be sure to check the fuel level and fuel te...

Page 577: ...s OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR L...

Page 578: ...the open or short circuit of the fuel tank pressure sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis con...

Page 579: ...LEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a...

Page 580: ...specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis continually when purging 1 Connector A Output voltage C To fuel tank 2 Terminal B Input voltage S...

Page 581: ...SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 BL DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT ED VERY SMALL LEAK NOTE For the detection standard refer to DTC P0442 Evaporative...

Page 582: ...e control solenoid valve Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis af...

Page 583: ...et 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 t...

Page 584: ...ge control solenoid valve Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis a...

Page 585: ...et 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 t...

Page 586: ...etect malfunctions of the fuel level sensor output property If the fuel level does not vary in a particular driving condition engine condition where it should judge as NG 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENA...

Page 587: ...med 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the fr...

Page 588: ...r short circuit of fuel level sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine con...

Page 589: ...ow are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is compl...

Page 590: ...or short circuit of fuel level sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine co...

Page 591: ...w are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is comple...

Page 592: ...t voltage variation of the fuel level sensor is larger than the threshold value 2 ENABLE CONDITION 3 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously at idle speed Pay attention to the...

Page 593: ...umulative values are not over the threshold value Otherwise when either of them is over the threshold value the diagnosis counter counts up Judge as NG if the counter indicated 4 counts 12 2S Diagnosi...

Page 594: ...e is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 Judgment Value Malfunction Criteria Thres...

Page 595: ...Diagnosis 5 minutes Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction cr...

Page 596: ...e Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when all of the following criter...

Page 597: ...cle speed fuel cut performs on vehicle speed condition and engine speed but perform the fuel cut only on engine speed condition 4 400 rpm or more ISC control Open loop compensation is set to specified...

Page 598: ...gment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criterion below be comes more than the time needed for diagnosis 10 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK...

Page 599: ...L DESCRIPTION 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memor...

Page 600: ...dgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criterion below be comes more than the time needed for diagnosis 10 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK...

Page 601: ...L DESCRIPTION 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memor...

Page 602: ...alfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as ON OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is compl...

Page 603: ...ey Use of unregistered key in body inte grated unit P1570 Antenna Faulty antenna P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility Reference code incompatibility between body integrated unit and ECM P1572 IMM Circ...

Page 604: ...below be comes more than the time needed for diagnosis 5 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LI...

Page 605: ...lished it is judged NG Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time when all of the following criteria are established is more than the predetermined time 1 s Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 time...

Page 606: ...tion Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Secondary Parameters Enable Co...

Page 607: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 608: ...Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine...

Page 609: ...sub CPU is abnormal When the input amplifier circuit of throttle position sensor 1 is abnormal When the cruise control cannot be canceled correctly When the signal of brake SW1 and 2 is mismatched Wh...

Page 610: ...When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear...

Page 611: ...tecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame da...

Page 612: ...ol is operating 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis Target opening angle and actual opening angle 250 milliseconds Fo...

Page 613: ...mory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped...

Page 614: ...tecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame da...

Page 615: ...lear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR...

Page 616: ...clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEA...

Page 617: ...when the following conditions are not established and clear the NG Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLE...

Page 618: ...t Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 56 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is...

Page 619: ...ing 3 times Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row W...

Page 620: ...t Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 56 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is...

Page 621: ...ng 3 times Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row Wh...

Page 622: ...is abnormal in accordance with value of front oxygen A F sensor and running conditions such as vehicle speed amount of intake air engine coolant temperature sub feedback control etc 2 COMPONENT DESCRI...

Page 623: ...s in a row When Clear Memory is performed Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions All secondary parameters enable condi tions 4 seconds or more Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 563...

Page 624: ...ont oxygen sensor A F sensor main learning compensation Not allowed to calculate Front oxygen A F sensor sub learning compensation Not allowed to calculate Purge control Not allowed to purge 9 ECM OPE...

Page 625: ...is abnormal in accordance with value of front oxygen A F sensor and running conditions such as vehicle speed amount of intake air engine coolant temperature sub feedback control etc 2 COMPONENT DESCR...

Page 626: ...imes in a row When Clear Memory is performed Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions All secondary parameters enable condi tions 4 seconds or more Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 5...

Page 627: ...ont oxygen sensor A F sensor main learning compensation Not allowed to calculate Front oxygen A F sensor sub learning compensation Not allowed to calculate Purge control Not allowed to purge 9 ECM OPE...

Page 628: ...lfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 1880 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idli...

Page 629: ...N INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERA...

Page 630: ...the malfunction criteria below becomes more than time needed for diagnosis 2 5 seconds Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 secon...

Page 631: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 632: ...he malfunction criteria below becomes more than time needed for diagnosis 2 5 seconds Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds...

Page 633: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 634: ...Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Bobbin 8 Magnetic plate 14 Retainer 2 Coil 9 Shaft 15 Diaphragm 3 Diode 10 Plate 16 Movable core 4 Stator core 11 Valve 17 Spring 5 End plate 12 Housing 18...

Page 635: ...erformed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Pressure control solenoid valve control Open t...

Page 636: ...tect the blow by hose release abnormality Judge as NG when the diagnosis terminal voltage is high 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis contin...

Page 637: ...e NG when the following criteria are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When...

Page 638: ...ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform diagnosis continuously during EGR operation 1 Engine control module...

Page 639: ...ed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Fro...

Page 640: ...n the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine control module ECM 3...

Page 641: ...ted 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Fr...

Page 642: ...GD H4SO 201 DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION LOW INPUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Cri teria CY DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL 3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION HIGH INPUT...

Page 643: ...ity Judgment Judge as OFF OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6...

Page 644: ...Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40...

Page 645: ...etecting Criteria DG DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS For the detection standard refer to DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY Ref to GD H4SO 166 DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZ...

Page 646: ...judge as NG 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis continuously at a constant speed of 50 100 km h 31 62 MPH 1 Atmosphere A Electromotive force D Lean...

Page 647: ...icator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is perform...

Page 648: ...owing criteria established is 5 seconds or more Judge as OK when the continuous time with the following criteria not established is 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 5 seconds 1 times Malfun...

Page 649: ...completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear Memory is...

Page 650: ...t is heated 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine control module ECM 4 Drive circuit 6 Electronic throttle control relay...

Page 651: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When...

Page 652: ...ontinuously 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 400 milliseconds For NG 2000 milliseconds For OK Malfunction Indicato...

Page 653: ...Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Stop...

Page 654: ...ets the electric throttle control relay to OFF 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE When ignition switch ON OFF Ignition switch OFF ON Only after clearing memory 1 Engine...

Page 655: ...When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3...

Page 656: ...the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 8 80 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 1 Engine control module ECM 3 M...

Page 657: ...Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Stop...

Page 658: ...Needed for Diagnosis 100 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row...

Page 659: ...PTION When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTI...

Page 660: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 100 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION Whe...

Page 661: ...When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttle...

Page 662: ...G when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 100 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When...

Page 663: ...When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttle...

Page 664: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 100 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION Whe...

Page 665: ...When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttle...

Page 666: ...of throttle position sensor 1 is different from the throttle position sensor 2 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Throttle p...

Page 667: ...ormed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE...

Page 668: ...sor 1 is different from the throttle position sensor 2 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine control module ECM 3 Accele...

Page 669: ...dling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is per...

Page 670: ...driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below be comes more than 0 3 seconds 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK...

Page 671: ...Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is...

Page 672: ...r Light Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is comple...

Page 673: ...GD H4SO 236 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION asieps_tobira book 236...

Page 674: ...work for satisfying our customers by keeping their vehicle in optimum condition When replacement of parts during repair work is needed be sure to use SUBARU genuine parts All information illustration...

Page 675: ...asieps_tobira book 2...

Page 676: ...FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS FU H4SO U5 Page 1 General Description 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 677: ...uel Delivery and Evaporation Lines 6 Remove the nuts and bolts which install fuel sub level sensor on fuel tank 7 Remove the fuel sub level sensor B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of remova...

Page 678: ...FUEL SYSTEMS 27 Fuel Filter A SPECIFICATION Fuel filter forms a single unit with fuel pump Refer to Fuel Pump for removal and installation Ref to FU H4SO 50 REMOVAL Fuel Pump Ref to FU H4SO 50 INSTALL...

Page 679: ...1 Disconnect the ground cable from the battery 2 Remove the glove box Ref to EI 51 REMOV AL Glove Box 3 Remove the harness cover A 4 Disconnect the connector from fuel pump relay B INSTALLATION Instal...

Page 680: ...en A F sensor ap ply anti seize compound only to the threaded por tion of front oxygen A F sensor to make the next removal easier Anti seize compound NEVER SEEZ NS 165 or the equivalent CAUTION Never...

Page 681: ...FU H4SO 33 Front Oxygen A F Sensor FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS 6 Connect the battery ground cable to the battery IN 00203 asieps_tobira book 33...

Page 682: ...block B INSTALLATION 1 Install the knock sensor to cylinder block NOTE Extraction area of knock sensor cord must be posi tioned at a 60 angle relative to the engine rear Tightening torque 24 N m 2 4...

Page 683: ...ess connector from the bracket 4 Disconnect the connector from the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch 5 Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres sure switch LH side RH side B I...

Page 684: ...the battery 2 Remove the generator Ref to SC H4SO 21 REMOVAL Generator 3 Disconnect the connectors from the engine cool ant temperature sensor 4 Remove the engine coolant temperature sensor B INSTALL...

Page 685: ...position sensor and manifold absolute pressure sensor 4 Disconnect the engine coolant hoses from the throttle body 5 Remove the bolts which secure the throttle body to the intake manifold B INSTALLAT...

Page 686: ...ion Fuel tank Capacity 64 2 16 9 US gal 14 1 Imp gal Install locations Under rear seat Fuel pump Type Impeller Shutoff discharge pressure 550 850 kPa 5 6 8 7 kg cm2 79 7 123 2 psi Discharge rate 125 2...

Page 687: ...L SYSTEMS B COMPONENT 1 INTAKE MANIFOLD 19 T1 T1 T1 7 18 2 1 16 3 15 T5 T4 T1 T3 T2 T2 T2 T3 T1 T1 T4 T4 T4 15 21 13 12 14 15 13 12 14 15 13 12 14 10 3 4 T4 9 17 13 12 14 6 6 4 T4 T4 T5 2 17 18 T3 T4...

Page 688: ...N m kgf m ft lb 5 Nipple 15 O ring T1 6 4 0 65 4 7 6 Guide pin 16 Purge control solenoid valve T2 8 75 0 89 6 5 7 PCV pipe 17 Plug cord holder T3 17 1 7 12 5 8 EGR valve 18 Nipple T4 19 1 9 14 9 Fuel...

Page 689: ...FT POSITION CAMSHAFT POSITION AND KNOCK SENSORS 1 Crankshaft position sensor 3 Camshaft position sensor Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Knock sensor 4 Camshaft position sensor support T1 6 4 0 65...

Page 690: ...iption FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS 4 FUEL TANK FU 02827 7 T4 T1 T4 T3 T3 T3 T2 T3 T3 T4 T1 16 14 15 15 17 19 17 3 22 23 24 2 20 21 11 12 13 8 10 17 17 30 9 1 T2 T3 17 25 26 27 17 29 28 5 6 4 6 18 17 1...

Page 691: ...pump tube 17 Clip 29 Evaporation pipe 6 Retainer 18 Evaporation hose F 30 Evaporation hose E 7 Fuel pump ASSY 19 Fuel tank protector LH Rear 8 Fuel pump upper plate 20 Stopper RH Tightening torque N m...

Page 692: ...ion FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS 5 FUEL LINE FU 02828 A A 25 22 27 20 21 26 28 24 23 T2 T4 T1 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 19 17 15 14 1 1 1 30 31 1 32 29 18 11 11 10 9 8 7 2 1 6 4 3 1 1 5 11 11 13 12 16 1 35 1 T...

Page 693: ...disconnect the ground cable from the bat tery Place NO FIRE signs near the working area Be careful not to spill fuel D PREPARATION TOOL 1 Clamp 14 Canister 27 Fuel tank pressure sensor 2 Fuel damper...

Page 694: ...r 5 Remove the bolts and nuts which hold the ECM to the bracket 6 Remove the clip A from bracket 7 Disconnect the ECM connectors and take out the ECM B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of rem...

Page 695: ...ehicle 5 Remove the rear wheel RH 6 Drain fuel from fuel tank Ref to FU H4SO 40 DRAINING FUEL PROCEDURE Fuel 7 Remove the mud guard Ref to EI 29 RE MOVAL Mud Guard 8 Remove the rear sub frame Ref to R...

Page 696: ...crewdriver 4 Securely insert the fuel filler hose A and Evap oration hose B to the specified position then tight en the clamp Tightening torque 2 5 N m 0 3 kgf m 1 8 ft lb 5 Tighten the bolts which ho...

Page 697: ...the shut valve 2 Remove the nut which holds the evaporation pipe assembly to the fuel filler pipe 3 Remove the shut valve from the fuel filler pipe Ref to EC H4SO 14 REMOVAL Shut Valve E ASSEMBLY 1 I...

Page 698: ...t parts Replace the faulty part 2 Decline of fuel pump function Replace the fuel pump 3 Clogged dust or water in the fuel filter Replace the fuel filter and clean or replace the fuel tank 4 Clogged or...

Page 699: ...FU H4SO 60 Fuel System Trouble in General FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS asieps_tobira book 60...

Page 700: ...lytic Converter 4 4 Canister 5 5 Purge Control Solenoid Valve 6 6 EGR Valve 7 7 Fuel Level Sensor 8 8 Fuel Temperature Sensor 9 9 Fuel Sub Level Sensor 10 10 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 11 11 Pressure C...

Page 701: ...e air intake chamber Ref to IN H4SO 7 REMOVAL Air Intake Chamber 3 Remove the engine harness connector from the bracket 4 Disconnect the connector from the oil tempera ture sensor 5 Remove the oil tem...

Page 702: ...round cable from the battery 2 Disconnect the connector from the EGR valve 3 Remove the EGR valve from intake manifold B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Use a new gasket Tigh...

Page 703: ...el pump 7 Remove the connector A and clip B 8 Remove the service hole cover of fuel sub level sensor 1 Remove bolt A 2 Push the grommet B down and remove the service hole cover 9 Disconnect connector...

Page 704: ...e Assembly Rear Disc Brake 19 Lift up the vehicle 20 Remove the rear exhaust pipe Ref to EX H4SO 8 REMOVAL Rear Exhaust Pipe 21 Remove the propeller shaft Ref to DS 10 REMOVAL Propeller Shaft 22 Remov...

Page 705: ...hose B 29 Support the fuel tank with a transmission jack remove the bolts from the fuel tank band and re move the fuel tank from the vehicle WARNING A helper is required to perform this work B INSTAL...

Page 706: ...ctor 6 Install the rear suspension assembly CAUTION A helper is required to perform this work 1 Support the rear differential with the trans mission jack 2 Support the rear suspension assembly and tig...

Page 707: ...shaft Ref to DS 11 IN STALLATION Propeller Shaft 11 Install the rear exhaust pipe Ref to EX H4SO 8 INSTALLATION Rear Exhaust Pipe 12 Lower the vehicle 13 Connect the parking brake cable to the parkin...

Page 708: ...hose Ref to FU H4SO 57 INSTALLA TION Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines 24 Install the service hole cover of fuel sub level sensor 25 Connect connector A and install clip B 26 Connect the connector...

Page 709: ...A SPECIFICATION Throttle body is a non disassembled part so do not remove the throttle position sensor from throttle body Refer to Throttle Body for removal and installation procedure Ref to FU H4SO 1...

Page 710: ...MOVAL 1 Disconnect the ground cable from the battery 2 Disconnect the connectors from the mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor 3 Remove the mass air flow and intake air temper ature sensor...

Page 711: ...r apply the anti seize compound only to the threaded portion of rear oxygen sensor to make the next removal eas ier CAUTION Never apply anti seize compound to the protec tor of rear oxygen sensor Anti...

Page 712: ...FU H4SO 35 Rear Oxygen Sensor FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS 6 Connect the battery ground cable to the battery IN 00203 asieps_tobira book 35...

Page 713: ...isconnect the ground cable from the battery 2 Remove the glove box Ref to EI 51 REMOV AL Glove Box 3 Remove the harness cover A 4 Disconnect the connectors from main relay B INSTALLATION Install in th...

Page 714: ...rator Ref to SC H4SO 21 REMOVAL Generator 6 Remove the spark plug cords from the spark plugs by pulling the plug caps Do not pull the cord 7 Disconnect the engine coolant hoses A from throttle body 8...

Page 715: ...connector on the fuel delivery line by pushing the ST in the direction of the arrow ST 42099AE000 CONNECTOR REMOVER 2 Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo ration hose from the pipe WARNING Be care...

Page 716: ...pipe to intake manifold Tightening torque 34 N m 3 4 kgf m 24 6 ft lb 4 Connect the connectors to camshaft position sensor 5 Connect the connector to the power steering pump switch A 6 Connect the con...

Page 717: ...Intake Duct Ref to IN H4SO 6 INSTALLATION Air Cleaner Case Ref to IN H4SO 7 INSTALLATION Air Intake Cham ber 17 Install the fuse of fuel pump relay to the main fuse box 18 Connect the battery ground...

Page 718: ...e Ref to EC H4SO 6 REMOVAL Purge Control Solenoid Valve 11 Remove the harness band clips which install the engine harness 12 Remove the bolts which hold engine harness to intake manifold 13 Remove the...

Page 719: ...l pipe from intake manifold 21 Remove the intake manifold D ASSEMBLY NOTE When assembling the nipple apply liquid gasket Liquid gasket THREE BOND 1105 Part No 004403010 1 Install the intake manifold N...

Page 720: ...e 19 N m 1 9 kgf m 14 0 ft lb Tightening torque 6 4 N m 0 65 kgf m 4 7 ft lb 7 Install the engine harness onto the intake mani fold 8 Tighten the bolts which install engine harness on intake manifold...

Page 721: ...ightening torque 6 4 N m 0 65 kgf m 4 7 ft lb 16 Install the EGR valve Ref to FU H4SO 26 INSTALLATION EGR Valve 17 Install the throttle body to the intake manifold Ref to FU H4SO 10 INSTALLATION Throt...

Page 722: ...working area Be careful not to spill fuel 1 Set the vehicle on a lift 2 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 3 Open the fuel filler flap lid and remove the fuel filler cap 4 Lift up the vehicle 5...

Page 723: ...m fuel injector 8 Remove the harness band B which holds the engine harness to injector pipe 9 Remove the bolt which holds fuel injector pipe onto intake manifold 10 Remove the fuel injector while lift...

Page 724: ...jector while lifting up the fuel injector pipe B INSTALLATION 1 RH SIDE Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Use new O rings Tightening torque 19 N m 1 9 kgf m 14 0 ft lb Tightening torque 19...

Page 725: ...order of removal NOTE Use new O rings Tightening torque 6 4 N m 0 65 kgf m 4 7 ft lb Tightening torque 19 N m 1 9 kgf m 14 0 ft lb Tightening torque 19 N m 1 9 kgf m 14 0 ft lb A O ring B O ring C Fue...

Page 726: ...erator Ref to SC H4SO 21 REMOVAL Generator 3 Remove the bolt which installs crankshaft posi tion sensor to cylinder block 4 Remove the crankshaft position sensor and then disconnect the connector from...

Page 727: ...40 RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE PROCE DURE Fuel 2 Remove the fuel damper valve from the fuel de livery line WARNING Be careful not to spill fuel Catch the fuel from hoses using a container or cloth B IN...

Page 728: ...connect the evaporation pipes and hoses 6 In the engine compartment disconnect the fuel delivery hoses return hoses and evaporation hos es 1 Disconnect the quick connector on the fuel delivery line an...

Page 729: ...ector on fuel line CAUTION If the retainer remains in the pipe after remov al replace the retainer with a new part Make sure there is no damage or dust on the connections If necessary clean seal surfa...

Page 730: ...es and their connections for any leakage of fuel 3 Connect the evaporation hose to the pipe with an overlap of approx 15 to 20 mm 0 59 to 0 79 in Fuel evaporation hose L 17 5 2 5 mm 0 689 0 098 in CAU...

Page 731: ...ry and Evaporation Lines 7 Remove the nuts which install fuel pump assem bly onto fuel tank 8 Remove the fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NO...

Page 732: ...ply the battery power supply to check whether the pump operates WARNING Wipe off fuel completely Keep the battery as far apart from fuel pump as possible Be sure to turn the battery supply to ON and O...

Page 733: ...support 4 Remove the bolt which installs camshaft position sensor support to camshaft cap LH 5 Remove the camshaft position sensor and the support as a unit 6 Remove the camshaft position sensor from...

Page 734: ...the ground cable from the battery 2 Disconnect the connector from manifold abso lute pressure sensor 3 Remove the manifold absolute pressure sensor from throttle body B INSTALLATION Install in the re...

Page 735: ...A REMOVAL 1 Disconnect the ground cable from the battery 2 Remove the glove box Ref to EI 51 REMOV AL Glove Box 3 Remove the harness cover A 4 Disconnect the connector from electric throttle control r...

Page 736: ...uel level sensor is built in fuel pump assembly 1 Remove the fuel pump assembly Ref to FU H4SO 50 REMOVAL Fuel Pump 2 Disconnect the connector from fuel pump brack et 3 Remove the fuel level sensor an...

Page 737: ...Electric Secondary coil resistance 11 2 k 15 Spark plug Manufacturer and type NGK FR5AP 11 Thread size diameter pitch length mm 14 1 25 19 Spark plug gap mm in 1 0 1 1 0 039 0 043 Electrode Platinum...

Page 738: ...dust and dirt Before removal installation or disassembly be sure to clarify the failure Avoid unnecessary re moval installation disassembly and replacement Vehicle components are extremely hot after d...

Page 739: ...ark plug with a spark plug socket B INSTALLATION 1 RH SIDE Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque 21 N m 2 1 kgf m 15 2 ft lb NOTE The tightening torque described above should be ap...

Page 740: ...weak ignition too rich fuel mixture dirty air cleaner etc 3 Oil fouled Wet black deposits show excessive oil entrance into combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons or excessive clearance betw...

Page 741: ...o not wear away ceramic insulator at this time If deposits are too stubborn replace the spark plugs After cleaning the spark plugs measure the spark plug gap using a gap gauge NOTE Do not use a plug c...

Page 742: ...the reverse order of removal Tightening torque 8 N m 0 82 kgf m 5 9 ft lb CAUTION Connect the spark plug cords to the correct po sitions Failure to do so will damage the unit C INSPECTION Check the fo...

Page 743: ...ss air flow and intake air temperature sensor 4 Loosen clamps A which connect the air cleaner case and the intake duct 5 Remove the clip B securing the upper side of air cleaner case 6 Remove the air...

Page 744: ...he reverse order of removal Tightening torque Bolt A 6 0 N m 0 6 kgf m 4 4 ft lb Nut B 7 5 N m 0 76 kgf m 5 5 ft lb NOTE Fasten with a clip after inserting the lower tab of case C INSPECTION Check for...

Page 745: ...which installs the air intake duct on the front side of body 2 Remove the air intake duct B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal C INSPECTION 1 Check for cracks or loose connections 2...

Page 746: ...INSPECTION Check the following items Damage to cords deformation burning or rust formation of terminals Resistance value of cords Specified resistance 1 cord 7 1 12 1 k 2 cord 12 1 19 9 k 3 cord 7 7 1...

Page 747: ...STARTING CHARGING SYSTEMS SC H4SO Page 1 General Description 2 2 Starter 6 3 Generator 21 4 Battery 27 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 748: ...to Air Clean er Case for the removal procedure Ref to IN H4SO 5 REMOVAL Air Cleaner Case B INSTALLATION The resonator chamber and air cleaner case are in tegrated into one unit therefore refer to Air...

Page 749: ...IN H4SO 10 Resonator Chamber INTAKE INDUCTION asieps_tobira book 10...

Page 750: ...unting 34 11 Preparation for Overhaul 35 12 V belt 36 13 Crank Pulley 38 14 Timing Belt Cover 39 15 Timing Belt 40 16 Cam Sprocket 45 17 Crank Sprocket 46 18 Valve Rocker Assembly 47 19 Camshaft 50 20...

Page 751: ...ir intake chamber to the stay 4 Disconnect the connector D 5 Disconnect the blow by hoses and then remove air intake chamber B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque Cl...

Page 752: ...r side of air cleaner case 4 Pull the air cleaner case rear backward of the vehicle and remove the air cleaner element NOTE Be careful of the power steering hose fixed to the bottom of the air cleaner...

Page 753: ...SO 2 General Description INTAKE INDUCTION 1 General Description A COMPONENT IN 02165 19 18 15 10 11 12 T1 6 6 5 5 16 17 9 21 8 T3 T3 T3 T2 7 4 3 2 1 13 14 13 T2 14 T4 T4 T4 T6 9 T5 20 asieps_tobira bo...

Page 754: ...urns from heated parts Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points Before disconnecting connectors of sensors...

Page 755: ...haft position sensor Ref to FU H4SO 20 REMOVAL Crankshaft Po sition Sensor 9 Remove the crank pulley using ST ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH 10 Remove the water pump Ref to CO H4SO 14 REMOVAL Water...

Page 756: ...ring A with a new part 3 Apply a coat of engine oil to the inside of oil seal 4 Position the oil pump aligning the notched area with crankshaft and push the oil pump straight CAUTION Make sure the oi...

Page 757: ...ve D ASSEMBLY 1 Assemble the front oil seal by using ST ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER NOTE Use a new oil seal 2 Apply a coat of engine oil to inner and outer ro tors 3 Assemble the inner and outer r...

Page 758: ...otors as a matched set Tip clearance Standard 0 04 0 14 mm 0 0016 0 0055 in 2 CASE CLEARANCE Measure the clearance between outer rotor and oil pump case If the clearance exceeds the limit re place the...

Page 759: ...condition and dam age and the relief valve spring for damage and de terioration Replace the parts if defective Relief valve spring Free length 73 7 mm 2 902 in Installed length 54 7 mm 2 154 in Load w...

Page 760: ...ce and wire ropes 9 Lift up the vehicle CAUTION When lifting up the vehicle raise up wire ropes at the same time 10 Remove the under cover 11 Drain the engine oil Ref to LU H4SO 8 RE PLACEMENT Engine...

Page 761: ...all the oil strainer onto baffle plate NOTE Replace the O ring with a new part Tightening torque 10 N m 1 0 kgf m 7 2 ft lb 4 Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces and install the oil pan Liquid...

Page 762: ...ttach the pitching stopper Tightening torque T1 50 N m 5 1 kgf m 36 9 ft lb T2 58 N m 5 9 kgf m 42 8 ft lb 13 Install the hood stay holder A and radiator up per brackets B 14 Install the air intake ch...

Page 763: ...mm 2 56 in in diameter approx 2 3 3 4 rotation after the seal rubber of the oil filter comes in contact with cylinder block or oil cooler When using a torque wrench tighten to 12 N m 1 2 kgf m 8 7 ft...

Page 764: ...EMENT 1 Open the engine oil filler cap for quick draining of engine oil 2 Lift up the vehicle 3 Drain engine oil by loosening the engine oil drain plug NOTE Prepare the container for draining of engin...

Page 765: ...engine stops recheck the oil level If necessary add engine oil up to the upper level on level gauge A Oil level gauge B Engine oil filler cap C Upper level D Lower level E Approx 1 0 2 1 1 US qt 0 9 I...

Page 766: ...9 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 16 23 30 19 20 22 26 27 28 29 8 17 24 31 18 25 B38 F74 B36 3 4 1 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 5 6 7 i12 1 2 9 8 7 10 3 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 A i1...

Page 767: ...rom oil pressure switch 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Measure the voltage of harness between oil pressure switch connector and chassis ground Connector terminal E11 No 1 Chassis ground Is the vol...

Page 768: ...9 in Limit 0 20 mm 0 0079 in Performance Oil temperature 80 C 176 F 600 rpm Discharge pressure 98 kPa 1 0 kgf cm2 14 psi Discharge rate 4 6 2 4 9 US qt 4 0 Imp qt min 5 000 rpm Discharge pressure 294...

Page 769: ...case 19 Oil filler cap T1 5 0 5 3 6 7 Inner rotor 20 Seal T2 6 4 0 65 4 7 8 Outer rotor 21 Baffle plate T3 10 1 0 7 2 9 Oil pump cover 22 O ring T4 25 2 5 18 4 10 Oil filter 23 Oil strainer T5 44 4 5...

Page 770: ...from dust and dirt Before removal installation or disassembly be sure to clarify the failure Avoid unnecessary re moval installation disassembly and replacement Be careful not to burn your hands beca...

Page 771: ...ing and tightening the crank pulley bolt 18332AA000 OIL FILTER WRENCH Used for removing and installing oil filter Outer diameter 68 mm 2 68 in 18332AA010 OIL FILTER WRENCH Used for removing and instal...

Page 772: ...bolt B 3 Remove the rear side belt 4 Remove the belt tensioner B INSTALLATION NOTE Wipe off any oil and water on the belt and pulley 1 FRONT SIDE BELT 1 Install the V belt and tighten the slider bolt...

Page 773: ...kgf 139 170 lb At inspection 490 640 N 50 0 65 3 kgf 110 2 143 9 lb B When installing new parts 740 880 N 75 5 89 7 kgf 166 198 lb At inspection 350 450 N 35 7 45 9 kgf 78 7 101 2 lb Belt tension wit...

Page 774: ...rank sprocket 2 Install the timing belt Ref to ME H4SO 41 INSTALLATION Timing Belt 3 Install the timing belt cover Ref to ME H4SO 39 INSTALLATION Timing Belt Cover 4 Install the crank pulley Ref to ME...

Page 775: ...he clamp pul ley bolt is a minimum of 65 Perform the following procedures when less than 65 1 Replace the crank pulley bolts and clean them Crank pulley bolt 12369AA011 2 Clean the crankshaft thread u...

Page 776: ...ect the fuel delivery hose from fuel damper and connect fuel pressure gauge 3 Install the fuse of fuel pump to main fuse box 4 Start the engine 5 Measure the fuel pressure after warming up the engine...

Page 777: ...ICAL 25 Connecting Rod A SPECIFICATION Refer to Cylinder Block for removal and installa tion procedures of connecting rods Ref to ME H4SO 61 REMOVAL Cylinder Block Ref to ME H4SO 66 INSTALLATION Cylin...

Page 778: ...sion pressure at 350 rpm kPa kg cm2 psi 1 020 1 275 10 4 13 0 148 185 Number of piston rings Pressure ring 2 Oil ring 1 Intake valve timing Constant Open BTDC 0 Close ABDC 58 Low speed Open BTDC 0 Clo...

Page 779: ...Valve seat Seating angle 90 Contacting width mm in Intake Standard 0 8 1 4 0 03 0 055 Exhaust Standard 1 2 1 8 0 047 0 071 Valve guide Inside diameter mm in 6 000 6 012 0 2362 0 2367 Protrusion above...

Page 780: ...1 520 1 523 0 0598 0 0600 0 25 0 0098 US 1 620 1 623 0 0638 0 0639 Bushing of small end Clearance between piston pin and bushing mm in Standard 0 0 022 0 0 0009 Crankshaft Bend limit mm in 0 035 0 00...

Page 781: ...t idler No 2 T2 9 75 1 0 7 2 4 Timing belt cover No 2 LH 11 Cam sprocket No 2 T3 24 5 2 5 18 1 5 Cam sprocket No 1 12 Timing belt T4 39 4 0 28 9 6 Belt idler No 1 13 Front timing belt cover T5 78 8 0...

Page 782: ...ve holder RH T2 Ref to ME H4SO 48 INSTAL LATION Valve Rocker Assem bly 8 Spark plug pipe gasket 9 Cylinder head RH 24 Gasket 10 Cylinder head gasket 25 Oil temperature sensor T3 9 75 1 0 7 2 11 Cylind...

Page 783: ...take valve rocker arm ASSY 4 Exhaust rocker shaft Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Valve rocker nut 5 Exhaust valve rocker arm T1 8 0 8 5 9 3 Valve rocker adjusting screw T2 9 75 1 0 7 2 T3 25 2 5...

Page 784: ...INDER HEAD AND VALVE ASSEMBLY 1 Exhaust valve 4 Valve spring seat 7 Retainer 2 Intake valve 5 Intake valve oil seal 8 Retainer key 3 Valve guide 6 Valve spring 9 Exhaust valve oil seal ME 02743 2 2 6...

Page 785: ...5 Ref to ME H4SO 66 INSTAL LATION Cylinder Block 7 Oil pump 21 Water pump sealing 8 Front oil seal 22 Oil filter T6 70 7 1 50 6 9 Rear oil seal 23 Gasket T7 First 12 1 2 8 7 Second 12 1 2 8 7 10 O rin...

Page 786: ...aring 2 4 3 Drive plate AT model 10 Connecting rod 17 Crankshaft bearing 5 4 Top ring 11 Connecting rod bearing 5 Second ring 12 Connecting rod cap Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 6 Oil ring 13 Cran...

Page 787: ...arings Rotating parts and sliding parts such as piston bearing and gear should be coated with oil prior to assembly Be careful not to let oil grease or coolant contact the timing belt clutch disc and...

Page 788: ...g cam sprocket CAMSHAFT SPROCKET WRENCH 499207100 can also be used 18482AA010 CARTRIDGE Troubleshooting for electrical system 22771AA030 Subaru Select Moni tor KIT Troubleshooting for electrical syste...

Page 789: ...9817100 498457100 ENGINE STAND ADAPTER LH Used with ENGINE STAND 499817100 498497100 CRANKSHAFT STOPPER Used for stopping rotation of the flywheel when loosening tightening crank pulley bolt 498747300...

Page 790: ...D BUSHING REMOVER INSTALLER Used for removing and installing connecting rod bushing 499587200 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL INSTALLER Used for installing crankshaft oil seal Used with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL GUIDE...

Page 791: ...499497000 TORX PLUS Used for removing and installing camshaft cap 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER Used for installing oil pump oil seal 499597000 OIL SEAL GUIDE Used for installing the camshaft oil seal...

Page 792: ...RING REMOVER Used for removing and installing valve spring 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER Used for removing valve guides 499767400 VALVE GUIDE REAMER Used for reaming valve guides 499767700 VALVE GUIDE...

Page 793: ...977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH Used for stopping rotation of crank pulley when loosening tightening crank pulley bolt 18482AA010 OIL FILTER WRENCH Used for removing and installing oil filter Outer diamete...

Page 794: ...intake 2 sets 18258AA000 SPRING INSTALLER Used for installing the valve rocker assembly intake TOOL NAME REMARKS Compression gauge Used for measuring compression Vacuum gauge Used for vacuum measurem...

Page 795: ...o conduct the following service proce dures with engine on vehicle however the proce dures described in this section are based on the condition that the engine is removed from vehicle V belt Timing be...

Page 796: ...rock er cover 7 Remove the valve rocker assembly 1 Use the ST to rotate the spring stopper in the direction of the arrow to remove it from ad juster pin ST 18258AA000 SPRING INSTALLER 2 Remove the bo...

Page 797: ...fied torque Tightening torque 8 N m 0 8 kgf m 5 9 ft lb 4 Use the ST to rotate the spring stopper in the direction of the arrow to fasten the adjuster pin ST 18258AA000 SPRING INSTALLER 2 Adjust the v...

Page 798: ...entifica tion marks Make sure the parts with same mark ings are properly assembled E INSPECTION 1 INTAKE VALVE ROCKER ASSEMBLY 1 If the roller or valve contact surface of valve rocker arm is worn or d...

Page 799: ...CHANICAL 24 Piston A SPECIFICATION Refer to Cylinder Block for removal and installa tion procedures of pistons Ref to ME H4SO 61 REMOVAL Cylinder Block Ref to ME H4SO 66 INSTALLATION Cylinder Block as...

Page 800: ...chamber Ref to IN H4SO 8 REMOVAL Air Intake Duct Ref to IN H4SO 5 REMOVAL Air Cleaner Case Ref to IN H4SO 7 REMOVAL Air In take Chamber 8 Remove the under cover 9 Remove the radiator from the vehicle...

Page 801: ...wheel apron 15 Remove the front and center exhaust pipes Ref to EX H4SO 4 REMOVAL Front Exhaust Pipe 16 Disconnect the ground cable 17 Remove the bolts and nuts which hold lower side of transmission...

Page 802: ...ransmission with a garage jack CAUTION Doing this is very important because the trans mission lowers for its own weight This work is also of great importance for facilitating reinstal lation CAUTION B...

Page 803: ...ten the bolts which hold upper side of trans mission to engine Tightening torque 50 N m 5 1 kgf m 36 9 ft lb 5 Remove the lifting device and wire ropes 6 Remove the garage jack 7 Attach the pitching s...

Page 804: ...Lower the vehicle 18 Connect the following hoses 1 Fuel delivery hose and evaporation hose 2 Heater inlet and outlet hoses 3 Brake booster vacuum hose 19 Connect the following connectors 1 Front oxyg...

Page 805: ...he A C system with refrigerant Ref to AC 20 PROCEDURE Refrigerant Charging Procedure 30 Remove the front hood stay and close the front hood 31 Lower the vehicle from the lift C INSPECTION 1 Check that...

Page 806: ...e re moving as shown in procedures below 1 Use the ST to turn crankshaft Align the mark a of sprocket to the cylinder block notch b and then ensure the right side cam sprocket mark c cam cap and cylin...

Page 807: ...utes Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9 807 N 1 000 kgf 2 205 lb Press the adjuster rod as far as the end sur face of the cylinder Do not press the adjuster rod into cylinder Doing so may damage...

Page 808: ...ST and position the alignment marks A on each at the highest positions ST1 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH NOTE CAM SPROCKET WRENCH 499207100 can also be used 2 While aligning the alignment mark B on t...

Page 809: ...ul not to let oil grease or coolant contact the belt Remove quickly and thorough ly if this happens Do not bend the timing belt sharply In radial diameter h 60 mm 2 36 in or more 2 AUTOMATIC BELT TENS...

Page 810: ...r 4 Measure the amount of rod protrusion beyond the body If it is not within specified range replace with new part Amount of rod protrusion H 5 7 0 5 mm 0 224 0 020 in 3 BELT TENSION PULLEY 1 Check th...

Page 811: ...vacuum Vacuum gauge indication Possible engine condition 1 Needle is steady but lower than normal position This ten dency becomes more evident as engine temperature rises Air leakage around intake ma...

Page 812: ...right side cylinder head B INSTALLATION 1 Install the cylinder head to the cylinder block CAUTION Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of cylinder head and cylinder block NOTE Use a new cylind...

Page 813: ...ALLATION Timing Belt 8 Install the timing belt cover Ref to ME H4SO 39 INSTALLATION Timing Belt Cover 9 Install the crank pulley Ref to ME H4SO 38 INSTALLATION Crank Pulley 10 Install the V belts Ref...

Page 814: ...when inserting the valve into valve guide 3 Install the valve spring and retainer NOTE Be sure to install the valve spring with its close coiled end facing the seat on cylinder head 4 Set the ST on v...

Page 815: ...ase using a straight edge and thickness gauge If the warping exceeds the limit regrind the surface with a surface grinder Warping limit 0 03 mm 0 0012 in Grinding limit 0 1 mm 0 004 in Standard height...

Page 816: ...ameter 6 000 6 012 mm 0 2362 0 2367 in Valve stem outer diameters Intake 5 950 5 965 mm 0 2343 0 2348 in Exhaust 5 945 5 960 mm 0 2341 0 2346 in 1 Place the cylinder head on ST1 with the combustion ch...

Page 817: ...er back while rotating it clock wise After reaming clean the valve guide to re move chips CAUTION Apply engine oil to the reamer when reaming If the inner surface of the valve guide is torn the edge o...

Page 818: ...and remove the oil seal from valve using pliers then replace it with a new part When the lip is damaged When the spring is out of the specified position When readjusting the surfaces of intake valve a...

Page 819: ...r motor for satisfactory perfor mance and operation 7 Hold the compression gauge tightly against the spark plug hole NOTE When using a screw in type compression gauge the screw put into cylinder head...

Page 820: ...Install the front timing belt cover Tightening torque 5 N m 0 5 kgf m 3 6 ft lb 2 Install the timing belt cover LH Tightening torque 5 N m 0 5 kgf m 3 6 ft lb 3 Install the crank pulley Ref to ME H4S...

Page 821: ...NCH 499207100 can also be used Tightening torque 78 N m 8 0 kgf m 57 9 ft lb NOTE Do not confuse left and right side cam sprockets during installation Cam sprocket No 2 is identified by the protrusion...

Page 822: ...NICAL 26 Crankshaft A SPECIFICATION Refer to Cylinder Block for removal and installa tion procedures of the crankshaft Ref to ME H4SO 61 REMOVAL Cylinder Block Ref to ME H4SO 66 INSTALLATION Cylinder...

Page 823: ...nk when engine speed is 1 000 to 2 000 rpm Sound is reduced when fuel injector connector of noisy cyl inder is disconnected NOTE Worn camshaft main bearing Worn bearing at crankshaft end of connecting...

Page 824: ...EXHAUST EX H4SO Page 1 General Description 2 2 Front Exhaust Pipe 4 3 Center Exhaust Pipe 7 4 Rear Exhaust Pipe 8 5 Muffler 10 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 825: ...Lack of or insufficient fuel B Belt Trouble B Defective timing B Compression Incorrect valve clearance C Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective gasket C Im...

Page 826: ...ontrol system Ref to EN H4SO diag 2 Basic Diagnostic Procedure A Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A Loosened or cracked PCV hose A Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A Defective intake manif...

Page 827: ...ion system Incorrect oil pressure B Cooling system Overheating C Over cooling C Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction A 4 Surging Engine control system Ref to EN H4SO diag 2 Basic Dia...

Page 828: ...sealing B Defective valve stem C Worn or broken valve spring C Worn or stuck piston rings cylinder and piston C Incorrect valve timing A Lubrication system Incorrect oil pressure C Cooling system Over...

Page 829: ...ression Incorrect valve clearance B Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective gasket C Improper valve sealing B Defective valve stem C Worn or broken valve spr...

Page 830: ...rk plugs LH side Ref to IG H4SO 4 LH SIDE REMOVAL Spark Plug 2 Disconnect the PCV hose from rocker cover LH 3 Remove the bolts then remove the rocker cover LH 10 Set 1 cylinder piston to top dead cent...

Page 831: ...valve clearance 1 Loosen the valve rocker nut and screw 2 Set a suitable thickness gauge 3 While noting the valve clearance tighten the valve rocker adjusting screw 4 When the specified valve clearanc...

Page 832: ...LH SIDE 1 Disconnect the ground cable from the battery 2 Remove the V belts Ref to ME H4SO 36 REMOVAL V belt 3 Remove the crank pulley Ref to ME H4SO 38 REMOVAL Crank Pul ley 4 Remove the timing belt...

Page 833: ...t Tightening torque T1 6 4 N m 0 65 kgf m 4 7 ft lb T2 10 N m 1 0 kgf m 7 4 ft lb T3 17 N m 1 7 kgf m 12 5 ft lb Liquid gasket THREE BOND 1141 Part No 004403006 A Oil switching solenoid valve B Variab...

Page 834: ...L 23 Intake and Exhaust Valve A SPECIFICATION Refer to Cylinder Head for removal and installa tion procedures of intake and exhaust valves Ref to ME H4SO 54 REMOVAL Cylinder Head Ref to ME H4SO 54 INS...

Page 835: ...e rocker cover 10 Remove the cylinder head bolts in alphabetical sequence shown in the figure NOTE Leave bolts a and d engaged by three or four threads to prevent the cylinder head from falling 11 Whi...

Page 836: ...ot to scratch the mating surface of cylinder block and oil pump 22 Remove the oil pan 1 Place the cylinder block to face the 2 and 4 piston side upward 2 Remove the bolts which secure oil pan to cylin...

Page 837: ...pipe 28 Remove the service hole cover and service hole plugs using a hexagon wrench 14 mm ME 00300 1 Service hole plug 3 Snap ring 5 Service hole cover 2 Gasket 4 Piston pin 6 O ring ME 02407 3 4 2 1...

Page 838: ...areful not to confuse the original combination of piston piston pin and cylinder 31 Similarly remove the piston pins from 3 and 4 pistons 32 Remove the bolts which connect cylinder block on the side o...

Page 839: ...Remove the crankshaft bearings from cylinder block using a hammer handle NOTE Be careful not to confuse the crankshaft bearing combination Press the bearing at the end opposite to locking lip 39 Draw...

Page 840: ...Apply liquid gasket to the mating surface of 1 and 3 cylinder block and position 2 and 4 cylin der block Liquid gasket Three bond 1215 Part No 004403007 or equivalent NOTE Do not allow liquid gasket t...

Page 841: ...al phabetical sequence Tightening torque 18 N m 1 8 kgf m 13 ft lb 7 Further tighten the RH side bolts E J in al phabetical sequence Tightening torque 18 N m 1 8 kgf m 13 ft lb 8 Further tighten the...

Page 842: ...r B in the fig ure NOTE Assemble so that the piston ring mark R faces the upper side of the piston 13 Position the second ring gap at 180 on the re verse side the top ring gap NOTE Assemble so that th...

Page 843: ...holes located op posite to the service holes in cylinder block when positioning all pistons in corresponding cylinders NOTE Use new snap rings CAUTION Piston front mark faces towards the front of en...

Page 844: ...T2 498747300 PISTON GUIDE 20 Install the piston pin 1 Apply a coat of engine oil to ST3 2 Insert ST3 into the service hole to align pis ton pin hole with connecting rod small end ST3 499017100 PISTON...

Page 845: ...d 4 cylinder side upward Following the same procedures as used for 1 and 2 cylinders in stall the pistons and piston pins ME 00140 1 Piston 5 Service hole plug Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Pist...

Page 846: ...Part No 004403012 or equivalent 26 Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces and the threaded portion of bolt A shown in the figure and then install the oil separator cover Liquid gasket Mating surfa...

Page 847: ...pump Liquid gasket Three bond 1215 Part No 004403007 or equivalent 3 Apply a coat of engine oil to the inside of oil seal 4 Install the oil pump to cylinder block Be careful not to damage the oil seal...

Page 848: ...tighten the bolts LH side only 36 Install the rocker cover and rocker cover gas ket NOTE Use a new rocker cover gasket 37 Install the crank sprocket Ref to ME H4SO 46 INSTALLATION Crank Sprocket 38 In...

Page 849: ...rod cap and bearing in order to prevent confusion 3 Remove the piston rings using piston ring ex pander 4 Remove the oil ring by hand NOTE Arrange the removed piston rings in proper order to prevent c...

Page 850: ...s 5 Install the expander lower rail and upper rail in this order by hand Install the second ring and top ring along with the piston ring expander E INSPECTION 1 CYLINDER BLOCK 1 Visually check for cra...

Page 851: ...piston pin directions at the heights as shown in the figure using a cylinder bore gauge NOTE Measurement should be performed at a tempera ture of 20 C 68 F Taper Standard 0 015 mm 0 0006 in Out of rou...

Page 852: ...ll other cylinders must be bored at the same time and use oversize pistons Do not perform bor ing on one cylinder only Nor use an oversize piston for one cylinder only 2 If the cylinder inner diameter...

Page 853: ...ring consists of the upper rail expander and lower rail Be careful about the direction of rail when installing the oil ring to piston 2 Clean the piston ring groove and piston ring 3 Squarely place th...

Page 854: ...lastigauge If any oil clearance is not within the standard replace the defective bearing with a new part of standard size or under size as necessary See the table below Connecting rod oil clearance St...

Page 855: ...block is not available install 1 and 5 crankshaft bearing on cylinder block position the crankshaft on these bearings and then mea sure the crankshaft bend using a dial gauge Crankshaft bend limit 0 0...

Page 856: ...008 2 3619 2 3625 59 992 60 008 2 3619 2 3625 51 984 52 000 2 0466 2 0472 Bearing size Thickness at center 1 998 2 011 0 0787 0 0792 2 000 2 013 0 0787 0 0793 1 492 1 501 0 0587 0 0591 0 03 0 0012 Und...

Page 857: ...Remove the camshaft position sensor support LH side only 10 Remove the oil level gauge guide LH side only 11 Remove the valve rocker assembly Ref to ME H4SO 47 REMOVAL Valve Rocker Assem bly 12 Remove...

Page 858: ...tighten the bolts a through d in alphabetical sequence 3 Install the valve rocker assembly Ref to ME H4SO 48 INSTALLATION Valve Rocker Assembly 4 Tighten the TORX bolts e through j in al phabetical s...

Page 859: ...gasket and then connect PCV hose NOTE Use a new rocker cover gasket Tighten the bolts in two stages in alphabetical se quence as shown in figure Tightening torque 1st 6 4 N m 0 65 kgf m 4 7 ft lb 2nd...

Page 860: ...the camshaft or cylinder head as nec essary 4 Check the cam face condition and remove the minor faults by grinding with oil stone Measure the cam height H If it exceeds the standard replace it Cam hei...

Page 861: ...to ME H4SO 28 REMOVAL Engine Assembly 2 Remove the engine mounting from engine as sembly B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque Engine mounting 35 N m 3 6 kgf m 25 8...

Page 862: ...pressure is out of standard values check the oil pump oil filter and lubrication line Ref to LU H4SO 20 INSPECTION En gine Lubrication System Trouble in General If the oil pressure warning light is t...

Page 863: ...NGINE STAND 2 In this section the procedures described under each index are all connected and stated in order The procedure for overhauling of the engine will be completed when you go through all step...

Page 864: ...em Diagnosis 10 Select Data Display in Data Display Menu 11 Start the engine and read the engine idle speed NOTE The ignition system ignites 1 and 2 plugs simul taneously The value of the actual engin...

Page 865: ...F 4 Insert the cartridge to the Subaru Select Monitor 5 Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to the data link connector 6 Turn the ignition switch to ON and Subaru Select Monitor to ON 7 Select Each Syst...

Page 866: ...filter Clean or replace Malfunction of oil relief valve in oil pump Clean or replace Clogged oil passage Clean Excessive tip clearance and side clearance of oil pump rotor and gear Replace Clogged oil...

Page 867: ...SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS SP H4SO Page 1 General Description 2 2 Accelerator Pedal 3 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 868: ...il pressure switch threads Liquid gasket Three bond 1324 Part No 004403042 or equivalent 2 Install the oil pressure switch onto engine block Tightening torque 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 18 4 ft lb 3 Connect the...

Page 869: ...to clarify the failure Avoid unnecessary re moval installation disassembly and replacement Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv ing Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts Be sure to...

Page 870: ...nd cable from battery 2 Disconnect the connector 3 Remove the nut securing accelerator pedal as sembly B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque 18 N m 1 8 kgf m 13 0 ft...

Page 871: ...SP H4SO 4 Accelerator Pedal SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS asieps_tobira book 4...

Page 872: ...IGNITION IG H4SO Page 1 General Description 2 2 Spark Plug 4 3 Ignition Coil and Ignitor Assembly 7 4 Spark Plug Cord 8 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 873: ...urrent 900 A or less 900 A or less Torque 13 62 N m 1 39 kgf m 10 0 ft lb or more 15 42 N m 1 57 kgf m 11 3 ft lb or more Generator Type Rotating field three phase type voltage regulator built in type...

Page 874: ...pring 5 Stopper 16 Planetary gear 27 Magnet switch 6 Overrunning clutch 17 Armature plate 7 Snap ring 18 Yoke Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 8 Washer 19 Armature T1 1 4 0 14 1 03 9 Lever 20 Brush h...

Page 875: ...g 13 Terminal 2 Pulley 8 Starter coil 3 Front cover 9 IC regulator with brush Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 4 Ball bearing 10 Brush T1 4 7 0 48 3 5 5 Bearing retainer 11 Rectifier T2 108 11 0 80 6...

Page 876: ...hem from dust and dirt Before removal installation or disassembly be sure to clarify the failure Avoid unnecessary re moval installation disassembly and replacement Vehicle components are extremely ho...

Page 877: ...BELT RE MOVAL V belt or Ref to ME H4DOTC 36 FRONT SIDE BELT REMOVAL V belt Ref to ME H6DO 32 REMOVAL V belt 5 Remove the bolts which install the generator onto bracket B INSTALLATION Install in the r...

Page 878: ...olding the rotor with a vise place alumi num plates or wooden pieces on the vise jaws to protect the rotor from damage 5 Use the following procedures to remove the ball bearings 1 Remove the bolt and...

Page 879: ...ng iron to contact the terminals for more than 5 seconds at a time 8 Use the following procedures to remove the IC regulator 1 Remove the screws which secure the IC regulator to the rear cover 2 Disco...

Page 880: ...ter re assembling remove the wire 2 Install the ball bearings 1 Set the ball bearings in the front cover then securely install an appropriate tool such as a socket wrench of proper size to the bearing...

Page 881: ...nation or any roughness on the sliding surface Repair the slip ring surface using a lathe or sand paper 2 Slip ring outer diameter Measure the slip ring outer diameter Replace the rotor assembly if th...

Page 882: ...a ser vice limit mark A on each brush Brush length Service limit 1 5 0 mm 0 197 in Standard 2 18 5 mm 0 728 in 2 Check that there is appropriate pressure on the brush spring Using a spring pressure i...

Page 883: ...or and terminal from starter 6 Remove the starter from transmission B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque 50 N m 5 1 kgf m 37 ft lb C DISASSEMBLY 1 STARTER ASSEMBLY...

Page 884: ...emove the end frame cover 6 Remove the snap ring 7 Remove the space ring 8 Remove the armature from end frame 9 Remove the screws 10 Remove the brush holder assembly from end frame A Yoke B Armature C...

Page 885: ...Use the following procedures to remove the overrunning clutch from the shaft assembly 1 Remove the stopper from snap ring by light ly tapping the stopper with an appropriate tool such as a fit socket...

Page 886: ...ing a press remove the front bearing 19 Remove the oilless bearing from shock absorb er bearing 1 Set an appropriate tool 20 mm to oilless bearing 2 Using a press remove the oilless bearing 20 Remove...

Page 887: ...it contact to the base bottom 3 Press fit the front bearing into front bracket 1 Set the front bearing into front bracket 2 Set an appropriate tool 2 0 mm thickness plate to front bracket and press fi...

Page 888: ...follows 1 Insert the snap ring into the shaft groove by lightly tapping it with an appropriate tool such as a fit socket wrench NOTE Use new snap rings 2 Press fit the stopper to snap ring using a pre...

Page 889: ...Install the rubber seal 11 Install the planetary gear 1 Apply a grease to the pin A and bushing B 2 Assemble the planetary gear to pin 3 Apply grease to the planetary gear clear ance A and pin upper p...

Page 890: ...end frame NOTE Apply grease to the rear bearing inner circumfer ence Be careful not to allow grease to attach to com mutator Grease DENSO HL50 14 Set the space ring then assemble the snap ring NOTE U...

Page 891: ...of cutout portion of yoke with the rubber part of end frame Be careful not to damage the magnet 18 Assemble the yoke to front bracket NOTE Apply grease to the end surface of yoke mating surface with f...

Page 892: ...and magnet switch to front bracket NOTE Apply grease to the end surface of magnet switch as shown in the figure Grease DENSO HL50 3 Tighten the bolt Tightening torque 7 5 N m 0 8 kgf m 5 5 ft lb 22 C...

Page 893: ...ure discontinuity test Using a circuit tester touch one probe to the arma ture and the other to commutator If there is no con tinuity it is normal If there is continuity the armature is grounded If gr...

Page 894: ...switch continuity test Be sure there is continuity between the terminals S and M and between terminal S and ground Use a circuit tester Also check to be sure there is no continuity be tween terminal...

Page 895: ...andard 0 03 0 061 mm 0 001 0 0024 in Service limit 0 1 mm 0 003 in 7 REAR BEARING Check the rear bearing and replace the rear bear ing if there are damage lock or rust 8 PLANETARY GEAR BUSHING CLEAR A...

Page 896: ...ontact point Make sure the pinion gear returns to its original position when the terminal S is disconnected 10 PERFORMANCE TEST The starter should be submitted to performance tests whenever it has bee...

Page 897: ...rter The condition is satisfactory if the current draw and ro tating speed are within specifications Load test Standard Voltage Load MT model 8 V 7 76 N m 0 79 kgf m 5 7 ft lb AT model 8 V 12 78 N m 1...

Page 898: ...tion Batteries produce explosive gases Keep sparks flame cigarettes away Ventilate when charging or using in enclosed space For safety in case an explosion does occur wear eye protection or shield you...

Page 899: ...specific range from 1 250 to 1 290 for more than one hour 2 Voltage per battery cell should be held at a spe cific value in a range from 2 5 to 2 8 V for more than one hour 2 CHECK CONDITION OF CHARGE...

Page 900: ...ector 22 8 General Scan Tool 23 9 Subaru Select Monitor 26 10 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 33 11 Inspection Mode 34 12 Drive Cycle 39 13 Clear Memory Mode 43 14 Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mo...

Page 901: ...CO H4SO U5 2 General Description COOLING 1 General Description A SPECIFICATION Specifications for SOHC U5 model are the same as the SOHC model Ref to CO H4SO 2 General Description asieps_tobira book 2...

Page 902: ...LUBRICATION LU H4SO U5 Page 1 General Description 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 903: ...on EMISSION CONTROL AUX EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES 1 General Description A SPECIFICATION Removal and installation procedures for SOHC U5 model are the same as the SOHC model Ref to EC H4SO 2 General Des...

Page 904: ...INTAKE INDUCTION IN H4SO U5 Page 1 General Description 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 905: ...2 General Description EXHAUST 1 General Description A SPECIFICATION Removal and installation procedures for SOHC U5 model are the same as the SOHC model Ref to EX H4SO 2 General Description asieps_tob...

Page 906: ...COOLING CO H4SO U5 Page 1 General Description 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 907: ...Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor Refer to Read Diagnostic Trouble Code for detailed operation procedure Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 35 Read Diagnostic Trou ble Code DTC For d...

Page 908: ...Others Ambient air temperature C F Hot Warm Cool Cold Place Highway Suburbs Inner city Uphill Downhill Rough road Others Engine temperature Cold Warming up After warming up Any temperature Others Eng...

Page 909: ...ning out of fuel Yes No c Intentional connecting or disconnecting of harness connectors or spark plug cords Yes No What d Intentional connecting or disconnecting of hoses Yes No What e Installing of o...

Page 910: ...trical control modules using a tapered pin with a diameter of less than 0 64 mm 0 025 in Do not insert the pin more than 5 mm 0 20 in into the part 6 Before removing the ECM from the located posi tion...

Page 911: ...e distinguished clearly when performing diagnostics 15 Diagnostics should be conducted with simple easy operations first and then with complicated difficult operations The most important thing in di a...

Page 912: ...function indi cator light is turned off but DTC remains at on board computer When troubleshooting the vehicle which com plies with OBD II regulations connect the Subaru Select Monitor or general scan...

Page 913: ...STICS D PREPARATION TOOL ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 18482AA010 CARTRIDGE Troubleshooting for electrical system 22771AA030 SUBARU SELECT MONITOR KIT Troubleshooting for electrical sys...

Page 914: ...S 4 Electrical Component Location A LOCATION 1 ENGINE Control module 1 Engine control module ECM 3 Test mode connector 4 Data link connector 2 Malfunction indicator light EN 03145 1 2 4 3 1 EN 01147 E...

Page 915: ...or 1 Mass air flow and intake air tem perature sensor 3 Engine coolant temperature sen sor 5 Knock sensor 6 Camshaft position sensor 2 Manifold absolute pressure sensor 4 Electronic throttle control 7...

Page 916: ...EN H4SO U5 diag 11 Electrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS EN 02977 1 EN 01971 2 3 EN 02179 EN 01972 4 5 EN 00010 6 EN 00011 7 EN 00012 asieps_tobira book 11...

Page 917: ...STICS 1 Front oxygen A F sensor 3 Front catalytic converter 4 Rear catalytic converter 2 Rear oxygen sensor 1 Fuel level sensor 3 Fuel tank pressure sensor 4 Fuel sub level sensor 2 Fuel temperature s...

Page 918: ...EN H4SO U5 diag 13 Electrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS EN 03147 2 1 EN 03003 3 EN 03132 4 asieps_tobira book 13...

Page 919: ...Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS Solenoid valve actuator emission control system parts and ignition system parts 1 Purge control solenoid valve 3 Ignition coil and ignitor ASSY 4 Fuel injector 2 EGR valve...

Page 920: ...EN H4SO U5 diag 15 Electrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS EN 01975 1 EN 01976 2 EN 03105 3 EN 03106 4 asieps_tobira book 15...

Page 921: ...H4SO U5 diag 16 Electrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS 1 Pressure control solenoid valve 3 Drain valve 4 Drain filter 2 Canister EN 04017 1 2 3 4 EN 02980 1 EN 02981 4 3 2 asieps_tobira book...

Page 922: ...tch 4 Fuel pump relay 7 Radiator sub fan relay 2 Fuel pump 5 Electronic throttle control relay 8 Radiator main fan relay 2 3 Main relay 6 Radiator main fan relay 1 9 Starter EN 03149 3 2 7 8 6 9 1 4 5...

Page 923: ...y open 4 17 Power supply B134 19 5 5 GND sensor B134 29 0 0 Electronic throttle control motor B137 5 Duty waveform Duty waveform Drive frequency 500 Hz Electronic throttle control motor B137 4 Duty wa...

Page 924: ...ON 0 5 or less OFF 10 13 ON 0 5 or less OFF 12 14 A C switch B136 24 ON 10 13 OFF 0 ON 12 14 OFF 0 Ignition switch B135 19 10 13 12 14 Neutral posi tion switch AT B136 31 ON 0 OFF 12 0 5 For AT model...

Page 925: ...oil pressure switch B134 33 ON 1 or less OFF 10 13 ON 1 or less OFF 12 14 Blower fan switch B135 16 ON 0 OFF 10 13 ON 0 OFF 12 14 A C middle pressure switch B136 33 ON 0 OFF 10 13 ON 0 OFF 12 14 Oil...

Page 926: ...released 0 When brake pedal is depressed 12 14 When brake pedal is released 0 Cruise control main switch B135 12 ON 0 OFF 5 ON 0 OFF 5 Cruise control command switch B135 24 When operating nothing 3 5...

Page 927: ...ition Data A ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION Measuring condition After engine is warmed up Gear position is in N or P range Turn the A C to OFF Turn all the accessory switches to OFF Remarks Specification En...

Page 928: ...Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool because the circuit for Subaru Select Monitor may be damaged EN 00037 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 14 16 Terminal No Remarks Terminal No Remarks 1 Power...

Page 929: ...ic data 2 MODE 02 Powertrain freeze frame data 3 MODE 03 Emission related powertrain DTC 4 MODE 04 Clear Reset emission related diagnostic information 5 MODE 06 Request on board monitoring test result...

Page 930: ...manifold absolute pressure kPa 0C Engine revolution rpm 0D Vehicle speed km h and MPH 0E Ignition timing advance 0F Intake air temperature C and F 10 Air flow rate from mass air flow sensor g sec 11 T...

Page 931: ...pending code for troubleshooting result about emission in the first time 8 MODE 09 Refer to data of vehicle specification V I N calibration ID diagnosis frequency etc TID CID Test value Test limit 81...

Page 932: ...nnect the diagnosis cable to data link connector CAUTION Do not connect any scan tools except Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool 5 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF and Subaru Select M...

Page 933: ...ir Temp C or F Ambient air temperature Amount of intake air Mass Air Flow g s or lb m 2 5 g s or 0 33 lb m Throttle opening angle signal Throttle Opening Angle 2 0 Rear oxygen sensor voltage Rear O2 S...

Page 934: ...Knocking Signal None Crankshaft position sensor signal Crankshaft Position Sig nal Provided Camshaft position sensor signal Camshaft Position Signal Provided Rear defogger switch signal Rear Defogger...

Page 935: ...h signal Brake Switch OFF input At OFF Main switch signal Main Switch OFF input At OFF Integrated unit data reception Body Int Unit Data Provided Body integrated unit counter update Body Int Unit Coun...

Page 936: ...rge sys tem Incomplete Test of secondary air system Secondary air system No Test of A C system refrigerant A C system refrigerant No Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor Incomplete Test of oxygen senso...

Page 937: ...data Freeze frame data DTC Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank1 Normal CLOSE or initial OPEN Engine load data Engine Load Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp C or...

Page 938: ...ocking signal is input Crankshaft position sensor signal Crankshaft Position Signal Provided or None When crankshaft position sensor signal is input Camshaft position sensor signal Camshaft Position S...

Page 939: ...OFF When AT coordinate permission signal is input Electronic throttle control motor relay signal ETC Motor Relay ON or OFF When electronic throttle control motor relay is in function Clutch switch si...

Page 940: ...BARU SELECT MONITOR OBD MODE 1 On the Main Menu display screen select the Each System Check and press the YES key 2 On the System Selection Menu display screen select the Engine Control System and pre...

Page 941: ...Circuit Low Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 2 P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 2 P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected Bank1 Sensor2 P0182 Fuel Temperature Sensor A Circuit Low Input P0...

Page 942: ...n Blow by Function Problem P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input P1560 Back Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range Performance P2102 Throttle Actuator Cont...

Page 943: ...vehicle to jump off free rollers In order to prevent the vehicle from slipping due to vibration do not place any wooden blocks or similar items between the rigid racks and vehicle Since the rear whee...

Page 944: ...he corre sponding DTC appears on the display screen NOTE For detailed operation procedure refer to the SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION MANUAL For details concerning DTC refer to List of Di agnostic Tr...

Page 945: ...AT model or 1st gear MT model and drive the vehicle at 5 to 10 km h 3 to 6 MPH NOTE For AWD model release the parking brake The speed difference between front and rear wheels may light the ABS warning...

Page 946: ...ostat Engine Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regulat ing Temperature P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response Bank 1 Sensor 1 P0171 System Too Lean Bank 1 Complete diagnosis for drive cycle B or C P...

Page 947: ...cycle A or C P0302 Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected Complete diagnosis for drive cycle A or C P0303 Cylinder 3 Misfire Detected Complete diagnosis for drive cycle A or C P0304 Cylinder 4 Misfire Detected C...

Page 948: ...P0082 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Low Bank 2 P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range Performance P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected Bank 1 Sensor 1 P0139 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow...

Page 949: ...IVE CYCLE E 1 Make sure that the battery voltage is more than 10 9 V 2 Perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 Clear Memory Mode 3 Drive the vehicle for the distance equal to the fuel...

Page 950: ...ON read the engine coolant temperature intake air temperature and fuel temper ature Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 28 READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE NORMAL MODE OPER ATION Subaru Select Monitor 3 When the valu...

Page 951: ...select the Each System Check and press the YES key 2 On the System Selection Menu display screen select the Engine Control System and press the YES key 3 Press the YES key after the information of en...

Page 952: ...scan tools except Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool 6 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF and Subaru Select Monitor switch to ON 7 On the Main Menu display screen select the Each System...

Page 953: ...ay oper ation check Fuel Pump Compulsory radiator fan relay operation check Radiator Fan Relay Compulsory air conditioning relay operation check A C Compressor Relay Compulsory purge control sole noid...

Page 954: ...LFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON Malfunction Indicator Light 3 Malfunction indicator light does not go off Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 53 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO OFF Malfunction I...

Page 955: ...Malfunction indicator light blinks at a cycle of 1 Hz when the diagnosis system detects the misfire which might damage the catalyst 4 Turn the ignition switch to OFF and connect the test mode connect...

Page 956: ...COMBINATION METER IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26 33 34 35 Step...

Page 957: ...the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and combi nation meter con nector Poor contact of coupling connector 5 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of combination meter con nector Is...

Page 958: ...7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ECM COMBINATION METER IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22...

Page 959: ...ION METER B135 B 8 i3 B38 ECM B75 B76 1 1 B136 C E 3 B72 SBF 6 6 MAIN SBF No 5 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY B135 B136 B C B72 B75 2 1 3 4 6 2 i10 B38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 19 20 2 1 3 4 6...

Page 960: ...witch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 3 Measure the resistance of harness between test mode connector and ECM Connector terminal B76 No 1 B136 No 6 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step...

Page 961: ...B38 ECM B75 B76 1 1 B136 C E 3 B72 SBF 6 6 MAIN SBF No 5 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY B135 B136 B C B72 B75 2 1 3 4 6 2 i10 B38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 19 20 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19...

Page 962: ...blinks when test mode connector is con nected 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM CON NECTOR AND TEST MODE CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 3 Measure the resis...

Page 963: ...ne Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 63 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE ECM Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure 4 Inspection of ignition control system Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 65 I...

Page 964: ...17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26 33 34 35 12 20 32 31 6 No 21 B225 MAIN SBF SBF 6 E 15 13 16 14 ECM B136 B72 2 3 B14 M B12 B106 B25 P N 11 2 1 2 1 MT MT BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH STAR...

Page 965: ...tarter motor Ref to SC H4SO 6 Starter Go to step 5 5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY AND IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR 1 Disconnect the connector from ignition switch 2 Measure the power supply voltage betw...

Page 966: ...ssis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Go to step 13 Repair the open or ground short cir cuit of harness between ECM and ignition switch 13 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IN HIBITOR SWITCH 1 Turn th...

Page 967: ...ral switch Connector terminal B136 No 31 B25 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 19 Repair the open or ground short cir cuit of harness between ECM and neutral switch 19 CHECK NEUTRAL SWITCH...

Page 968: ...4 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B137...

Page 969: ...ltage between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 5 Chassis ground B135 No 19 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Go to step 4 Repair the open or ground short cir cuit...

Page 970: ...1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 14 15 24 25 26 16 17 18 19 20 21 27 28 29 30 31 5 3 19 B21 E2 E12 SBF 7 15A 32 49 33 47 1 2 3 4 B137 18 26 6 3 4 1 2 B47 E 1 2 B225 ECM BATTERY IGNITION COIL IGNITOR ASSEMBLY...

Page 971: ...ing connector Blown out of fuse 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN IGNITION COIL AND IGNITOR ASSEMBLY AND ECM 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Measure the resistance between the igni tion coil and ignitor ass...

Page 972: ...Open circuit of harness between ECM and ignition coil and ignitor as sembly connector Poor contact of coupling connector 7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG NITION COIL AND IGNITOR ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR...

Page 973: ...PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04023 5 3 B97 MAIN SBF No 12 SBF 6 E 3 6 B72 B362 B136 No 11 FUEL PUMP RELAY FUEL PUMP FUEL PUMP CONDENSER ECM BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH B136 B72 1 3 4 5 6 2...

Page 974: ...tween fuel pump connector and chassis ground Connector terminal R58 No 5 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Replace the fuel pump Ref to FU H4SO 50 Fuel Pump Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BET...

Page 975: ...nector terminal B136 No 12 B362 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 8 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and fuel pump relay connector 8 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of...

Page 976: ...Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04024 E6 E17 E5 E16 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 10 9 8 11 42 48 43 44 45 B137 E5 E16 E6 E17 B21 E2 SBF 7 B47 1 2 4 6 3 5 B47 3 4 1 2 5 6 E B137 B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7...

Page 977: ...TOR 1 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 2 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and fuel injector connector Connector terminal 1 B137 No 8 E5 No 1 2 B137 No 9 E16 No 1 3 B137 No 10 E6 No 1 4...

Page 978: ...N H4SO U5 diag 96 DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLE NOID CIRCUIT LOW BANK 1 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0077 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Cir cuit High Bank 1 Ref to EN H...

Page 979: ...Trouble Code DTC P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1 Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 138 DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE BANK 1 SENSOR 1 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Co...

Page 980: ...ED Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low Bank 1 or Single Sensor Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 183 DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSO...

Page 981: ...TC P0462 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit Low Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 229 DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIR CUIT LOW Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0463 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit H...

Page 982: ...ostic Procedure with Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC P1160 Return Spring Failure Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 265 DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P1400 Fue...

Page 983: ...ON TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P2109 Throttle Pedal Position Sensor A Minimum Stop Performance Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 305 DTC P2109 THROTTLE PEDAL POS...

Page 984: ...ecting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Erroneous idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspect...

Page 985: ...ve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch connector 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and variable v...

Page 986: ...TOM Erroneous idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 d...

Page 987: ...ve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch connector 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and variable v...

Page 988: ...ection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04027 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6...

Page 989: ...ep 3 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and front oxygen A F sensor connector 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY AND FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of ha...

Page 990: ...3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41...

Page 991: ...Is the current more than 0 2 A Repair the poor contact of connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Poor contact in front oxygen A F sensor connector Poor contact in ECM connector Go to s...

Page 992: ...e Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04027 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17...

Page 993: ...ata of front oxygen A F sensor heater current using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to...

Page 994: ...RE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04028 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 E BATTERY OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY 50 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT B327 E23 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 C4 B4 A29 B1 ECM 1 3 4 2 E2...

Page 995: ...is ground Connector terminal B136 No 4 Chassis ground Does the voltage change by shaking the ECM harness and connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Go to step 4 4 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF EC...

Page 996: ...ls Terminals No 1 No 2 Is the resistance less than 30 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between rear oxygen sen sor and ECM con nec...

Page 997: ...URE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04028 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 E BATTERY OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY 50 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT B327 E23 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 C4 B4 A29 B1 ECM 1 3 4 2 E...

Page 998: ...r 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Read the data of rear oxygen A F sensor heater current using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure...

Page 999: ...airing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRIN...

Page 1000: ...d operation procedures refer to the General Scan Tool Instruction Manual Is the measured value 73 3 106 6 kPa 550 800 mmHg 21 65 31 50 inHg when the ignition is turned ON and 20 0 46 7 kPa 150 350 mmH...

Page 1001: ...dling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDUR...

Page 1002: ...2 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and oil switching sole noid valve connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and oil switching solenoid...

Page 1003: ...idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDU...

Page 1004: ...minal E67 No 1 Engine ground E67 No 2 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the short circuit between ECM and oil switching solenoid valve connector 2 CHECK OIL SWITCHING S...

Page 1005: ...dling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDUR...

Page 1006: ...2 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and oil switching sole noid valve connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and oil switching solenoid...

Page 1007: ...idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDU...

Page 1008: ...minal E68 No 1 Engine ground E68 No 2 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the short circuit between ECM and oil switching solenoid valve connector 2 CHECK OIL SWITCHING S...

Page 1009: ...dling Engine stalls Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection...

Page 1010: ...TC displayed Check the appro priate DTC using the List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 73 List of Diagnostic Trou ble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect D...

Page 1011: ...r driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5...

Page 1012: ...M con nector Go to step 2 2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM connector and chassis ground while engine is idling Connector terminal B135 No 26 Chassis ground Is the voltage mo...

Page 1013: ...30 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 7 Repair the ground short circuit between ECM and mass air flow sen sor connector 7 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of mass air flow...

Page 1014: ...or driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5...

Page 1015: ...the circuit has returned to a nor mal condition at this time Go to step 2 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector f...

Page 1016: ...ON After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspectio...

Page 1017: ...CM Measure the voltage between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 19 Chassis ground Does the voltage change by shaking the ECM harness and connector Repair the poor contact of...

Page 1018: ...ctor terminal B134 No 29 E21 No 2 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 9 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and manifold absolute pressure sensor connector 9 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check p...

Page 1019: ...ION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspecti...

Page 1020: ...poor contact of ECM connector Contact the SOA service center 4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 6 Chassis ground Is the...

Page 1021: ...sensor connector Repair the poor contact of manifold absolute pressure sensor connector Replace the mani fold absolute pres sure sensor Ref to FU H4SO 24 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 10 CHECK HAR...

Page 1022: ...TOM Erroneous idling Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection...

Page 1023: ...SPLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check DTC using List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 73 List of Diagnostic Trou ble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC...

Page 1024: ...ving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag...

Page 1025: ...or contact of coupling connector Poor contact of joint connector 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND ECM CON NECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector f...

Page 1026: ...iving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag...

Page 1027: ...r temperature sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal B3 No 4 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between intake air tempera ture sen...

Page 1028: ...tor terminal B3 No 5 Engine ground Is the resistance less than 5 Replace the intake air temperature sensor Ref to FU H4SO 25 Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temper ature Sensor Repair the har ness and co...

Page 1029: ...erformance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PRO...

Page 1030: ...contact of coupling connector Poor contact of joint connector 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors...

Page 1031: ...performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PR...

Page 1032: ...re sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal E8 No 2 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between ECM and engine coolant tempera ture se...

Page 1033: ...minal E8 No 1 Engine ground Is the resistance less than 5 Replace the engine coolant temperature sen sor Ref to FU H4SO 19 Engine Coolant Temperature Sen sor Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In...

Page 1034: ...pection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31...

Page 1035: ...e resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis...

Page 1036: ...spection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31...

Page 1037: ...No 18 E57 No 6 B134 No 29 E57 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL 1 Connect the ECM...

Page 1038: ...PTOM Engine does not return to idle CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref...

Page 1039: ...f Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 73 List of Diagnostic Trou ble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0125 Go to step 2 2 CHECK THERMOSTAT Does the thermos...

Page 1040: ...BLE SYMPTOM Engine does not return to idle CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mo...

Page 1041: ...ble Code DTC Go to step 2 2 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Measure the resistance between engine cool ant temperature sensor terminals when the engine coolant is cold and after warmed up Ter...

Page 1042: ...Yes No 1 CHECK VEHICLE Was the vehicle driven or idled with the engine partially sub merged under water In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0128 Go to step 2 2 CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISP...

Page 1043: ...Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04027 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18...

Page 1044: ...CONNEC TOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from ECM and front oxygen A F sensor connector 3 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and front oxygen A F sensor conn...

Page 1045: ...Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04027 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 1...

Page 1046: ...XYGEN A F SENSOR CONNEC TOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Disconnect the connector from front oxygen A F sensor 3 Measure the voltage of harness between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector...

Page 1047: ...Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04027 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15...

Page 1048: ...TC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0133 Go to step 2 2 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM NOTE Check the following items Loose installation of front portion of exhaust pipe onto cylinder heads...

Page 1049: ...ion Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04027 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E22 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 6 4 1 3 B135 B B136 C ECM E B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8...

Page 1050: ...o 1 B135 No 8 E22 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 2 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and front ox ygen A...

Page 1051: ...E Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04028 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 E BATTERY OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY 50 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT B327 E23 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 C4 B4 A29 B1 ECM 1 3 4 2 E23...

Page 1052: ...R AND COUPLING CONNECTOR Does water enter the connec tor Dry the water thor oughly Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconn...

Page 1053: ...he following items Loose installation of portions Damage crack hole etc of parts Looseness and improper fitting of parts be tween front oxygen A F sensor and rear oxy gen sensor Is there any fault in...

Page 1054: ...RE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04028 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 E BATTERY OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY 50 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT B327 E23 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 C4 B4 A29 B1 ECM 1 3 4 2 E2...

Page 1055: ...AND COUPLING CONNECTOR Does water enter the connec tor Dry the water thor oughly Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconne...

Page 1056: ...he following items Loose installation of portions Damage crack hole etc of parts Looseness and improper fitting of parts be tween front oxygen A F sensor and rear oxy gen sensor Is there any fault in...

Page 1057: ...URE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04028 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 E BATTERY OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY 50 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT B327 E23 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 C4 B4 A29 B1 ECM 1 3 4 2 E...

Page 1058: ...r oxygen sensor con nector Connector terminal B135 No 4 E23 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 3 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and rear oxygen sen sor connector 3 CHECK HAR...

Page 1059: ...CEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04028 SBF 5 E B327 B21 E2 E2 B21 6 4 2 1 E BATTERY OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY 50 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT B327 E23 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 C4 B4 A29 B1 ECM 1 3 4...

Page 1060: ...EN H4SO U5 diag 27 Subaru Select Mon itor General scan tool For detailed operation procedures refer to the General Scan Tool Instruction Manual Is the voltage more than 490 mV Go to step 7 Go to step...

Page 1061: ...witch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from rear oxygen sensor 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Measure the voltage between rear oxygen sensor harness connector and chassis ground Connector termina...

Page 1062: ...ECK FUEL PRESSURE WARNING Place NO FIRE signs near the working area Be careful not to spill fuel Measure the fuel pressure Ref to ME H4SO 25 INSPECTION Fuel Pressure WARNING Release fuel pressure befo...

Page 1063: ...25 Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temper ature Sensor 6 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 Start the engine and warm up engine until coolant temperature is greater than 60 C 140 F...

Page 1064: ...Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROC...

Page 1065: ...OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check DTC using List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 73 List of Diagnostic Trou ble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary...

Page 1066: ...repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode W...

Page 1067: ...es the circuit has returned to a nor mal condition at this time 2 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Remove the access hole lid 3 Disconnect the connector from fuel pump 4 Turn the...

Page 1068: ...r repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode...

Page 1069: ...ween fuel pump connector and chassis ground Connector terminal R58 No 2 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between ECM and fuel pump connector Go...

Page 1070: ...mp connector and ECM Connector terminal R58 No 3 B135 No 30 Is the resistance less than 1 Replace the fuel temperature sen sor Ref to EC H4SO 9 Fuel Temperature Sen sor Repair the har ness and connec...

Page 1071: ...start Erroneous idling Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspecti...

Page 1072: ...OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check DTC using List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 73 List of Diagnostic Trou ble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary...

Page 1073: ...erformance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PRO...

Page 1074: ...erature sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal B134 No 23 Engine ground B134 No 29 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the ground short circuit between ECM...

Page 1075: ...performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PR...

Page 1076: ...ATURE SENSOR AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the voltage between oil temperature sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal E75 No 2 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 4 V Go to step 4 Repai...

Page 1077: ...20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 18 22 23 24 25 26 B137 D 1 2 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27...

Page 1078: ...than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector...

Page 1079: ...1 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 18 22 23 24 25 26 B137 D 1 2 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17...

Page 1080: ...E57 No 3 B134 No 28 E57 No 4 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL 1 Connect the ECM conne...

Page 1081: ...Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC AU DTC P0302 CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE DETECTED NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC P0304 Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 177 DTC P0304 CYLIN DER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED Diagnostic P...

Page 1082: ...ng or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DI...

Page 1083: ...Measure the resistance between ECM con nector and engine ground on faulty cylinders Connector terminal 1 E5 No 1 Engine ground 2 E16 No 1 Engine ground 3 E6 No 1 Engine ground 4 E17 No 1 Engine groun...

Page 1084: ...rcuit of har ness between ECM and fuel injector After repair replace the ECM Ref to FU H4SO 36 Engine Control Module ECM Go to step 8 8 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Measure...

Page 1085: ...fuel Fuel additive used or not Visually check spark plug Visually check spark plug cord Condition of en gine oil 16 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM Is there any fault in air intake system Repair the air intak...

Page 1086: ...heck the follow ing items Spark plug Spark plug cord Fuel injector Compression ra tio Go to DTC P0171 Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 156 DTC P0171 SYS TEM TOO LEAN BANK 1 Diag nostic Procedure with Diagnostic...

Page 1087: ...s NOTE Check the follow ing items Spark plug Fuel injector Skipping timing belt teeth Go to DTC P0171 Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 156 DTC P0171 SYS TEM TOO LEAN BANK 1 Diag nostic Procedure with Diagnostic...

Page 1088: ...rmance Knocking occurs CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5...

Page 1089: ...2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN KNOCK SEN SOR AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the resistance between ECM and knock sensor connector Connector terminal B134 No 15 E14 No 1 B134 No 29 E14 No 2 Is the resistance less...

Page 1090: ...ormance Knocking occurs CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U...

Page 1091: ...short circuit of har ness between knock sensor con nector and ECM connector NOTE The harness be tween both con nectors are shielded Repair the short circuit of harness covered with shield 3 CHECK INP...

Page 1092: ...t CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE In...

Page 1093: ...nd ECM connector NOTE The harness be tween both con nectors are shielded Repair the ground short circuit of harness with shield Go to step 3 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CRANK SHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND ECM...

Page 1094: ...of engine to start CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 di...

Page 1095: ...rely Go to step 3 Tighten the crank shaft position sen sor installation bolt securely 3 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET Remove the timing belt cover Are crank sprocket teeth cracked or damaged Replace the crank...

Page 1096: ...ilure of engine to start CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO...

Page 1097: ...sor and ECM connector NOTE The harness be tween both con nectors are shielded Repair the ground short circuit of harness with shield Go to step 3 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND E...

Page 1098: ...M Engine stalls Failure of engine to start CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mo...

Page 1099: ...ION SENSOR AND ECM CONNEC TOR Measure the resistance of harness between camshaft position sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal E15 No 1 Engine ground Is the resistance less than 10 Re...

Page 1100: ...llation bolt tightened securely Go to step 8 Tighten the cam shaft position sen sor installation bolt securely 8 CHECK CAM SPROCKET Remove the timing belt cover Ref to ME H4SO 39 Timing Belt Cover Are...

Page 1101: ...em CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE I...

Page 1102: ...K POWER SUPPLY OF EGR VALVE 1 Disconnect the connector from EGR valve 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON 3 Measure the voltage between EGR valve connector and engine ground Connector terminal E18 No 2 E...

Page 1103: ...SO 26 EGR Valve 7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN EGR VALVE AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between EGR valve and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 10 Chassis ground B134 No 9 Chassi...

Page 1104: ...RE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04042 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 B327 B138 E2 B21 B21 E2 E23 E22 1 2 6 4 E E 1 3 4 2 B135 B B136 C E 4 1 3 1 2 3 4 E23 FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR JOINT CON NECTOR REAR OX...

Page 1105: ...st pipe and front catalyt ic converter Between front catalytic converter and rear catalytic converter Loose part and improper installation of front oxygen A F sensor or rear oxygen sensor Is there any...

Page 1106: ...tor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 27 Subaru Select Mon itor Is the voltage more than 490 mV Go to step 9 Go to step 6 6 CHECK REAR OXYGE...

Page 1107: ...TE For MT model depress the clutch pedal Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 27 Subaru Select Mon itor Is the voltage 25...

Page 1108: ...lear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04043 5 3 6 4 2 1 B47 SBF 7 E4 1 2 E2 B21 41 48 D29 R68 1 2 R213 R15 1 5 R1 B97 14 15 R1 B97...

Page 1109: ...the drain valve NOTE Drain valve operation can be executed using Subaru Select Monitor For procedure refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 47 Compulsory Valve Operation...

Page 1110: ...dia in it Repair or replace the canister Ref to EC H4SO 5 Canister Go to step 10 10 CHECK FUEL TANK Remove the fuel tank Ref to FU H4SO 41 Fuel Tank Is the fuel tank damaged or is there a hole of more...

Page 1111: ...ng Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PR...

Page 1112: ...RNESS BETWEEN DRAIN VALVE AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from drain valve and ECM 3 Measure the resistance of harness between drain valve connector and...

Page 1113: ...oltage more than 10 V Go to step 7 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between main relay and drain valve Poor contact of coupling co...

Page 1114: ...ting Crite ria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36...

Page 1115: ...e more than 10 V Go to step 4 Go to step 3 3 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of ECM connector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM Ref...

Page 1116: ...eria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE...

Page 1117: ...en the fuel flap Is the fuel filler cap tightened securely Go to step 3 Securely install the fuel filler cap 3 CHECK PRESSURE VACUUM LINE NOTE Check the following items Disconnection leakage and clogg...

Page 1118: ...cting Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36...

Page 1119: ...he ECM harness and connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Contact the SOA service center 4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM and chas sis ground Connector terminal...

Page 1120: ...ECM and rear wir ing harness con nector 9 CHECK FUEL TANK HARNESS 1 Disconnect the connector from fuel tank pressure sensor 2 Measure the resistance of fuel tank har ness Connector terminal R213 No 7...

Page 1121: ...ecting Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 3...

Page 1122: ...lace the ECM Ref to FU H4SO 36 Engine Control Module ECM 4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM and chas sis ground Connector terminal B135 No 32 Chassis ground Is the voltage les...

Page 1123: ...ank harness Connector terminal R213 No 4 R47 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 10 Repair the open circuit in fuel tank cord 10 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact in fuel tank pressure s...

Page 1124: ...TION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04043 5 3 6 4 2 1 B47 SBF 7 E4 1 2 E2 B21 41 48 D29 R68 1 2 R213 R15 1 5 R1 B97 14 15 R...

Page 1125: ...the drain valve NOTE Drain valve operation can be executed using Subaru Select Monitor For procedure refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 47 Compulsory Valve Operatio...

Page 1126: ...dia in it Repair or replace the canister Ref to EC H4SO 5 Canister Go to step 10 10 CHECK FUEL TANK Remove the fuel tank Ref to FU H4SO 41 Fuel Tank Is the fuel tank damaged or is there a hole of more...

Page 1127: ...and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04043 5 3 6 4 2 1 B47 SBF 7 E4 1 2 E2 B21 41 48 D29 R68 1 2 R213 R15 1 5 R1 B97 14 15 R1 B97 R67 R46 7 6 C17...

Page 1128: ...ted using Subaru Select Monitor For procedure refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 47 Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Does the drain valve operate Go to step 6 R...

Page 1129: ...r replace the fuel tank Ref to FU H4SO 41 Fuel Tank Go to step 10 10 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON TROL SYSTEM Are there holes of more than 0 5 mm 0 020 in dia cracks...

Page 1130: ...idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDU...

Page 1131: ...lenoid valve Connector terminal B137 No 29 E4 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and purge control sole noid valve connec tor NOTE In this c...

Page 1132: ...idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCED...

Page 1133: ...3 3 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of ECM connector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM Ref to FU H4SO 36 Engine Control Module ECM...

Page 1134: ...DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT HIGH DTC DETECTING CONDITION Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur GENERAL DESCRIPTION Ref to GD H4SO U5 153 DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...

Page 1135: ...VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A DTC DETECTING CONDITION Immediately at fault recognition GENERAL DESCRIPTION Ref to GD H4SO U5 159 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A Di agnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Crite...

Page 1136: ...U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10...

Page 1137: ...6 Go to step 2 2 CHECK AIR CLEANER ELEMENT 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Check the air cleaner element Is the air cleaner element excessively clogged Replace the air cleaner element Ref to IN H4...

Page 1138: ...36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19...

Page 1139: ...n switch to ON 2 Start and idle the engine 3 Check the following items Loose installation of intake manifold and throttle body Cracks of intake manifold gasket and throttle body gasket Disconnection o...

Page 1140: ...ry Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04020 B136 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26 33 3...

Page 1141: ...OTE Place the inhibitor switch in each position AT model Depress and release the clutch pedal MT model Check the security alarm is not sounding Does the starter motor oper ate Repair the battery short...

Page 1142: ...e WIRING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16...

Page 1143: ...t DTC P0519 Go to step 2 2 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Start and idle the engine 3 Check the following items Loose installation of intake manifold and throttle body Crac...

Page 1144: ...g or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIA...

Page 1145: ...22 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 42 43 44 45 46 47 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 B362 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 E57 C B122 B362 D B136 B137 A B134 EN 09093 SBF 7 E E E E BATTERY ELECTRONIC THRO...

Page 1146: ...A FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 27 Subaru Select Mon itor General scan tool For detailed operation procedure refer to the general scan tool operation manual Is the engine coolant tempera ture abov...

Page 1147: ...37 No 9 Chassis ground 3 B137 No 10 Chassis ground 4 B137 No 11 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Go to step 14 Go to step 10 10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL INJEC TOR AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Tur...

Page 1148: ...Chassis ground 4 B137 No 11 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between ECM and fuel injector After repair replace the ECM Ref to FU H4SO 36 Engin...

Page 1149: ...the voltage less than 5 V Go to step 22 Repair the power supply short cir cuit of harness between ECM and electronic throttle control 22 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE L...

Page 1150: ...esistance less than 1 Go to step 28 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 28 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis...

Page 1151: ...tween ECM con nector and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B134 No 29 E57 No 3 B134 No 18 E57 No 6 B134 No 28 E57 No 4 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 35 Repair the ope...

Page 1152: ...ignal using Subaru Select Monitor NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 27 Subaru Select Mon itor Is the voltage 1 64...

Page 1153: ...een ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 5 Chassis ground B136 No 15 Chassis ground B137 No 1 Chassis ground B137 No 2 Chassis ground B137 No 3 Chassis ground B137 No 7 Chassis...

Page 1154: ...ctive part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode CC DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MOD...

Page 1155: ...1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 42 43 44 45 46 47 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19...

Page 1156: ...ND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from the ECM and electronic throttle control 3 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and electronic...

Page 1157: ...nsecutive driving cycles with fault occur GENERAL DESCRIPTION Ref to GD H4SO U5 183 DTC P0692 FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Radiator fan doe...

Page 1158: ...CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Ins...

Page 1159: ...T3 3 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B136 No 31 Chassis ground B136 No 6 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 4 Repai...

Page 1160: ...ION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspecti...

Page 1161: ...ransmis sion harness connector terminals Connector terminal T2 No 1 No 2 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 6 Repair the short circuit in transmis sion harness or replace the neu tral position s...

Page 1162: ...g CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE In...

Page 1163: ...nnector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Contact the SOA service center 5 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis ground Co...

Page 1164: ...arter motor ground line NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit in harness between inhibitor switch connector and starter motor ground line Poor contact in starter motor con nector Po...

Page 1165: ...TION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspect...

Page 1166: ...ce less than 1 Go to step 5 Repair the open circuit in transmis sion harness or replace neutral switch 5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND NEUTRAL SWITCH CONNECTOR 1 Disconnect the connector from ECM 2 Me...

Page 1167: ...RAM EN 04042 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 B327 B138 E2 B21 B21 E2 E23 E22 1 2 6 4 E E 1 3 4 2 B135 B B136 C E 4 1 3 1 2 3 4 E23 FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR JOINT CON NECTOR REAR OXYGEN SENSOR ECM OXYGEN SENSOR...

Page 1168: ...ront oxygen A F sensor connector Connector terminal B135 No 8 E22 No 3 B135 No 9 E22 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 3 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the fol...

Page 1169: ...E E 1 3 4 2 B135 B B136 C E 4 1 3 1 2 3 4 E23 FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR JOINT CON NECTOR REAR OXYGEN SENSOR ECM OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY B134 8 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 2 1 3 4 16 30 19 20 22 28 29 9...

Page 1170: ...ECM 1 Connect the connector to ECM 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON 3 Measure the voltage between ECM con nector and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 8 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than...

Page 1171: ...N After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection...

Page 1172: ...ctor Connector terminal B136 No 28 R68 No 2 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 5 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit in harness between EC...

Page 1173: ...ter repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mod...

Page 1174: ...ECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of ECM connector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM Ref to FU H4SO 36 Engine Control Module ECM 4 CHECK...

Page 1175: ...UTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspec...

Page 1176: ...in hose Replace the drain hose Go to step 3 3 CHECK DRAIN VALVE OPERATION 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect the test mode connector at the lower portion of instrument panel on the driver s s...

Page 1177: ...UBLE SYMPTOM Erroneous idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN...

Page 1178: ...ctor 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PCV DIAGNO SIS CONNECTOR AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between PCV diagnosis connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 30 Chassis groun...

Page 1179: ...diag 275 DTC P1498 EGR SO LENOID VALVE SIGNAL 4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION LOW INPUT Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos tic Trouble Code DTC CW DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL 2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION HIGH...

Page 1180: ...UNCTION LOW IN PUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria Ref to GD H4SO U5 209 DTC P1496 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL 3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION LOW INPUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criter...

Page 1181: ...5 29 26 SBF 7 B134 ECM B47 E18 3 4 1 2 5 6 1 3 4 5 6 2 MAIN RELAY BATTERY EGR VALVE B134 8 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 2 1 3 4 16 30 19 20 22 28 29 9 17 18 25 21 23 24 32 31 26 27 33 34 B21 1 2 3 4 12 13...

Page 1182: ...494 B134 No 9 E18 No 1 DTC P1496 B134 No 10 E18 No 4 DTC P1498 B134 No 20 E18 No 6 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 3 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following...

Page 1183: ...UNCTION HIGH IN PUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria Ref to GD H4SO U5 209 DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL 3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION HIGH INPUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Crit...

Page 1184: ...5 29 26 SBF 7 B134 ECM B47 E18 3 4 1 2 5 6 1 3 4 5 6 2 MAIN RELAY BATTERY EGR VALVE B134 8 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 2 1 3 4 16 30 19 20 22 28 29 9 17 18 25 21 23 24 32 31 26 27 33 34 B21 1 2 3 4 12 13...

Page 1185: ...witch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from EGR valve 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Measure the voltage between ECM con nector and chassis ground Connector terminal DTC P1493 B134 No 8 Chassis g...

Page 1186: ...ear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 04020 B136 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27...

Page 1187: ...the security alarm is not sounding Does the starter motor operate when ignition switch is turned to ST Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open or ground sh...

Page 1188: ...7 B72 No 12 B47 E2 B21 2 1 4 6 5 3 E 3 6 B134 B135 A D B137 C B136 B 3 4 1 2 5 6 B47 No 13 B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 B135 5 6 7...

Page 1189: ...M AND MAIN FUSE BOX CONNECTOR 1 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 2 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 5 Chassis ground Is the resistance less...

Page 1190: ...04042 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 B327 B138 E2 B21 B21 E2 E23 E22 1 2 6 4 E E 1 3 4 2 B135 B B136 C E 4 1 3 1 2 3 4 E23 FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR JOINT CON NECTOR REAR OXYGEN SENSOR ECM OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY...

Page 1191: ...n harness between ECM and front ox ygen A F sensor connector Poor contact in front oxygen A F sensor connector Poor contact in ECM connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR CON...

Page 1192: ...p 11 11 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE WARNING Place NO FIRE signs near the working area Be careful not to spill fuel Measure the fuel pressure Ref to ME H4SO 25 INSPECTION Fuel Pressure WARNING Release fuel pre...

Page 1193: ...Turn all the accessory switches to OFF 5 Open the front hood 6 Measure the ambient temperature 7 Read the data of mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or...

Page 1194: ...ygen sensor harness connector and engine ground or chassis ground Connector terminal E23 No 3 Engine ground Is the voltage 0 2 0 5 V Replace the rear oxygen sensor Ref to FU H4SO 34 Rear Oxygen Sen so...

Page 1195: ...sor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 27 Subaru Select Mo...

Page 1196: ...04042 3 4 1 2 5 6 B327 SBF 5 B327 B138 E2 B21 B21 E2 E23 E22 1 2 6 4 E E 1 3 4 2 B135 B B136 C E 4 1 3 1 2 3 4 E23 FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR JOINT CON NECTOR REAR OXYGEN SENSOR ECM OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY...

Page 1197: ...n harness between ECM and front ox ygen A F sensor connector Poor contact in front oxygen A F sensor connector Poor contact in ECM connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR CON...

Page 1198: ...11 11 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE WARNING Place NO FIRE signs near the working area Be careful not to spill fuel 1 Measure the fuel pressure Ref to ME H4SO 25 INSPECTION Fuel Pressure WARNING Release fuel pr...

Page 1199: ...Turn all the accessory switches to OFF 5 Open the front hood 6 Measure the ambient temperature 7 Read the data of mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or...

Page 1200: ...con nector Poor contact of the rear oxygen sensor connector Poor contact in ECM connector 19 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA 1 Warm up the engine until engine coolant temperature is above 70 C 158 F and...

Page 1201: ...Code DTC Detecting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Erroneous idling Poor driving performance Engine stalls WIRING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 3...

Page 1202: ...ground Connector terminal B362 No 5 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the power supply short circuit of harness between ECM and electronic throttle control Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARN...

Page 1203: ...stance less than 1 Go to step 10 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis gro...

Page 1204: ...tween ECM con nector and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B134 No 29 E57 No 3 B134 No 18 E57 No 6 B134 No 28 E57 No 4 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 17 Repair the ope...

Page 1205: ...ignal using Subaru Select Monitor NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 27 Subaru Select Mon itor Is the voltage 1 64...

Page 1206: ...een ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 5 Chassis ground B136 No 15 Chassis ground B137 No 1 Chassis ground B137 No 2 Chassis ground B137 No 3 Chassis ground B137 No 7 Chassis...

Page 1207: ...8 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 18 22 23 24 25 26 B137 D 1 2 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 18...

Page 1208: ...ECM 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Measure the voltage between electronic throttle control relay connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B362 No 5 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than...

Page 1209: ...4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 18 22 23 24 25 26 B137 D 1 2 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27 28 18 22 23 24 25 26 7 32 33 34 35 B136 C...

Page 1210: ...2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT OF ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY POWER SUP PLY 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Measure the voltage between electronic throttle control relay connector and chassis ground...

Page 1211: ...1 26 27 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3...

Page 1212: ...CK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 29 Chassis ground B135 No 31 Chassis ground Is...

Page 1213: ...tance of accelerator pedal position sensor Terminals No 4 No 3 Check the measured value is within the specifi cation with the accelerator pedal depressed Is the resistance between 0 5 and 2 5 k Repair...

Page 1214: ...31 26 27 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4...

Page 1215: ...ss connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Connect the ECM connector 2 Measure the resistance between accelera tor pedal position sensor connector and chas sis g...

Page 1216: ...1 26 27 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3...

Page 1217: ...he open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 31 C...

Page 1218: ...dal position sensor Terminals No 3 No 5 2 Check the measured value is within the specification with the accelerator pedal depressed Is the resistance between 0 28 and 1 68 k Repair the poor contact of...

Page 1219: ...31 26 27 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4...

Page 1220: ...s connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Connect the ECM connector 2 Measure the resistance between accelera tor pedal position sensor connector and chas sis gr...

Page 1221: ...Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM ECM 8 6 5 7 C1 C21 A19 D4 D5 A29 D1 D2 A5 D3 D7 A28 A18 C6 5 1 2 3 4 6 E2 B21 20 39 38 19 34 35 36 37 52 18 17 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30...

Page 1222: ...nce between ECM con nector and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B134 No 18 E57 No 6 B134 No 28 E57 No 4 B134 No 19 E57 No 5 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 5 Repair th...

Page 1223: ...nector and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B134 No 29 E57 No 3 B134 No 18 E57 No 6 B134 No 28 E57 No 4 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 12 Repair the open circuit of h...

Page 1224: ...the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 16 Repair the short circuit to sensor power supply 16 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON TROL HARNESS 1 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 2 Disconnect the connecto...

Page 1225: ...32 31 26 27 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 5 6 7 8 2 1 9...

Page 1226: ...ector terminal B135 No 23 B315 No 5 B135 No 21 B315 No 3 B135 No 31 B315 No 2 B135 No 22 B315 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNE...

Page 1227: ...el erator pedal posi tion sensor 11 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance of accelerator pedal position sensor with depressing the accelera tor pedal Terminals No 2 No 6 Is th...

Page 1228: ...hort circuit of har ness between ECM connector and accelerator pedal position sen sor connector 17 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2...

Page 1229: ...SCRIPTION Ref to GD H4SO U5 238 DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR CUIT LOW Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memo...

Page 1230: ...UTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 46 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspec...

Page 1231: ...pump and fuel pump relay 12 EGR valve 3 Engine does not return to idle 1 Engine coolant temperature sensor 2 Electronic throttle control 3 Manifold absolute pressure sensor 4 Mass air flow and intake...

Page 1232: ...erature sensor 2 Manifold absolute pressure sensor 3 Engine coolant temperature sensor 2 4 Crankshaft position sensor 3 5 Camshaft position sensor 3 6 Fuel injection parts 4 7 Electronic throttle cont...

Page 1233: ...EN H4SO U5 diag 328 General Diagnostic Table ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS asieps_tobira book 328...

Page 1234: ...GENERAL DESCRIPTION GD H4SO U5 Page 1 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 2 2 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria 9 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 1235: ...High NG When the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch remains OFF even though the intake valve tried to enter low mode oil switching solenoid valve duty is small this is judged as a High...

Page 1236: ...ted 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE No...

Page 1237: ...NG when it is determined that the front oxygen A F sensor impedance is large by referring to the engine condition such as fuel shut off in deceleration etc 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4...

Page 1238: ...es when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CL...

Page 1239: ...rminal voltage at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING...

Page 1240: ...Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor heater con...

Page 1241: ...nal voltage at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING C...

Page 1242: ...Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor heater con...

Page 1243: ...is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the d...

Page 1244: ...clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGH...

Page 1245: ...0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diag...

Page 1246: ...clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGH...

Page 1247: ...sure AD value is Low whereas it seemed to be High from the viewpoint of engine condition or when it is High whereas it seemed to be Low from the engine condition 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDI...

Page 1248: ...ON When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Intake manifold pressure sensor process Estimate the pressure from engine load ISC feedback Not al...

Page 1249: ...occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time when the following conditions are established are more than 2 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is...

Page 1250: ...s a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time when the following conditions are established are more than 2 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK...

Page 1251: ...6 Ref to GD H4SO U5 23 DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW BANK 1 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria L DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH BANK 2 NOTE For...

Page 1252: ...increases Judge as a high side NG when the air flow voltage indicates a large val ue regardless of running in a state where the air flow voltage decreases Judge air flow sensor property NG when the L...

Page 1253: ...take manifold pressure 53 3 kPa 400 mmHg 15 7 inHg High side error 1 Output voltage 2 66 V Engine speed 600 900 rpm Throttle opening angle 2 44 Intake manifold pressure 40 0 kPa 300 mmHg 11 8 inHg Hig...

Page 1254: ...g cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is perform...

Page 1255: ...leting the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicat...

Page 1256: ...AL DESCRIPTION 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memo...

Page 1257: ...eting the malfunction criteria below becomes more than 0 5 seconds Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indica...

Page 1258: ...AL DESCRIPTION 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memo...

Page 1259: ...en the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0...

Page 1260: ...INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE ISC feedback Not allowed to calculate the amount of feedback 9 ECM O...

Page 1261: ...hen the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis...

Page 1262: ...INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE ISC feedback Not allowed to calculate the amount of feedback 9 ECM O...

Page 1263: ...ondition 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis when the vehicle speed condition is completed after idling from starting the cooled en gine 1 Air flow...

Page 1264: ...NDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row Whe...

Page 1265: ...rcuit of the intake air temperature sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Air...

Page 1266: ...ow are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is compl...

Page 1267: ...ircuit of the intake air temperature sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Air...

Page 1268: ...ow are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is compl...

Page 1269: ...tinuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds...

Page 1270: ...ne coolant temperature sensor process Engine coolant temperature is fixed at 70 C 158 F ISC Feedback Calculate target engine speed as engine coolant temperature 70 C 158 F ISC learning Not allowed to...

Page 1271: ...tinuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds...

Page 1272: ...ne coolant temperature sensor process Engine coolant temperature is fixed at 70 C 158 F ISC Feedback Calculate target engine speed as engine coolant temperature 70 C 158 F ISC learning Not allowed to...

Page 1273: ...ar the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITI...

Page 1274: ...TION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle o...

Page 1275: ...ar the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITI...

Page 1276: ...TION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle o...

Page 1277: ...output property Judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature does not rise in driving conditions where it should 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagn...

Page 1278: ...erformed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Engine coolant temperature sensor process Engi...

Page 1279: ...em to judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature does not decrease when it should 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis only once after starting...

Page 1280: ...rformed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize th...

Page 1281: ...han the estimated engine coolant temperature and the difference between them is large Judge as OK when the engine coolant temperature becomes to 70 C 158 F and the difference is small before judging N...

Page 1282: ...CATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For te...

Page 1283: ...dge as NG when the continuous time of completing any malfunction criteria below is more than 1 second Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 second Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as...

Page 1284: ...is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor heater control Not allowed to turn on the heater A F main learning Not allowed to calculate the A F main learning compensation factor A F sub learning...

Page 1285: ...dge as NG when the continuous time of completing any malfunction criteria below is more than 1 second Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 second Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as...

Page 1286: ...is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor heater control Not allowed to turn on the heater A F main learning Not allowed to calculate the A F main learning compensation factor A F sub learning...

Page 1287: ...ged ventilation holes are diagnosed When the holes are clogged the A F output variation becomes slow comparing with the actual A F variation because oxygen which reaches the zirconia layer is insuffic...

Page 1288: ...tions All secondary parameters enable condi tions 1 second or more Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 563 mmHg 22 2 inHg Closed loop control with main feedback Operating Front oxygen...

Page 1289: ...ON INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen sensor A F sensor main learning compensation Not allo...

Page 1290: ...TIC METHOD Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes more than 5 seconds Time Needed for Diagnosis 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Il...

Page 1291: ...cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor heater control Not allowed to turn on the heater A F main learning Not allowed to calculate the A...

Page 1292: ...tiunuity NG of oxygen sensor If the oxygen sensor voltage reading is not within the probable range considering the operating conditions judge as NG 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A Electromotive force C Rich...

Page 1293: ...econd Low side 2 judgment Closed loop control at the oxygen sensor In operation Misfire detection every 200 rotations 5 times Front oxygen A F sensor compensation coefficient Not in limit value Batter...

Page 1294: ...R LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Sub feedback control Not allowed 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the...

Page 1295: ...ean to rich If the measured response time is larger than the threshold value it is NG 2 Judge as NG when the oxygen sensor voltage remains small when recovering from a deceleration fuel cut Diagnostic...

Page 1296: ...ion 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD When the oxygen sensor output voltage changes from 0 55 V rich to 0 25 V lean calculate the minimum response time for output change between 0 5V and 0 3V for the judgment crite...

Page 1297: ...malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Normality Judgment 1 Regardless of a deceleration fuel cut if the response time diagnosis value when the oxygen sensor voltage has changed from rich...

Page 1298: ...ox ygen sensor output voltage changes from 0 25 V lean to 0 55 V rich Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions Battery voltage 10 9 V A F main feedback control condition Completed Deceleration fuel cut...

Page 1299: ...ponse time diagnosis value threshold value normal 2 Do not judge as a normal condition Judge as OK when the criteria below are met 13 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times...

Page 1300: ...following conditions is established judged as NG Time Needed for Diagnosis 200 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Norm...

Page 1301: ...pleted 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE...

Page 1302: ...Judge as OK when the malfunction criteria below are completed for 10 seconds or more Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions A F main learning system In operation Engine coolant temperature 75 C 167 F...

Page 1303: ...s completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear Memory i...

Page 1304: ...after warming up the engine Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions A F main learning system In operation Engine coolant temperature 75 C 168 F Amount of intake air Value from Map 5 Intake air change d...

Page 1305: ...CTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE Purge control solenoid valve control Not allo...

Page 1306: ...ther is NG judge as NG If both are OK Judge as OK and clear the NG Drift Diagnosis Normally fuel temperature is lower than engine coolant temperature When the fuel temperature becomes higher than the...

Page 1307: ...RAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform diagnosis after 20 seconds have passed since the engine started Judgment Value Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value Fuel level 9 6 2 2 54 US gal 2 11 Imp gal After eng...

Page 1308: ...is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 10 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 11...

Page 1309: ...en the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 2 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a...

Page 1310: ...g cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is perform...

Page 1311: ...en the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 2 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a...

Page 1312: ...g cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is perform...

Page 1313: ...timer judgment value t t 1882940 43302 Ti t 1882940 Ti The lowest coolant temperature after starting the engine Time Needed for Diagnosis Undecided Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates...

Page 1314: ...ow When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE Oil temperature senso...

Page 1315: ...ollowing conditions are not established Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idl...

Page 1316: ...following conditions are not established Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK id...

Page 1317: ...ar the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITI...

Page 1318: ...TION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle o...

Page 1319: ...ear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDIT...

Page 1320: ...TION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle o...

Page 1321: ...engine revs 13 3 kPa 100 mmHg 3 94 inHg Throttle position change during 16 milli seconds 21 Fuel shut off function Not in operation Atmospheric pressure 75 0 kPa 563 mmHg 22 2 inHg Fuel level 9 6 2 2...

Page 1322: ...ge correspond ing cylinders as NG As shown in the following figure pick a cylinder as the standard and name it omg 0 And the former crank shaft position speed is named omg 1 the second former cranksha...

Page 1323: ...ollowing cases domg 180 judgment value of positive side domg 180 judgment value of negative side Judgment value before 180 CA Diagnostic value domg 360 omg 1 omg 0 omg 3 omg 2 Misfire judg ment domg 3...

Page 1324: ...vel damaging catalyst Diagnostic value domg 720 omg 1 omg 0 omg 5 omg 4 Misfire judg ment domg 720 Judgment value Judge as misfire Judgment Value Judge that malfunction occurs when the misfire ratio i...

Page 1325: ...ION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 percentage In...

Page 1326: ...e Code DTC Detecting Criteria AV DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC P0301 Ref to GD H4SO U5 95 DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED Diagnostic Troubl...

Page 1327: ...etect the open or short circuit of knock sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1...

Page 1328: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITIO...

Page 1329: ...etect the open or short circuit of knock sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1...

Page 1330: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITIO...

Page 1331: ...ion sensor Judge as NG when the crank signal is not input even though the starter was rotated 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION A Camshaft signal B Crankshaft signal 1 Crankshaft position sen...

Page 1332: ...the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When t...

Page 1333: ...sensor output properties Judge as NG when there is a problem in the number of crankshaft signals for every revolution 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A Camshaft signal B Crankshaft signal 1 Crankshaft positi...

Page 1334: ...n criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving...

Page 1335: ...sensor Judge as NG when the number of camshaft signals remains abnormal 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously A Camshaft signal...

Page 1336: ...eria are established 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycl...

Page 1337: ...property Judge as NG when the camshaft line signal input timing is shifted from the crankshaft signal because of tim ing belt tooth chip etc 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A Camshaft signal B Crankshaft sig...

Page 1338: ...continuous driving cy cles 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK drivin...

Page 1339: ...in relay 2 Detecting circuit 5 EGR valve 7 Battery power supply 3 Switching circuit Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions After engine starting 40 seconds or more Engine coolant temperature 75 C 167...

Page 1340: ...EGR target step to 50 steps nearly full open 2 Label the intake manifold pressure value as PMON which is observed after one second has passed since EGR target step was set to 50 steps when the enable...

Page 1341: ...eration fuel cut E Intake manifold pressure During normal condition G Start diagnosis B Diagnosis enable condition H Open C EGR target step F Diagnostic mode timer I Close D EGR actual step EN 02168 O...

Page 1342: ...ION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE A F main learning Not allowed Knock learning Not allowed EGR cont...

Page 1343: ...sor C Output waveform from the front oxygen A F sensor 3 Catalytic converter A Normal Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 563 mmHg 22 2 inHg Eng...

Page 1344: ...eeded for Diagnosis 30 55 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is complet...

Page 1345: ...re change using the fuel tank pressure sensor When in 0 04 inch diagnosis perform in the order of mode Z mode A mode B mode C and mode D When in 0 02 inch diagnosis perform in the order of mode A mode...

Page 1346: ...to the target start level of P2 calculation If the tank pressure does not become the value make advanced OK judgment 1 15 seconds Mode D Negative pressure variation measure ment evaporation leakage d...

Page 1347: ...ode C Negative pressure maintained Wait until the tank pressure returns to the target start level of P2 calculation 0 20 seconds Mode D Negative pressure change calcu lated Calculate the time it takes...

Page 1348: ...c air pressure Normally the solenoid is set to OFF The valve opens and closes mechanically in accordance with the pressure difference between tank and atmospheric air or tank and canister The valve is...

Page 1349: ...e and the part below Y is charged with canister pressure If the atmospheric air pressure port is A tank pressure port is B and canister pressure port is C the air flows according to pressure differenc...

Page 1350: ...tecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION When B C solenoid OFF When Solenoid is ON 1 Valve a Atmospheric pressure b Fuel tank c Canister a Atmospheric pressure b Fuel tank c Canister EN 01718 A B C a b c...

Page 1351: ...1050 6000 rpm Fuel tank pressure 4 00 kPa 30 mmHg 1 18 inHg Intake manifold relative vacuum relative pres sure 26 7 kPa 200 mmHg 7 87 inHg Vehicle speed 32 km h 20 MPH Fuel level 9 6 54 4 2 2 54 14 3...

Page 1352: ...canister purge operation 120 seconds or more After engine starting 120 seconds or more Fuel temperature 10 70 C 14 158 F Fuel level 9 6 54 4 2 2 54 14 37 US gal 2 11 11 97 Imp gal Intake manifold rela...

Page 1353: ...leakage diagnosis is can celled Diagnostic method Purge control solenoid valve functional diagnosis is performed by monitoring the tank pressure in mode Z Normality Judgment Judge as OK and change to...

Page 1354: ...rs in 2 continuous driving cy cles When judgment for purge control solenoid valve stuck open NG is made end the evaporative diagnosis Cancel the evaporative diagnosis when the OK NG judgment for purge...

Page 1355: ...53 US gal 0 44 Imp gal for 40 seconds or more Judge as normal when all are established Leak Diagnosis DTC P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected Small Leak P0457 Evaporative Emission...

Page 1356: ...time Mode D Measure amount of negative pressure change Monitor the tank pressure change amount when using mode D In this case the tank pressure increases nears atmospheric pressure because evaporatio...

Page 1357: ...culation or when the pre determined amount of time has passed Mode D Calculate the amount of negative pressure change Monitor the tank pressure in mode D calculate P2 the pressure change in the tank a...

Page 1358: ...0 seconds 30 seconds 50 seconds 100 sec onds 160 sec onds 200 sec onds 10 L 2 6 US gal 2 2 Imp gal 0 kPa 0 mmHg 0 inHg 0 07 kPa 0 5 mmHg 0 02 inHg 0 23 kPa 1 7 mmHg 0 068 inHg 0 36 kPa 2 7 mmHg 0 106...

Page 1359: ...s Fuel level 0 seconds 30 seconds 50 seconds 100 sec onds 160 sec onds 200 sec onds 10 L 2 6 US gal 2 2 Imp gal 0 1 kPa 1 mmHg 0 03 inHg 0 47 kPa 3 5 mmHg 0 139 inHg 0 56 kPa 4 2 mmHg 0 165 inHg 0 56...

Page 1360: ...fers from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Bobbin 8 Magnetic plate 14 Retainer 2 Coil 9 Shaft 15...

Page 1361: ...lear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Pressure control solenoid valv...

Page 1362: ...ffers from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Bobbin 8 Magnetic plate 14 Retainer 2 Coil 9 Shaft 1...

Page 1363: ...Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Pressure control solenoid val...

Page 1364: ...PONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis continuously after 60 seconds or more have passed since the engine started Be sure to check the fuel level and fuel...

Page 1365: ...as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR...

Page 1366: ...t the open or short circuit of the fuel tank pressure sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis c...

Page 1367: ...CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in...

Page 1368: ...f specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis continually when purging 1 Connector A Output voltage C To fuel tank 2 Terminal B Input voltage...

Page 1369: ...ycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 1370: ...O U5 119 DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED SMALL LEAK Di agnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria BM DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT ED FUEL CAP...

Page 1371: ...rge control solenoid valve Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis...

Page 1372: ...met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3...

Page 1373: ...rge control solenoid valve Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis...

Page 1374: ...met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3...

Page 1375: ...Detect malfunctions of the fuel level sensor output property If the fuel level does not vary in a particular driving condition engine condition where it should judge as NG 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 E...

Page 1376: ...ormed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the...

Page 1377: ...or short circuit of fuel level sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine c...

Page 1378: ...elow are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is com...

Page 1379: ...or short circuit of fuel level sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine c...

Page 1380: ...ow are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is compl...

Page 1381: ...ut voltage variation of the fuel level sensor is larger than the threshold value 2 ENABLE CONDITION 3 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously at idle speed Pay attention to the...

Page 1382: ...cumulative values are not over the threshold value Otherwise when either of them is over the threshold value the diagnosis counter counts up Judge as NG if the counter indicated 4 counts 12 2S Diagnos...

Page 1383: ...le is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 Judgment Value Malfunction Criteria Thre...

Page 1384: ...r Diagnosis 5 minutes Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction...

Page 1385: ...ime Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when all of the following crit...

Page 1386: ...hicle speed fuel cut performs on vehicle speed condition and engine speed but perform the fuel cut only on engine speed condition 4 400 rpm or more ISC control Open loop compensation is set to specifi...

Page 1387: ...dgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criterion below be comes more than the time needed for diagnosis 10 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK...

Page 1388: ...AL DESCRIPTION 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memo...

Page 1389: ...udgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criterion below be comes more than the time needed for diagnosis 10 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the O...

Page 1390: ...AL DESCRIPTION 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memo...

Page 1391: ...malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as ON OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is com...

Page 1392: ...key Use of unregistered key in body inte grated unit P1570 Antenna Faulty antenna P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility Reference code incompatibility between body integrated unit and ECM P1572 IMM Ci...

Page 1393: ...below be comes more than the time needed for diagnosis 5 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR L...

Page 1394: ...ished it is judged NG Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time when all of the following criteria are established is more than the predetermined time 1 s Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 time...

Page 1395: ...t close to the target engine speed after stopping the retard angle control 2 ENABLE CONDITION Intake air amount diagnosis Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 563 mmHg...

Page 1396: ...Incomplete Engine Run Vehicle speed 3 km h 2 MPH After ISC control 1 5 sec Low limit revolution counter 2000 After the neutral switch ON OFF opera tion 3 sec Catalytic converter initial warm up retar...

Page 1397: ...0 C 50 F 20 C 68 F 30 C 86 F 40 C 104 F Average amount of intake air 9 5 g s 0 097 lb m 9 5 g s 0 097 lb m 9 5 g s 0 097 lb m 8 5 g s 0 087 lb m 6 g s 0 06 lb m AT N range Engine coolant temperature a...

Page 1398: ...AL DESCRIPTION 6 Malfunction Indicator Light Clear Condition When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memo...

Page 1399: ...ction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Secondary Parameters Enable C...

Page 1400: ...g cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is perform...

Page 1401: ...on Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engin...

Page 1402: ...U sub CPU is abnormal When the input amplifier circuit of throttle position sensor 1 is abnormal When the cruise control cannot be canceled correctly When the signal of brake SW1 and 2 is mismatched W...

Page 1403: ...n Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions 1 Igni...

Page 1404: ...T CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fi...

Page 1405: ...rol is operating 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis Target opening angle and actual opening angle 250 milliseconds F...

Page 1406: ...llumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 1 Difference between target opening angle and actual opening angle 2 Target throttle opening angle 3 NG area 1 Judgment time milliseconds 2 Thro...

Page 1407: ...Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Stop...

Page 1408: ...clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEA...

Page 1409: ...clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLE...

Page 1410: ...K when the following conditions are not established and clear the NG Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CL...

Page 1411: ...met Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 56 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle i...

Page 1412: ...ring 3 times Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row...

Page 1413: ...et Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 56 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is...

Page 1414: ...ring 3 times Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row...

Page 1415: ...e is abnormal in accordance with value of front oxygen A F sensor and running conditions such as vehicle speed amount of intake air engine coolant temperature sub feedback control etc 2 COMPONENT DESC...

Page 1416: ...able Conditions All secondary parameters enable condi tions 4 seconds or more Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 563 mmHg 22 2 inHg Rear oxygen sensor sub feedback Execution Rear oxy...

Page 1417: ...completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor main learning compensation Not allowed to calculate Front oxygen A F sensor sub learning compensation Not...

Page 1418: ...ue is abnormal in accordance with value of front oxygen A F sensor and running conditions such as vehicle speed amount of intake air engine coolant temperature sub feedback control etc 2 COMPONENT DES...

Page 1419: ...times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions All secondary parameters enable condi tions 4 seconds or more Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa...

Page 1420: ...FE Front oxygen A F sensor main learning compensation Not allowed to calculate Front oxygen A F sensor sub learning compensation Not allowed to calculate Purge control Not allowed to purge 9 ECM OPERA...

Page 1421: ...alfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 1880 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idl...

Page 1422: ...ION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPE...

Page 1423: ...g the malfunction criteria below becomes more than time needed for diagnosis 2 5 seconds Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seco...

Page 1424: ...g cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is perform...

Page 1425: ...the malfunction criteria below becomes more than time needed for diagnosis 2 5 seconds Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 second...

Page 1426: ...g cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is perform...

Page 1427: ...E Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Bobbin 8 Magnetic plate 14 Retainer 2 Coil 9 Shaft 15 Diaphragm 3 Diode 10 Plate 16 Movable core 4 Stator core 11 Valve 17 Spring 5 End plate 12 Housing 1...

Page 1428: ...performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Pressure control solenoid valve control Open...

Page 1429: ...Detect the blow by hose release abnormality Judge as NG when the diagnosis terminal voltage is high 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis cont...

Page 1430: ...the NG when the following criteria are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION Wh...

Page 1431: ...e ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform diagnosis continuously during EGR operation 1 Engine control module...

Page 1432: ...mpleted 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAF...

Page 1433: ...hen the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine control module ECM...

Page 1434: ...leted 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE...

Page 1435: ...H4SO U5 205 DTC P1492 EGR SOLE NOID VALVE SIGNAL 1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION LOW INPUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detect ing Criteria CZ DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL 3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION HIGH INPUT...

Page 1436: ...ality Judgment Judge as OFF OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 1437: ...n Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40...

Page 1438: ...etecting Criteria DH DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS For the detection standard refer to DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY Ref to GD H4SO U5 166 DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBI...

Page 1439: ...llowing criteria established is 5 seconds or more Judge as OK when the continuous time with the following criteria not established is 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 5 seconds 1 time Malfu...

Page 1440: ...s completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear Memory i...

Page 1441: ...llowing criteria established is 5 seconds or more Judge as OK when the continuous time with the following criteria not established is 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 5 seconds 1 time Malfu...

Page 1442: ...s completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear Memory i...

Page 1443: ...uit is heated 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine control module ECM 4 Drive circuit 6 Electronic throttle control rel...

Page 1444: ...ng cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row Wh...

Page 1445: ...continuously 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 400 milliseconds For NG 2000 milliseconds For OK Malfunction Indicat...

Page 1446: ...Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Stop...

Page 1447: ...sets the electric throttle control relay to OFF 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE When ignition switch ON OFF Ignition switch OFF ON Only after clearing memory 1 Engi...

Page 1448: ...N When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3...

Page 1449: ...n the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 8 80 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 1 Engine control module ECM 3...

Page 1450: ...Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Stop...

Page 1451: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 100 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION Wh...

Page 1452: ...N When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttl...

Page 1453: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 100 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION Wh...

Page 1454: ...N When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttl...

Page 1455: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 100 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION Wh...

Page 1456: ...N When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttl...

Page 1457: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 100 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION Wh...

Page 1458: ...N When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttl...

Page 1459: ...of throttle position sensor 1 is different from the throttle position sensor 2 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Throttle...

Page 1460: ...formed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAF...

Page 1461: ...nsor 1 is different from the throttle position sensor 2 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine control module ECM 3 Accel...

Page 1462: ...idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is pe...

Page 1463: ...us driving cycles Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below be comes more than 0 3 seconds 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK...

Page 1464: ...ht Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle i...

Page 1465: ...tor Light Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is comp...

Page 1466: ...GD H4SO U5 240 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION asieps_tobira book 240...

Page 1467: ...epair work for satisfying our customers by keeping their vehicle in optimum condition When replacement of parts during repair work is needed be sure to use SUBARU genuine parts All information illustr...

Page 1468: ...asieps_tobira book 2...

Page 1469: ...e Actuator 30 14 Tumble Generator Valve Position Sensor 31 15 Oil Flow Control Solenoid Valve 32 16 Wastegate Control Solenoid Valve 33 17 Front Oxygen A F Sensor 34 18 Rear Oxygen Sensor 36 19 Exhaus...

Page 1470: ...agnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P0077 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Cir cuit High Bank 1 Ref to GD H4SO U5 24 DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLE NOID CIRCUIT HIGH BANK 1 Diagnostic Troub...

Page 1471: ...Code DTC Detecting Crite ria P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1 Ref to GD H4SO U5 59 DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLT AGE BANK 1 SENSOR 1 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting...

Page 1472: ...stic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High Bank 1 or Single Sensor Ref to GD H4SO U5 103 DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR Diagnostic Troubl...

Page 1473: ...463 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit High Ref to GD H4SO U5 153 DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIR CUIT HIGH Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermit tent Ref...

Page 1474: ...eria P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range Perfor mance High Bank1 Sensor1 Ref to GD H4SO U5 192 DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE PERFORMANCE HIGH BANK1 SENSOR1 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria...

Page 1475: ...ic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM Ref to GD H4SO U5 212 DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P1578 Meter Failure Ref...

Page 1476: ...osition Sensor Switch D E Voltage Correlation Ref to GD H4SO U5 235 DTC P2138 THROTTLE PEDAL POSITION SENSOR SWITCH D E VOLTAGE CORRELATION Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P2227 Baromet...

Page 1477: ...neral Description INTAKE INDUCTION 1 General Description A SPECIFICATION Removal and installation procedures for SOHC U5 model are the same as the SOHC model Ref to IN H4SO 2 General Description asiep...

Page 1478: ...MECHANICAL ME H4SO U5 Page 1 General Description 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 1479: ...H4SO U5 2 General Description LUBRICATION 1 General Description A SPECIFICATION Specifications for SOHC U5 model are the same as the SOHC model Ref to LU H4SO 2 General Description asieps_tobira book...

Page 1480: ...SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS SP H4SO U5 Page 1 General Description 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 1481: ...H4SO U5 2 General Description MECHANICAL 1 General Description A SPECIFICATION Specifications for SOHC U5 model are the same as the SOHC model Ref to ME H4SO 2 General Description asieps_tobira book...

Page 1482: ...EXHAUST EX H4SO U5 Page 1 General Description 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 1483: ...ure k Excessive back pressure in exhaust system Clean or replace l Insufficient clearance between piston and cylin der Adjust or replace m Slipping clutch Correct or replace n Dragging brake Adjust o...

Page 1484: ...ption 2 2 Oil Pressure System 7 3 Engine Oil 9 4 Oil Pump 11 5 Oil Pan and Strainer 15 6 Oil Pressure Switch 18 7 Oil Pipe 19 8 Engine Oil Cooler 23 9 Engine Oil Filter 24 10 Engine Lubrication System...

Page 1485: ...ler tank side Specified pressure 93 123 kPa 0 95 1 25 kg cm2 14 18 psi Service limit pressure 83 kPa 0 85 kg cm2 12 psi Radiator side Specified pressure 122 152 kPa 1 24 1 55 kg cm2 18 22 psi Service...

Page 1486: ...tor cover 2 Disconnect the over flow hose A 3 Pull out the reservoir tank to the arrow direction while pushing the claw B B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal C INSPECTION Make sure...

Page 1487: ...COOLANT REPLACEMENT Engine Coolant 8 Remove the ATF hose from the clip of the radia tor main fan motor assembly AT model 9 Lower the vehicle 10 Remove the air intake duct 11 Disconnect the over flow...

Page 1488: ...flow pipe 7 Connect the over flow hose 8 Install the air intake duct 9 Lift up the vehicle 10 Connect the ATF hose to the clip of the radiator main fan motor assembly AT model 11 Install the heat shi...

Page 1489: ...shroud 2 Remove the nut which holds fan to fan motor and shroud assembly 3 Remove the bolts which hold fan motor onto shroud D ASSEMBLY Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly Tightening torque...

Page 1490: ...e 5 to 6 times at 3 000 rpm or less then stop the engine Complete this operation within 40 seconds 6 Wait for one minute after the engine stops then open the coolant filler tank cap If the engine cool...

Page 1491: ...ust be increased from 25 to 40 Find point A where the 25 line of engine coolant concentration inter sects with the 40 curve of the necessary engine coolant concentration and read the scale on the vert...

Page 1492: ...4 15 25 24 16 30 9 8 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 32 31 26 27 33 34 35 F17 MAIN FAN MOTOR B361 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 F109 3 4 1 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 5 6 7 F27 A C R...

Page 1493: ...radiator fan relay using Subaru Select Monitor NOTE When performing a forced operation radiator fan relay check using the Subaru Select Moni tor the radiator main fan and sub fan will repeat low speed...

Page 1494: ...ve the main fan relay 2 from A C relay holder 2 Measure the resistance of harness between sub fan motor connector and main fan relay 2 connector Connector terminal F16 No 2 F27 No 5 Is the resistance...

Page 1495: ...M connector Check the DTC Repair the trouble cause Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 32 Read Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC 20 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 1 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Remove main fan relay 1 from...

Page 1496: ...UIT OF MAIN FAN RELAY 2 1 Remove the main fan relay 2 from A C relay holder 2 Measure the resistance between main fan relay 2 terminal and chassis ground Connector terminal F27 No 4 Chassis ground Is...

Page 1497: ...ain engine coolant completely Ref to CO H4DOTC 13 DRAINING OF EN GINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT Engine Cool ant 5 Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from thermo stat cover 6 Remove the thermostat cover and...

Page 1498: ...temperature or if the fol lowing test shows unsatisfactory results Inspection method Immerse the thermostat and a thermometer in wa ter Raise water temperature gradually and mea sure the temperature...

Page 1499: ...rain engine coolant completely Ref to CO H4DOTC 13 DRAINING OF EN GINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT Engine Cool ant 8 Disconnect the connectors of radiator main fan A and sub fan motor B 9 Disconnect the ATF c...

Page 1500: ...20 Lift the radiator up and away from vehicle B INSTALLATION 1 Attach the radiator lower cushion to the hole on the radiator lower bracket 2 Install the radiator to vehicle NOTE Make pins on the lower...

Page 1501: ...or outlet hose 13 Connect the connectors to the radiator main fan motor A and sub fan motor B 14 Install the heat shield cover AT model 15 Install the under cover 16 Lower the vehicle 17 Connect the b...

Page 1502: ...oolant leaking from the radiator or its vicinity There is coolant leaking from the hoses or con nections CAUTION Inspection must be carried out at the side of coolant filler tank not at the side of ra...

Page 1503: ...00 rpm 225 4 kPa 23 0 mAq Engine coolant temperature 80 C 176 F Impeller diameter mm in 76 2 99 Number of impeller vanes 8 Pump pulley diameter mm in 60 2 36 Clearancebetween impeller and case Standar...

Page 1504: ...ow Speed Low Speed High Speed High High Speed High Speed High Speed During acceleration 20 69 km h 12 43 MPH During deceleration 11 64 km h 7 40 MPH OFF OFF Low Speed High Speed Low High Speed High Sp...

Page 1505: ...5 Gasket Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Gasket 6 Heater by pass hose T1 First 12 1 2 8 9 3 Thermostat 7 Coolant filler by pass hose Second 12 1 2 8 9 4 Water pump ASSY 8 Water by pass pipe T2 12...

Page 1506: ...l Description COOLING 2 RADIATOR AND RADIATOR FAN CO 02132 C B T4 T2 T2 T3 T3 27 26 5 8 9 7 5 10 25 29 12 11 14 5 5 6 5 1 2 3 4 28 22 23 5 30 21 13 24 15 15 15 17 16 18 19 20 15 B C T3 T3 T3 T1 T1 asi...

Page 1507: ...g connectors of sensors or units be sure to disconnect the ground cable from battery 1 Radiator lower cushion 14 Radiator main fan ASSY 26 Coolant filler tank hose A 2 Radiator 15 ATF hose clamp AT mo...

Page 1508: ...Y WRENCH Used to stop rotation of the crank pulley when loosening or tightening crank pulley bolts 499977500 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH Used for removing and installing intake cam sprocket 499207400 CAM SPRO...

Page 1509: ...EMENT Engine Coolant 3 Disconnect the engine coolant hoses from cool ant filler tank 4 Remove the bolts which install the coolant filler tank 5 Disconnect the engine coolant hose which con nects the u...

Page 1510: ...COOLANT REPLACEMENT Engine Coolant 8 Remove the ATF hose from the clip of the radia tor sub fan motor assembly AT model 9 Lower the vehicle 10 Remove the air intake duct 11 Disconnect the over flow h...

Page 1511: ...r flow pipe 7 Connect the over flow hose 8 Install the air intake duct 9 Lift up the vehicle 10 Connect the ATF hose to the clip of the radiator sub fan motor assembly AT model 11 Install the heat shi...

Page 1512: ...shroud 2 Remove the nut which holds fan to fan motor and shroud assembly 3 Remove the bolts which hold fan motor onto shroud D ASSEMBLY Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly Tightening torque 5...

Page 1513: ...procket LH using ST Ref to ME H4DOTC 50 REMOVAL Cam Sprocket 10 Remove the tensioner bracket 11 Remove the belt cover LH No 2 12 Disconnect the hose from water pump 13 Remove the water pump B INSTALLA...

Page 1514: ...m 4 0 kgf m 28 9 ft lb 10 Install the timing belt Ref to ME H4DOTC 45 TIMING BELT INSTALLATION Timing Belt 11 Install the V belts Ref to ME H4DOTC 37 INSTALLATION V belt 12 Install the radiator Ref t...

Page 1515: ...11 REMOVAL Intake Man ifold 2 Fit the depression in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp to unlock 3 Remove the PCV hose assembly ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS B INSTALLATION NOTE Replace the clamp wi...

Page 1516: ...H4DOTC Page 1 General Description 2 2 Air Cleaner Element 7 3 Air Cleaner Case 8 4 Air Intake Duct 9 5 Resonator Chamber 10 6 Intake Duct 11 7 Intercooler 12 8 Turbocharger 13 9 Air By pass Valve 16 a...

Page 1517: ...50 REMOVAL Fuel Filler Pipe 2 Disconnect the evaporation hose from the shut valve 3 Remove the shut valve from the fuel filler pipe B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening to...

Page 1518: ...9 Fuel Sub Level Sensor A REMOVAL For removal procedure refer to FU H4DOTC section Ref to FU H4DOTC 56 REMOVAL Fuel Sub Level Sensor B INSTALLATION For installation procedure refer to FU F4DOTC secti...

Page 1519: ...ipe Ref to EX H4DOTC 8 REMOVAL Center Ex haust Pipe 2 Disconnect the front catalytic converter A from the rear catalytic converter B B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Use a n...

Page 1520: ...ic converter is built into the joint pipe Refer to joint pipe removal for the removal proce dures Ref to EX H4DOTC 11 REMOVAL Joint Pipe B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal C INSPEC...

Page 1521: ...4 Drain Valve A SPECIFICATION Canister is a non disassembled part so do not re move the drain valve from canister Refer to Canister for removal and installation pro cedure Ref to EC H4DOTC 6 REMOVAL C...

Page 1522: ...pe Ref to EX H4DOTC 8 REMOVAL Center Ex haust Pipe 2 Disconnect the rear catalytic converter B from the front catalytic converter A B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Use a ne...

Page 1523: ...Disconnect the drain valve connector B 7 Remove clip C 8 Remove the canister from body B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Check that there is no damage or dust on the quick co...

Page 1524: ...re refer to Fuel Level Sensor for removal procedure Ref to FU H4DOTC 55 REMOVAL Fuel Level Sensor B INSTALLATION The fuel temperature sensor and fuel level sensor are integrated into one unit therefor...

Page 1525: ...2 Drain Filter A SPECIFICATION Canister is a non disassembled part so do not re move the drain filter from canister Refer to Canister for removal and installation pro cedure Ref to EC H4DOTC 6 REMOVAL...

Page 1526: ...placement Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv ing Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque Place shop jack...

Page 1527: ...nect the evaporation hose from the intake manifold and fuel pipe assembly 6 Remove the purge control solenoid valve from the solenoid valve bracket assembly B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order...

Page 1528: ...e from battery 4 Lift up the vehicle 5 Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank pressure sensor 6 Disconnect the pressure hose from the fuel tank pressure sensor 7 Remove the fuel tank pressure sen...

Page 1529: ...m the pressure con trol solenoid valve 5 Disconnect the evaporation hose B from the pressure control solenoid valve 6 Remove the bolts C which secure the bracket to the fuel tank 7 Remove the pressure...

Page 1530: ...ICES 7 Fuel Level Sensor A REMOVAL For removal procedure refer to FU H4DOTC section Ref to FU H4DOTC 55 REMOVAL Fuel Level Sensor B INSTALLATION For installation procedure refer to FU H4DOTC section R...

Page 1531: ...Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool because the circuit for Subaru Select Monitor may be damaged EN 00037 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 14 16 Terminal No Remarks Terminal No Remarks 1 Power...

Page 1532: ...DTC Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 68 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 2 MODE 01 CURRENT POWERTRAIN DIAGNOSTIC DATA Refer to data denoting the current operating condition of analog input output digital inpu...

Page 1533: ...Refer to the data of DTC pending code for troubleshooting result about emission in the first time 8 MODE 09 Refer to the data of vehicle specification V I N calibration ID etc PID Data Unit of measur...

Page 1534: ...Immo bilizer immobilizer system must be registered To do so all ignition keys and ID cards need to be pre pared Refer to the IMMOBILIZER TEACHING OPERATION MANUAL 7 Connectors of each sensor in the en...

Page 1535: ...mplex electronic control Malfunction indi cator light in the combination meter indicates oc currence of a fault or trouble Further against such a failure or sensors as may disable the drive the fail s...

Page 1536: ...s determined by the duration of an electric pulse applied to the fuel injector and this permits simple yet highly precise metering of the fuel Furthermore all operating conditions of the en gine are c...

Page 1537: ...e rollers In order to prevent the vehicle from slipping due to vibration do not place any wooden blocks or similar items between the rigid racks and vehicle Since the rear wheels will also rotate do n...

Page 1538: ...corre sponding DTC appears on the display screen NOTE For detailed operation procedure refer to the SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION MANUAL For details concerning DTC refer to List of Di agnostic Troub...

Page 1539: ...1st gear MT model and drive the vehicle at 5 to 10 km h 3 to 6 MPH NOTE For AWD model release the parking brake The speed difference between front and rear wheels may light the ABS warning light but t...

Page 1540: ...for Stable Operation P0128 Coolant Thermostat Engine Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regulat ing Temperature Engine coolant temperature at engine start is 55 C 131 F or less P0133 O2 Sensor Circ...

Page 1541: ...72 System Too Rich Bank 1 Diagnosis completes in drive cycle A or C as well P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected Diagnosis completes in drive cycle A or C as well P0302 Cylinder 2 Misfire Detected Diagno...

Page 1542: ...etes in drive cycle A or B as well P0172 System Too Rich Bank 1 Diagnosis completes in drive cycle A or B as well P0244 Turbo Super Charger Wastegate Solenoid A Range Performance P0246 Turbo Super Cha...

Page 1543: ...Memory Mode 3 Drive the vehicle for the distance equal to the fuel of 50 2 13 2 US gal 11 Imp gal NOTE It is possible to drive intermittently Do not disconnect the terminal of battery during diagnosis...

Page 1544: ...ECT MONITOR OPERATION MANUAL 2 SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OBD MODE 1 On the Main Menu display screen select Each System Check and press the YES key 2 On the System Selection Menu display screen select Engi...

Page 1545: ...r 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON and the Sub aru Select Monitor or general scan tool power switch to ON 4 Read the DTC on Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool Is DTC displayed on the Sub aru S...

Page 1546: ...y scan tools except the Sub aru Select Monitor or the general scan tool 6 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF and Subaru Select Monitor switch to ON 7 On the Main Menu display screen select Each...

Page 1547: ...ANUAL Description Display Compulsory fuel pump relay operation check Fuel Pump Compulsory radiator fan relay operation check Radiator Fan Relay Compulsory air conditioning relay oper ation check A C C...

Page 1548: ...ass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range Performance Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 90 DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE PERFORMANCE Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0102 Mass o...

Page 1549: ...D BANK 1 SENSOR 1 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 2 Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 130 DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE BANK 1 SEN...

Page 1550: ...ance Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 170 DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE PERFORMANCE Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor A Cir cuit Bank 1 o...

Page 1551: ...OR A Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower Than Expected Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 209 DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYS TEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED Di...

Page 1552: ...tic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P1312 Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor Malfunction Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 230 DTC P1312 EXHAUST GAS TEMPERA TURE SENSOR MALFUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure wit...

Page 1553: ...CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN BANK 2 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P2012 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit Low Bank 2 Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 256 DTC P2012 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUN NER C...

Page 1554: ...rouble Code DTC P2123 Throttle Pedal Position Sensor Switch D Circuit High Input Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 303 DTC P2123 THROTTLE PEDAL POSI TION SENSOR SWITCH D CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT Diagnostic Procedure wi...

Page 1555: ...nnect the diagnosis cable to the data link connector CAUTION Do not connect the scan tools except for Suba ru Select Monitor and general scan tool 5 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF and Subar...

Page 1556: ...m Throttle opening angle signal Throttle Opening Angle 2 0 2 4 Rear oxygen sensor voltage Rear O2 Sensor V 0 1 0 V Battery voltage Battery Voltage V 12 15 V Mass air flow voltage Air Flow Sensor Volt...

Page 1557: ...ignal Starter Switch OFF input Rear oxygen monitor Rear O2 Rich Signal Rich Lean Knocking signal Knock Signal None Crankshaft position sensor signal Crankshaft Position Sig Provided Camshaft position...

Page 1558: ...N MANUAL Brake switch signal Brake Switch OFF At OFF Main switch signal Main Switch OFF At OFF Integrated unit data reception Body Int Unit Data Provided Integrated unit data update Body Int Unit Coun...

Page 1559: ...ntrol sys tem Evaporative purge system Finish or incomplete Test of secondary air system Secondary air system No support Test of air conditioning system refrigerant A C system refrigerant No support O...

Page 1560: ...m for Bank1 Engine load data Engine Load Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp C or F Short term fuel trim by front oxygen A F sensor Bank 1 Short term fuel trim B1 Long term fuel trim by fro...

Page 1561: ...erator valve signal is input Tumble generator valve drive sig nal TGV Drive Open or Close Tumble generator valve open Drain valve signal Vent Control Solenoid ON or OFF When drain valve is ON AT retar...

Page 1562: ...isplay screen select Engine Control System and press the YES key 3 Press the YES key after the information of engine type has been displayed 4 On the Engine Diagnosis display screen select VIN Registr...

Page 1563: ...ition Data A ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION Measuring condition After engine is warmed up Gear position is in neutral Turn the A C to OFF Turn all the accessory switches to OFF Remarks Specification Engine...

Page 1564: ...ALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON Malfunction Indicator Light 3 Malfunction indicator light does not go off Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 49 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO OFF Malfunction I...

Page 1565: ...function indica tor light goes out If it does not go off either the en gine or emission control system has malfunction 3 Turn the ignition switch to OFF and connect the test mode connector 1 When the...

Page 1566: ...24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 3 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 1 3 4 5 6 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Step C...

Page 1567: ...ir the following item Open circuit in harness between ECM and combi nation meter con nector Poor contact in coupling connector 5 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of combination meter con nector I...

Page 1568: ...SWITCH BATTERY B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 3 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 1 3 4 5 6 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8...

Page 1569: ...1 2 1 2 1 2 D B134 A 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 14 15 24 25 26 16 17 18 19 20 21 27 28 29 30 31 4...

Page 1570: ...nnect the connectors from ECM 3 Measure the resistance of harness between test mode connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B76 No 1 Chassis ground Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 R...

Page 1571: ...6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 14 15 24 25 26 16 17 18 19 20 21 27 28 29 30 31 4 16 3 8 36 A34 B122 1 3...

Page 1572: ...cycle of 3 Hz when test mode connec tor is connected 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM CON NECTOR AND CHASSIS GROUND TERMI NAL 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 3 Measur...

Page 1573: ...ic throttle control 2 Engine coolant temperature sensor 3 Manifold absolute pressure sensor 4 Mass air flow sensor 4 Poor acceleration 1 Manifold absolute pressure sensor 2 Mass air flow and intake ai...

Page 1574: ...ak in air intake system 7 Spark knock 1 Manifold absolute pressure sensor 2 Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor 3 Engine coolant temperature sensor 4 Knock sensor 5 Fuel injection parts 4...

Page 1575: ...EN H4DOTC diag 322 General Diagnostic Table ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS asieps_tobira book 322...

Page 1576: ...GENERAL DESCRIPTION GD H4DOTC Page 1 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 2 2 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria 9 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 1577: ...the List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 68 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Go to step 2 2 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Start the engine and let it idle 2 Inspect the output of AVCS...

Page 1578: ...to EN H4DOTC diag 68 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Go to step 2 2 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Start the engine and let it idle 2 Inspect the output of AVCS advance angle and oil flow control solenoid...

Page 1579: ...t perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02937 SBF 5 B47 1 2 4 6 3...

Page 1580: ...s than 1 Go to step 3 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and front oxygen A F sensor connector 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR CONNEC TOR Measure the resistance of...

Page 1581: ...perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02937 SBF 5 B47 1 2 4 6 3 5...

Page 1582: ...OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 3 Measure the resistance between front oxy gen A F sensor connector and ECM connec tor Connector terminal B18 No 1 B134 No 2 B18 No 1 B134 No 3 Is the resistan...

Page 1583: ...t perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02937 SBF 5 B47 1 2 4 6 3...

Page 1584: ...B136 No 7 Chassis ground Is the resistance less than 5 Go to step 2 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM connector and chassis ground 2 CHECK THE VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECM AND FRONT OXYGEN A F SEN...

Page 1585: ...ection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03940 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B83 B47 1 2 4 6 3 5 E E B21 E2 35 B83 3 4 1 2 5 6 B135 B47 B19 B136 1 4 2 3 T6 B4 B1 B2 D25 D31 C35 ECM B136 B137 C B135 B D B C B137 D 5 6 7 8 2 1...

Page 1586: ...terminal B135 No 2 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 3 Repair the ground short circuit of har ness between ECM and rear oxy gen sensor 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND REAR OXY...

Page 1587: ...Terminals No 1 No 2 Is the resistance less than 30 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between rear oxygen sen sor and ECM con necto...

Page 1588: ...pection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03940 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B83 B47 1 2 4 6 3 5 E E B21 E2 35 B83 3 4 1 2 5 6 B135 B47 B19 B136 1 4 2 3 T6 B4 B1 B2 D25 D31 C35 ECM B136 B137 C B135 B D B C B137 D 5 6 7 8 2 1...

Page 1589: ...e resistance less than 5 Go to step 2 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and engine ground cable Poor contact in ECM con...

Page 1590: ...the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM B83 3 1 2 3...

Page 1591: ...c Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0106 2 CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check the relative DTC List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Re...

Page 1592: ...ngine stalls Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref...

Page 1593: ...C displayed Check the appro priate DTC using the List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 68 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC...

Page 1594: ...Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOT...

Page 1595: ...NPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM connector and chassis ground while engine is idling Connector terminal B136 No 23 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 0 2 V Go to step 4 Go to st...

Page 1596: ...5 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 7 Repair the ground short circuit between ECM and mass air flow sen sor connector 7 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of mass air flow s...

Page 1597: ...s Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DO...

Page 1598: ...returned to a nor mal condition at this time Go to step 2 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from mass air flow...

Page 1599: ...g the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM B83 3 1 2...

Page 1600: ...ensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal E21 No 3 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 4 5 V Go to step 5 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and manifold absolute pressure se...

Page 1601: ...ng the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM B83 3 1 2...

Page 1602: ...lute pressure sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal E21 No 3 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 4 5 V Go to step 5 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and manifold absol...

Page 1603: ...mproper idling Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode R...

Page 1604: ...asure the engine coolant temperature using the Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4...

Page 1605: ...driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC dia...

Page 1606: ...connector 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND THE ECM CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from the mass air flow and intake...

Page 1607: ...r driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC di...

Page 1608: ...d Connector terminal B3 No 4 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of the harness between mass air flow and intake air tempera ture sensor and the ECM connec tor...

Page 1609: ...d Connector terminal B3 No 5 Engine ground Is the resistance less than 5 Replace the mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor Ref to FU H4DOTC 26 Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temper ature Senso...

Page 1610: ...ring or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DI...

Page 1611: ...f coupling connector Poor contact of joint connector 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from the...

Page 1612: ...iring or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING D...

Page 1613: ...e sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal E8 No 2 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between ECM and engine coolant tempera ture sen...

Page 1614: ...inal E8 No 1 Engine ground Is the resistance less than 5 Replace the engine coolant temperature sen sor Ref to FU H4DOTC 21 Engine Coolant Temperature Sen sor Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE I...

Page 1615: ...B20 E57 B E E D6 B35 16 15 E2 B21 39 38 19 20 35 36 37 4 6 1 2 3 5 D4 D5 C35 C16 A34 B1 B4 D1 D2 D3 C29 C18 6 7 8 5 B362 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23...

Page 1616: ...6 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and...

Page 1617: ...B20 E57 B E E D6 B35 16 15 E2 B21 39 38 19 20 35 36 37 4 6 1 2 3 5 D4 D5 C35 C16 A34 B1 B4 D1 D2 D3 C29 C18 6 7 8 5 B362 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23...

Page 1618: ...tween ECM con nector and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B136 No 18 E57 No 6 B136 No 35 E57 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness...

Page 1619: ...TION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspectio...

Page 1620: ...68 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0125 Go to step 2 2 CHECK ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM NOTE Check the following items Thermostat open stuck Coola...

Page 1621: ...ormance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDUR...

Page 1622: ...rouble Code DTC Go to step 2 2 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Measure the resistance between engine cool ant temperature sensor terminals when the engine coolant is cold and after warmed up T...

Page 1623: ...ONDITION Was the vehicle driven or idled with the engine partially sub merged under water In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0128 Go to step 2 2 CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY Is any oth...

Page 1624: ...perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02937 SBF 5 B47 1 2 4 6 3 5...

Page 1625: ...OR CONNEC TOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from ECM and front oxygen A F sensor connector 3 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM connector and chassis ground C...

Page 1626: ...perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02937 SBF 5 B47 1 2 4 6 3 5...

Page 1627: ...GEN A F SENSOR CONNEC TOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Disconnect the connector from front oxygen A F sensor 3 Measure the voltage of harness between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector t...

Page 1628: ...part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02937 SBF 5 B47 1 2 4...

Page 1629: ...le Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0133 Go to step 2 2 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM NOTE Check the following items Loose installation of front portion of exhaust pipe onto cylin...

Page 1630: ...ive part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02937 SBF 5 B47 1 2...

Page 1631: ...ect the connectors from ECM and front oxygen A F sensor 3 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and front oxygen A F sensor connector Connector terminal B134 No 26 B18 No 4 B134 No 33 B18 No 3...

Page 1632: ...ction Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03940 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B83 B47 1 2 4 6 3 5 E E B21 E2 35 B83 3 4 1 2 5 6 B135 B47 B19 B136 1 4 2 3 T6 B4 B1 B2 D25 D31 C35 ECM B136 B137 C B135 B D B C B137 D 5 6 7 8 2 1 9...

Page 1633: ...OR AND COUPLING CONNECTOR Does water enter the connec tor Dry the water thor oughly Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Discon...

Page 1634: ...items Loose part and incomplete installation of ex haust system Damage crack hole etc of parts Loose part and improper installation between front oxygen A F sensor and rear oxygen sen sor Is there any...

Page 1635: ...ection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03940 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B83 B47 1 2 4 6 3 5 E E B21 E2 35 B83 3 4 1 2 5 6 B135 B47 B19 B136 1 4 2 3 T6 B4 B1 B2 D25 D31 C35 ECM B136 B137 C B135 B D B C B137 D 5 6 7 8 2 1...

Page 1636: ...R AND COUPLING CONNECTOR Does water enter the connec tor Dry the water thor oughly Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconn...

Page 1637: ...items Loose part and incomplete installation of ex haust system Damage crack hole etc of parts Loose part and improper installation between front oxygen A F sensor and rear oxygen sen sor Is there any...

Page 1638: ...pection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03940 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B83 B47 1 2 4 6 3 5 E E B21 E2 35 B83 3 4 1 2 5 6 B135 B47 B19 B136 1 4 2 3 T6 B4 B1 B2 D25 D31 C35 ECM B136 B137 C B135 B D B C B137 D 5 6 7 8 2 1...

Page 1639: ...o step 3 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and rear oxygen sen sor connector 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect th...

Page 1640: ...manifold Ref to ME H4DOTC 24 INSPECTION Fuel Pressure WARNING Release fuel pressure before removing the fuel pressure gauge NOTE If fuel pressure does not increase squeeze the fuel return hose 2 to 3...

Page 1641: ...GINE Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 24 Subaru Select Mon itor General scan tool For detailed operation procedure refer to the general scan tool operation manual Is the measured value 2 7 4 7 g s 0 36 0 62 lb m...

Page 1642: ...N After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection M...

Page 1643: ...DISPLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check the appro priate DTC using the List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 68 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not...

Page 1644: ...ring or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DI...

Page 1645: ...minates the circuit has returned to a nor mal condition at this time 2 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Remove the access hole lid 3 Disconnect the connector from fuel pump 4 Tur...

Page 1646: ...iring or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING D...

Page 1647: ...between fuel pump connector and chassis ground Connector terminal R58 No 2 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair battery short circuit of har ness between ECM and fuel pump connector Go...

Page 1648: ...p connector and ECM Connector terminal R58 No 3 B136 No 35 Is the resistance less than 1 Replace the fuel temperature sen sor Ref to EC H4DOTC 9 Fuel Temperature Sensor Repair the har ness and connec...

Page 1649: ...B20 E57 B E E D6 B35 16 15 E2 B21 39 38 19 20 35 36 37 4 6 1 2 3 5 D4 D5 C35 C16 A34 B1 B4 D1 D2 D3 C29 C18 6 7 8 5 B362 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23...

Page 1650: ...an 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector te...

Page 1651: ...1 B20 E57 B E E D6 B35 16 15 E2 B21 39 38 19 20 35 36 37 4 6 1 2 3 5 D4 D5 C35 C16 A34 B1 B4 D1 D2 D3 C29 C18 6 7 8 5 B362 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 2...

Page 1652: ...tors from electronic throttle control 4 Measure the resistance between ECM con nector and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B136 No 35 E57 No 3 B136 No 29 E57 No 4 Is the resist...

Page 1653: ...N Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02936 E E M 10 7 6 5 6 No 11 B362 R122 B135 B B137 D R58 B97 7 D28 B27 2 1 9 8 5 19 8 R1 20...

Page 1654: ...l unit and chassis ground Connector terminal R122 No 5 Chassis ground Is the resistance less than 5 Go to step 3 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open cir...

Page 1655: ...UMP CONTROL UNIT AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between fuel pump control unit and chassis ground Connector terminal R122 No 9 Chassis ground R122 No 8 Chassis ground Is the resis...

Page 1656: ...e CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Insp...

Page 1657: ...Is any other DTC displayed Check the appro priate DTC using the List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 68 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary...

Page 1658: ...acing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 031...

Page 1659: ...ector terminal B134 No 32 E64 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair open circuit of harness between ECM and wastegate control solenoid valve connector NOTE In this case repair the fol...

Page 1660: ...lacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03...

Page 1661: ...tact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM Ref to FU H4DOTC 38 Engine Control Module ECM 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE AND ECM CONNECTOR...

Page 1662: ...Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03953 E E 4 1 2 SBF 7 3 1 2 2 1 2 B21 1...

Page 1663: ...e resistance between ECM con nector and engine ground on faulty cylinders Connector terminal 1 E5 No 1 Engine ground 2 E16 No 1 Engine ground 3 E6 No 1 Engine ground 4 E17 No 1 Engine ground Is the re...

Page 1664: ...ound 4 B136 No 3 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between ECM and fuel injector After repair replace the ECM Ref to FU H4DOTC 38 Engine Control...

Page 1665: ...eration if the engine has no abnormality Repair the poor contact NOTE In this case repair the following item Poor contact of ignition coil con nector Poor contact of fuel injector con nector on faulty...

Page 1666: ...de DTC Detecting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Poor driving performance Knocking occurs CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERAT...

Page 1667: ...k sensor and ECM connector Poor contact of knock sensor con nector Poor contact of coupling connector 2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR 1 Disconnect the connector from knock sen sor 2 Measure the resistance betwee...

Page 1668: ...de DTC Detecting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Poor driving performance Knocking occurs CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERAT...

Page 1669: ...ir the ground short circuit of har ness between knock sensor con nector and ECM connector NOTE The harness be tween both connec tors are shielded Repair the short circuit of harness covered with shiel...

Page 1670: ...TROUBLE SYMPTOM Engine stalls Failure of engine to start CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and...

Page 1671: ...Go to step 3 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CRANK SHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND ECM CON NECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between crankshaft position sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal...

Page 1672: ...DTC Detecting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Engine stalls Failure of engine to start CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATIO...

Page 1673: ...Go to step 3 Tighten the crank shaft position sen sor installation bolt securely 3 CHECK CRANKSHAFT SPROCKET Remove the front belt cover Are crank sprocket teeth cracked or damaged Replace the crank s...

Page 1674: ...Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02941 B47 1 2 4 6 3 5 E E2 B21 3 C35 SBF 7 E35 E1 B20 2 E36 B21 E2 1 19 3 B9 B83 2 1 ECM B135 B B136 C 48 1 3 4 1 2 5 6 B20 E...

Page 1675: ...CONNECTOR AND ECM 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from ECM 3 Measure the resistance between camshaft position sensor connector and ECM Connector terminal E36 No 2 B135 No...

Page 1676: ...4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02941 B47 1 2 4 6 3 5 E E2 B21 3 C35 SBF 7 E35 E1 B20 2 E36 B21 E2 1 19 3 B9 B83 2 1 ECM B135 B B136 C 48 1 3 4 1 2 5 6 B20 E36 B47 1 2 3 1 2...

Page 1677: ...CONNECTOR AND ECM 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from ECM 3 Measure the resistance between camshaft position sensor connector and ECM Connector terminal E35 No 2 B135 No...

Page 1678: ...Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03942 5 3 6 4 2 1 1 4 3 2 3 2 C35 B2 D25 D31 A2 A3 A26 A33 A25 4 E B18 B19 T6 B47 B47 3 4 1 2 5 6 T6 B135 B B136 C B137 D B83...

Page 1679: ...pipe and front catalyt ic converter Between front catalytic converter and rear catalytic converter Loose part and improper installation of front oxygen A F sensor or rear oxygen sensor Is there any f...

Page 1680: ...onitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 24 Subaru Select Mon itor Is the voltage more than 490 mV Go to step 9 Go to step 6 6 CHECK REAR OXY...

Page 1681: ...TE For MT model depress the clutch pedal Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 24 Subaru Select Mon itor Is the voltage 250...

Page 1682: ...Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03943 SBF 7 B21 E2 E4 B47 E 5 3 6 4 2 1 B134 E...

Page 1683: ...te the drain valve NOTE Drain valve operation can be executed using Subaru Select Monitor For procedure refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 43 Compulsory Valve Operati...

Page 1684: ...it Repair or replace the canister Ref toEC H4DOTC 6 Canister Go to step 10 10 CHECK FUEL TANK Remove the fuel tank Ref to FU H4DOTC 44 Fuel Tank Is the fuel tank damaged or is there any hole of more t...

Page 1685: ...N After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection M...

Page 1686: ...HARNESS BETWEEN DRAIN VALVE AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from drain valve and ECM 3 Measure the resistance of harness between drain valve connector a...

Page 1687: ...more than 10 V Go to step 7 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between main relay and drain valve Poor contact of coupling connector...

Page 1688: ...UTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspecti...

Page 1689: ...10 V Go to step 4 Go to step 3 3 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check the poor contact of ECM connector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM Ref to FU H4...

Page 1690: ...ON After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection...

Page 1691: ...Open the fuel flap Is the fuel filler cap tightened securely Go to step 3 Tighten fuel filler cap securely 3 CHECK PRESSURE VACUUM LINE NOTE Check the following items Disconnection leakage and cloggin...

Page 1692: ...CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspec...

Page 1693: ...V Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Contact with SOA Service Center 4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM and chas sis ground Connector terminal B136 No 21 Chassis ground...

Page 1694: ...circuit of har ness between ECM and rear wir ing harness con nector 9 CHECK FUEL TANK CORD 1 Disconnect the connector from fuel tank pressure sensor 2 Measure the resistance of fuel tank cord Connect...

Page 1695: ...CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspe...

Page 1696: ...ef to FU H4DOTC 38 Engine Control Module ECM 4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM and chas sis ground Connector terminal B136 No 21 Chassis ground Is the voltage less than 0 2 V...

Page 1697: ...Connector terminal R213 No 4 R47 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 10 Repair the open circuit in fuel tank cord 10 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check for poor contact in fuel tank pressure sensor co...

Page 1698: ...Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03943 SBF 7 B21 E2 E4 B47 E 5 3 6 4 2 1...

Page 1699: ...te the drain valve NOTE Drain valve operation can be executed using Subaru Select Monitor For procedure refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 43 Compulsory Valve Operati...

Page 1700: ...it Repair or replace the canister Ref toEC H4DOTC 6 Canister Go to step 10 10 CHECK FUEL TANK Remove the fuel tank Ref to FU H4DOTC 44 Fuel Tank Is the fuel tank damaged or is there any hole of more t...

Page 1701: ...EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03943 SBF 7 B21 E2 E4 B47 E 5 3 6 4 2 1 B134 ECM 2 1 41 48 13 12...

Page 1702: ...uted using Subaru Select Monitor For procedure refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 43 Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Does the drain valve operate Go to step 6 R...

Page 1703: ...e the fuel tank Ref to FU H4DOTC 44 Fuel Tank Go to step 10 10 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON TROL SYSTEM Are there holes of more than 0 5 mm 0 020 in dia cracks clogg...

Page 1704: ...After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mod...

Page 1705: ...l B134 No 14 E4 No 2 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and purge control sole noid valve connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item...

Page 1706: ...After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mo...

Page 1707: ...lenoid valve terminals Terminals No 1 No 2 Is the resistance 29 35 Go to step 3 Replace the purge control solenoid valve Ref to EC H4DOTC 7 Purge Control Solenoid Valve 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PURGE C...

Page 1708: ...0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT LOW Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERA...

Page 1709: ...ION Two consecutive driving cycles with fault GENERAL DESCRIPTION Ref to GD H4DOTC 151 DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT IN TERMITTENT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria CAUTION After re...

Page 1710: ...DITION Immediately at fault recognition GENERAL DESCRIPTION Ref to GD H4DOTC 155 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A Di agnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing t...

Page 1711: ...B83 B122 E1 B20 E57 B E E D6 B35 16 15 E2 B21 39 38 19 20 35 36 37 4 6 1 2 3 5 D4 D5 C35 C16 A34 B1 B4 D1 D2 D3 C29 C18 6 7 8 5 B362 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19...

Page 1712: ...to step 2 2 CHECK AIR CLEANER ELEMENT 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Check the air cleaner element Is there excessive clogging on air cleaner element Replace the air cleaner element Ref to IN H4...

Page 1713: ...22 E1 B20 E57 B E E D6 B35 16 15 E2 B21 39 38 19 20 35 36 37 4 6 1 2 3 5 D4 D5 C35 C16 A34 B1 B4 D1 D2 D3 C29 C18 6 7 8 5 B362 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21...

Page 1714: ...switch to ON 2 Start and idle the engine 3 Check the following items Loose installation of intake manifold and throttle body Cracks of intake manifold gasket and throttle body gasket Disconnection of...

Page 1715: ...g 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02935 No 21 B225 B225 B106 MAIN SBF SBF 6 E 15 13 16 14 ECM B137 D B135 B106 B...

Page 1716: ...e more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between igni tion switch and ECM Repair the poor contact of ECM Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY Is any other DTC displa...

Page 1717: ...ting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Hard to start Improper idling Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPER...

Page 1718: ...ature sensor Poor contact in ECM Poor contact of joint connector 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN EXHAUST TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND ECM CON NECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from...

Page 1719: ...cting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Hard to start Improper idling Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPE...

Page 1720: ...re sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal B392 No 1 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between ECM and exhaust temperature sen sor...

Page 1721: ...607 CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN EXHAUST TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND ECM CON NECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Measure t...

Page 1722: ...spection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03954 B72 SBF 6 MAIN SBF SBF 7 No 13 SBF 5 B72 D16 A6 A7 B1 B4 D7 B12 D1 D2 D3 B5 B6 B19 D14 No 12 B47 E2 B21 2 1 4 6 5 3 ECM E E 3 6 B134 B135 B137 A B D 54 35 36 12 3...

Page 1723: ...h to ON 2 Measure the voltage between ECM con nector and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 5 Chassis ground B135 No 6 Chassis ground Is the voltage 10 13 V Go to step 2 Repair the open or grou...

Page 1724: ...ion Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode CD DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MIL REQUEST NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to AT section Ref to 5AT diag 2 Basic Diagnosti...

Page 1725: ...fective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02937 SBF 5 B47...

Page 1726: ...xygen A F sensor connector Connector terminal B134 No 26 B18 No 4 B134 No 33 B18 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 3 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the followi...

Page 1727: ...efective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02937 SBF 5 B4...

Page 1728: ...Turn the ignition switch to ON 3 Measure the voltage between ECM con nector and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 26 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 4 5 V Go to step 5 Go to step 6 5 C...

Page 1729: ...INE DIAGNOSTICS CI DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC P2101 Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 290 DTC P2101 THROT TLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE PERFORMANCE D...

Page 1730: ...a TROUBLE SYMPTOM Improper idling Engine stalls Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear...

Page 1731: ...K DTC Perform the troubleshooting of DTC P0301 P0302 P0303 and P0304 Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 68 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Does any trouble needing repair or replacement exist Repair or replace...

Page 1732: ...ouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to...

Page 1733: ...PLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check the appro priate DTC using the List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 68 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not nece...

Page 1734: ...emory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03951 SBF 7 R68 B47 R67 B97 R213 1 2 3 4 1 2 5 6 R68 R213 R15 R67 R46 R1 B97 B47 E 12 5 3 6 4 2 1 1...

Page 1735: ...n this case repair the following item Open circuit in harness between ECM and pressure control solenoid valve connector Poor contact of coupling connector 5 CHECK PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Measu...

Page 1736: ...epairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRIN...

Page 1737: ...3 3 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check the poor contact of ECM connector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM Ref to FU H4DOTC 38 Engine Control Modul...

Page 1738: ...ON After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection...

Page 1739: ...ain hose Replace the drain hose Go to step 3 3 CHECK DRAIN VALVE OPERATION 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect the test mode connector at the lower portion of instrument panel on the driver s...

Page 1740: ...YMPTOM Improper idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC d...

Page 1741: ...y and ECM connec tor 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PCV HOSE ASSEMBLY AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between PCV hose assembly and chassis ground Connector terminal B137 No 24 Chassis gr...

Page 1742: ...DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02935 No 21 B225 B225 B106 MAIN SBF SBF 6 E 15 13 16 14 ECM B137 D B13...

Page 1743: ...DOTC diag 68 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Go to step 2 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STARTER RELAY AND ECM 1 Disconnect the connectors from starter relay and ECM 2 Measure the resistance of harness...

Page 1744: ...LE SYMPTOM Improper idling Poor driving performance CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspe...

Page 1745: ...ag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P1544 Go to step 2 2 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM Check exhaust system parts NOTE Check the following items Loose installation o...

Page 1746: ...DIAGRAM EN 03954 B72 SBF 6 MAIN SBF SBF 7 No 13 SBF 5 B72 D16 A6 A7 B1 B4 D7 B12 D1 D2 D3 B5 B6 B19 D14 No 12 B47 E2 B21 2 1 4 6 5 3 ECM E E 3 6 B134 B135 B137 A B D 54 35 36 12 34 3 4 1 2 5 6 B47 B2...

Page 1747: ...AND MAIN FUSE BOX CONNECTOR 1 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 2 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 19 Chassis ground Is the resistance less...

Page 1748: ...ION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check the appro priate DTC us...

Page 1749: ...ION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check the appro priate DTC us...

Page 1750: ...ATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check the appro priate DTC...

Page 1751: ...ATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check the appro priate DTC...

Page 1752: ...repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIR...

Page 1753: ...No 8 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 2 Repair the open circuit between ECM and tumble generator valve connector NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between EC...

Page 1754: ...repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRI...

Page 1755: ...the connector from tumble gen erator valve connector 3 Measure the voltage between tumble gen erator valve actuator and chassis ground Connector terminal E55 No 1 Chassis ground E55 No 2 Chassis groun...

Page 1756: ...repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRI...

Page 1757: ...No 10 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 2 Repair the open circuit between ECM and tumble generator valve connector NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between E...

Page 1758: ...epairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRIN...

Page 1759: ...the connector from tumble gen erator valve connector 3 Measure the voltage between tumble gen erator valve actuator and chassis ground Connector terminal E51 No 1 Chassis ground E51 No 2 Chassis groun...

Page 1760: ...TION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspectio...

Page 1761: ...or contact of coupling connector 2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B136 No 16 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 4 5 V Go...

Page 1762: ...valve position sensor connector Connector terminal B136 No 27 E54 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 8 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open c...

Page 1763: ...UTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspecti...

Page 1764: ...ECM CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from tumble gen erator valve position sensor 3 Measure the resistance of the harness between the tumble generator valve posit...

Page 1765: ...TION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspectio...

Page 1766: ...Poor contact of coupling connector 2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B136 No 16 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 4 5 V...

Page 1767: ...valve position sensor connector Connector terminal B136 No 26 E50 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 8 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open c...

Page 1768: ...UTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspecti...

Page 1769: ...AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from tumble gen erator valve position sensor 3 Measure the resistance of the harness between the tumble generator valve...

Page 1770: ...oper idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROC...

Page 1771: ...tep 2 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and oil flow control solenoid valve connector NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and oil flow control...

Page 1772: ...roper idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PRO...

Page 1773: ...terminal E38 No 1 Engine ground E38 No 2 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the short circuit between ECM and oil flow control solenoid valve connector 2 CHECK OIL FLOW...

Page 1774: ...oper idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROC...

Page 1775: ...tep 2 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and oil flow control solenoid valve connector NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and oil flow control...

Page 1776: ...roper idling CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PRO...

Page 1777: ...terminal E37 No 1 Engine ground E37 No 2 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the short circuit between ECM and oil flow control solenoid valve connector 2 CHECK OIL FLOW...

Page 1778: ...part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02937 SBF 5 B47 1 2 4...

Page 1779: ...5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 14 15 24 25 26 16 17 18 19 20 21 27 28 29 30 31 B19 T5 2 T5 B19 3 1 4 B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33...

Page 1780: ...ess between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 26 Chassis ground B134 No 33 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 5 Repair the ground short circuit of har...

Page 1781: ...ure before removing the fuel pressure gauge NOTE If fuel pressure does not increase squeeze the fuel return hose 2 to 3 times then measure fuel pressure again Is the measured value 284 314 kPa 2 9 3 2...

Page 1782: ...READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 24 Subaru Select Mon itor General scan tool For detailed operation procedure refer to the general scan tool operation manual Is the measured value 2...

Page 1783: ...NSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from ECM and rear oxygen sensor 3 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and rear oxygen sensor con nector Connector...

Page 1784: ...ol operation manual Is the voltage less than 250 mV Go to step 21 Go to step 17 21 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA 1 Warm up the engine until engine coolant temperature is ab...

Page 1785: ...part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 02937 SBF 5 B47 1 2 4...

Page 1786: ...5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 14 15 24 25 26 16 17 18 19 20 21 27 28 29 30 31 B19 T5 2 T5 B19 3 1 4 B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33...

Page 1787: ...ess between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 26 Chassis ground B134 No 33 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 5 Repair the ground short circuit of har...

Page 1788: ...ure before removing the fuel pressure gauge NOTE If fuel pressure does not increase squeeze the fuel return hose 2 to 3 times then measure fuel pressure again Is the measured value 284 314 kPa 2 9 3 2...

Page 1789: ...READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 24 Subaru Select Mon itor General scan tool For detailed operation procedure refer to the general scan tool operation manual Is the measured value 2...

Page 1790: ...NSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from ECM and rear oxygen sensor 3 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and rear oxygen sensor con nector Connector...

Page 1791: ...ol operation manual Is the voltage less than 250 mV Go to step 21 Go to step 17 21 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA 1 Warm up the engine until engine coolant temperature is ab...

Page 1792: ...122 E1 B20 E57 B E E D6 B35 16 15 E2 B21 39 38 19 20 35 36 37 4 6 1 2 3 5 D4 D5 C35 C16 A34 B1 B4 D1 D2 D3 C29 C18 6 7 8 5 B362 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2...

Page 1793: ...s the voltage more than 10 V Repair the power supply short circuit of harness between ECM and electronic throttle control Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY...

Page 1794: ...le control connector and engine ground Connector terminal E57 No 5 Engine ground Is the voltage 4 5 5 5 V Go to step 12 Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM if defective Ref to FU...

Page 1795: ...Module ECM 18 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the voltage between electronic throt tle control connector and engine ground Connector terminal E57 No 6 Engine ground E...

Page 1796: ...Connector terminal E57 No 2 Engine ground E57 No 1 Engine ground Is the voltage less than 5 V Go to step 24 Repair the power supply short cir cuit of harness between ECM and electronic throttle contro...

Page 1797: ...ns with fingers Check that the valve returns to the specified position when releasing fingers Does the valve return to the specified position Standard value 3 mm 0 12 in from fully closed position Rep...

Page 1798: ...B E E D6 B35 16 15 E2 B21 39 38 19 20 35 36 37 4 6 1 2 3 5 D4 D5 C35 C16 A34 B1 B4 D1 D2 D3 C29 C18 6 7 8 5 B362 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 3...

Page 1799: ...rom ECM 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Measure the voltage between electronic throttle control relay connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B362 No 5 Chassis ground Is the voltage more th...

Page 1800: ...20 35 36 37 4 6 1 2 3 5 D4 D5 C35 C16 A34 B1 B4 D1 D2 D3 C29 C18 6 7 8 5 B362 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 48 49 50 51...

Page 1801: ...CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT OF ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY POWER SUP PLY 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Measure the voltage between electronic throttle control relay connector and chassis ground Con...

Page 1802: ...nd Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03950 B315 B21 E C ECM B136 A B134 B137 D C B136 A B134 B137 D B83 B315 3 5 4 1 2 6 C15 C17 C34 C16 C28 C35 D1 M...

Page 1803: ...ir the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector terminal B136 No...

Page 1804: ...al position sensor Terminals No 5 No 4 Check the measured value is within the specifi cation with the accelerator pedal depressed Is the resistance between 0 5 and 2 5 k Repair the poor contact of ECM...

Page 1805: ...and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03950 B315 B21 E C ECM B136 A B134 B137 D C B136 A B134 B137 D B83 B315 3 5 4 1 2 6 C15 C17 C34 C16 C28 C35 D1...

Page 1806: ...nnector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Connect the ECM connector 2 Measure the resistance between accelera tor pedal position sensor connector and chas sis ground...

Page 1807: ...nd Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03950 B315 B21 E C ECM B136 A B134 B137 D C B136 A B134 B137 D B83 B315 3 5 4 1 2 6 C15 C17 C34 C16 C28 C35 D1 M...

Page 1808: ...he open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector terminal B136 No 28 C...

Page 1809: ...l position sensor Terminals No 2 No 6 2 Check the measured value is within the specification with the accelerator pedal depressed Is the resistance between 0 28 and 1 68 k Repair the poor contact of E...

Page 1810: ...and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03950 B315 B21 E C ECM B136 A B134 B137 D C B136 A B134 B137 D B83 B315 3 5 4 1 2 6 C15 C17 C34 C16 C28 C35 D1...

Page 1811: ...ircuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Connect the ECM connector 2 Measure the resistance between accelera tor pedal position sensor connector...

Page 1812: ...E1 B20 E57 B E E D6 B35 16 15 E2 B21 39 38 19 20 35 36 37 4 6 1 2 3 5 D4 D5 C35 C16 A34 B1 B4 D1 D2 D3 C29 C18 6 7 8 5 B362 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122...

Page 1813: ...the resistance less than 1 Go to step 5 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chas...

Page 1814: ...on nector and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B136 No 35 E57 No 3 B136 No 18 E57 No 6 B136 No 29 E57 No 4 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 12 Repair the open circuit o...

Page 1815: ...n 1 M Go to step 16 Repair the short circuit to sensor power supply 16 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON TROL HARNESS 1 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 2 Disconnect the connectors from electronic throt...

Page 1816: ...de and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03950 B315 B21 E C ECM B136 A B134 B137 D C B136 A B134 B137 D B83 B315 3 5 4 1 2 6 C15 C17 C34 C16 C28 C35...

Page 1817: ...tor terminal B136 No 17 B315 No 5 B136 No 15 B315 No 3 B136 No 28 B315 No 2 B136 No 16 B315 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS...

Page 1818: ...el erator pedal posi tion sensor 11 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance of accelerator pedal position sensor while depressing the accelera tor pedal Terminals No 2 No 6 Is t...

Page 1819: ...tween ECM connector and accelerator pedal position sen sor connector 17 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors f...

Page 1820: ...RIC PRESSURE CIR CUIT LOW Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria CAUTION After repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear...

Page 1821: ...fter repairing or replacing the defective part perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 42 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 33 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode...

Page 1822: ...0 0 After engine is warmed up Air flow sensor Signal B136 23 0 3 4 5 Shield B136 32 0 0 GND B136 31 0 0 Intake air temperature sen sor signal B136 13 0 3 4 6 0 3 4 6 Wastegate control solenoid valve...

Page 1823: ...y 1 control B135 25 ON 0 5 or less OFF 10 13 ON 0 5 or less OFF 12 14 Radiator fan relay 2 control B135 24 ON 0 5 or less OFF 10 13 ON 0 5 or less OFF 12 14 Model with A C only Malfunction indicator l...

Page 1824: ...137 4 Duty waveform Duty waveform Drive frequency 500 Hz Electronic throttle control motor power supply B137 6 10 13 12 14 Electronic throttle control motor relay B135 35 ON 0 OFF 10 13 ON 0 OFF 12 14...

Page 1825: ...ture sen sor B136 24 Fuel tank pressure sensor B136 21 2 3 2 7 2 3 2 7 Pressure control solenoid valve B134 12 ON 1 or less OFF 10 13 ON 1 or less OFF 12 14 Drain valve B134 13 ON 1 or less OFF 10 13...

Page 1826: ...line Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 59 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE ECM Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure 4 Inspection of ignition control system Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 61...

Page 1827: ...1 2 MT AT MT AT M 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 39 40 37 38 1 2 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 29 30 31 13 14 15 16 17 27...

Page 1828: ...B72 No 3 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Go to step 6 Check the follow ing item and repair if necessary Blown out of fuse Open circuit of harness between ignition switch and battery 6 CH...

Page 1829: ...rn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from clutch switch 3 Turn the ignition switch to START 4 Measure the voltage between the clutch switch connector and chassis ground Connector t...

Page 1830: ...the resistance of harness between clutch switch and ECM connector Connector terminal B137 No 8 B72 No 2 Is the resistance less than 1 Check the engine control module ECM power sup ply and ground line...

Page 1831: ...B6 B19 D14 No 12 B47 E2 B21 2 1 4 6 5 3 ECM E E 3 6 B134 B135 B137 A B D 54 35 36 12 34 3 4 1 2 5 6 B47 B21 B134 A B137 D B135 B 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20...

Page 1832: ...is ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Go to step 4 Repair the open or ground short cir cuit of power sup ply circuit 4 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Measure the volta...

Page 1833: ...03952 SBF 6 NAIN SBF B72 B135 18 17 16 15 ECM No 12 E E 6 3 E2 B21 E31 E31 E32 E33 E34 E32 E33 E34 1 2 3 B21 3 1 2 3 1 2 13 49 14 15 16 3 1 2 3 1 2 B135 B72 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 1...

Page 1834: ...Go to step 4 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit in harness between the ignition coil and ignitor assembly and ignition switch connector Poor co...

Page 1835: ...und B135 No 16 Engine ground B135 No 17 Engine ground B135 No 18 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 7 Repair the ground short circuit of har ness between ECM and ignition coil an...

Page 1836: ...N 02936 E E M 10 7 6 5 6 No 11 B362 R122 B135 B B137 D R58 B97 7 D28 B27 2 1 9 8 5 19 8 R1 20 R1 B97 3 5 R46 R67 FUEL PUMP CONTROL UNIT FUEL PUMP ECM BATTERY FUEL PUMP RELAY B135 B137 B362 B97 R58 2 5...

Page 1837: ...n also be executed us ing Subaru Select Monitor Regarding the procedures refer to Compulso ry Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 43 Compulsory Valve Op eration Check Mode Does the fuel p...

Page 1838: ...953 E E 4 1 2 SBF 7 3 1 2 2 1 2 B21 1 1 2 48 42 43 44 45 C6 C5 C4 C3 1 2 5 3 6 4 2 1 B21 B136 B137 B136 E5 E5 E2 E6 E6 E16 E16 E17 B47 E17 B47 3 4 1 2 5 6 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14...

Page 1839: ...L INJECTOR CONNECTOR 1 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 2 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and fuel injector connector Connector terminal B136 No 6 E5 No 1 B136 No 5 E16 No 1 B136 No 4...

Page 1840: ...PERATION MANUAL For details concerning DTC refer to List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 68 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 2 SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OBD MODE 1 On the Main Men...

Page 1841: ...Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1 P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 2 P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 2 P0182 Fuel Temperature Sensor A Circuit Low Input P0183 F...

Page 1842: ...011 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit Open Bank 2 P2012 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit Low Bank 2 P2016 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor Switch Circuit Low Bank 1 P2017 Intake Manif...

Page 1843: ...s Others Ambient air temperature C F Hot Warm Cool Cold Place Highway Suburbs Inner city Uphill Downhill Rough road Others Engine temperature Cold Warming up After warming up Any temperature Others En...

Page 1844: ...ning out of fuel Yes No c Intentional connecting or disconnecting of harness connectors or spark plug cords Yes No What d Intentional connecting or disconnecting of hoses Yes No What e Installing of o...

Page 1845: ...4 Electrical Component Location A LOCATION 1 ENGINE Control module 1 Engine control module ECM 3 Test mode connector 4 Data link connector 2 Malfunction indicator light EN 03145 1 2 4 3 1 EN 01147 EN...

Page 1846: ...ssure sen sor 3 Electronic throttle control 7 Air flow and intake air tempera ture sensor 4 Knock sensor 2 Engine coolant temperature sen sor 5 Intake camshaft position sensor 8 Tumble generator valve...

Page 1847: ...EN H4DOTC diag 10 Electrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS EN 01927 1 2 EN 00295 EN 01928 3 EN 02169 4 EN 01798 5 EN 02919 6 EN 02920 7 EN 02921 8 asieps_tobira book 10...

Page 1848: ...STICS 1 Front oxygen A F sensor 3 Exhaust temperature sensor 5 Rear oxygen sensor 2 Precatalytic converter 4 Front catalytic converter 6 Rear catalytic converter 1 4 3 5 6 2 EN 02922 1 EN 00303 EN 003...

Page 1849: ...lectrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS 1 Fuel level sensor 3 Fuel tank pressure sensor 4 Fuel sub level sensor 2 Fuel temperature sensor EN 03146 1 4 2 3 EN 03147 2 1 EN 03003 3 EN 03132 4 as...

Page 1850: ...valve actuator emission control system parts and ignition system parts 1 Wastegate control solenoid valve 4 Intake oil flow control solenoid valve 5 Tumble generator valve actuator 2 Purge control so...

Page 1851: ...al Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS 1 Pressure control solenoid valve 3 Drain valve 4 Drain filter 2 Canister EN 01935 1 2 EN 01936 3 EN 01937 4 EN 02928 5 EN 03938 1 2 3 4 EN 02980 1 EN 02981 4...

Page 1852: ...ch 4 Fuel pump relay 7 Radiator sub fan relay 2 Fuel pump 5 Electronic throttle control relay 8 Radiator main fan relay 2 3 Main relay 6 Radiator main fan relay 1 9 Starter EN 03149 3 2 7 8 6 9 1 4 5...

Page 1853: ...pipe B INSTALLATION 1 Apply a coat of spray type lubricant to the mating area of cushion rubber 2 Install the rear exhaust pipe bracket to cushion rubber 3 Install the rear exhaust pipe to both muffl...

Page 1854: ...emove the nuts which hold the front exhaust manifold to joint pipe 8 Remove the center exhaust pipe Ref to EX H4DOTC 8 REMOVAL Center Ex haust Pipe 9 Remove the turbocharger Ref to IN H4DOTC 13 REMOVA...

Page 1855: ...y type lubricant to the mating area of the cushion rubber 3 Perform the same procedures for the muffler LH B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Use a new gasket and self locking...

Page 1856: ...EX H4DOTC 14 Muffler EXHAUST asieps_tobira book 14...

Page 1857: ...3 Engine Coolant 13 4 Water Pump 15 5 Thermostat 17 6 Radiator 19 7 Radiator Cap 23 8 Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor 24 9 Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor 27 10 Reservoir Tank 30 11 Coolant Filler Tank...

Page 1858: ...hich install the lower side of turbocharger lower cover CAUTION Be careful the turbocharger and exhaust pipe are hot 9 Lower the vehicle 10 Remove the turbocharger upper cover 11 Remove the bolts whic...

Page 1859: ...lace with a new gasket 1 Install the center exhaust pipe and temporarily tighten the bolt which holds center exhaust pipe to hanger bracket 2 Temporarily tighten the bolt which holds the cen ter pipe...

Page 1860: ...ghtening torque 7 5 N m 0 8 kgf m 5 5 ft lb 11 Position the turbocharger upper cover and tighten the bolts which install the upper side of up per cover Tightening torque 7 5 N m 0 8 kgf m 5 5 ft lb 12...

Page 1861: ...and remove the nuts which hold the front exhaust pipe assembly to cylinder head exhaust port 7 Remove the front exhaust pipe assembly 8 Remove the covers from exhaust manifold and front exhaust pipe 9...

Page 1862: ...tall the exhaust manifold lower cover RH and the exhaust manifold lower cover LH Tightening torque 19 N m 1 9 kgf m 13 7 ft lb 7 Install the front oxygen A F sensor Ref to FU H4DOTC 34 INSTALLATION Fr...

Page 1863: ...ral Description EXHAUST 1 General Description A COMPONENT 1 FRONT EXHAUST PIPE EX 02142 T1 T1 T3 T3 T4 T3 T3 T4 T1 T2 T1 1 3 9 11 13 12 8 5 15 19 17 16 20 21 22 14 4 2 A A 6 10 T5 T2 T2 7 7 T6 18 asie...

Page 1864: ...int pipe T3 35 3 6 26 0 5 Front exhaust pipe upper cover 16 Gasket T4 40 4 28 9 6 Front exhaust pipe upper insulator RH 17 Front oxygen A F sensor T5 Ref to FU H4DOTC 34 INSTALLATION Front Oxygen A F...

Page 1865: ...g T3 30 3 1 22 4 5 Center pipe upper cover Rear 15 Bolt T4 35 3 6 26 0 6 Clamp 16 Gasket T5 48 4 9 35 4 7 Rear catalytic converter lower cover 17 Muffler RH T6 Ref to FU H4DOTC 36 INSTALLATION Rear Ox...

Page 1866: ...om dust and dirt Before removal installation or disassembly be sure to clarify the failure Avoid unnecessary re moval installation disassembly and replacement Vehicle components are extremely hot afte...

Page 1867: ...d cable from battery 2 Remove the rear quarter trim Ref to EI 61 REMOVAL Rear Quarter Trim 3 Remove the fuel pump control unit 4 Disconnect the connector from fuel pump control unit B INSTALLATION Ins...

Page 1868: ...5 Remove the nuts and bolts which hold the ECM to the bracket 6 Remove the clip A from bracket 7 Disconnect the ECM connectors and take out the ECM B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of remo...

Page 1869: ...en A F sensor wait until exhaust pipe cools otherwise it will dam age the exhaust pipe B INSTALLATION 1 Before installing front oxygen A F sensor ap ply the anti seize compound only to the threaded po...

Page 1870: ...the engine harness to the bracket using a clip 7 Connect the connector of front oxygen A F sensor 8 Connect the battery ground cable to the battery A Front oxygen A F sensor connector B Exhaust temper...

Page 1871: ...generator Ref to SC H4SO 21 REMOVAL Generator 4 Drain engine coolant Ref to CO H4DOTC 13 DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT RE PLACEMENT Engine Coolant 5 Disconnect the connectors from the engine cool ant te...

Page 1872: ...working area Be careful not to spill fuel 1 Set the vehicle on a lift 2 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 3 Open the fuel filler flap lid and remove the fuel filler cap 4 Lift up the vehicle 5...

Page 1873: ...exhaust pipe cools otherwise it may dam age the exhaust pipe B INSTALLATION 1 Before installing rear oxygen sensor apply the anti seize compound only to the threaded portion of rear oxygen sensor to m...

Page 1874: ...REMOVAL Intercooler 4 Disconnect the connectors from the throttle posi tion sensor 5 Disconnect the engine coolant hoses from throt tle body 6 Remove the bolts which install throttle body to the inta...

Page 1875: ...und cable from battery 3 Disconnect the connector from manifold abso lute pressure sensor A and remove the filter as sembly B from intake manifold 4 Remove the manifold absolute pressure sensor from t...

Page 1876: ...Remove the intake manifold Ref to FU H4DOTC 11 REMOVAL Intake Man ifold 5 Disconnect the connectors from the tumble gen erator valve position sensor A and tumble gener ator valve actuator B 6 Remove t...

Page 1877: ...remove the fuel injec tor 2 LH SIDE 1 Release the fuel pressure Ref to FU H4DOTC 43 RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE PROCEDURE Fuel 2 Open the fuel filler flap lid and remove the fuel filler cap 3 Remove t...

Page 1878: ...INSTALLATION 1 Before installing exhaust temperature sensor apply anti seize compound only to the threaded portion of exhaust temperature sensor This facili tates the next removal CAUTION Never apply...

Page 1879: ...A 2 Push the grommet B down and remove the service hole cover 4 Disconnect the connector from fuel sub level sensor 5 Disconnect the quick connector then disconnect the fuel delivery hose return hose...

Page 1880: ...matter before installation Align the protrusion A of gasket with the posi tion shown in the figure Align the protrusion B of fuel sub level sensor with the cutout on the upper plate of fuel sub level...

Page 1881: ...ehicle 5 Remove the rear wheel RH 6 Drain fuel from fuel tank Ref to FU H4DOTC 43 DRAINING FUEL PROCEDURE Fuel 7 Remove the mud guard Ref to EI 29 RE MOVAL Mud Guard 8 Remove the rear sub frame Ref to...

Page 1882: ...ten it with a flat tip screwdriver 4 Securely insert the fuel filler hose A and evap oration hose B to the specified position then tight en the clamp 5 Tighten the bolts which hold fuel filler pipe br...

Page 1883: ...from the shut valve 2 Remove the nut which holds the evaporation pipe assembly to the fuel filler pipe 3 Remove the shut valve from the fuel filler pipe Ref to EC H4DOTC 14 REMOVAL Shut Valve E ASSEM...

Page 1884: ...ain approximately 3 0 2 3 2 US qt 2 6 Imp qt of coolant 8 Remove the intake duct from the air cleaner case 9 Remove the intercooler Ref to IN H4DOTC 12 REMOVAL Intercooler 10 Remove the generator Ref...

Page 1885: ...ant temperature sensor A oil pressure switch B and crankshaft position sensor C 17 Disconnect the knock sensor connector 18 Disconnect the connector from camshaft posi tion sensor 19 Disconnect the co...

Page 1886: ...anifold onto the cylinder heads 23 Remove the intake manifold B INSTALLATION 1 Install the intake manifold onto cylinder heads NOTE Use a new gasket Tightening torque 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 18 ft lb 2 Conne...

Page 1887: ...ssure switch B and crankshaft position sensor C 6 Connect the connector to the knock sensor 7 Connect the connectors to camshaft position sensor 8 Connect the connector to the ignition coil 9 Connect...

Page 1888: ...Connect the battery ground cable to the bat tery 18 Lift up the vehicle 19 Install the under cover 20 Fill engine coolant Ref to CO H4DOTC 13 FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT REPLACE MENT Engine Coolant 21...

Page 1889: ...Remove the bolts which secures the air by pass pipe to the intake manifold 8 Remove the PCV pipe A harness assembly B and intake duct C from intake manifold 9 Remove the bolt which secures the fuel in...

Page 1890: ...pipe and then disconnect the fuel hose from pipe 15 Remove the fuel injector pipe 16 Remove the intake manifold upper from the intake manifold lower D ASSEMBLY 1 Install the intake manifold lower to t...

Page 1891: ...e 6 5 N m 0 66 kgf m 4 8 ft lb 6 Tighten the bolts which secure fuel injector pipe onto intake manifold Tightening torque 19 N m 1 9 kgf m 14 ft lb LH side RH side 7 Install the coolant filler tank st...

Page 1892: ...the intake manifold Tightening torque 6 5 N m 0 66 kgf m 4 8 ft lb 11 Install the connectors to fuel injector A tum ble generator valve position sensor B and tumble generator valve actuator C 12 Inst...

Page 1893: ...or and purge control solenoid valve and install the solenoid valve bracket assembly to intake man ifold Tightening torque 19 N m 1 9 kgf m 14 ft lb 16 Install the engine ground terminal to the ground...

Page 1894: ...cable from battery 3 Disconnect the connector from the wastegate control solenoid valve A 4 Disconnect pressure hose B from the waste gate control solenoid valve 5 Remove the wastegate control soleno...

Page 1895: ...YSTEMS 15 Oil Flow Control Solenoid Valve A REMOVAL Oil flow control solenoid valve is a unit with cam shaft cap Refer to Camshaft for removal procedure Ref to ME H4DOTC 52 REMOVAL Camshaft B INSTALLA...

Page 1896: ...parts Replace the faulty parts 2 Decline of fuel pump function Replace the fuel pump 3 Clogged dust or water in the fuel filter Replace the fuel filter and clean or replace the fuel tank 4 Clogged or...

Page 1897: ...FU H4DOTC 64 Fuel System Trouble in General FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS asieps_tobira book 64...

Page 1898: ...Converter 4 4 Precatalytic Converter 5 5 Canister 6 6 Purge Control Solenoid Valve 7 7 Fuel Level Sensor 8 8 Fuel Temperature Sensor 9 9 Fuel Sub Level Sensor 10 10 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 11 11 Pr...

Page 1899: ...tank Capacity 64 2 16 9 US gal 14 1 Imp gal Location Under rear seat Fuel pump Type Impeller Shutoff discharge pressure 550 850 kPa 5 61 8 67 kg cm2 79 8 123 3 psi Discharge rate 155 2 40 9 US gal 34...

Page 1900: ...INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS B COMPONENT 1 INTAKE MANIFOLD FU 02338 8 21 9 T2 T4 T4 T4 T4 T5 T5 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T1 4 5 7 7 8 T3 T3 17 18 19 16 15 20 10 12 1 11 10 12 2 3 11 T3 T3 14 T4 T4 T4 3 22 13 23 23 26...

Page 1901: ...ssure sensor 26 Purge hose 5 Vacuum hose 17 Filter 6 Vacuum control hose 18 Intake manifold Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 7 Intake manifold gasket 19 Wastegate control solenoid valve ASSY T1 1 5 0...

Page 1902: ...HAFT POSITION CAMSHAFT POSITION AND KNOCK SENSORS 1 Crankshaft position sensor 3 Camshaft position sensor LH Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Knock sensor 4 Camshaft position sensor RH T1 6 4 0 65...

Page 1903: ...ption FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS 4 FUEL TANK FU 02861 T4 T1 T4 T3 T3 T3 T2 T3 T3 T4 T1 16 14 15 15 17 18 17 6 21 5 4 3 22 23 24 2 19 20 11 12 13 8 7 10 17 17 30 9 1 T2 T3 21 17 25 26 27 17 29 28 32 3...

Page 1904: ...e F 6 Jet pump tube 19 Stopper RH 32 Fuel sub level sensor filter 7 Fuel pump ASSY 20 Stopper LH 33 Fuel sub level sensor protector 8 Fuel pump upper plate 21 Retainer 9 Fuel pump gasket 22 Heat shiel...

Page 1905: ...L INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS 5 FUEL LINE FU 02825 B B A A 28 25 30 23 24 9 29 31 27 26 T2 T4 T1 T2 T2 T6 T2 T6 T3 22 20 18 17 1 1 1 33 34 1 32 21 13 11 10 12 14 16 15 19 1 1 1 5 T2 T2 1 3 4 2 8 6 7 1 T5 T...

Page 1906: ...NO FIRE signs near the working area Be careful not to spill fuel D PREPARATION TOOL 1 Clamp 15 Fuel pipe ASSY 29 Fuel tank pressure sensor 2 Fuel delivery hose A 16 Canister 30 Evaporation pipe prote...

Page 1907: ...A REMOVAL 1 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 2 Disconnect the connector from the mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor 3 Remove the mass air flow and intake air temper ature sensor...

Page 1908: ...AL 1 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 2 Remove the glove box Ref to EI 51 REMOV AL Glove Box 3 Remove the harness cover A 4 Disconnect the connector from fuel pump relay B INSTALLATION Install...

Page 1909: ...SPECIFICATION Throttle body is a non disassembled part so do not remove the throttle position sensor from throttle body Refer to Throttle Body for removal and installation procedure Ref to FU H4DOTC...

Page 1910: ...m the pipe WARNING Be careful not to spill fuel Catch the fuel from hoses using a container or cloth 3 Remove the fuel by pass valve from the vehicle 4 Disconnect the fuel delivery hose and fuel retur...

Page 1911: ...STALLATION 1 Install the knock sensor to the cylinder block NOTE The portion of the knock sensor cord that is pulled out must be positioned at a 60 angle relative to the engine rear Tightening torque...

Page 1912: ...7 Remove the connector A and clip B 8 Remove the service hole cover of fuel sub level sensor 1 Remove bolt A 2 Push the grommet B down and remove the service hole cover 9 Disconnect connector A from...

Page 1913: ...ake Assembly Rear Disc Brake 19 Lift up the vehicle 20 Remove the rear exhaust pipe Ref to EX H4DOTC 12 REMOVAL Rear Ex haust Pipe 21 Remove the propeller shaft Ref to DS 10 REMOVAL Propeller Shaft 22...

Page 1914: ...n hose B 29 Support the fuel tank with a transmission jack remove the bolts from the fuel tank band and re move the fuel tank from the vehicle WARNING A helper is required to perform this work B INSTA...

Page 1915: ...this work 1 Support the rear differential with the trans mission jack 2 Support the rear suspension assembly and tighten the bolts which secure the rear suspen sion assembly to the body Tightening tor...

Page 1916: ...e Assembly Rear Disc Brake 14 Install the rear brake caliper 15 Tighten the bolts which secure the rear brake hose mounting bracket Tightening torque 33 N m 3 4 kgf m 25 ft lb 16 Install the rear whee...

Page 1917: ...l sub level sensor 25 Connect connector A and install clip B 26 Connect the connector to the fuel pump 27 Install the service hole cover of fuel pump 28 Install the rear seat 29 Install the fuse of fu...

Page 1918: ...elivery Return and Evaporation Lines 7 Remove the nuts which install fuel pump assem bly onto fuel tank 8 Remove the fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order o...

Page 1919: ...pply the battery power supply to check whether the pump operates WARNING Wipe off fuel completely Keep the battery as far apart from fuel pump as possible Be sure to turn the battery supply to ON and...

Page 1920: ...Remove the generator Ref to SC H4SO 21 REMOVAL Generator 4 Remove the bolt which installs crankshaft posi tion sensor to cylinder block 5 Remove the crankshaft position sensor and then disconnect the...

Page 1921: ...1 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 2 Remove the glove box Ref to EI 51 REMOV AL Glove Box 3 Remove the harness cover A 4 Disconnect the connectors from main relay B INSTALLATION Install in the...

Page 1922: ...from battery 3 Disconnect the connector from camshaft posi tion sensor RH 4 Remove the camshaft position sensor RH from the rear side of the cylinder head 5 Remove the cam shaft position sensor LH in...

Page 1923: ...ove the tumble generator valve actuator RH 2 LH SIDE 1 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 2 Remove the intercooler Ref to IN H4DOTC 12 REMOVAL Intercooler 3 Disconnect the connector from tumble...

Page 1924: ...level sensor is built in fuel pump assembly 1 Remove the fuel pump assembly Ref to FU H4DOTC 53 REMOVAL Fuel Pump 2 Disconnect the connector from fuel pump brack et 3 Remove the fuel temperature senso...

Page 1925: ...es and hoses and then disconnect the fuel return pipes and hoses evap oration pipes and hoses 6 In the engine compartment disconnect the fuel delivery hoses return hoses and evaporation hos es 1 Disco...

Page 1926: ...push the retainer B down 4 Pull out the connector A from the retainer B CAUTION Always use a new retainer except in use of en gine compartment B INSTALLATION 1 Connect the quick connector on fuel line...

Page 1927: ...nserted is not specified 2 2 5 1 5 mm 0 098 0 059 in L 22 5 2 5 mm 0 886 0 098 in 3 Connect the return hose and evaporation hose to the pipe by approx 15 mm 0 59 in from hose end Fuel return hose L 22...

Page 1928: ...UEL SYSTEMS 31 Fuel Filter A SPECIFICATION Fuel filter forms a single unit with fuel pump Refer to Fuel Pump for removal and installation Ref to FU H4DOTC 53 REMOVAL Fuel Pump Ref to FU H4DOTC 53 INST...

Page 1929: ...or valve position sensor cannot be adjusted when installed so it should not be re moved from the tumble generator valve assembly Refer to Tumble Generator Valve Assembly for removal and installation p...

Page 1930: ...ay A REMOVAL 1 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 2 Remove the glove box Ref to EI 51 REMOV AL Glove Box 3 Remove the harness cover A 4 Disconnect the connector from electric throttle control re...

Page 1931: ...ESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION FOR ABNORMALITY JUDGMENT ONLY 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE 1 Always perform the diagnosis after warming up when the engine speed is more than 1500 rpm 2 Always perform the dia...

Page 1932: ...clear the NG when the continuous time with the following criteria established is more than 1 second 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 1933: ...on timing partial learning compensation Enter the initial value 0 CA to the compensation value of partial learning zone with IG OFF Enter the initial value 0 CA to the compensation value of the partia...

Page 1934: ...hut off in deceleration etc 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis continuously after 60 seconds or more have passed since the engine started 1 Protec...

Page 1935: ...n malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CO...

Page 1936: ...rminal voltage at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING...

Page 1937: ...CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor activation judgment Front oxygen A F sensor full activation i...

Page 1938: ...al voltage at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CY...

Page 1939: ...CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor activation judgment Front oxygen A F sensor full activation i...

Page 1940: ...e at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perfor...

Page 1941: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR C...

Page 1942: ...t ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform...

Page 1943: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR C...

Page 1944: ...sure AD value is Low whereas it seemed to be High from the viewpoint of engine condition or when it is High whereas it seemed to be Low from the engine condition 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDI...

Page 1945: ...ompleted 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Intake manifold pressure sensor process Estimate the pressure from engine load ISC feedback Not allowed to calculate the amount of...

Page 1946: ...reases Judge as a high side NG when the air flow voltage indicates a large val ue regardless of running in a state where the air flow voltage decreases Judge air flow sensor property NG when the Low s...

Page 1947: ...pressure 53 3 kPa 400 mmHg 15 7 inHg High side NG 1 Output voltage 1 95 V Engine speed 600 900 rpm Throttle opening angle 4 1 Intake manifold pressure 52 7 kPa 395 mmHg 15 6 inHg High side NG 2 Output...

Page 1948: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performe...

Page 1949: ...e as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DT...

Page 1950: ...mpensation value portional learning compensation value When normal Knock compensation value Fixed at 0 CA Failure Knock compensation value Fixed at 0 CA When knock Max 12 CA retard Whole learning comp...

Page 1951: ...nd clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR C...

Page 1952: ...mpensation value portional learning compensation value When normal Knock compensation value Fixed at 0 CA Failure Knock compensation value Fixed at 0 CA When knock Max 12 CA retard Whole learning comp...

Page 1953: ...ntinuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 second...

Page 1954: ...y is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Intake manifold pressure sensor process Estimate the pressure from engine load ISC feedback Not allowed to calculate the amount of feedback Heavy fuel judgment Not allowed t...

Page 1955: ...ntinuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 second...

Page 1956: ...y is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Intake manifold pressure sensor process Estimate the pressure from engine load ISC feedback Not allowed to calculate the amount of feedback Heavy fuel judgment Not allowed t...

Page 1957: ...ondition 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis when the vehicle speed condition is completed after idling from starting the cooled en gine 1 Air flow...

Page 1958: ...is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FA...

Page 1959: ...rcuit of the intake air temperature sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Air...

Page 1960: ...w are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is comple...

Page 1961: ...rcuit of the intake air temperature sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Air...

Page 1962: ...ow are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is compl...

Page 1963: ...5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a...

Page 1964: ...nditioner control Not allowed to turn the air conditioner to ON Radiator fan control Both main and sub fan are in High driving High water temperature expansion compensation coefficient Normally mass e...

Page 1965: ...0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a...

Page 1966: ...nditioner control Not allowed to turn the air conditioner to ON Radiator fan control Both main and sub fan are in High driving High water temperature expansion compensation coefficient Normally mass e...

Page 1967: ...24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 1968: ...etecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame d...

Page 1969: ...24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 1970: ...etecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame d...

Page 1971: ...ON 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis only once after engine starting 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Abnormality Judgment Judge as NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 1 C...

Page 1972: ...coolant temperature is fixed at 70 C 158 F ISC Feedback Calculate target engine speed as engine coolant temperature 70 C 158 F ISC learning Not allowed to learn Heavy fuel judgment control Not allowed...

Page 1973: ...view point of the driving condition 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE After idling and running for the specified time perform the diagnosis only once for OK NG judgmen...

Page 1974: ...occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When...

Page 1975: ...an the estimated engine coolant temperature and the difference between them is large Judge as OK when the engine coolant temperature becomes to 75 C 167 F and the difference is small before judging NG...

Page 1976: ...iving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 Judgment Value Malfunction Crit...

Page 1977: ...Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing any malfunction criteria below is more than 1 second Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 second Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon...

Page 1978: ...tivation judgment Front oxygen A F sensor full activation is not complete or front oxygen A F sensor half activation is not complete A F main learning Not allowed to calculate the A F main learning co...

Page 1979: ...D Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing any malfunction criteria below is more than 1 second Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 second Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soo...

Page 1980: ...tivation judgment Front oxygen A F sensor full activation is not complete or front oxygen A F sensor half activation is not complete A F main learning Not allowed to calculate the A F main learning co...

Page 1981: ...ed ventilation holes are diagnosed When the holes are clogged the A F output variation becomes slow comparing with the actual A F variation because oxygen which reaches the zirconia layer is insuffici...

Page 1982: ...tions All secondary parameters enable condi tions 1 second or more Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 563 mmHg 22 2 inHg Closed loop control with main feedback Operating Front oxygen...

Page 1983: ...ICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen sensor A F sensor main learning compensation Not allowed to...

Page 1984: ...e of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes more than 5 seconds Time Needed for Diagnosis 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 1 At...

Page 1985: ...ry is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor activation judgment Front oxygen A F sensor full activation is not complete or front oxygen A F sensor half activation is not complete A F main lear...

Page 1986: ...CYCLE Perform the diagnosis once after warming up the engine 1 Atmosphere A Electromotive force D Lean 2 Exhaust gas B Air fuel ratio E Theoretical air fuel ratio 3 Electromotive force C Rich F Compa...

Page 1987: ...mpleted 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAF...

Page 1988: ...erform the diagnosis once after warming up the engine 1 Atmosphere A Electromotive force D Lean 2 Exhaust gas B Air fuel ratio E Theoretical air fuel ratio 3 Electromotive force C Rich F Comparative v...

Page 1989: ...mpleted 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAF...

Page 1990: ...ge is large rich when recovering from a deceleration fuel cut Lean rich diagnosis response 1 Measure the response time for oxygen sensor output changes when the A F ratio changes to lean to rich If th...

Page 1991: ...sensor voltage for the timing of the deceleration Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions Battery voltage 10 9 V A F sub feedback control condition Completed Deceleration fuel cut time is 5 seconds or...

Page 1992: ...ime of rear oxygen sensor output voltage is short during fuel shut off in deceleration Carry out the NG judgment only after the fuel shut off in deceleration Even without deceration fuel cut judge as...

Page 1993: ...When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Sub feedback control No...

Page 1994: ...5 V output change response time as judgment value when the rear oxygen sensor output voltage changes from 0 25 V lean to 0 55 V rich EN 02210 Fuel cut on deceleration Execute the malfunction judgement...

Page 1995: ...ime diagnosis value threshold value normal 2 Do not judge as a normal condition Judge as OK when the criteria below are met 13 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a r...

Page 1996: ...nt Judge as OK when the malfunction criteria below are completed for 10 seconds or more Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions A F main learning system In operation Engine coolant temperature 70 C 158...

Page 1997: ...INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE Rich side malfunction Purge control solenoid valve...

Page 1998: ...Parameters Enable Conditions A F main learning system In operation Engine coolant temperature 70 C 158 F Engine load Value from Map 5 Intake air change during 0 5 engine revs 0 02 g 0 001 oz rev Lear...

Page 1999: ...TION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE Rich side malfunction Purge control solenoid v...

Page 2000: ...ther is NG judge as NG If both are OK Judge as OK and clear the NG Drift Diagnosis Normally fuel temperature is lower than engine coolant temperature When the fuel temperature becomes higher than the...

Page 2001: ...DRIVING CYCLE Always perform diagnosis after 20 seconds have passed since the engine started Judgment Value Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value Fuel level 9 6 2 2 54 US gal 2 11 Imp gal After engine...

Page 2002: ...completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 10 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 11 FAI...

Page 2003: ...OF DIAGNOSIS Detect the open or short circuit of fuel temperature sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform th...

Page 2004: ...when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION W...

Page 2005: ...hen the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 2 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a...

Page 2006: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performe...

Page 2007: ...24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 2008: ...etecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame d...

Page 2009: ...24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 2010: ...etecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame d...

Page 2011: ...ming from the fuel pump control unit Fuel pump control unit detects the open or short circuit malfunction for each line and then sends NG signals if one of them is found NG 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 E...

Page 2012: ...y is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE OFF setting may be needed depending on t...

Page 2013: ...FORMANCE 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS Detect the malfunction of wastegate control solenoid valve function Judge as NG when becoming high wastegate pressure 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENER...

Page 2014: ...ICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For t...

Page 2015: ...f wastegate control solenoid valve Judge as NG when the terminal output voltage remains Low during outputting the duty signal 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform...

Page 2016: ...when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION...

Page 2017: ...astegate control solenoid valve Judge as NG when the terminal output voltage remains Low or High during outputting the duty signal 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Pe...

Page 2018: ...when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION...

Page 2019: ...misfire 180 Interval Difference Method MT 1 800 rpm or less AT None 360 Interval Difference Method whole range 720 Interval Difference Method 3 000 rpm or less 2 Misfire every time FTP 1 5 times misf...

Page 2020: ...314 12 36 47 0 352 5 13 88 51 1 383 15 08 Vehicle speed 64 4 km h 40 MPH rpm 700 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500 6700 kPa mmHg inHg 25 5 191 7 52 25 1 188 7 40 30 4 227 7...

Page 2021: ...figure pick a cylinder as the standard and name it omg 0 And the former crank shaft position speed is named omg 1 the second former crankshaft position speed is named omg 2 the third is named omg 3 e...

Page 2022: ...value of positive side domg 180 judgment value of negative side Judgment value before 180 CA A Threshold value judgment value of the positive side B Threshold value judgment value of the negative side...

Page 2023: ...amaging catalyst Diagnostic value domg 720 omg 1 omg 0 omg 7 omg 6 Misfire judg ment domg 720 Judgment value Judge as misfire A Threshold Value B Judged as a misfire Judgment Value Judge that malfunct...

Page 2024: ...ouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria AR DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC P0301 Ref to GD H4DOTC 97 DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETEC...

Page 2025: ...tect the open or short circuit of knock sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1...

Page 2026: ...ITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Knock compensation Knock compensation final advance delay angle value knock compensation value...

Page 2027: ...tect the open or short circuit of knock sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1...

Page 2028: ...ITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Knock compensation Knock compensation final advance delay angle value knock compensation value...

Page 2029: ...e crank signal is not input even though the starter was rotated 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION A Camshaft signal RH B Camshaft signal LH C Crankshaft signal 1 Crankshaft position sensor 2...

Page 2030: ...e meeting the malfunction criteria below is 3 seconds or more 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT...

Page 2031: ...as NG when there is a problem in the number of crankshaft signals for every revolution 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A Camshaft signal RH C Crankshaft signal D Number of crankshaft signal 30 is normal B Cam...

Page 2032: ...criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving c...

Page 2033: ...mal 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously A Camshaft signal RH D Number of camshaft position sig nals When normal there will be 3...

Page 2034: ...tion factor and variable amount of whole learning compensation factor when IG OFF and then make the whole learning incomplete Enter the initial value whole learning compensation factor 0 5 Variable am...

Page 2035: ...the deterioration of the catalyst function Though the rear oxygen sensor output would change slowly with a new catalyst the sensor output with a de teriorated catalyst becomes high and the inversion...

Page 2036: ...on Evaporative system diagnosis Not in operation Time of difference 0 10 between actual and target lambda 1000 milliseconds or more Vehicle speed 70 4 km h 44 MPH Amount of intake air 12 40 g 0 35 1 4...

Page 2037: ...s 30 to 55 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in...

Page 2038: ...el tank pressure sensor When in 0 04 inch diagnosis perform in the order of mode Z mode A mode B mode C and mode D When in 0 02 inch diagnosis perform in the order of mode A mode B mode C mode D and m...

Page 2039: ...of P2 calculation If the tank pressure does not become the value make advanced OK judgment 1 15 seconds Mode D Negative pressure variation mea surement evaporation leakage diagnosis Calculate the tan...

Page 2040: ...Negative pressure maintained Wait until the tank pressure returns to the target start level of P2 calculation 0 20 seconds Mode D Negative pressure change calcu lated Calculate the time it takes for...

Page 2041: ...ir pressure Normally the solenoid is set to OFF And the valve opens and closes mechanically in accordance with the pressure difference between tank and atmospheric air or tank and canister The valve i...

Page 2042: ...e and the part below Y is charged with canister pressure If the atmospheric air pressure port is A tank pressure port is B and canister pressure port is C the air flows according to pressure differenc...

Page 2043: ...ecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION When B C solenoid OFF When Solenoid is ON a Atmospheric pressure b Fuel tank c Canister 1 Valve a Atmospheric pressure b Fuel tank c Canister EN 01718 A B C a b c 1...

Page 2044: ...density 0 08 Engine speed 1050 6500 rpm Fuel tank pressure 1 42 kPa 10 7 mmHg 0 42 inHg Intake manifold relative vacuum relative pressure 13 33 kPa 100 mmHg 3 94 inHg Vehicle speed 32 km h 20 MPH Fuel...

Page 2045: ...gnosis Evap diagnosis Incomplete Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 563 mmHg 22 2 inHg Time since last incomplete diagnosis event of 0 02 inch leakage 600 sec Total time of canister...

Page 2046: ...Loose Off Purge control solenoid valve stuck open diagnosis is performed in mode Z as shown in the figure below Diagnosis of purge control solenoid valve function DTC P0457 Evaporative Emission Contro...

Page 2047: ...in 2 continuous driving cy cles When judgment for purge control solenoid valve stuck open NG is made end the evaporative diagnosis Cancel the evaporative diagnosis when the OK NG judgment for drain va...

Page 2048: ...n Control System Leak Detected Small Leak P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected Fuel Cap Loose Off Diagnostic method The diagnostic method consists of creating a sealed vacuum in the...

Page 2049: ...spheric pressure because evaporation occurs However if any leakage exists the pressure in creases additionally in proportion to this leakage The pressure variation of this tank is P2 After calculating...

Page 2050: ...pressure returns to the start level of P2 cal culation Change to Mode D either when the tank pressure returns to the start level of P2 calculation or when the pre determined amount of time has passed...

Page 2051: ...gment Value Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value DTC P1 Value of Map 7 Threshold value Fig ure Residual Fuel Amount vs evpdset P0456 Map7 Failure diagnosis reference limit for 0 02 in leaks for evapor...

Page 2052: ...ds 30 seconds 50 seconds 100 seconds 160 seconds 200 seconds 10 L 2 6 US gal 2 2 Imp gal 0 13 kPa 1 0 mmHg 0 039 inHg 0 47 kPa 3 5 mmHg 0 138 inHg 0 56 kPa 4 2 mmHg 0 165 inHg 0 56 kPa 4 2 mmHg 0 165...

Page 2053: ...ers from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Bobbin 8 Magnetic plate 14 Retainer 2 Coil 9 Shaft 15...

Page 2054: ...lear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Pressure control solenoid valv...

Page 2055: ...ffers from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Bobbin 8 Magnetic plate 14 Retainer 2 Coil 9 Shaft 1...

Page 2056: ...Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Pressure control solenoid val...

Page 2057: ...N 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis continuously after 60 seconds or more have passed since the engine started Be sure to check the fuel level and fuel temperature 1 Connector A Output vol...

Page 2058: ...OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LI...

Page 2059: ...the open or short circuit of the fuel tank pressure sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis co...

Page 2060: ...ON When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Cle...

Page 2061: ...specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis continually when purging 1 Connector A Output voltage C To fuel tank 2 Terminal B Input voltage...

Page 2062: ...the freeze frame data For test mode 02 BG DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT ED VERY SMALL LEAK 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS For the detection standard refer to DTC P0442 Evaporative...

Page 2063: ...ge control solenoid valve Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis a...

Page 2064: ...met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3...

Page 2065: ...rge control solenoid valve Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis...

Page 2066: ...met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3...

Page 2067: ...tions of the fuel level sensor output property If the fuel level does not vary in a particular driving condition engine condition where it should judge as NG 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION...

Page 2068: ...NCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame...

Page 2069: ...or short circuit of fuel level sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine co...

Page 2070: ...low are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is comp...

Page 2071: ...or short circuit of fuel level sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine c...

Page 2072: ...are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is complete...

Page 2073: ...ut voltage variation of the fuel level sensor is larger than the threshold value 2 ENABLE CONDITION 3 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously at idle speed Pay attention to the...

Page 2074: ...alues are not over the threshold value Otherwise when either of them is over the threshold value the diagnosis counter counts up Judge as NG if the counter indicated 6 counts A Diagnosis condition E D...

Page 2075: ...g cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 Judgment Value Malfunction Criteria...

Page 2076: ...r Diagnosis 5 minutes Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction...

Page 2077: ...e malfunction criteria below becomes 2 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment J...

Page 2078: ...on vehicle speed condition and engine speed but perform the fuel cut only on engine speed condition 4400 rpm or more ISC control Open loop compensation is set to 1 g 0 04 oz oz s Not allowed ISC feed...

Page 2079: ...d clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criterion below be comes more than the time needed for diagnosis 10 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is comp...

Page 2080: ...AL DESCRIPTION 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memo...

Page 2081: ...and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criterion below be comes more than the time needed for diagnosis 10 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is co...

Page 2082: ...AL DESCRIPTION 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memo...

Page 2083: ...or Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDIT...

Page 2084: ...e of unregistered key in body inte grated unit P1570 Antenna Faulty antenna P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility Reference code incompatibility between body integrated unit and ECM P1572 IMM Circuit F...

Page 2085: ...n criteria below be comes more than the time needed for diagnosis 5 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION I...

Page 2086: ...DIAGNOSIS Detect open or short circuit of the exhaust temperature sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the...

Page 2087: ...lear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR...

Page 2088: ...DIAGNOSIS Detect open or short circuit of the exhaust temperature sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform th...

Page 2089: ...ompleted 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SA...

Page 2090: ...ime when all of the following criteria are established is more than the predetermined time 1 s Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 time Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfun...

Page 2091: ...function Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Secondary Parameters Enabl...

Page 2092: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performe...

Page 2093: ...n Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine...

Page 2094: ...U sub CPU is abnormal When the input amplifier circuit of throttle position sensor 1 is abnormal When the cruise control cannot be canceled correctly When the signal of brake SW1 and 2 is mismatched W...

Page 2095: ...Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions 1 Ignition switch ON 2 Ignition switch ON 3 None 4 None 5 Throttle opening angle 6 Brake switch only wi...

Page 2096: ...Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the el...

Page 2097: ...rol is operating 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis Target opening angle and actual opening angle 250 milliseconds F...

Page 2098: ...emory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stoppe...

Page 2099: ...etecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame d...

Page 2100: ...clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEA...

Page 2101: ...clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLE...

Page 2102: ...as OK when the following conditions are not established and clear the NG Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DT...

Page 2103: ...eria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 6 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the...

Page 2104: ...on Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is p...

Page 2105: ...eria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 6 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the...

Page 2106: ...is 3 monitoring Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a r...

Page 2107: ...is abnormal in accordance with value of front oxygen A F sensor and running conditions such as vehicle speed amount of intake air engine coolant temperature sub feedback control etc value Actual air...

Page 2108: ...ed to calculate Correction when re starting at high temperature Normally minimum value 0 3 0 Purge control Not allowed to purge 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test m...

Page 2109: ...e is abnormal in accordance with value of front oxygen A F sensor and running conditions such as vehicle speed amount of intake air engine coolant temperature sub feedback control etc value Actual air...

Page 2110: ...owed to calculate Correction when re starting at high temperature Normally minimum value 0 3 0 Purge control Not allowed to purge 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test...

Page 2111: ...ime of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 600 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction oc...

Page 2112: ...ON INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPER...

Page 2113: ...ressure Value of map 3 or more Battery voltage 8 V Vehicle speed 64 4 km h 40 MPH rpm 700 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500 6700 kPa mmHg inHg 25 1 188 7 40 24 8 186 7 32 25...

Page 2114: ...agnosis 200 engine revs Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Me...

Page 2115: ...0 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is perfo...

Page 2116: ...g the malfunction criteria below becomes more than time needed for diagnosis 2 5 seconds Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seco...

Page 2117: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performe...

Page 2118: ...the malfunction criteria below becomes more than time needed for diagnosis 2 5 seconds Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 second...

Page 2119: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performe...

Page 2120: ...Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Bobbin 8 Magnetic plate 14 Retainer 2 Coil 9 Shaft 15 Diaphragm 3 Diode 10 Plate 16 Movable core 4 Stator core 11 Valve 17 Spring 5 End plate 12 Housing 18...

Page 2121: ...performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Pressure control solenoid valve control Open...

Page 2122: ...etect the blow by hose release abnormality Judge as NG when the diagnosis terminal voltage is high 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis conti...

Page 2123: ...CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in...

Page 2124: ...w are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is comple...

Page 2125: ...ction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time with the following criteria established is more than 8 2 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is...

Page 2126: ...soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row...

Page 2127: ...etecting Criteria CY DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS For the detection standard refer to DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY Ref to GD H4DOTC 162 DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBIL...

Page 2128: ...he OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory...

Page 2129: ...he OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory...

Page 2130: ...the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memor...

Page 2131: ...the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memor...

Page 2132: ...h occurs just before the tumble generator valve out put is set to ON OFF and judge open NG when the open NG signal is sent 2 seconds in a row Judge as OK and clear the NG when the OK signal is sent Ti...

Page 2133: ...row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Tumble generator val...

Page 2134: ...ccurs just before the tumble generator valve out put is set to ON OFF and judge overcurrent NG when the overcurrent NG signal is sent 1 second in a row Judge as OK and clear the NG when the OK signal...

Page 2135: ...row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Tumble generator val...

Page 2136: ...h occurs just before the tumble generator valve out put is set to ON OFF and judge open NG when the open NG signal is sent 2 seconds in a row Judge as OK and clear the NG when the OK signal is sent Ti...

Page 2137: ...row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Tumble generator val...

Page 2138: ...ccurs just before the tumble generator valve out put is set to ON OFF and judge overcurrent NG when the overcurrent NG signal is sent 1 second in a row Judge as OK and clear the NG when the OK signal...

Page 2139: ...row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Tumble generator val...

Page 2140: ...when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosi...

Page 2141: ...in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Tumble generator valve opening For tumble generator valve full closing points learning not allowed to update to closing side For tumble generator v...

Page 2142: ...NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagno...

Page 2143: ...in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Tumble generator valve opening For tumble generator valve full closing points learning not allowed to update to closing side For tumble generator v...

Page 2144: ...when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosi...

Page 2145: ...in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Tumble generator valve opening For tumble generator valve full closing points learning not allowed to update to closing side For tumble generator v...

Page 2146: ...when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosi...

Page 2147: ...s duty signal is small 2 ENABLE CONDITION 3 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 4 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Abnormality Judgment Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing...

Page 2148: ...ariable amount of whole learning compensation factor 0 25 to the whole learning compensation factor and variable amount of whole learning compensation factor when making a normality judgment abnormali...

Page 2149: ...ion Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below be co...

Page 2150: ...ial value 0 CA to the compensation value of partial learning zone when making a nor mality judgment abnormality judgment AVCS control Maximum timing retard learning is not complete or maximum timing r...

Page 2151: ...function criteria becomes more than 5 seconds Judge OK and clear NG when the continuous time of incompleting the malfunction criteria becomes more than 5 seconds Time Needed for Diagnosis 5 seconds 1...

Page 2152: ...completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear Memory is...

Page 2153: ...eting the malfunction criteria becomes more than 5 seconds Judge OK and clear NG when the continuous time of incompleting the malfunction criteria becomes more than 5 seconds Time Needed for Diagnosis...

Page 2154: ...completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear Memory is...

Page 2155: ...it is heated 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine control module ECM 4 Drive circuit 6 Electronic throttle control rela...

Page 2156: ...he OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times i...

Page 2157: ...plied even when ECM sets the electric con trol throttle relay to ON 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine control module...

Page 2158: ...n occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK...

Page 2159: ...sets the electric throttle control relay to OFF 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE When ignition switch ON OFF Ignition switch OFF ON Only after clearing memory 1 Engin...

Page 2160: ...N When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3...

Page 2161: ...et Time Needed for Diagnosis None Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row Whe...

Page 2162: ...TION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle o...

Page 2163: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 100 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION Whe...

Page 2164: ...N When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttl...

Page 2165: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 80 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION Whe...

Page 2166: ...N When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttl...

Page 2167: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 100 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION Whe...

Page 2168: ...N When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttl...

Page 2169: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 80 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION Whe...

Page 2170: ...N When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttl...

Page 2171: ...SCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 1 Throttle p...

Page 2172: ...formed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAF...

Page 2173: ...ERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes more than 0 5 seconds 1 Engin...

Page 2174: ...e OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory...

Page 2175: ...us driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below be comes more than 0 26 seconds 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the...

Page 2176: ...Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is...

Page 2177: ...r Light Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is comple...

Page 2178: ...GD H4DOTC 256 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION asieps_tobira book 256...

Page 2179: ...e complete repair work for satisfying our customers by keeping their vehicle in optimum condition When replacement of parts during repair work is needed be sure to use SUBARU genuine parts All informa...

Page 2180: ...asieps_tobira book 2...

Page 2181: ...jector 25 12 Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch 27 13 Oil Temperature Sensor 28 14 Front Oxygen A F Sensor 29 15 Rear Oxygen Sensor 31 16 Engine Control Module ECM 33 17 Main Relay 34 1...

Page 2182: ...2 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input Ref to GD H4DOTC 27 DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIR CUIT LOW INPUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circui...

Page 2183: ...E BANK 1 SENSOR 2 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Crite ria P0139 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response Bank 1 Sensor 2 Ref to GD H4DOTC 68 DTC P0139 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE BANK 1 SENSOR 2 Di...

Page 2184: ...0 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold Bank 1 Ref to GD H4DOTC 113 DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD BANK 1 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P0442 Evaporative Em...

Page 2185: ...em Perfor mance Ref to GD H4DOTC 163 DTC P0519 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P0545 Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor Circuit Low Bank 1 Sensor 1 Ref t...

Page 2186: ...DOTC 196 DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE CON TROL SOL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detect ing Criteria P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Func tion Problem Ref to GD H4DOTC 198 DTC P1443...

Page 2187: ...uit High Bank 1 Ref to GD H4DOTC 220 DTC P2017 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER POSITION SENSOR SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH BANK 1 Diagnostic Trou ble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P2021 Intake Manifold Runner Position S...

Page 2188: ...ow Input Ref to GD H4DOTC 245 DTC P2127 THROTTLE PEDAL POSITION SENSOR SWITCH E CIRCUIT LOW INPUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P2128 Throttle Pedal Position Sensor Switch E Circuit H...

Page 2189: ...ent ignition coil Manufacturer Diamond Electric Spark plug Manufacturer and type NGK ILFR6B Thread size diameter pitch length mm 14 1 25 26 5 Spark plug gap mm in 0 7 0 8 0 028 0 031 Electrode Iridium...

Page 2190: ...om dust and dirt Before removal installation or disassembly be sure to clarify the failure Avoid unnecessary re moval installation disassembly and replacement Vehicle components are extremely hot afte...

Page 2191: ...e Ref to IG H4DOTC 4 REMOVAL Spark Plug B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque 16 N m 1 6 kgf m 11 7 ft lb C INSPECTION For inspection procedure refer to Diagnostics...

Page 2192: ...STARTING CHARGING SYSTEMS SC H4DOTC Page 1 General Description 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 2193: ...ve the spark plug with a spark plug socket B INSTALLATION 1 RH SIDE Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque Spark plug 21 N m 2 1 kgf m 15 2 ft lb Tightening torque Ignition coil 16...

Page 2194: ...rance between valve guides and stems 4 Overheating White or light gray insulator with black or brown spots and bluish burnt electrodes indicate engine overheating Moreover the appearance results from...

Page 2195: ...o IN H4DOTC 7 REMOVAL Air Cleaner Element 3 Remove the bolts A and nuts B which secure the air cleaner case front to the body 4 Remove the air cleaner case front B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse...

Page 2196: ...Remove the clip which installs the air intake duct on the front side of body B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal C INSPECTION 1 Check for cracks or loose connection 2 Inspect that...

Page 2197: ...fer to Air Clean er Case for removal procedure Ref to IN H4DOTC 8 REMOVAL Air Cleaner Case B INSTALLATION The resonator chamber and air cleaner case are in tegrated into one unit therefore refer to Ai...

Page 2198: ...which is connected to coolant filler tank 10 Loosen the clamp which secures turbocharger to intake duct 11 Remove the bolts which secure oil pipe bracket to turbocharger 12 Remove the oil inlet pipe f...

Page 2199: ...e turbocharger NOTE Use a new gasket 4 Tighten the union screws and flare nuts which secure the oil inlet pipe to the turbocharger CAUTION In order to prevent damaging the oil pipe on the cylinder hea...

Page 2200: ...ning torque 33 N m 3 4 kgf m 24 6 ft lb 8 Connect the engine coolant hose which is con nected to the coolant filler tank 9 Lift up the vehicle 10 Install the center exhaust pipe Ref to EX H4DOTC 9 INS...

Page 2201: ...aner case front Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 8 Air intake duct T1 1 0 0 10 0 74 2 Air cleaner case rear 9 Clip T2 2 5 0 25 1 8 3 Clip 10 Resonator chamber T3 6 0 0 61 4 4 4 Air intake boot 11 Cus...

Page 2202: ...take manifold 8 PCV pipe 14 Clamp 3 Solenoid valve bracket ASSY 9 Vacuum hose 4 Intake duct 10 Air by pass pipe Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 5 Engine harness ASSY 11 Clamp T1 6 5 0 66 4 8 6 Vacuu...

Page 2203: ...OTC 4 General Description INTAKE INDUCTION 3 INTERCOOLER 1 Intercooler 3 Air by pass valve Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Gasket T1 6 5 0 66 4 8 T2 16 1 6 11 6 IN 02075 T2 1 2 3 T1 asieps_tobira...

Page 2204: ...tal gasket 8 Oil outlet pipe T1 4 4 0 45 3 3 3 Turbocharger 9 Clip T2 4 9 0 50 3 6 4 Water pipe 10 Oil outlet hose T3 20 2 0 14 8 5 Clamp 11 Turbocharger bracket RH T4 33 3 4 24 6 6 Engine coolant hos...

Page 2205: ...m from dust and dirt Before removal installation or disassembly be sure to clarify the failure Avoid unnecessary re moval installation disassembly and replacement Vehicle components are extremely hot...

Page 2206: ...ef to FU H4DOTC 11 REMOVAL Intake Manifold 4 Remove the sensor engine harness and fuel pipe attached to the intake manifold Ref to FU H4DOTC 15 DISASSEMBLY Intake Mani fold 5 Remove the intake duct fr...

Page 2207: ...2 Disconnect the air by pass hose A from the air by pass valve 3 Remove the air by pass valve B from the inter cooler B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque 6 5 N m 0...

Page 2208: ...9 Engine Assembly 28 10 Engine Mounting 34 11 Preparation for Overhaul 35 12 V belt 36 13 Crank Pulley 39 14 Timing Belt Cover 41 15 Timing Belt 42 16 Cam Sprocket 50 17 Crank Sprocket 51 18 Camshaft...

Page 2209: ...turbocharger 5 Remove the bolts which secure the intercooler to the bracket and remove the intercooler B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque 16 N m 1 6 kgf m 11 6 ft...

Page 2210: ...ct 4 Remove the clip C from the air cleaner case 5 Remove the air cleaner case rear and air in take boot 6 Remove the air cleaner element B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Wh...

Page 2211: ...ler and water pump 7 Lower the vehicle 8 Remove the radiator Ref to CO H4DOTC 19 REMOVAL Radiator 9 Remove the V belts Ref to ME H4DOTC 36 REMOVAL V belt 10 Remove the rear side V belt tensioner 11 Re...

Page 2212: ...e mating surfaces of oil pump Liquid gasket THREE BOND 1215 Part No 004403007 or equivalent 2 Replace O ring A with a new part 3 Apply a coat of engine oil to the inside of oil seal 4 Position the oil...

Page 2213: ...T 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER NOTE Use a new oil seal 2 Apply a coat of engine oil to inner and outer ro tors 3 Assemble the inner and outer rotors in their orig inal positions 4 Assemble the oil rel...

Page 2214: ...d pump cover If the clearance is out of spec ification replace the rotors and the pump body Side clearance Standard 0 02 0 07 mm 0 0008 0 0028 in 4 OIL RELIEF VALVE Check the valve for assembly condit...

Page 2215: ...1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 B38 B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 3...

Page 2216: ...l pressure switch 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Measure the voltage of harness between oil pressure switch connector and chassis ground Connector terminal E11 No 1 Chassis ground Is the voltage m...

Page 2217: ...ge rate 2 US qt Imp qt min 47 0 49 7 41 4 or more Relief valve working pressure kPa kg cm2 psi 588 6 0 85 Oil filter Filter type Full flow filter type Filtration area cm2 sq in Outer diameter 68 mm 2...

Page 2218: ...placing oil it does not matter if the oil to be added is a different brand from that in the engine however use oil with SUBARU desig nated API standard and SAE viscosity num bers NOTE If the vehicle i...

Page 2219: ...5 3 6 7 Inner rotor 21 O ring T2 5 4 0 55 4 0 8 Outer rotor 22 Oil strainer T3 6 4 0 65 4 7 9 Oil pump cover 23 Gasket T4 10 1 0 7 0 10 Oil filter 24 Oil level gauge guide T5 25 2 5 18 4 11 Oil cooler...

Page 2220: ...from dust and dirt Before removal installation or disassembly be sure to clarify the failure Avoid unnecessary re moval installation disassembly and replacement Vehicle components are extremely hot af...

Page 2221: ...when removing and tightening crank pulley bolt 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER Used for installing oil seal into oil pump 18332AA000 OIL FILTER WRENCH Used for removing and installing oil filter Outer di...

Page 2222: ...e loosening the nut 7 Remove the intake manifold Ref to FU H4DOTC 11 REMOVAL Intake Manifold 8 Remove the radiator main fan and radiator sub fan Ref to CO H4DOTC 24 REMOVAL Radia tor Main Fan and Fan...

Page 2223: ...without filter as their installation positions are different Use a new gasket Tightening torque T1 8 N m 0 8 kgf m 5 9 ft lb T2 29 N m 3 0 kgf m 21 4 ft lb A Union screw with filter with protrusion B...

Page 2224: ...LATION Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor 10 Install the intake manifold Ref to FU H4DOTC 13 INSTALLATION Intake Mani fold 11 Temporarily tighten the bolts and flare nuts which secure the oil inlet pipe t...

Page 2225: ...UNION SCREW WITH FIL TER Check the filter part of union screw for clogging or damage and if defective replace the union screw with filter with a new part 2 OTHER INSPECTIONS 1 Check that the oil pipe...

Page 2226: ...149 94 Compression ratio 8 2 Compression pressure at 400 rpm kPa kg cm2 psi 981 1 177 10 12 142 171 Number of piston rings Pressure ring 2 Oil ring 1 Intake valve timing Open Max retard ATDC 5 Min adv...

Page 2227: ...ess mm in Intake Standard 1 0 1 4 0 039 0 055 Exhaust Standard 1 3 1 7 0 051 0 067 Stem outer diameter mm in Intake 5 955 5 970 0 2344 0 2350 Exhaust 5 945 5 960 0 2341 0 2346 Valve stem gap mm in Sta...

Page 2228: ...003 0 0001 Cylindricality mm in 0 004 0 0002 Grinding limit dia mm in To 51 750 2 0374 Crank journal Out of roundness mm in 0 005 0 0002 Cylindricality mm in 0 006 0 0002 Grinding limit dia mm in To...

Page 2229: ...15 Timing belt cover LH T4 39 4 0 28 9 6 Automatic belt tension adjuster ASSY 16 Front belt cover T5 Ref to ME H4DOTC 50 INSTALLATION Cam Sprocket 17 Timing belt cover RH 7 Belt idler 18 Crank pulley...

Page 2230: ...ANICAL 2 CYLINDER HEAD AND CAMSHAFT ME 02924 T4 1 T3 T3 T5 T5 T5 T5 T4 T1 3 7 6 9 8 10 12 29 13 26 23 24 21 20 6 16 17 18 9 25 8 19 15 14 30 11 5 4 22 T4 T4 14 30 12 28 28 27 T1 11 2 T2 T6 T6 T2 T2 T2...

Page 2231: ...p Rear LH T1 Ref to ME H4DOTC 57 INSTALLATION Cylinder Head 6 Oil flow control solenoid valve 21 Rocker cover gasket LH 7 Exhaust camshaft cap Rear RH 22 Rocker cover LH 8 Gasket 23 Oil filler cap T2...

Page 2232: ...ntake valve oil seal 9 Valve lifter 2 Intake valve 6 Valve spring 10 Exhaust valve oil seal 3 Cylinder head 7 Retainer 11 Intake valve guide 4 Valve spring seat 8 Retainer key 12 Exhaust valve guide M...

Page 2233: ...OTC 69 INSTALLATION Cylinder Block 7 Oil pump 21 Drain plug 8 Front oil seal 22 Metal gasket 9 Rear oil seal 23 Oil level gauge guide T6 70 7 1 51 6 10 O ring 24 Oil filter T7 First 12 1 2 8 9 Second...

Page 2234: ...lb 4 Ball bearing MT model 13 Connecting rod bearing T1 52 5 3 38 4 5 Top ring 14 Connecting rod cap T2 Ref to 5AT 64 INSTALLA TION Drive Plate 6 Second ring 15 Crankshaft 7 Oil ring 16 Woodruff key T...

Page 2235: ...rings Rotating parts and sliding parts such as piston bearing and gear should be coated with oil prior to assembly Be careful not to let oil grease or coolant contact the timing belt clutch disc and f...

Page 2236: ...des Used for removing and installing valve spring 498457000 ENGINE STAND ADAPTER RH Used with ENGINE STAND 499817000 498457100 ENGINE STAND ADAPTER LH Used with ENGINE STAND 499817000 498497100 CRANKS...

Page 2237: ...valve guide oil seals 499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE Used for installing piston pin piston and con necting rod 499037100 CONNECTINGROD BUSHING REMOVER AND INSTALLER Used for removing and installing connec...

Page 2238: ...SEAL INSTALLER Used for installing crankshaft oil seal Used with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL GUIDE 499597100 499597100 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL GUIDE Used for installing crankshaft oil seal Used with CRANKSHAFT OI...

Page 2239: ...EAMER Used for reaming valve guides 499817000 ENGINE STAND Stand used for engine disassembly and assembly Used with ENGINE STAND ADAPTER RH 498457000 LH 498457100 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH Used fo...

Page 2240: ...LER Used for installing camshaft oil seal for DOHC engine 18332AA000 OIL FILTER WRENCH Used for removing and installing oil filter Outer diameter 68 mm 2 68 in 18332AA010 OIL FILTER WRENCH Used for re...

Page 2241: ...stalling automatic transmission assembly to engine 42099AE000 CONNECTOR REMOVER Used for disconnecting quick connector of the engine compartment 18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE Used for installing the crank pu...

Page 2242: ...rocedures described in this section are based on the condition that the engine is removed from vehicle V belt Timing belt Camshaft Cylinder head 22771AA030 SUBARU SELECT MONITOR KIT Troubleshooting fo...

Page 2243: ...ller cap 4 Disconnect the fuel delivery hose and connect fuel pressure gauge 5 Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse box 6 Start the engine 7 Measure the fuel pressure while disconnecting pressu...

Page 2244: ...HANICAL 22 Piston A SPECIFICATION Refer to Cylinder Block for removal and installa tion procedures of pistons Ref to ME H4DOTC 65 REMOVAL Cylinder Block Ref to ME H4DOTC 69 INSTALLATION Cylinder Block...

Page 2245: ...Install the cylinder head to the cylinder block CAUTION Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of cylinder head and cylinder block NOTE Use a new cylinder head gasket 1 Clean the bolt threads an...

Page 2246: ...the timing belt cover Ref to ME H4DOTC 41 INSTALLATION Tim ing Belt Cover 8 Install the crank pulley Ref to ME H4DOTC 39 INSTALLATION Crank Pulley 9 Install the V belts Ref to ME H4DOTC 37 INSTALLATI...

Page 2247: ...seal 9 Valve lifter 2 Intake valve 6 Valve spring 10 Exhaust valve oil seal 3 Cylinder head 7 Retainer 11 Intake valve guide 4 Valve spring seat 8 Retainer key 12 Exhaust valve guide ME 02583 3 1 2 1...

Page 2248: ...re the warping of the cylinder head sur face that mates with crankcase using a straight edge A and thickness gauge B If the warping exceeds the limit regrind the surface with a surface grinder Warp li...

Page 2249: ...ace of valve guide holes in cyl inder head 5 Put a new valve guide coated with sufficient oil in cylinder and insert the ST1 into valve guide Press in until the valve guide upper end is flush with the...

Page 2250: ...valve and seat surface Install a new intake valve oil seal after lapping 5 VALVE SPRING 1 Check the valve springs for damage free length and tension Replace the valve spring if it is not within the st...

Page 2251: ...00 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE ST2 498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL GUIDE CAUTION Differentiate between the intake valve oil seal and exhaust valve oil seal by noting their differ ence in color Color of rubber part I...

Page 2252: ...ylinder head 2 Prepare a large receptacle bucket or other container in a well ventilated location and fill the receptacle with water at least 10 liters 3 Immerse the damaged valve in the recepta cle C...

Page 2253: ...cates the direction of rotation on timing belt fade away put new marks before removing the timing belt as shown in procedures below 1 Turn the crankshaft using ST and align the alignment marks on cran...

Page 2254: ...the intake and exhaust sprocket If the cam sprocket is rotated the intake and exhaust valve heads strike together and valve stems are bent 2 AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUST ER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER 1...

Page 2255: ...the cylinder Do not release the press pressure until stop per pin is completely inserted 1 Attach the automatic belt tension adjuster assembly to vertical pressing tool 2 Slowly move the adjuster rod...

Page 2256: ...gn single line mark A on the intake cam sprocket RH with notch B on timing belt cov er Ensure double lines C on intake and ex haust camshaft sprockets are aligned 4 Align the single line mark A on exh...

Page 2257: ...e rotated to install the timing belts 2 intake and 4 exhaust cam of camshafts LH are held to push their corre sponding valves down Under this condition these valves are held lifted Right side cam shaf...

Page 2258: ...sure that the direction of belt rotation is correct 4 Install the belt idlers Tightening torque 39 N m 4 0 kgf m 28 9 ft lb NOTE Make sure that the marks on the timing belt and sprockets are aligned 5...

Page 2259: ...timing belt and timing belt guide Clearance 1 0 0 5 mm 0 039 0 020 in 3 Tighten the bolt Tightening torque 9 75 N m 1 0 kgf m 7 2 ft lb Tightening torque 6 4 N m 0 65 kgf m 4 7 ft lb Tightening torque...

Page 2260: ...cylinder Repeat this operation two to three times 2 With the adjuster rod moved all the way up apply a pressure of 165 N 16 8 kgf 37 1 lb to it Check the adjuster rod stiffness 3 If the adjuster rod...

Page 2261: ...ottle valve 7 Check the starter motor for satisfactory perfor mance and operation 8 Hold the compression gauge tightly against the spark plug hole NOTE When using a screw in type compression gauge the...

Page 2262: ...21 Intake and Exhaust Valve A SPECIFICATION Refer to Cylinder Head for removal and installa tion procedures of intake and exhaust valves Ref to ME H4DOTC 57 REMOVAL Cylinder Head Ref to ME H4DOTC 57 I...

Page 2263: ...ect Engine Control System in Selection Menu 9 Select Current Data Display Save in Engine Control System Diagnosis 10 Select Data Display in Data Display Menu 11 Start the engine and read the engine id...

Page 2264: ...l flow control solenoid valve as sembly connector 8 Remove the tensioner bracket 9 Remove the timing belt cover No 2 LH 10 Remove the timing belt cover No 2 RH 11 Remove the spark plug cords 12 Remove...

Page 2265: ...45 counterclockwise 2 Camshaft cap and oil flow control solenoid valve assembly installation 1 Apply small amount of liquid gasket to the mating surface of cap NOTE Do not apply liquid gasket excessi...

Page 2266: ...sket THREE BOND 1215 Part No 004403007 or equivalent 3 Install the rocker cover on cylinder head En sure the gasket is properly positioned during in stallation 4 Temporarily tighten the rocker cover t...

Page 2267: ...lt Cover 16 Install the crank pulley Ref to ME H4DOTC 39 INSTALLATION Crank Pulley 17 Install the V belts Ref to ME H4DOTC 37 INSTALLATION V belt C INSPECTION 1 Measure the bend and repair or replace...

Page 2268: ...0 072 mm 0 0015 0 0028 in 7 Completely remove the plastigauge 5 Check the cam face condition remove the minor faults by grinding with oil stone Measure the cam height H If it exceeds the standard or o...

Page 2269: ...connect the battery cable and then re move the battery and battery carrier 2 Disconnect the connector of ignition coil 3 Remove the ignition coil 4 Place a suitable container under the vehicle 5 Disco...

Page 2270: ...inspection install the related parts in the reverse order of removal B ADJUSTMENT CAUTION Adjustment of valve clearance should be per formed while engine is cold 1 Measure all the valve clearances Re...

Page 2271: ...0 1988 13228 AB482 5 06 0 1992 13228 AB492 5 07 0 1996 13228 AB502 5 08 0 2000 13228 AB512 5 09 0 2004 13228 AB522 5 10 0 2008 13228 AB532 5 11 0 2012 13228 AB542 5 12 0 2016 13228 AB552 5 13 0 2020 1...

Page 2272: ...WRENCH Tightening torque Tighten to 30 N m 3 1 kgf m 22 1 ft lb of torque and then tighten further by 45 ST 499977500 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH Tightening torque Tighten to 30 N m 3 1 kgf m 22 1 ft lb of to...

Page 2273: ...e speed is between 1 000 and 2 000 rpm Sound is reduced when fuel injector connector of noisy cyl inder is disconnected NOTE Worn camshaft main bearing Worn bearing at crankshaft end of connecting rod...

Page 2274: ...EXHAUST EX H4DOTC Page 1 General Description 2 2 Front Exhaust Pipe 6 3 Center Exhaust Pipe 8 4 Joint Pipe 11 5 Rear Exhaust Pipe 12 6 Muffler 13 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 2275: ...cm2 43 psi or more CAUTION If the oil pressure is out of specification check oil pump oil filter and lubrication line Ref to LU H4DOTC 25 INSPECTION Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General If the...

Page 2276: ...y 2 Remove the engine mounting from engine as sembly B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Make sure the engine mounting cover of the RH side is securely installed Tightening tor...

Page 2277: ...der head Ref toME H4DOTC 57 REMOVAL CylinderHead 10 Remove the clutch disc and cover Ref to CL 10 REMOVAL Clutch Disc and Cover 11 Remove the flywheel MT model Ref to CL 13 REMOVAL Flywheel 12 Remove...

Page 2278: ...s in place of oil pan cutter 21 Remove the oil strainer stay 22 Remove the oil strainer 23 Remove the baffle plate 24 Remove the water pipe 25 Remove the service hole cover and service hole plugs usin...

Page 2279: ...N PIN REMOVER NOTE Be careful not to confuse the original combination of piston piston pin and cylinder 28 Similarly remove the piston pins from 3 and 4 pistons 29 Remove the bolts which connect cylin...

Page 2280: ...d 35 Remove the crankshaft bearings from cylinder block using a hammer handle NOTE Do not confuse the combination of crankshaft bear ings Press the bearing at the end opposite to lock ing lip 36 Draw...

Page 2281: ...on cylinder block 2 and 4 Liquid gasket THREE BOND 1215 Part No 004403007 or equivalent NOTE Do not allow liquid gasket to run over to O ring grooves oil passages bearing grooves etc 4 Apply a coat of...

Page 2282: ...ce Tightening torque 18 N m 1 8 kgf m 13 0 ft lb 9 Further tighten the LH side bolts A D in al phabetical sequence A C 90 B D 40 N m 4 1 kgf m 29 5 ft lb 10 Tighten the RH side bolts E J 90 further in...

Page 2283: ...fig ure 14 Position the second ring gap at 180 on the re verse side the top ring gap 15 Position the upper rail gap at C in the figure 16 Align the upper rail spin stopper D to the side hole E on the...

Page 2284: ...site to the service holes in cylinder block when positioning all pistons in corresponding cylinders NOTE Use new snap rings A Front side ME 00154 4 3 2 1 A 1 Piston 4 Gasket Tightening torque N m kgf...

Page 2285: ...front of the engine 21 Installing piston pin 1 Apply a coat of engine oil to ST3 before in sertion and then insert it into the service hole to align piston pin hole with connecting rod small end ST3...

Page 2286: ...for 1 and 2 cylinders install the pistons and piston pins 22 Install the water pipe 23 Install the baffle plate Tightening torque 6 4 N m 0 65 kgf m 4 7 ft lb ME 00140 1 Piston 5 Service hole plug Tig...

Page 2287: ...1207C Part No 004403012 or equivalent Bolt thread A THREE BOND 1324 Part No 004403042 or equivalent Tightening torque 6 4 N m 0 65 kgf m 4 7 ft lb 28 Install the flywheel MT model Ref to CL 13 INSTALL...

Page 2288: ...ter pump tighten bolts in two stages in alphabetical sequence as shown in the figure 33 Install the water by pass pipe for heater 34 Install the oil cooler Tightening torque T1 54 N m 5 5 kgf m 40 ft...

Page 2289: ...V belts Ref to ME H4DOTC 37 INSTALLATION V belt 48 Install the intake manifold Ref to FU H4DOTC 13 INSTALLATION Intake Manifold C DISASSEMBLY 1 Remove the connecting rod cap 2 Remove the connecting ro...

Page 2290: ...n the threads 4 Install the oil ring spacer upper rail and lower rail in this order by hand Install the second ring and top ring using piston ring expander E INSPECTION 1 CYLINDER BLOCK 1 Visually che...

Page 2291: ...piston pin directions at the heights as shown in the figure using a cylinder bore gauge NOTE Measurement should be performed at a tempera ture of 20 C 68 F Taper Standard 0 015 mm 0 0006 in Out of ro...

Page 2292: ...ot perform bor ing on one cylinder only Nor use an oversize piston for one cylinder only 2 If the cylinder inner diameter exceeds 100 015 mm 3 9376 in after boring and hon ing replace the crankcase NO...

Page 2293: ...f each rail 2 Squarely place the piston ring and oil ring in cyl inder and measure the piston ring gap with a thick ness gauge 3 Measure the clearance between piston ring and piston ring groove with a...

Page 2294: ...using plastigauge If any oil clearance is not within the standard replace the defective bearing with a new part of standard size or under size as necessary See the table below Connecting rod oil clear...

Page 2295: ...able V block is not available install 1 and 5 crankshaft bearing on cylinder block position the crankshaft on these bearings and then mea sure the crankshaft bend using a dial gauge Crankshaft bend li...

Page 2296: ...2 3619 2 3625 59 992 60 008 2 3619 2 3625 51 984 52 000 2 0466 2 0472 Bearing size Thickness at center 1 998 2 011 0 0787 0 0792 2 000 2 013 0 0787 0 0793 1 486 1 498 0 0585 0 0590 0 03 0 0012 unders...

Page 2297: ...crank sprocket 2 Install the timing belt Ref to ME H4DOTC 44 INSTALLATION Tim ing Belt 3 Install the timing belt cover Ref to ME H4DOTC 41 INSTALLATION Timing Belt Cover 4 Install the crank pulley Re...

Page 2298: ...BELT 1 Remove the collector cover 2 Remove the V belt covers 3 Loosen the lock bolt A 4 Loosen the slider bolt B 5 Remove the front side belt C 2 REAR SIDE BELT 1 Loosen the lock nut A 2 Loosen the s...

Page 2299: ...ten the lock bolt A 3 Tighten the slider bolt B Tightening torque Lock bolt A 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 18 1 ft lb Slider bolt B 8 N m 0 8 kgf m 5 9 ft lb 2 REAR SIDE BELT 1 Remove the A C belt tensioner 2 Ins...

Page 2300: ...50 450 N 36 46 kgf 78 101 lb Belt tension when not using a belt tension gauge A When installing new parts 7 9 mm 0 276 0 354 in At inspection 9 11 mm 0 354 0 433 in B When installing new parts 7 5 8 5...

Page 2301: ...NICAL 24 Crankshaft A SPECIFICATION Refer to Cylinder Block for removal and installa tion procedures of crankshaft Ref to ME H4DOTC 65 REMOVAL Cylinder Block Ref to ME H4DOTC 69 INSTALLATION Cylin der...

Page 2302: ...ENGINE STAND 2 In this section the procedures described under each index are all connected and stated in order The procedure for overhauling of the engine will be completed when you go through all ste...

Page 2303: ...t cover C B INSTALLATION 1 Install the front timing belt cover C Tightening torque 5 N m 0 5 kgf m 3 6 ft lb 2 Install the timing belt cover RH B Tightening torque 5 N m 0 5 kgf m 3 6 ft lb 3 Install...

Page 2304: ...ld vacuum Vacuum gauge indication Possible engine condition 1 Needle is steady but lower than normal position This ten dency becomes more evident as engine temperature rises Leakage around intake mani...

Page 2305: ...4 Tighten the crank pulley bolts 1 Use the ST to lock the crank pulley and temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH Tightening torque 47 N m 4 8 kgf m 34 7 ft lb 2 Dr...

Page 2306: ...diator Sub Fan and Fan Mo tor 2 Use the ST1 to lock the crank pulley and temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt ST1 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH Tightening torque 47 N m 4 8 kgf m 34 7 ft lb 3 Set...

Page 2307: ...itor 5 Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to the data link connector 6 Turn the ignition switch to ON and Subaru Select Monitor switch to ON 7 Select Each System Check in Main Menu 8 Select Engine Cont...

Page 2308: ...fuel filler cap 6 Remove the collector cover 7 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 8 Remove the radiator from vehicle Ref to CO H4DOTC 19 REMOVAL Radiator 9 Remove the coolant filler tank Ref to...

Page 2309: ...elt Ref to ME H4DOTC 36 FRONT SIDE BELT RE MOVAL V belt 2 Disconnect the power steering pressure switch connector 3 Remove the power steering pump from the engine Ref to PS 45 REMOVAL Oil Pump 4 Place...

Page 2310: ...ve the pitching stopper 21 Disconnect the fuel hoses from fuel pipe 1 Disconnect the connector of fuel pipe by pushing the ST in the direction of arrow ST 42099AE000 CONNECTOR REMOVER 2 Remove the cli...

Page 2311: ...engine horizontally until main shaft is withdrawn from clutch cover 4 Slowly move the engine away from engine compartment NOTE Be careful not to damage adjacent parts or body panels with crank pulley...

Page 2312: ...bolts while rotating the engine using the ST CAUTION Be careful not to drop bolts into the torque con verter clutch housing ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH Tightening torque 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 18 1 ft...

Page 2313: ...INSTALLATION Intercool er 2 Install the air cleaner element and air clean er case Ref to IN H4DOTC 8 INSTALLA TION Air Cleaner Case 19 Install the A C pressure hoses NOTE Use new O rings Tightening t...

Page 2314: ...CAL 23 Connecting Rod A SPECIFICATION Refer to Cylinder Block for removal and installa tion procedures of connecting rod Ref to ME H4DOTC 65 REMOVAL Cylinder Block Ref to ME H4DOTC 69 INSTALLA TION Cy...

Page 2315: ...relay A Lack of or insufficient fuel B Belt Trouble B Defective timing B Compression Incorrect valve clearance C Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective gas...

Page 2316: ...control system Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 2 Basic Diagnostic Procedure A Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A Loosened or cracked PCV hose A Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A Defective intake ma...

Page 2317: ...tion system Incorrect oil pressure B Cooling system Over heating C Over cooling C Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction A 4 Surging Engine control system Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 2 Basic...

Page 2318: ...e sealing B Defective valve stem C Worn or broken valve spring C Worn or stuck piston rings cylinder and piston C Incorrect valve timing A Lubrication system Incorrect oil pressure C Cooling system Ov...

Page 2319: ...mpression Incorrect valve clearance B Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective gasket C Improper valve sealing B Defective valve stem C Worn or broken valve s...

Page 2320: ...ting device and wire ropes 11 Lift up the vehicle CAUTION When lifting up the vehicle raise up wire ropes at the same time 12 Remove the under cover 13 Drain the engine oil 14 Remove the front exhaust...

Page 2321: ...nstall the oil strainer onto baffle plate NOTE Use new O rings Tightening torque 10 N m 1 0 kgf m 7 2 ft lb 4 Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces and install the oil pan Liquid gasket THREE BON...

Page 2322: ...Install the pitching stopper Tightening torque T1 50 N m 5 1 kgf m 36 9 ft lb T2 58 N m 5 9 kgf m 42 8 ft lb 13 Install the radiator upper brackets 14 Install the intercooler Ref to IN H4DOTC 12 INSTA...

Page 2323: ...oil pressure switch threads Liquid gasket THREE BOND 1324 Part No 004403007 or equivalent 2 Install the oil pressure switch onto engine block Tightening torque 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 18 4 ft lb 3 Connect th...

Page 2324: ...lter 7 Remove the oil cooler connector and remove the oil cooler B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Use new O rings Tightening torque T 54 N m 5 5 kgf m 40 ft lb C INSPECTION...

Page 2325: ...being care ful not to damage the seal rubber 4 Tighten further after the seal rubber contacts the oil cooler NOTE In case of the filter of outer diameter 68mm 2 68 in tighten by about one turn When us...

Page 2326: ...oil filter Clean or replace Malfunction of oil relief valve in oil pump Clean or replace Clogged oil passage Clean Excessive tip clearance and side clearance of oil pump rotor and gear Replace Clogged...

Page 2327: ...LU H4DOTC 26 Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General LUBRICATION asieps_tobira book 26...

Page 2328: ...SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS SP H4DOTC Page 1 General Description 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 2329: ...REPLACEMENT 1 Open the engine oil filler cap for quick draining of engine oil 2 Lift up the vehicle 3 Drain engine oil by loosening the engine oil drain plug NOTE Prepare the container for draining o...

Page 2330: ...engine stops recheck the oil level If necessary add engine oil up to the upper level on level gauge A Oil level gauge B Engine oil filler cap C Upper level D Lower level E Approx 1 0 2 1 1 US qt 0 9...

Page 2331: ...FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT REPLACE MENT Engine Coolant C INSPECTION Replace the thermostat if the valve does not close completely at an ambient temperature or if the fol lowing test shows unsatisfactor...

Page 2332: ...ec onds 5 Wait for one minute after the engine stops open the radiator cap If the engine coolant level drops add engine coolant into radiator up to the filler neck position 6 Perform the procedures 4...

Page 2333: ...st be increased from 25 to 40 Find point A where the 25 line of engine coolant concentration inter sects with the 40 curve of the necessary engine coolant concentration and read the scale on the verti...

Page 2334: ...an motor Refer to Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor for removal and installation procedure Ref to CO H6DO 21 REMOVAL Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor Ref to CO H6DO 21 IN STALLATION Radiator Sub Fan and Fa...

Page 2335: ...ator cap is functioning properly if it holds the service limit pressure for five six seconds Specified pressure 93 123 kPa 0 95 1 25 kg cm2 14 18 psi Service limit pressure 83 kPa 0 85 kg cm2 12 psi C...

Page 2336: ...t Ref to IN H6DO 8 REMOVAL Air Intake Duct 6 Disconnect the connector from radiator fan con trol unit 7 Remove the bolts which hold the sub shroud to the radiator 8 Lift up the vehicle 9 Remove the un...

Page 2337: ...tor fan control unit bolt tightening torque 5 4 N m 0 55 kgf m 4 0 ft lb Tightening torque 3 8 N m 0 39 kgf m 2 8 ft lb Tightening torque 6 2 N m 0 63 kgf m 4 6 ft lb E INSPECTION 1 Disconnect the con...

Page 2338: ...move the bolts which hold the reservoir tank to the fan shroud then remove the reservoir tank B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque 6 2 N m 0 63 kgf m 4 6 ft lb C IN...

Page 2339: ...er NOTE Apply engine coolant to O ring Tightening torque 6 4 N m 0 65 kgf m 4 7 ft lb NOTE Use new O rings Apply engine coolant to O ring to install water pump easier 2 Install the timing chain assemb...

Page 2340: ...ient clearance between piston and cylinder Adjust or replace k Slipping clutch Correct or replace l Dragging brake Adjust m Faulty transmission gear oil Replace n Malfunction of radiator fan Inspect t...

Page 2341: ...CO H6DO 26 Engine Cooling System Trouble in General COOLING asieps_tobira book 26...

Page 2342: ...Description 2 2 Oil Pressure System 5 3 Engine Oil 7 4 Oil Pump 8 5 Oil Pump Relief Valve 11 6 Oil Pan and Strainer 12 7 Oil Pressure Switch 14 8 Engine Oil Filter 15 9 Oil Cooler 16 10 General Diagno...

Page 2343: ...18 25 21 23 24 32 31 26 27 33 34 B135 5 6 7 2 1 3 4 29 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 16 30 9 8 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 32 31 26 27 33 34 35 B B361 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 B30 A31 F106 1 2 3 B7 E S...

Page 2344: ...tance of terminal in main fan relay 1 switch Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Replace the main fan relay 1 2 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 1 1 Connect the battery to terminal of main fan relay 1 co...

Page 2345: ...radiator fan control unit 2 Measure the resistance between radiator fan control unit connector and chassis ground Connector terminal F106 No 3 Chassis ground Is the resistance less than 5 Go to step...

Page 2346: ...ANT REPLACEMENT Engine Coolant 10 Remove the ATF hose from the clip of the radi ator main fan shroud 11 Remove the radiator main fan motor harness from the clip 12 Lower the vehicle 13 Remove the rese...

Page 2347: ...DISASSEMBLY 1 Remove the nut which holds fan to fan motor and shroud assembly 2 Remove the clip which holds the fan motor onto the shroud D ASSEMBLY Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly Tighte...

Page 2348: ...tor from radiator fan con trol unit NOTE Do not remove the main fan motor harness connec tor 2 Connect the battery to radiator fan control unit as shown in the figure 3 Check the fan motor for operati...

Page 2349: ...7 Disconnect the radiator hose from radiator 8 Disconnect the ATF cooler hose from the radia tor 9 Lower the vehicle 10 Remove the hood stay holder 11 Remove the air intake duct Ref to IN H6DO 8 REMOV...

Page 2350: ...adiator hose 5 Install the reservoir tank Ref to CO H6DO 23 INSTALLATION Reservoir Tank 6 Connect the connector to the radiator fan control unit 7 Install the air intake duct Ref to IN H6DO 8 INSTALLA...

Page 2351: ...the tester to the instal lation position of cap 2 In the following cases apply a pressure of 157 kPa 1 6 kg cm2 23 psi to the radiator There is coolant leaking from the radiator or its vicinity There...

Page 2352: ...m in 9 0 0 354 or more Valve bore mm in 35 1 38 Radia tor fan Motor input Main fan W 160 Sub fan W 160 Fan diameter Blade Main fan 320 mm 12 60 in 5 Sub fan 320 mm 12 6 in 7 Radiator Type Down flow pr...

Page 2353: ...ption COOLING 1 A C OFF control 3 A C ON control A C middle pres sure switch ON A Fan speed 2 A C ON control A C middle pres sure switch OFF B Coolant temperature CO 02115 100 1 70 A B 2 70 A B 3 70 A...

Page 2354: ...neral Description COOLING B COMPONENT 1 WATER PUMP 1 Water pump ASSY 4 Gasket Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 O ring 5 Thermostat cover T 6 4 0 65 4 7 3 Thermostat 1 2 4 5 T T CO 02125 3 asieps_to...

Page 2355: ...7 Radiator main fan shroud 6 Radiator upper cushion 18 Engine coolant reservoir tank cap Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 7 Clamp 19 Over flow hose T1 3 8 0 39 2 8 8 Radiator hose A 20 Engine coolant...

Page 2356: ...parts Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or units be sure...

Page 2357: ...13 Drain Valve A SPECIFICATION Canister is a non disassembled part so do not re move the drain valve from canister Refer to Canister for removal and installation pro cedure Ref to EC H6DO 5 REMOVAL Ca...

Page 2358: ...ore refer to Fuel Level Sensor for removal procedure Ref to FU H6DO 51 REMOVAL Fuel Level Sensor B INSTALLATION The fuel temperature sensor and fuel level sensor are integrated into one unit therefore...

Page 2359: ...in order and pro tect them from dust and dirt Before removal installation or disassembly be sure to clarify the failure Avoid unnecessary re moval installation disassembly and replacement Vehicle comp...

Page 2360: ...ble from battery 4 Lift up the vehicle 5 Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank pressure sensor 6 Disconnect the pressure hose from the fuel tank pressure sensor 7 Remove the fuel tank pressure s...

Page 2361: ...AL Front Exhaust Pipe B INSTALLATION The front and rear catalytic converters are integrat ed into front exhaust pipe as one unit therefore re fer to Front Exhaust Pipe for installation procedure Ref t...

Page 2362: ...CES 8 Fuel Sub Level Sensor A REMOVAL For removal procedure refer to FU H6DO sec tion Ref to FU H6DO 52 REMOVAL Fuel Sub Level Sensor B INSTALLATION For installation procedure refer to FU H6DO section...

Page 2363: ...the pressure con trol solenoid valve 5 Disconnect the evaporation hose B from the pressure control solenoid valve 6 Remove the bolts C which secure the bracket to the fuel tank 7 Remove the pressure...

Page 2364: ...REMOVAL Fuel Filler Pipe 2 Disconnect the evaporation hose from the shut valve 3 Remove the shut valve from the fuel filler pipe B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torq...

Page 2365: ...t the PCV hose 2 Remove the PCV valve from rocker cover B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Apply liquid gasket to the bolt threads of PCV valve Liquid gasket THREE BOND 1141 P...

Page 2366: ...EC H6DO 16 PCV Valve EMISSION CONTROL AUX EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES asieps_tobira book 16...

Page 2367: ...INTAKE INDUCTION IN H6DO Page 1 General Description 2 2 Air Cleaner Element 4 3 Air Cleaner Case 5 4 Air Intake Chamber 7 5 Air Intake Duct 8 6 Resonator Chamber 9 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 2368: ...connect the drain valve connector B 7 Remove clip C 8 Remove the canister from body B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Check that there is no damage or dust on the quick conne...

Page 2369: ...EVICES 6 Fuel Level Sensor A REMOVAL For removal procedure refer to FU H6DO sec tion Ref to FU H6DO 51 REMOVAL Fuel Lev el Sensor B INSTALLATION For installation procedure refer to FU H6DO section Ref...

Page 2370: ...ake Cham ber 4 Disconnect the connector and hoses of purge control solenoid valve and then remove the purge control solenoid valve B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening tor...

Page 2371: ...11 Drain Filter A SPECIFICATION Canister is a non disassembled part so do not re move the drain filter from canister Refer to Canister for removal and installation pro cedure Ref to EC H6DO 5 REMOVAL...

Page 2372: ...L Front Exhaust Pipe B INSTALLATION The front and rear catalytic converters are integrat ed into front exhaust pipe as one unit therefore re fer to Front Exhaust Pipe for installation procedure Ref to...

Page 2373: ...l up DTC and freeze frame data General scan tool functions consist of 1 MODE 01 Current powertrain diagnostic data 2 MODE 02 Powertrain freeze frame data 3 MODE 03 Emission related powertrain DTC 4 MO...

Page 2374: ...m fuel trim Bank 2 09 Long term fuel trim Bank 2 0B Intake manifold absolute pressure kPa 0C Engine revolution rpm 0D Vehicle speed km h MPH 0E Ignition timing advance 0F Intake air temperature C or F...

Page 2375: ...ation OBD II trouble diagnostic information NOTE Refer to general scan tool manufacturer s instruction manual to clear the emission related diagnostic infor mation MODE 04 PID Data Unit of measure 02...

Page 2376: ...ative emission control system 0 04 inch leak 04 Evaporative emission control system 0 04 inch leak 05 Evaporative emission control system 0 02 inch leak 06 Evaporative emission control system 0 02 inc...

Page 2377: ...connector 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON and the Sub aru Select Monitor or general scan tool power switch to ON 4 Read DTC on Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool Is DTC displayed on the Sub...

Page 2378: ...electrical control modules using a tapered pin with a diameter of less than 0 64 mm 0 025 in Do not insert the pin more than 5 mm 0 20 in into the part 6 Remove the ECM from the located position after...

Page 2379: ...ABS the ABS warning light may illuminate when performing driving test with jacked up or lifted up condition but this is not a system malfunction The reason for this is the speed difference between the...

Page 2380: ...intermittent injection system where the electro magnetic injection valve fuel in jector opens only for a short period of time de pending on the quantity of air required for one cycle of operation In...

Page 2381: ...any scan tools except Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool 6 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF and Subaru Select Monitor switch to ON 7 On the Main Menu display screen select Each System...

Page 2382: ...ory fuel pump relay oper ation check Fuel Pump Compulsory radiator fan relay operation check Radiator Fan Relay Compulsory air conditioning relay operation check A C Compressor Relay Compulsory purge...

Page 2383: ...ubaru Select Monitor or general scan tool because the circuit for Subaru Select Monitor may be damaged EN 00037 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 14 16 Terminal No Remarks Terminal No Remarks 1 Power s...

Page 2384: ...ELECT MONITOR OPERATION MANUAL 2 SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OBD MODE 1 On the Main Menu display screen select Each System Check and press the YES key 2 On the System Selection Menu display screen select En...

Page 2385: ...LFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON Malfunction Indicator Light 3 Malfunction indicator light does not go off Ref to EN H6DO diag 52 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO OFF Malfunction Indi...

Page 2386: ...ndica tor light goes out If it does not go off either the en gine or emission control system has malfunction 3 Turn the ignition switch to OFF and connect the test mode connector 1 When the ignition s...

Page 2387: ...25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26 33 34 35 IGNITION SWITCH SBF 6 MAIN SBF 3 6 B72 BATTERY E No 5 i10 4 3 COMBINATION METER i3 B38 8 16 B136 11 ECM B72 B136 i10 B38 Step...

Page 2388: ...ollowing item Open circuit in harness between ECM and combi nation meter con nector Poor contact in coupling connector 5 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of combination meter con nector Is there...

Page 2389: ...16 15 14 13 12 11 5 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26 33 34 35 IGNITION SWITCH SBF 6 MAIN SBF 3 6 B72 BATTERY E No 5 i10 4 3 COMBINATION METER i3 B...

Page 2390: ...IGNITION SWITCH i10 COMBINATION METER B135 B SBF 6 6 C11 C6 B27 ECM B72 8 MAIN SBF No 5 1 1 B75 1 2 1 2 16 i3 B38 E 4 3 B136 C B135 B136 B C 1 3 4 5 6 2 i10 B38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16...

Page 2391: ...o OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 3 Measure the resistance of harness between test mode connector and ECM con nector Connector terminal B76 No 1 B136 No 6 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to...

Page 2392: ...MBINATION METER B135 B SBF 6 6 C11 C6 B27 ECM B72 8 MAIN SBF No 5 1 1 B75 1 2 1 2 16 i3 B38 E 4 3 B136 C B135 B136 B C 1 3 4 5 6 2 i10 B38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 1 3 4 6...

Page 2393: ...nks when test mode connector is con nected 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM CON NECTOR AND CHASSIS GROUND TERMI NAL 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 3 Measure the resi...

Page 2394: ...o EN H6DO diag 70 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Go to step 2 2 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Start the engine and let it idle 2 Measure the AVCS system operating angle and oil flow control solenoid valv...

Page 2395: ...ode DTC Go to step 2 2 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Start the engine and let it idle 2 Measure the AVCS system operating angle and oil flow control solenoid valve duty output using Subaru Select Monitor or ge...

Page 2396: ...to step 2 2 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Start the engine and let it idle 2 Check the AVCS system operating angle and oil flow control solenoid valve duty output using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan to...

Page 2397: ...Trouble Code DTC Go to step 2 2 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Start the engine and let it idle 2 Check the AVCS system operating angle and oil flow control solenoid valve duty output using Subaru Select Monito...

Page 2398: ...1 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Erroneous idling CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear M...

Page 2399: ...and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch connector 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between EC...

Page 2400: ...2 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Erroneous idling CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear M...

Page 2401: ...alve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch connector 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and variable...

Page 2402: ...26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 2...

Page 2403: ...to step 3 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and front oxygen A F sensor connector 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MAIN RELAY AND FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR CON NECTOR Measure the resistance of harn...

Page 2404: ...26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 2...

Page 2405: ...ECM and engine ground terminal Poor contact in ECM connector Poor contact in coupling connector 3 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Start the engine 2 Read the data of the front oxygen A F sensor heater current u...

Page 2406: ...2 No 1 Is the resistance less than 10 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open or ground short circuit of har ness between front oxygen A F sen sor and ECM...

Page 2407: ...5 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22...

Page 2408: ...f the front oxygen A F sensor heater current using the Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref...

Page 2409: ...9 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13...

Page 2410: ...this case repair the following item Open circuit in harness between ECM and engine ground terminal Poor contact in ECM connector Poor contact in coupling connector 3 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Start the en...

Page 2411: ...or con nector After repair replace the ECM Ref to FU H6DO 33 Engine Control Module ECM 7 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Measure the resistance between the rear oxygen sen...

Page 2412: ...39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13...

Page 2413: ...Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Read the data of rear oxygen sensor heater current using the Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure re...

Page 2414: ...26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 2...

Page 2415: ...o to step 3 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and front oxygen A F sensor connector 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MAIN RELAY AND FRONT OXYGEN A F SENSOR CON NECTOR Measure the resistance of har...

Page 2416: ...26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 2...

Page 2417: ...ECM and engine ground terminal Poor contact in ECM connector Poor contact in coupling connector 3 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Start the engine 2 Read the data of the front oxygen A F sensor heater current u...

Page 2418: ...2 No 1 Is the resistance less than 10 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open or ground short circuit of har ness between front oxygen A F sen sor and ECM...

Page 2419: ...5 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22...

Page 2420: ...f the front oxygen A F sensor heater current using the Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref...

Page 2421: ...9 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13...

Page 2422: ...n this case repair the following item Open circuit in harness between ECM and engine ground terminal Poor contact in ECM connector Poor contact in coupling connector 3 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Start the e...

Page 2423: ...or con nector After repair replace the ECM Ref to FU H6DO 33 Engine Control Module ECM 7 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Measure the resistance between the rear oxygen sen...

Page 2424: ...39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13...

Page 2425: ...Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Read the data of rear oxygen sensor heater current using the Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure re...

Page 2426: ...air or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 0...

Page 2427: ...Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0106 2 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DIS PLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check the relative DTC List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC...

Page 2428: ...s idling CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspectio...

Page 2429: ...Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and oil switching sole noid valve connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit in harness between ECM and oil switch ing solenoid...

Page 2430: ...us idling CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspecti...

Page 2431: ...inal E69 No 1 Engine ground E69 No 2 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the short circuit between ECM and oil switching solenoid valve connector 2 CHECK OIL SWITCHING SO...

Page 2432: ...s idling CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspectio...

Page 2433: ...Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and oil switching sole noid valve connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit in harness between ECM and oil switch ing solenoid...

Page 2434: ...us idling CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspecti...

Page 2435: ...inal E70 No 1 Engine ground E70 No 2 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the short circuit between ECM and oil switching solenoid valve connector 2 CHECK OIL SWITCHING SO...

Page 2436: ...ing Engine stalls Poor driving performance CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to E...

Page 2437: ...DTC displayed Check the appro priate DTC using the List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H6DO diag 70 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DT...

Page 2438: ...Poor driving performance CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PRO...

Page 2439: ...ep 2 2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM connector and chassis ground while engine is idling Connector terminal B135 No 26 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 0 2 V Go to s...

Page 2440: ...0 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 7 Repair the ground short circuit between ECM and mass air flow sen sor connector 7 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of mass air flow s...

Page 2441: ...Poor driving performance CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PR...

Page 2442: ...the circuit has returned to a nor mal condition at this time Go to step 2 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector f...

Page 2443: ...pair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN...

Page 2444: ...oltage between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 19 Chassis ground Does the voltage change by shaking the ECM harness and connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector R...

Page 2445: ...tor terminal B134 No 29 E21 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 9 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and manifold absolute pressure sensor connector 9 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check po...

Page 2446: ...epair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN...

Page 2447: ...ector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Go to step 5 5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN SOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector fr...

Page 2448: ...o 29 E21 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 9 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and manifold absolute pressure sensor connector 9 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of manif...

Page 2449: ...roneous idling Poor driving performance CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H...

Page 2450: ...Measure the engine coolant temperature using the Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN...

Page 2451: ...driving performance CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDU...

Page 2452: ...Poor contact in joint connector 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from the mass ai...

Page 2453: ...r driving performance CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCED...

Page 2454: ...r and engine ground Connector terminal B3 No 4 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit in the harness between mass air flow and intake air tempera ture sensor and...

Page 2455: ...ound Connector terminal B3 No 5 Engine ground Is the resistance less than 5 Replace the mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor Ref to FU H6DO 24 Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temper ature Sens...

Page 2456: ...ng performance CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Ins...

Page 2457: ...ontact in coupling connector Poor contact in joint connector 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors f...

Page 2458: ...ing performance CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE In...

Page 2459: ...e sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal E8 No 2 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between ECM and engine coolant tempera ture sen...

Page 2460: ...inal E8 No 1 Engine ground Is the resistance less than 5 Replace the engine coolant temperature sen sor Ref to FU H6DO 18 Engine Coolant Temperature Sen sor Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In...

Page 2461: ...6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 48...

Page 2462: ...stance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis groun...

Page 2463: ...5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 48...

Page 2464: ...18 E57 No 6 B134 No 29 E57 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL 1 Connect the ECM c...

Page 2465: ...ECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DIS PLAY Is any other DTC displayed Inspect the rele vant DTC using List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H6DO diag 70 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In thi...

Page 2466: ...Erroneous idling Poor driving performance CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN...

Page 2467: ...uble Code DTC Go to step 2 2 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Measure the resistance between engine cool ant temperature sensor terminals when the engine coolant is cold and after warmed up Ter...

Page 2468: ...ON Was the vehicle driven or idled with the engine partially sub merged under water In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0128 Go to step 2 2 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DIS PLAY Is any othe...

Page 2469: ...6 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23...

Page 2470: ...F SENSOR CONNEC TOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from ECM and front oxygen A F sensor connector 3 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and chassis ground Conne...

Page 2471: ...26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23...

Page 2472: ...YGEN A F SENSOR CONNEC TOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Disconnect the connector from front oxygen A F sensor 3 Measure the voltage of harness between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector...

Page 2473: ...14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21...

Page 2474: ...TC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0133 Go to step 2 2 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM NOTE Check the following items Loose installation of front portion of exhaust pipe onto cylinder heads...

Page 2475: ...13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20...

Page 2476: ...No 4 B135 No 9 E47 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 2 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and front ox ygen...

Page 2477: ...38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14...

Page 2478: ...ING CONNECTOR Does water enter the connec tor Dry the water thor oughly Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the con...

Page 2479: ...tems Looseness and improper fitting of exhaust system parts Damage crack hole etc of parts Looseness and improper fitting of parts be tween front oxygen A F sensor and rear oxy gen sensor Is there any...

Page 2480: ...38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 1...

Page 2481: ...G CONNECTOR Does water enter the connec tor Dry the water thor oughly Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the conne...

Page 2482: ...tems Looseness and improper fitting of exhaust system parts Damage crack hole etc of parts Looseness and improper fitting of parts be tween front oxygen A F sensor and rear oxy gen sensor Is there any...

Page 2483: ...39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13...

Page 2484: ...ear oxygen sensor con nector Connector terminal B135 No 4 E61 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 3 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and rear oxygen sen sor connector 3 CHECK H...

Page 2485: ...36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 1...

Page 2486: ...REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA 1 Warm up the engine until engine coolant temperature is above 70 C 158 F and drop the engine speed suddenly from 3 000 rpm 2 Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal using...

Page 2487: ...Oxygen Sen sor Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit in harness between rear oxygen sen sor and ECM con nector Poor contact in rear oxygen sen so...

Page 2488: ...6 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23...

Page 2489: ...SENSOR CONNEC TOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from ECM and front oxygen A F sensor connector 3 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and chassis ground Connec...

Page 2490: ...26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23...

Page 2491: ...GEN A F SENSOR CONNEC TOR 1 Disconnect the connector from front oxygen A F sensor 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON 3 Measure the voltage of harness between ECM connector and chassis ground Connector t...

Page 2492: ...14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21...

Page 2493: ...TC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to inspect DTC P0133 Go to step 2 2 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM NOTE Check the following items Loose installation of front portion of exhaust pipe onto cylinder heads...

Page 2494: ...13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20...

Page 2495: ...No 4 B135 No 11 E24 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 2 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and front ox ygen...

Page 2496: ...38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14...

Page 2497: ...ING CONNECTOR Does water enter the connec tor Dry the water thor oughly Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the con...

Page 2498: ...tems Looseness and improper fitting of exhaust system parts Damage crack hole etc of parts Looseness and improper fitting of parts be tween front oxygen A F sensor and rear oxy gen sensor Is there any...

Page 2499: ...38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 1...

Page 2500: ...G CONNECTOR Does water enter the connec tor Dry the water thor oughly Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the conne...

Page 2501: ...tems Looseness and improper fitting of exhaust system parts Damage crack hole etc of parts Looseness and improper fitting of parts be tween front oxygen A F sensor and rear oxy gen sensor Is there any...

Page 2502: ...39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13...

Page 2503: ...ear oxygen sensor con nector Connector terminal B135 No 15 E25 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 3 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and rear oxygen sen sor connector 3 CHECK...

Page 2504: ...36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 1...

Page 2505: ...K REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA 1 Warm up the engine until engine coolant temperature is above 70 C 158 F and drop the engine speed suddenly from 3 000 rpm 2 Read the data of rear oxygen sensor signal using...

Page 2506: ...t the connector from rear oxygen sensor 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Measure the resistance between the rear oxygen sensor harness connector and chassis ground Connector terminal E25 No 3 Chassi...

Page 2507: ...reful not to spill fuel Measure the fuel pressure while disconnecting pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake manifold Ref to ME H6DO 26 INSPECTION Fuel Pressure WARNING Release fuel pressure befor...

Page 2508: ...dure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H6DO diag 27 Subaru Select Moni tor Is the measured value 3 1 4 3 g s 0 41 0 57 lb m Go to step 7 Replace the mass air flow and intake air temperat...

Page 2509: ...AUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIR...

Page 2510: ...ON DIS PLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check the appro priate DTC using the List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H6DO diag 70 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not...

Page 2511: ...repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM E...

Page 2512: ...inates the circuit has returned to a nor mal condition at this time 2 CHECK CURRENT DATA 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Remove the access hole lid 3 Disconnect the connector from fuel pump 4 Turn...

Page 2513: ...repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM...

Page 2514: ...een fuel pump connector and chassis ground Connector terminal R58 No 2 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair battery short circuit of har ness between ECM and fuel pump connector Go to s...

Page 2515: ...p connector and ECM Connector terminal R58 No 3 B135 No 30 Is the resistance less than 1 Replace the fuel temperature sen sor Ref to EC H6DO 8 Fuel Temperature Sen sor Repair the har ness and connec t...

Page 2516: ...ving performance CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE I...

Page 2517: ...HER DTC ON DIS PLAY Is any other DTC displayed Check DTC using List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H6DO diag 70 List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC NOTE In this case it is not necessary to...

Page 2518: ...ter repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGR...

Page 2519: ...rature sensor con nector and engine ground Connector terminal B134 No 23 Engine ground B134 No 29 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the ground short circuit between ECM...

Page 2520: ...fter repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAG...

Page 2521: ...SENSOR AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the voltage between oil temperature sensor connector and engine ground Connector terminal E75 No 2 Engine ground Is the voltage more than 4 V Go to step 4 Repair the...

Page 2522: ...6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 48...

Page 2523: ...n 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector ter...

Page 2524: ...5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 48...

Page 2525: ...No 3 B134 No 28 E57 No 4 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL 1 Connect the ECM connecto...

Page 2526: ...Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03911 E E M 10 7 6 5 6 No 11 B362 R122 B135 B B136 C R58 7 B33 C12 2 1 9 8 5 FUEL PUMP CONTROL UNIT...

Page 2527: ...unit and chassis ground Connector terminal R122 No 5 Chassis ground Is the resistance less than 5 Go to step 3 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circ...

Page 2528: ...TROL UNIT AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between fuel pump control unit and chassis ground Connector terminal R122 No 9 Chassis ground R122 No 8 Chassis ground Is the resistance m...

Page 2529: ...Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC BP DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC P0306 Ref to EN H6DO diag 214 DTC P0306 CYLINDER 6 MISFIRE DETECTED Diagnostic Proc...

Page 2530: ...r Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03912 3 4 1 2 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7...

Page 2531: ...esistance between ECM con nector and engine ground on faulty cylinders Connector terminal 1 E5 No 1 Engine ground 2 E16 No 1 Engine ground 3 E6 No 1 Engine ground 4 E17 No 1 Engine ground 5 E43 No 1 E...

Page 2532: ...No 11 Chassis ground 5 B137 No 12 Chassis ground 6 B137 No 13 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the battery short circuit of har ness between ECM and fuel injector After repair repla...

Page 2533: ...mality Repair the poor contact NOTE In this case repair the following item Poor contact of ignition coil con nector Poor contact in fuel injector con nector on faulty cylinders Poor contact in ECM con...

Page 2534: ...ems Spark plug Fuel injector Ignition coil Compression ratio If any fault are not found check the IGNITION CONTROL SYS TEM of 1 and 2 cylinders side Ref to EN H6DO diag 64 IGNI TION CONTROL SYSTEM Dia...

Page 2535: ...TE Check the follow ing items Spark plug Fuel injector Skipping timing chain teeth Check DTC P0171 P0172 P0174 or P0175 using List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC Ref to EN H6DO diag 70 List of Diag n...

Page 2536: ...r or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 039...

Page 2537: ...NESS BETWEEN KNOCK SEN SOR AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Disconnect the connector from knock sen sor 2 Measure the resistance of harness between knock sensor connector terminal and ECM connector Connector termi...

Page 2538: ...ir or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03...

Page 2539: ...hort circuit of har ness between knock sensor con nector and ECM connector NOTE The harness be tween both connec tors are shielded Repair the short circuit of harness covered with shield 3 CHECK INPUT...

Page 2540: ...ent of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03925 5 6 7 8 2...

Page 2541: ...NESS BETWEEN KNOCK SEN SOR AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Disconnect the connector from knock sen sor 2 Measure the resistance of harness between knock sensor connector terminal and ECM connector Connector termi...

Page 2542: ...nt of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03925 5 6 7 8 2 1...

Page 2543: ...hort circuit of har ness between knock sensor con nector and ECM connector NOTE The harness be tween both connec tors are shielded Repair the short circuit of harness covered with shield 3 CHECK INPUT...

Page 2544: ...iteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Engine stalls Failure of engine to start CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Ins...

Page 2545: ...ECM connector NOTE The harness be tween both connec tors are shielded Repair the ground short circuit of har ness with shield Go to step 3 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN CRANK SHAFT POSITION SENSOR AND ECM...

Page 2546: ...e Code DTC Detecting Criteria TROUBLE SYMPTOM Engine stalls Failure of engine to start CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Cl...

Page 2547: ...tallation bolt tightened securely Go to step 3 Tighten the crank shaft position sen sor installation bolt securely 3 CHECK CRANKSHAFT PLATE Are the crankshaft plate teeth cracked or damaged Replace th...

Page 2548: ...rform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03927 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25...

Page 2549: ...SOR CONNECTOR AND ECM 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from ECM 3 Measure the resistance between camshaft position sensor connector and ECM Connector terminal E73 No 2 B134...

Page 2550: ...y Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03927 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 2...

Page 2551: ...SOR CONNECTOR AND ECM 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from ECM 3 Measure the resistance between camshaft position sensor connector and ECM Connector terminal E74 No 2 B134...

Page 2552: ...26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 34 37 36 39 38 41 40 43 42 44 45 47 46 49 48 51 50 53 52 54 B135 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 B B134 5 6 7...

Page 2553: ...e and front catalyt ic converter Between front catalytic converter and rear catalytic converter Loose part and improper installation of front oxygen A F sensor or rear oxygen sensor Is there any fault...

Page 2554: ...refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H6DO diag 27 Subaru Select Monitor Is the voltage more than 490 mV Go to step 9 Go to step 6 6 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNEC TOR AND COUPLING CONNECT...

Page 2555: ...ing Subaru Select Monitor NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H6DO diag 27 Subaru Select Moni tor Is the voltage 250 mV or less...

Page 2556: ...ection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03928 SBF 7 E4 B47 E 5 3 6 4 2 1 ECM 2 1 C17 C28 D29 R15 R57 R68 R143 R1 B97 14 7 2 2 1 1 15 1 5 PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID V...

Page 2557: ...OTE Drain valve operation can be executed using Subaru Select Monitor Regarding the proce dures refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 46 Compulsory Valve Operation Check M...

Page 2558: ...it Repair or replace the canister Ref to EC H6DO 5 Canister Go to step 10 10 CHECK FUEL TANK Remove the fuel tank Ref to FU H6DO 39 Fuel Tank Is the fuel tank damaged or is there any hole of more tha...

Page 2559: ...TION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRIN...

Page 2560: ...RNESS BETWEEN DRAIN VALVE AND ECM CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from drain valve and ECM 3 Measure the resistance of harness between drain valve connector and...

Page 2561: ...more than 10 V Go to step 7 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit in harness between main relay and drain valve Poor contact in coupling connector...

Page 2562: ...CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WI...

Page 2563: ...more than 10 V Go to step 4 Go to step 3 3 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check the poor contact of ECM connector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM R...

Page 2564: ...AUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIR...

Page 2565: ...2 Open the fuel flap Is the fuel filler cap tightened securely Go to step 3 Tighten fuel filler cap securely 3 CHECK PRESSURE VACUUM LINE NOTE Check the following items Disconnection leakage and clogg...

Page 2566: ...eria CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mo...

Page 2567: ...V Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Contact with SOA Service Center 4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM and chas sis ground Connector terminal B135 No 32 Chassis ground...

Page 2568: ...circuit of har ness between ECM and rear wir ing harness con nector 9 CHECK FUEL TANK CORD 1 Disconnect the connector from fuel tank pressure sensor 2 Measure the resistance of fuel tank cord Connecto...

Page 2569: ...teria CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection M...

Page 2570: ...eplace the ECM Ref to FU H6DO 33 Engine Control Module ECM 4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM Measure the voltage between ECM and chas sis ground Connector terminal B135 No 32 Chassis ground Is the voltage l...

Page 2571: ...ord Connector terminal R57 No 4 R47 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 10 Repair the open circuit in fuel tank cord 10 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check for poor contact in fuel tank pressure sensor...

Page 2572: ...Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03928 SBF 7 E4 B47 E 5 3 6 4 2 1 ECM 2 1 C17 C28 D29 R15 R57 R68 R143 R1 B97 14 7 2 2 1 1 15 1 5 PURGE CONTROL SOLEN...

Page 2573: ...NOTE Drain valve operation can be executed using Subaru Select Monitor Regarding the proce dures refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 46 Compulsory Valve Operation Check...

Page 2574: ...it Repair or replace the canister Ref to EC H6DO 5 Canister Go to step 10 10 CHECK FUEL TANK Remove the fuel tank Ref to FU H6DO 39 Fuel Tank Is the fuel tank damaged or is there any hole of more tha...

Page 2575: ...ef to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03928 SBF 7 E4 B47 E 5 3 6 4 2 1 ECM 2 1 C17 C28 D29 R15 R57 R68 R143 R1 B97 14 7 2 2 1 1 15 1 5 PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE DRAIN VA...

Page 2576: ...u Select Monitor Regarding the proce dures refer to Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 46 Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mode Does the drain valve operate Go to step 6 Replace...

Page 2577: ...the fuel tank Ref to FU H6DO 39 Fuel Tank Go to step 10 10 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON TROL SYSTEM Are there holes of more than 0 5 mm 0 020 in dia cracks clogging...

Page 2578: ...repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM E...

Page 2579: ...B137 No 29 E4 No 2 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness between ECM and purge control sole noid valve connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Op...

Page 2580: ...repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM...

Page 2581: ...3 3 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check the poor contact of ECM connector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM Ref to FU H6DO 33 Engine Control Module E...

Page 2582: ...ECTING CONDITION Two consecutive driving cycles with fault GENERAL DESCRIPTION Ref to GD H6DO 158 DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT HIGH Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria CAUTION Afte...

Page 2583: ...se Overheating CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Ins...

Page 2584: ...ic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6...

Page 2585: ...EN 03922 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 3...

Page 2586: ...o to step 2 2 CHECK AIR CLEANER ELEMENT 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Check the air cleaner element Is there excessive clogging on air cleaner element Replace the air cleaner element Ref to IN H...

Page 2587: ...922 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4...

Page 2588: ...switch to ON 2 Start and idle the engine 3 Check the following items Loose installation of intake manifold and throttle body Cracks of intake manifold gasket and throttle body gasket Disconnection of...

Page 2589: ...eplacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03908 16...

Page 2590: ...epair the battery short circuit in starter motor cir cuit Check the starter motor circuit Ref to EN H6DO diag 58 STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK...

Page 2591: ...M EN 03909 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26 33 34 35 B136 C SBF 6 MAIN SBF SBF 7 B72 A7 B2 C23 A3 D2 D1 D7 B5 C11 No 12 B47 E2 B21 1 2 4 6 5 3 ECM...

Page 2592: ...DTC P0607 Ref to EN H6DO diag 277 DTC P0607 CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DIS PLAY Is any other DTC d...

Page 2593: ...B136 D E1 B20 C E E 38 39 20 19 16 15 E2 B21 E57 4 6 1 2 3 5 D4 D5 A29 A19 D1 D7 A5 D2 A3 D3 35 34 37 52 36 A8 C6 A18 ECM B20 B21 E57 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 3...

Page 2594: ...the voltage 13 15 V Go to step 3 Repair the open or ground short cir cuit of power sup ply circuit 3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disco...

Page 2595: ...ator fan does not operate properly Overheating CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref...

Page 2596: ...1 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10...

Page 2597: ...ion procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H6DO diag 27 Subaru Select Monitor General scan tool For detailed operation procedures refer to the General Scan Tool Instruction Manual I...

Page 2598: ...11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 1...

Page 2599: ...refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H6DO diag 27 Subaru Select Monitor General scan tool For detailed operation procedures refer to the General Scan Tool Instruction Manual Is the measured...

Page 2600: ...After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DI...

Page 2601: ...NTROL SOLENOID VALVE AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and pressure control solenoid valve con nector Connector terminal B136 No 28 R68 No 2 Is the resistance less than 1...

Page 2602: ...CK POOR CONTACT Check poor contact of pressure control sole noid valve connector Is there poor contact of the pressure control solenoid valve connector Repair the poor contact of pres sure control sol...

Page 2603: ...er repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRA...

Page 2604: ...tep 3 3 CHECK POOR CONTACT Check the poor contact of ECM connector Is there poor contact in ECM connector Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM Ref to FU H6DO 33 Engine Control Modu...

Page 2605: ...AUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIR...

Page 2606: ...hose Replace the drain hose Go to step 3 3 CHECK DRAIN VALVE OPERATION 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect the test mode connector at the lower portion of instrument panel on the driver s sid...

Page 2607: ...pair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN...

Page 2608: ...e starter motor operate when ignition switch is turned to START Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open or ground short circuit of har ness between ECM and...

Page 2609: ...7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26 33 34 35 B136 C SBF 6 MAIN SBF SBF 7 B72 A7 B2 C23 A3 D2 D1 D7 B5 C11 No 12 B47 E2 B21 1 2 4 6 5 3 ECM E E 3 6 B134 B135 A C B136 D B137 B 35 34 52...

Page 2610: ...AND MAIN FUSE BOX CONNECTOR 1 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 2 Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 5 Chassis ground Is the resistance less t...

Page 2611: ...TOM Erroneous idling CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDU...

Page 2612: ...r the open circuit of harness between ECM and oil flow control solenoid valve connector NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and oil flow control solenoid va...

Page 2613: ...PTOM Erroneous idling CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCED...

Page 2614: ...7 No 1 Engine ground E67 No 2 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the short circuit between ECM and oil flow control solenoid valve connector 2 CHECK OIL FLOW CONTROL SOL...

Page 2615: ...TOM Erroneous idling CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDU...

Page 2616: ...r the open circuit of harness between ECM and oil flow control solenoid valve connector NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit of harness between ECM and oil flow control solenoid va...

Page 2617: ...PTOM Erroneous idling CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCED...

Page 2618: ...8 No 1 Engine ground E68 No 2 Engine ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the short circuit between ECM and oil flow control solenoid valve connector 2 CHECK OIL FLOW CONTROL SOL...

Page 2619: ...14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21...

Page 2620: ...32 30 31 A B22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 B136 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 35 C B137 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 1...

Page 2621: ...5 at idle Go to step 3 Go to step 4 3 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL 1 Race engine at speeds from idling to 3 000 rpm for a total of 5 cycles NOTE To increase engine speed to 3 000 rpm slowly depress...

Page 2622: ...E If the measured value at this step is out of spec ification check or replace pressure regulator and pressure regulator vacuum hose Is the measured value 279 309 kPa 2 85 3 15 kg cm2 40 45 psi Go to...

Page 2623: ...e accessory switches to OFF 5 Open the front hood 6 Measure the ambient temperature 7 Read the data of mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or general sca...

Page 2624: ...connector 15 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA 1 Warm up the engine until engine coolant temperature is above 70 C 158 F and keep the engine speed at 3 000 rpm Max 2 min utes 2 Read the data of rear oxyg...

Page 2625: ...ear oxygen sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H6DO diag 27 Subar...

Page 2626: ...14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21...

Page 2627: ...32 30 31 A B22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 B136 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 35 C B137 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 1...

Page 2628: ...5 at idle Go to step 3 Go to step 4 3 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL 1 Race engine at speeds from idling to 3 000 rpm for a total of 5 cycles NOTE To increase engine speed to 3 000 rpm slowly depress...

Page 2629: ...E If the measured value at this step is out of spec ification check or replace pressure regulator and pressure regulator vacuum hose Is the measured value 279 309 kPa 2 85 3 15 kg cm2 40 45 psi Go to...

Page 2630: ...e accessory switches to OFF 5 Open the front hood 6 Measure the ambient temperature 7 Read the data of mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or general sca...

Page 2631: ...connector 15 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA 1 Warm up the engine until engine coolant temperature is above 70 C 158 F and keep the engine speed at 3 000 rpm Max 2 min utes 2 Read the data of rear oxyg...

Page 2632: ...ear oxygen sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H6DO diag 27 Subar...

Page 2633: ...14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21...

Page 2634: ...32 30 31 A B22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 B136 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 35 C B137 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 1...

Page 2635: ...5 at idle Go to step 3 Go to step 4 3 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL 1 Race engine at speeds from idling to 3 000 rpm for a total of 5 cycles NOTE To increase engine speed to 3 000 rpm slowly depress...

Page 2636: ...E If the measured value at this step is out of spec ification check or replace pressure regulator and pressure regulator vacuum hose Is the measured value 279 309 kPa 2 85 3 15 kg cm2 40 45 psi Go to...

Page 2637: ...accessory switches to OFF 5 Open the front hood 6 Measure the ambient temperature 7 Read the data of mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan...

Page 2638: ...r connector 15 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA 1 Warm up the engine until engine coolant temperature is above 70 C 158 F and keep the engine speed at 3 000 rpm Max 2 min utes 2 Read the data of rear oxy...

Page 2639: ...ear oxygen sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H6DO diag 27 Subar...

Page 2640: ...14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21...

Page 2641: ...32 30 31 A B22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 B136 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 35 C B137 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 1...

Page 2642: ...5 at idle Go to step 3 Go to step 4 3 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL 1 Race engine at speeds from idling to 3 000 rpm for a total of 5 cycles NOTE To increase engine speed to 3 000 rpm slowly depress...

Page 2643: ...E If the measured value at this step is out of spec ification check or replace pressure regulator and pressure regulator vacuum hose Is the measured value 279 309 kPa 2 85 3 15 kg cm2 40 45 psi Go to...

Page 2644: ...accessory switches to OFF 5 Open the front hood 6 Measure the ambient temperature 7 Read the data of mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan...

Page 2645: ...r connector 15 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA 1 Warm up the engine until engine coolant temperature is above 70 C 158 F and keep the engine speed at 3 000 rpm Max 2 min utes 2 Read the data of rear oxy...

Page 2646: ...ear oxygen sensor signal using Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool NOTE Subaru Select Monitor For detailed operation procedure refer to READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE Ref to EN H6DO diag 27 Subar...

Page 2647: ...3922 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40...

Page 2648: ...ground Connector terminal B362 No 6 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Repair the power supply short circuit of harness between ECM and electronic throttle control Go to step 4 4 CHECK HARN...

Page 2649: ...ector terminal B134 No 16 Chassis ground B134 No 28 Chassis ground B134 No 19 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 11 Repair the ground short circuit of har ness 11 CHECK SENSOR P...

Page 2650: ...le control connector and engine ground Connector terminal E57 No 3 Engine ground Is the resistance less than 5 Go to step 18 Repair the poor contact of ECM connector Replace the ECM if defective Ref t...

Page 2651: ...nnectors from electronic throttle control 4 Measure the resistance between ECM con nector and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B137 No 5 E57 No 2 B137 No 4 E57 No 1 Is the resi...

Page 2652: ...TLE CON TROL Measure the resistance between electronic throttle control terminals Terminals No 1 No 2 Is the resistance less than 50 Go to step 29 Replace the elec tronic throttle con trol 29 CHECK EL...

Page 2653: ...1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 48 49 50 51...

Page 2654: ...om ECM 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Measure the voltage between electronic throttle control relay connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B362 No 6 Chassis ground Is the voltage more tha...

Page 2655: ...15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 42 43 44 45 46 47 26 27 2...

Page 2656: ...HECK SHORT CIRCUIT OF ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY POWER SUP PLY 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Measure the voltage between electronic throttle control relay connector and chassis ground Conn...

Page 2657: ...AGRAM EN 03935 B315 E C ECM B136 B137 D B83 B315 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 3 5 4 1 2 6 B21 B23 B29 B22 B31 B30 A3 D2 B21 E2 D1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MAIN SUB B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18...

Page 2658: ...r the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 2...

Page 2659: ...al position sensor Terminals No 5 No 4 Check the measured value is within the specifi cation with the accelerator pedal depressed Is the resistance between 0 5 and 2 5 k Repair the poor contact of ECM...

Page 2660: ...IAGRAM EN 03935 B315 E C ECM B136 B137 D B83 B315 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 3 5 4 1 2 6 B21 B23 B29 B22 B31 B30 A3 D2 B21 E2 D1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MAIN SUB B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 1...

Page 2661: ...s connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Connect the ECM connector 2 Measure the resistance between accelera tor pedal position sensor connector and engine grou...

Page 2662: ...AGRAM EN 03935 B315 E C ECM B136 B137 D B83 B315 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 3 5 4 1 2 6 B21 B23 B29 B22 B31 B30 A3 D2 B21 E2 D1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MAIN SUB B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18...

Page 2663: ...LERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance between ECM connec tor and chassis ground Connector terminal B135 No 31 Chassis ground B135 No 22 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go...

Page 2664: ...al position sensor Terminals No 2 No 6 2 Check the measured value is within the specification with the accelerator pedal depressed Is the resistance between 0 28 and 1 68 k Repair the poor contact of...

Page 2665: ...IAGRAM EN 03935 B315 E C ECM B136 B137 D B83 B315 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 3 5 4 1 2 6 B21 B23 B29 B22 B31 B30 A3 D2 B21 E2 D1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MAIN SUB B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 1...

Page 2666: ...s connector 4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Connect the ECM connector 2 Measure the resistance between accelera tor pedal position sensor connector and engine grou...

Page 2667: ...22 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 1 2 7 8 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2122 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41...

Page 2668: ...etween ECM con nector and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B134 No 18 E57 No 6 B134 No 28 E57 No 4 B134 No 19 E57 No 5 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 5 Repair the ope...

Page 2669: ...tor and electronic throttle control connector Connector terminal B134 No 29 E57 No 3 B134 No 18 E57 No 6 B134 No 28 E57 No 4 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 12 Repair the open circuit of harn...

Page 2670: ...than 1 M Go to step 16 Repair the short circuit to sensor power supply 16 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON TROL HARNESS 1 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 2 Disconnect the connectors from electronic th...

Page 2671: ...G DIAGRAM EN 03935 B315 E C ECM B136 B137 D B83 B315 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 3 5 4 1 2 6 B21 B23 B29 B22 B31 B30 A3 D2 B21 E2 D1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MAIN SUB B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 1...

Page 2672: ...or terminal B135 No 23 B315 No 5 B135 No 21 B315 No 3 B135 No 31 B315 No 2 B135 No 22 B315 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness connector 4 CHECK HARNESS...

Page 2673: ...l posi tion sensor 11 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance of accelerator pedal position sensor with depressing the accelera tor pedal Terminals No 2 No 6 Is the resistance b...

Page 2674: ...tween ECM connector and accelerator pedal position sen sor connector 17 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors f...

Page 2675: ...PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform Clear Memory Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 45 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode and...

Page 2676: ...lear Memory Mode and Inspection Mode Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode EJ DTC P2503 CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC P2104 Ref to EN H6DO diag...

Page 2677: ...t recognition GENERAL DESCRIPTION Ref to GD H6DO 233 DTC P2504 CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria CAUTION After repair or replacement of faulty parts perform C...

Page 2678: ...e resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Repair the ground short circuit of har ness between ECM and genera tor connector 2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN GENERATOR AND ECM CONNECTOR Measure the resistance of h...

Page 2679: ...o jump off free rollers In order to prevent the vehicle from slipping due to vibration do not place any wooden blocks or similar items between the rigid racks and vehicle Since the rear wheels will al...

Page 2680: ...corre sponding DTC appears on the display screen NOTE For detailed operation procedure refer to the SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERATION MANUAL For details concerning DTC refer to List of Di agnostic Troub...

Page 2681: ...to 10 km h 3 to 6 MPH NOTE For AWD model release the parking brake The speed difference between front and rear wheels may light the ABS warning light but this in dicates no malfunctions When engine co...

Page 2682: ...open 4 23 1 51 1 58 After engine is warmed up Fully closed 1 48 Fully open 4 23 Electronic throttle control motor B137 5 Duty waveform Duty waveform Drive frequency 500 Hz Electronic throttle control...

Page 2683: ...tch B135 19 10 13 12 14 Neutral position switch B136 31 ON 0 OFF 12 0 5 Switch is ON when select lever is shifted into P or N range Test mode connector B135 27 12 14 12 14 When connected 0 Knock senso...

Page 2684: ...hield B135 1 0 0 Front oxygen A F sensor heater RH Signal 1 B136 3 12 14 Waveform Signal 2 B136 2 12 14 Waveform Front oxygen A F sensor LH Signal B135 11 2 8 3 2 2 8 3 2 Signal B135 10 2 4 2 7 2 4 2...

Page 2685: ...agnosis oil pressure switch RH B134 31 0 0 Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch LH B134 32 0 0 Generator control B136 10 0 6 5 0 6 5 SSM communication B136 16 1 or less 4 or more 1 or les...

Page 2686: ...on Data A ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION Measuring condition After engine is warmed up Gear position is in N or P range Turn the A C to OFF Turn all the accessory switches to OFF Remarks Specification Engin...

Page 2687: ...line Ref to EN H6DO diag 61 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE ECM Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure 4 Inspection of ignition control system Ref to EN H6DO diag 64 IGNI...

Page 2688: ...Ref to EN H6DO diag 36 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode WIRING DIAGRAM EN 03908 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26 33 34 35 32 20 No 21 B225 MAIN SBF SBF 6...

Page 2689: ...o to step 5 5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY AND IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR 1 Disconnect the connector from ignition switch 2 Measure the power supply voltage between ignition switch connector and chass...

Page 2690: ...he starter relay 9 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect the connector to starter relay 3 Disconnect the connectors from ECM 4 Measure the voltage between ECM and chas...

Page 2691: ...A7 B2 C23 A3 D2 D1 D7 B5 C11 No 12 B47 E2 B21 1 2 4 6 5 3 ECM E E 3 6 B134 B135 A C B136 D B137 B 35 34 52 3 4 1 2 5 6 B47 TO OXYGEN SENSOR No 13 A5 36 B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13...

Page 2692: ...up ply circuit 4 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Measure the voltage between ECM con nector and chassis ground Connector terminal B136 No 11 Chassis ground Is the voltage...

Page 2693: ...or and chassis ground Connector terminal B134 No 7 Chassis ground B135 No 2 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 V Check ignition control system Ref to EN H6DO diag 64 IGNITION CONTROL SYS TEM D...

Page 2694: ...31 E32 E46 E33 1 2 3 ECM B137 23 19 18 21 22 20 SBF 7 4 6 B327 E46 E2 B21 E32 18 14 13 16 17 3 2 3 1 2 E34 3 2 E45 3 2 15 6 26 54 49 1 1 1 E31 3 1 2 E33 3 1 2 1 2 B225 B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8...

Page 2695: ...gnition coil and ignitor assembly connector and engine ground Connector terminal E31 No 3 Engine ground E32 No 3 Engine ground E33 No 3 Engine ground E34 No 3 Engine ground E45 No 3 Engine ground E46...

Page 2696: ...in harness between ECM and ignition coil and ignitor as sembly connector Poor contact in coupling connector 6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG NITION COIL AND IGNITOR ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR Measure the r...

Page 2697: ...R122 3 4 1 2 5 8 9 10 6 7 B97 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 R67 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 25 24 30 9 8 7 17 18 19 20 28 21 22 23 29 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 27 26 33 34 35 B136 C...

Page 2698: ...5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 14 15 24 25 26 16 17 18 19 20 21 27 28 29 30 31 B47 B21 B137 E6 E17 E5 E16 E43 E44 1 2 E5 8 42 B47 MAIN RELAY 1 2 3 5 4 6 48 1 2 E16 1 2 E6 10 ECM BATTERY SBF 7 B1...

Page 2699: ...B137 No 11 E17 No 1 5 B137 No 12 E43 No 1 6 B137 No 13 E44 No 1 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the har ness and connec tor NOTE In this case repair the following item Open circuit...

Page 2700: ...Connect the diagnosis cable to the data link connector CAUTION Do not connect any scan tools except Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool 5 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF and Subaru S...

Page 2701: ...13 15 deg Intake air temperature signal Intake air temperature C or F Ambient air temperature Amount of intake air Amount of intake air g s or lb m 3 8 g s or 0 5 lb m Throttle opening angle signal Th...

Page 2702: ...0 km h or 0 MPH A F compensation 4 A F Compensation 4 0 31 A F learning 4 A F learning 4 0 0 Fuel level sensor resistance Fuel level resistance 4 96 Engine oil temperature Oil Temperature C 85 C Afte...

Page 2703: ...an switch signal Blower fan SW OFF input when OFF Light switch signal Light SW OFF input when OFF Wiper switch signal Wiper SW OFF input when OFF A C lock signal A C lock signal OFF input A C middle p...

Page 2704: ...control 2 Fuel system for Bank 2 OPEN early period Load Calculated load value Engine coolant temperature Coolant Temp C A F compensation 1 Short term fuel trim B1 A F learning 1 Long term fuel trim B1...

Page 2705: ...2 Engine load data Engine Load Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp C or F Short term fuel trim by front oxygen A F sensor Bank 1 Short term fuel trim B1 Long term fuel trim by front oxygen...

Page 2706: ...nsor signal Crankshaft angle signal Yes No Yes Camshaft position sensor signal Camshaft angle signal Yes No Yes Rear defogger switch signal Rear Defogger SW ON Input OFF Input ON input Blower fan swit...

Page 2707: ...play screen select Engine Control System and press the YES key 3 Press the YES key after the information of engine type has been displayed 4 On the Engine Diagnosis display screen select V I N Registr...

Page 2708: ...mperature For Stable Operation P0128 Coolant Thermostat Engine Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regu lating Temperature P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response Bank 1 Sensor 1 P0153 O2 Sensor Circui...

Page 2709: ...ive cycle A or C as well P0175 System Too Rich Bank 2 Diagnosis completes in drive cycle A or C as well P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected Diagnosis completes in drive cycle A or C as well P0302 Cylind...

Page 2710: ...76 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Low Bank 1 P0082 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Low Bank 2 P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range Performance P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity D...

Page 2711: ...e vehicle for the distance equal to the fuel of 30 2 7 9 US gal 6 6 Imp gal NOTE It is possible to drive intermittently Do not disconnect the terminal of battery during diagnosis Data will be cleared...

Page 2712: ...SELECT MONITOR OBD MODE 1 On the Main Menu display screen select Each System Check and press the YES key 2 On the System Selection Menu display screen select Engine Control System and press the YES k...

Page 2713: ...mperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low P0113 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High P0122 Throttle Pedal Positi...

Page 2714: ...essure Control Solenoid Valve Circuit Low P1420 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sol Valve Circuit High P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input P1560 Back up Voltage Circuit Malfunction P1570 Antenna P1571 R...

Page 2715: ...thers Ambient air temperature C F Hot Warm Cool Cold Place Highway Suburbs Inner city Uphill Downhill Rough road Others Engine temperature Cold Warming up After warming up Any temperature Others Engin...

Page 2716: ...ning out of fuel Yes No c Intentional connecting or disconnecting of harness connectors or spark plug cords Yes No What d Intentional connecting or disconnecting of hoses Yes No What e Installing of o...

Page 2717: ...s not return to idle 1 Engine coolant temperature sensor 2 Electronic throttle control 3 Manifold absolute pressure sensor 4 Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor 5 Accelerator pedal positio...

Page 2718: ...ture sensor 2 4 Crankshaft position sensor 3 5 Camshaft position sensor 3 6 Fuel injection parts 4 7 Electronic throttle control 8 Fuel pump and fuel pump relay 7 Spark knock 1 Mass air flow and intak...

Page 2719: ...GENERAL DESCRIPTION GD H6DO Page 1 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 2 2 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria 9 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 2720: ...4 Electrical Component Location A LOCATION 1 ENGINE Control module 1 Engine control module ECM 3 Test mode connector 4 Data link connector 2 Malfunction indicator light 1 4 3 2 EN 03120 1 EN 01147 EN...

Page 2721: ...w and intake air tem perature sensor 4 Electronic throttle control 7 Crankshaft position sensor 5 Knock sensor 8 Oil temperature sensor 2 Manifold absolute pressure sensor 6 Camshaft position sensor 3...

Page 2722: ...EN H6DO diag 10 Electrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS EN 02479 1 EN 02535 2 3 EN 00895 EN 02536 4 5 5 EN 00897 EN 02537 6 7 EN 00899 EN 02538 8 asieps_tobira book 10...

Page 2723: ...F sensor LH 4 Rear oxygen sensor RH 6 Front catalytic converter RH 2 Front oxygen A F sensor RH 5 Front catalytic converter LH 7 Rear catalytic converter 3 Rear oxygen sensor LH EN 02480 2 1 3 4 6 7 5...

Page 2724: ...ectrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS 1 Fuel level sensor 3 Fuel tank pressure sensor 4 Fuel sub level sensor 2 Fuel temperature sensor 1 4 EN 03121 2 3 EN 03147 2 1 EN 03003 3 EN 03132 4 asi...

Page 2725: ...r emission control system parts and ignition system parts 1 Purge control solenoid valve 3 Oil flow control solenoid valve 5 Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch 2 Ignition coil and ignit...

Page 2726: ...EN H6DO diag 14 Electrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS 1 EN 02482 2 EN 02960 3 EN 02961 5 EN 02962 4 asieps_tobira book 14...

Page 2727: ...H6DO diag 15 Electrical Component Location ENGINE DIAGNOSTICS 1 Pressure control solenoid valve 3 Drain valve 4 Drain filter 2 Canister EN 03937 1 2 3 4 EN 02980 1 EN 02981 4 3 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 2728: ...GINE DIAGNOSTICS 1 Inhibitor switch 4 Fuel pump relay 6 Radiator fan relay 2 Fuel pump 5 Electronic throttle control relay 7 Starter 3 Main relay 6 3 2 EN 03123 7 1 4 5 EN 00178 2 EN 02093 EN 02544 3...

Page 2729: ...BANK 1 SENSOR 1 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High Bank 1 Sensor 1 Ref to EN H6DO diag 91 DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR CUIT HIGH BANK 1 S...

Page 2730: ...e Code DTC P0112 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Cir cuit Low Ref to EN H6DO diag 135 DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0113...

Page 2731: ...Trou ble Code DTC P0153 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response Bank 2 Sensor 1 Ref to EN H6DO diag 176 DTC P0153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE BANK 2 SENSOR 1 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble C...

Page 2732: ...13 DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0304 Cylinder 4 Misfire Detected Ref to EN H6DO diag 213 DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED Diagnosti...

Page 2733: ...AP LOOSE OFF Diag nostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit Low Ref to EN H6DO diag 262 DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS TEM PUR...

Page 2734: ...ic Trouble Code DTC P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range Perfor mance High Bank1 Sensor1 Ref to EN H6DO diag 280 DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE PERFORMANCE HIGH BANK1 SENSOR1 Diagnostic Procedure with Dia...

Page 2735: ...DTC P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich Bank 1 Ref to EN H6DO diag 310 DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO RICH BANK 1 Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P2098 Po...

Page 2736: ...ure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P2227 Barometric Pressure Circuit Range Performance Ref to EN H6DO diag 359 DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE PERFORMANCE Diagnostic Procedure with Diagn...

Page 2737: ...ral Description EXHAUST 1 General Description A COMPONENT EX 02143 T2 T4 T5 T1 T1 T3 T3 T7 T7 18 12 11 10 8 T6 T6 20 21 22 23 25 24 17 24 24 24 26 24 25 16 26 13 15 19 14 T3 6 7 5 T3 4 3 1 2 9 asieps_...

Page 2738: ...s at the specified points Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or units be sure to disconnect the ground cable from battery 1 Front catalytic converter upper cover RH 11 Front catalytic converte...

Page 2739: ...a coat of spray type lubricant to the mating area of cushion rubber 4 Remove the rear exhaust pipe bracket from cushion rubber B INSTALLATION 1 Apply a coat of spray type lubricant to the mating area...

Page 2740: ...st pipe to center exhaust pipe Tightening torque 18 N m 1 8 kgf m 13 0 ft lb C INSPECTION 1 Check the connections and welds for exhaust leaks 2 Make sure there are no holes or rusting 3 Check the cush...

Page 2741: ...the front and rear cushion rubber and then remove the muffler B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Use a new gasket and self locking nut Tightening torque 48 N m 4 9 kgf m 35 4...

Page 2742: ...EX H6DO 10 Muffler EXHAUST asieps_tobira book 10...

Page 2743: ...gine Coolant 10 4 Water Pump 12 5 Thermostat 13 6 Radiator 14 7 Radiator Cap 17 8 Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor 18 9 Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor 21 10 Reservoir Tank 23 11 Radiator Fan Control Un...

Page 2744: ...ipe assembly 7 Remove the bolts which hold front exhaust pipe assembly to hanger bracket 8 Remove the front exhaust pipe assembly from vehicle CAUTION Be careful not to let the front exhaust pipe as s...

Page 2745: ...he bolts which hold front ex haust pipe assembly to hanger bracket 5 Install the nuts to cylinder head which hold front exhaust pipe Tightening torque 70 N m 7 1 kgf m 51 6 ft lb 6 Install the under c...

Page 2746: ...nt Exhaust Pipe EXHAUST 11 Connect the battery ground cable to the bat tery C INSPECTION 1 Check the connections and welds for exhaust leaks 2 Make sure there are no holes or rusting IN 00203 asieps_t...

Page 2747: ...the ground cable from battery 3 Remove the air intake chamber Ref to IN H6DO 7 REMOVAL Air Intake Chamber 4 Disconnect the connector from oil temperature sensor 5 Remove the oil temperature sensor B...

Page 2748: ...O 7 REMOVAL Air Intake Chamber 4 Disconnect the connectors from the throttle posi tion sensor 5 Disconnect the engine coolant hoses A from throttle body 6 Remove the bolts B which secure throttle body...

Page 2749: ...working area Be careful not to spill fuel 1 Set the vehicle on a lift 2 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 3 Open the fuel filler flap lid and remove the fuel filler cap 4 Lift up the vehicle 5...

Page 2750: ...tank Capacity 64 2 16 9 US gal 14 1 Imp gal Location Under rear seat Fuel pump Type Impeller Shutoff discharge pressure 550 850 kPa 5 61 8 67 kg cm2 79 8 123 3 psi Discharge rate 125 2 33 US gal 27 5...

Page 2751: ...eral Description FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS B COMPONENT 1 INTAKE MANIFOLD FU 02428 T5 T4 T6 T5 T5 T5 T6 5 6 9 2 12 2 T2 T2 T2 T4 10 T4 9 T4 10 11 T1 T2 T2 14 13 14 14 13 14 T1 4 3 T3 T5 7 8 1 asieps_...

Page 2752: ...T2 6 4 0 65 4 7 4 Filter 11 Fuel pipe protector LH T3 6 4 0 65 4 7 5 Fuel pipe protector RH 12 Fuel pipe ASSY T4 17 1 7 12 5 6 Purge control solenoid valve 13 Hose T5 19 1 9 14 7 Hose 14 Clamp T6 25...

Page 2753: ...FU H6DO 5 General Description FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS 3 AIR INTAKE SYSTEM 1 O ring 2 Throttle body Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb T 8 0 8 5 9 FU 02109 1 2 T asieps_tobira book 5...

Page 2754: ...agnosis oil pressure switch RH Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Knock sensor RH T1 6 4 0 65 4 7 3 Knock sensor LH 7 Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch LH T2 17 1 7 12 5 4 Camshaft po...

Page 2755: ...ion FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS 5 FUEL TANK FU 02862 T4 T1 T4 T3 T3 T3 T2 T3 T3 T4 T1 16 14 15 15 17 18 17 6 21 5 4 3 22 23 24 2 19 20 11 12 13 8 7 10 17 17 30 9 1 T2 T3 21 17 25 26 27 17 29 28 32 31...

Page 2756: ...e 6 Jet pump tube 19 Stopper RH 32 Fuel sub level sensor filter 7 Fuel pump ASSY 20 Stopper LH 33 Fuel sub level sensor protector 8 Fuel pump upper plate 21 Retainer 9 Fuel pump gasket 22 Heat shield...

Page 2757: ...L INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS 6 FUEL LINE FU 02864 B B A A 27 24 29 22 23 28 30 26 25 T2 T4 T1 T2 T2 T6 T2 T6 T3 21 19 17 16 1 1 1 32 33 1 34 31 20 13 13 12 10 9 11 13 13 15 14 18 33 1 2 4 3 5 1 1 1 7 8 6...

Page 2758: ...attery Place NO FIRE signs near the working area Be careful not to spill fuel D PREPARATION TOOL 1 Clamp 15 Fuel pipe ASSY 29 Fuel tank pressure sensor 2 Fuel return hose A 16 Canister 30 Evaporation...

Page 2759: ...ery 2 Remove the rear quarter trim Ref to EI 61 REMOVAL Rear Quarter Trim 3 Remove the fuel pump control unit Wagon model Sedan model 4 Disconnect the connector from fuel pump control unit B INSTALLAT...

Page 2760: ...Remove the connector A and clip B 8 Remove the service hole cover of fuel sub level sensor 1 Remove bolt A 2 Push the grommet B down and remove the service hole cover 9 Disconnect connector A from fu...

Page 2761: ...ake Assembly Rear Disc Brake 19 Lift up the vehicle 20 Remove the rear exhaust pipe Ref to EX H6DO 7 REMOVAL Rear Exhaust Pipe 21 Remove the propeller shaft Ref to DS 10 REMOVAL Propeller Shaft 22 Rem...

Page 2762: ...the connector 27 Disconnect the evaporation hose 28 Disconnect the fuel filler hose A and evapora tion hose B 29 Support the fuel tank with a transmission jack remove the bolts from the fuel tank ban...

Page 2763: ...n hose B to the specified position then tight en the clamp Tightening torque 2 5 N m 0 25 kgf m 1 8 ft lb 3 Connect the evaporation hose 4 Tighten the fuel tank band bolts Tightening torque 33 N m 3 4...

Page 2764: ...parking brake cable clamp Tightening torque 18 N m 1 8 kgf m 13 3 ft lb Tightening torque 32 N m 3 3 kgf m 23 9 ft lb 8 Connect the connector to the rear ABS wheel speed sensor 9 Install the heat shie...

Page 2765: ...to EI 69 INSTALLATION Trunk Room Trim 21 Install the rear quarter trim Wagon model Ref to EI 62 INSTALLATION Rear Quarter Trim 22 Connect connector A to the fuel sub level sen sor 23 Connect the quic...

Page 2766: ...r of fuel pump 28 Install the rear seat 29 Install the fuse of fuel pump to main fuse box C INSPECTION 1 Check that the fuel tank does not have holes cracks or is damaged in any other way 2 Make sure...

Page 2767: ...FUEL SYSTEMS 27 Fuel Filter A SPECIFICATION Fuel filter forms a single unit with fuel pump Refer to Fuel Pump for removal and installation Ref to FU H6DO 49 REMOVAL Fuel Pump Ref to FU H6DO 49 INSTALL...

Page 2768: ...e collector cover 2 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 3 Disconnect the connectors from the engine cool ant temperature sensor 4 Remove the engine coolant temperature sensor B INSTALLATION Insta...

Page 2769: ...r oxygen sen sor LH side RH side 5 Remove the clip holding the harness 6 Remove the rear oxygen sensor NOTE If it is hard to remove the oxygen A F sensor ap ply spray type lubricant and leave it for o...

Page 2770: ...und NEVER SEEZ NS 165 or the equivalent CAUTION Never apply anti seize compound to the protec tor of rear oxygen sensor 2 Install the rear oxygen sensor Tightening torque 21 N m 2 1 kgf m 15 2 ft lb L...

Page 2771: ...enerator Ref to SC H4SO 21 REMOVAL Generator 7 Disconnect the connector A from throttle body 8 Disconnect the engine harness connector B 9 Disconnect the engine coolant hoses from throt tle body 10 Di...

Page 2772: ...pipe LH to cylinder head 16 Remove the fuel pipe protector RH 17 Remove the engine harness from fuel injector pipe RH 18 Remove the bolts which hold the fuel injector pipe RH to the cylinder head 19...

Page 2773: ...e 19 N m 1 9 kgf m 14 ft lb 3 Install the engine harness to fuel injector pipe RH 4 Install the fuel pipe protector RH Tightening torque 19 N m 1 9 kgf m 14 ft lb 5 Install the bolts which hold fuel i...

Page 2774: ...e engine harness connector B 14 Install the generator Ref to SC H4SO 21 INSTALLATION Generator 15 Install the air cleaner case and air intake cham ber Ref to IN H6DO 6 INSTALLATION Air Cleaner Case Re...

Page 2775: ...e manifold 4 Remove the manifold absolute pressure sensor Ref to FU H6DO 23 REMOVAL Manifold Ab solute Pressure Sensor 5 Remove the purge control solenoid valve Ref to EC H6DO 6 REMOVAL Purge Control...

Page 2776: ...b 3 Install the purge control solenoid valve Ref to EC H6DO 6 INSTALLATION Purge Control So lenoid Valve 4 Install the manifold absolute pressure sensor Ref to FU H6DO 23 INSTALLATION Manifold Absolut...

Page 2777: ...move the engine harness from fuel injector pipe RH 9 Remove the bolt which holds fuel injector pipe onto intake manifold 10 Remove the fuel injector while lifting up the fuel injector pipe 2 LH SIDE 1...

Page 2778: ...STALLATION 1 RH SIDE Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Use new O rings Tightening torque 19 N m 1 9 kgf m 14 ft lb Tightening torque 19 N m 1 9 kgf m 14 ft lb 2 LH SIDE Install in the rever...

Page 2779: ...connector of front oxygen A F sensor LH side RH side 5 Remove the front oxygen A F sensor NOTE If it is hard to remove the oxygen A F sensor ap ply spray type lubricant and leave it for one minute or...

Page 2780: ...i seize compound NEVER SEEZ NS 165 or the equivalent CAUTION Never apply anti seize compound to the protec tor of front oxygen A F sensor 2 Install the front oxygen A F sensor Tightening torque 21 N m...

Page 2781: ...ground cable from battery 3 Disconnect the connector from manifold abso lute pressure sensor A and remove the filter as sembly B from intake manifold 4 Remove the manifold absolute pressure sensor fr...

Page 2782: ...ery Return and Evaporation Lines 7 Remove the nuts which install fuel pump assem bly onto fuel tank 8 Remove the fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of re...

Page 2783: ...ply the battery power supply to check whether the pump operates WARNING Wipe off fuel completely Keep the battery as far apart from fuel pump as possible Be sure to turn the battery supply to ON and O...

Page 2784: ...ehicle 5 Remove the rear wheel RH 6 Drain fuel from fuel tank Ref to FU H6DO 38 DRAINING FUEL PROCEDURE Fuel 7 Remove the mud guard Ref to EI 29 RE MOVAL Mud Guard 8 Remove the rear sub frame Ref to R...

Page 2785: ...rewdriver 4 Securely insert the fuel filler hose A and Evap oration hose B to the specified position then tight en the clamp Tightening torque A 2 5 N m 0 3 kgf m 1 8 ft lb 5 Tighten the bolts which h...

Page 2786: ...from the shut valve 2 Remove the nut which holds the evaporation pipe assembly to the fuel filler pipe 3 Remove the shut valve from the fuel filler pipe Ref to EC H4SO 14 REMOVAL Shut Valve E ASSEMBL...

Page 2787: ...rts Replace the faulty parts 2 Decline of fuel pump function Replace the fuel pump 3 Clogged dust or water in the fuel filter Replace the fuel filter and clean or replace the fuel tank 4 Clogged or be...

Page 2788: ...FU H6DO 60 Fuel System Trouble in General FUEL INJECTION FUEL SYSTEMS asieps_tobira book 60...

Page 2789: ...3 Rear Catalytic Converter 4 4 Canister 5 5 Purge Control Solenoid Valve 6 6 Fuel Level Sensor 7 7 Fuel Temperature Sensor 8 8 Fuel Sub Level Sensor 9 9 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor 10 10 Pressure Contr...

Page 2790: ...tery 3 Remove the air intake chamber Ref to IN H6DO 7 REMOVAL Air Intake Chamber 4 Remove the service hole cover 5 Remove the crankshaft position sensor 6 Disconnect the connector from crankshaft posi...

Page 2791: ...ensor from the cylinder block B INSTALLATION 1 Install the knock sensor to cylinder block Tightening torque 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 18 ft lb NOTE For the knock sensor installation angle refer to the figure b...

Page 2792: ...Intake Chamber 4 Disconnect the connector from the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch 5 Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres sure switch LH side RH side B INSTALLATION Ins...

Page 2793: ...Disconnect the ground cable from battery 2 Remove the glove box Ref to EI 51 REMOV AL Glove Box 3 Remove the harness cover A 4 Disconnect the connectors from main relay B INSTALLATION Install in the...

Page 2794: ...2 Push the grommet B down and remove the service hole cover 4 Disconnect the connector from fuel sub level sensor 5 Disconnect the quick connector then disconnect the fuel delivery hose return hose a...

Page 2795: ...matter before installation Align the protrusion A of gasket with the posi tion shown in the figure Align the protrusion B of fuel sub level sensor with the cutout on the upper plate of fuel sub level...

Page 2796: ...very pipes and hoses and then disconnect the fuel return pipes and hoses evap oration pipes and hoses 6 In the engine compartment disconnect the fuel delivery hoses and evaporation hose 1 Disconnect t...

Page 2797: ...e retainer B CAUTION If the retainer remains on the pipe side when the quick connector is disconnected replace the retainer with a new part B INSTALLATION 1 Connect the quick connector on fuel line CA...

Page 2798: ...is speci fied Type B When the amount to be inserted is not specified 2 2 5 1 5 mm 0 098 0 059 in L 22 5 2 5 mm 0 886 0 098 in CAUTION Be sure to inspect hoses and their connections for any leakage of...

Page 2799: ...emove the fuel pipe protector LH 5 Disconnect the connector from camshaft posi tion sensor LH 6 Remove the camshaft position sensor LH 7 Remove the camshaft position sensor RH in the same procedure as...

Page 2800: ...from bracket 7 Disconnect the ECM connectors and take out the ECM B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION When replacing the ECM be careful not to use the wrong spec ECM to avoi...

Page 2801: ...ery line and return line from the fuel by pass valve 4 Remove the fuel by pass valve from the vehicle 5 Disconnect the fuel delivery hose and fuel return hose from the fuel by pass valve B INSTALLATIO...

Page 2802: ...L 1 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 2 Remove the glove box Ref to EI 51 REMOV AL Glove Box 3 Remove the harness cover A 4 Disconnect the connector from fuel pump relay B INSTALLATION Install...

Page 2803: ...A SPECIFICATION Throttle body is a non disassembled part so do not remove the throttle position sensor from throttle body Refer to Throttle Body for removal and installation procedure Ref to FU H6DO 1...

Page 2804: ...MOVAL 1 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 2 Disconnect the connector from the mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor 3 Remove the mass air flow and intake air temper ature sensor B INS...

Page 2805: ...y A REMOVAL 1 Disconnect the ground cable from battery 2 Remove the glove box Ref to EI 51 REMOV AL Glove Box 3 Remove the harness cover A 4 Disconnect the connector from electric throttle control rel...

Page 2806: ...level sensor is built in fuel pump assembly 1 Remove the fuel pump assembly Ref to FU H6DO 49 REMOVAL Fuel Pump 2 Disconnect the connector from fuel pump brack et 3 Remove the fuel temperature sensor...

Page 2807: ...s after warming up when the engine speed increases and AVCS operates 1 AVCS timing controller 3 Engine control module ECM 5 Oil pressure 2 Vane 4 Oil flow control solenoid valve Secondary Parameters E...

Page 2808: ...driving cy cles Normality Judgment 1 Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time with the following criteria established is more than 1 second 2 OK when the following criteria are satisfied...

Page 2809: ...TION 3 ENABLE CONDITION FOR ABNORMALITY JUDGMENT ONLY 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis after warming up the engine 1 AVCS timing controller 3 Engine control module ECM 5 Oil pressu...

Page 2810: ...hen Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Fix valve lift amount to High 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 C DTC P0018 CRANKSHAFT POSITION CAMSHAFT POSITION...

Page 2811: ...the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch is turned ON or OFF Normal Low NG When the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch remains ON even though the intake valve tried to ent...

Page 2812: ...ntrolling the oil switching solenoid valve duty according to signals from the ECM 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis continuously 6 seconds after engine start while varia...

Page 2813: ...CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 F DTC P...

Page 2814: ...he continuous time of meeting the malfunction criteria below becomes more than the time needed for diagnosis 10 seconds Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of not completing the malf...

Page 2815: ...riving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor main learning compensation Not allowed to calculate Rear oxygen sensor sub learning compen...

Page 2816: ...minal voltage at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING...

Page 2817: ...LEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor activation judgment Front oxygen A F sensor full activation is...

Page 2818: ...l voltage at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYC...

Page 2819: ...LEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor activation judgment Front oxygen A F sensor full activation is...

Page 2820: ...put terminal voltage at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL D...

Page 2821: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CO...

Page 2822: ...terminal voltage at ON is 0 V and the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIV...

Page 2823: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CO...

Page 2824: ...0052 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH BANK 2 SENSOR 1 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC P0032 Ref to GD H6DO 20 DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH BANK 1 SE...

Page 2825: ...ure AD value is Low whereas it seemed to be High from the viewpoint of engine condition or when it is High whereas it seemed to be Low from the engine condition 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDIT...

Page 2826: ...s OK when the malfunction criteria below are completed 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR...

Page 2827: ...d EVAP conc learning fuel Not allowed to learn Knocking compensation When normal Learning ignition advance angle value knock F B advance angle entire learning advance angle value portional learning ad...

Page 2828: ...ccurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time when the following conditions are established are more than 2 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is c...

Page 2829: ...a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time when the following conditions are established are more than 2 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK i...

Page 2830: ...OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE PERFOR MANCE 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS Detect the malfunction of air flow sensor output property Judge as a low side NG when the air flow voltage indicates a small value...

Page 2831: ...or Output voltage 1 79 V Engine speed 2000 rpm Throttle opening angle 15 Intake manifold pressure 73 3 kPa 550 mmHg 21 7 inHg High side error 1 Output voltage 1 83 V Engine speed 500 850 rpm Throttle...

Page 2832: ...L DESCRIPTION 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memor...

Page 2833: ...as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC...

Page 2834: ...pensation value portional learning compensation value When normal Knock compensation value Fixed at 0 CA Failure Knock compensation value Fixed at 0 CA When knock Max 12 CA retard Whole learning compe...

Page 2835: ...d clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CO...

Page 2836: ...pensation value portional learning compensation value When normal Knock compensation value Fixed at 0 CA Failure Knock compensation value Fixed at 0 CA When knock Max 12 CA retard Whole learning compe...

Page 2837: ...n the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0...

Page 2838: ...udgment Fuel cut control Fuel cut will operate at engine high speed EVAP conc learning fuel Not allowed to learn Knocking compensation When normal Learning ignition advance angle value knock F B advan...

Page 2839: ...n the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 0 5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0...

Page 2840: ...udgment Fuel cut control Fuel cut will operate at engine high speed EVAP conc learning fuel Not allowed to learn Knocking compensation When normal Learning ignition advance angle value knock F B advan...

Page 2841: ...ondition 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis when the vehicle speed condition is completed after idling from starting the cooled en gine 1 Air flow...

Page 2842: ...TION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When C...

Page 2843: ...cuit of the intake air temperature sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Air f...

Page 2844: ...are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is complet...

Page 2845: ...rcuit of the intake air temperature sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Air...

Page 2846: ...are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is complet...

Page 2847: ...5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a m...

Page 2848: ...ment control Not allowed to carry out the heavy judgment Air conditioner control Not allowed to turn the air conditioner to ON Radiator fan control Both main and sub fan are in High driving High water...

Page 2849: ...5 seconds or more Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a...

Page 2850: ...ment control Not allowed to carry out the heavy judgment Air conditioner control Not allowed to turn the air conditioner to ON Radiator fan control Both main and sub fan are in High driving High water...

Page 2851: ...24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 2852: ...tecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame da...

Page 2853: ...24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 2854: ...tecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame da...

Page 2855: ...N 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis only once after engine starting 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Abnormality Judgment Judge as NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 1 Co...

Page 2856: ...Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Engine coolant temperature sensor process Engine coolant temperature is fixed at 70 C 158 F ISC Feedback Calculate target engine speed as engine coolant temperature 70...

Page 2857: ...hem to judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature does not decrease when it should 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis only once after startin...

Page 2858: ...formed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the...

Page 2859: ...an the estimated engine coolant temperature and the difference between them is large Judge as OK when the engine coolant temperature becomes to 75 C 167 F and the difference is small before judging NG...

Page 2860: ...d 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 Judgment Value Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value Ba...

Page 2861: ...Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing any malfunction criteria below is more than 1 second Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 second Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon...

Page 2862: ...ater control Not allowed to turn on the heater A F main learning Not allowed to calculate the A F main learning compensation factor A F sub learning Not allowed to calculate the A F sub learning compe...

Page 2863: ...Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing any malfunction criteria below is more than 1 second Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 second Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon...

Page 2864: ...ater control Not allowed to turn on the heater A F main learning Not allowed to calculate the A F main learning compensation factor A F sub learning Not allowed to calculate the A F sub learning compe...

Page 2865: ...ed ventilation holes are diagnosed When the holes are clogged the A F output variation becomes slow comparing with the actual A F variation because oxygen which reaches the zirconia layer is insuffici...

Page 2866: ...Parameters Enable Conditions All secondary parameters enable condi tions 1 second or more Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 563 mmHg 22 2 inHg Closed loop control with main feedbac...

Page 2867: ...the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor main learning compensation Not allowed to calculate Rear oxygen sensor sub learni...

Page 2868: ...ircuits of the sensor Judge as NG when the impedance of the element is large 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Atmosphere A...

Page 2869: ...TION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Front oxygen A F sensor IC communication Not allowed to communic...

Page 2870: ...3 ENABLE CONDITION USED ONLY FOR MALFUNCTION JUDGMENT 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Atmosphere A Electromotive force D Lean 2 Exhaust gas B Air fuel ratio E Theor...

Page 2871: ...criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving c...

Page 2872: ...PTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION USED ONLY FOR MALFUNCTION JUDGMENT 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Atmosphere A Electromotive force D Lean 2 Exhaust gas B Air fuel ratio E...

Page 2873: ...a below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is...

Page 2874: ...e is large rich when recovering from a deceleration fuel cut Lean rich diagnosis response 1 Measure the response time for oxygen sensor output changes when the A F ratio changes to lean to rich If the...

Page 2875: ...ntion to the oxygen sensor voltage for the timing of the deceleration Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions Battery voltage 10 9 V A F sub feedback control condition Completed Deceleration fuel cut t...

Page 2876: ...of rear oxygen sensor output voltage is short during fuel shut off in deceleration Carry out the NG judgment only after the fuel shut off in deceleration Even without deceleration fuel cut judge as O...

Page 2877: ...Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Sub feedback control Not allowed 9...

Page 2878: ...es from 0 25 V lean to 0 55 V rich EN 02210 Fuel cut on deceleration Execute the malfunction judgement in 2 seconds from recovery of fuel cut on deceleration Rear oxygen sensor V 0V 6s 120s 0 25V 0 3V...

Page 2879: ...time diagnosis value threshold value normal 2 Do not judge as a normal condition Judge as OK when the criteria below are met 13 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a...

Page 2880: ...Perform the diagnosis once after starting the engine A Electromotive force C Rich E Theoretical air fuel ratio B Air fuel ratio D Lean F Comparative voltage 1 Atmosphere 2 Exhaust gas 3 Electromotive...

Page 2881: ...is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FA...

Page 2882: ...Ref to GD H6DO 70 DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIR CUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED BANK 1 SENSOR 1 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria AW DTC P0157 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE BANK 2 SENSOR 2 1 OUTLINE...

Page 2883: ...ormality Judgment Judge as OK when the malfunction criteria below are completed for 10 seconds or more Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions A F main learning system In operation Engine coolant tempe...

Page 2884: ...completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear Memory is...

Page 2885: ...mination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as OK when the malfunction criteria below continues for 10 seconds Secondary Parameters Enable Con...

Page 2886: ...o purge Heavy fuel judgment control Not allowed to carry out the heavy judgment 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 BC DTC P0174 SYSTEM TOO LEAN BANK 2 1 OUT...

Page 2887: ...her is NG judge as NG If both are OK Judge as OK and clear the NG Drift Diagnosis Normally fuel temperature is lower than engine coolant temperature When the fuel temperature becomes higher than the e...

Page 2888: ...RIVING CYCLE Always perform diagnosis after 20 seconds have passed since the engine started Judgment Value Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value Fuel level 9 6 2 25 4 US gal 2 11 Imp gal After engine s...

Page 2889: ...s completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 10 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 11 FA...

Page 2890: ...the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 2 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a ma...

Page 2891: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 2892: ...n the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 2 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a m...

Page 2893: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 2894: ...characteristic diagnosis timer judgment value t t 2400000 60000 Ti t 2400000 Ti The lowest coolant temperature after starting the engine Time Needed for Diagnosis Undecided Malfunction Indicator Ligh...

Page 2895: ...When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE Oil temperature sensor...

Page 2896: ...llowing conditions are not established Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idli...

Page 2897: ...llowing conditions are not established Time Needed for Diagnosis 0 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idli...

Page 2898: ...24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 2899: ...tecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame da...

Page 2900: ...24 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 2901: ...tecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame da...

Page 2902: ...CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Abnormality Judgment Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 2 5 seconds or more...

Page 2903: ...formed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE OFF setting may be needed depending on the NG po...

Page 2904: ...rval Difference Method 2 ENABLE CONDITION Map 3 3 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE If conditions are met detect misfire from idling to high rotation Perform the diagnosis continuously Secondary Parameters Enable...

Page 2905: ...following figure pick a cylinder as the standard and name it omg 0 And the former crank shaft position speed is named omg 1 the second former crankshaft position speed is named omg 2 the third is nam...

Page 2906: ...he following cases domg 120 judgment value of positive side domg 121 judgment value of negative side 120 Judgment value Diagnostic value domg 360 omg 1 omg 0 omg 4 omg 3 Misfire judgment domg 360 Judg...

Page 2907: ...ght Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Diagnostic value domg 720 omg 1 omg 0 omg 7 omg 6 Misfire judgment domg 720 Judgment value Judge as misfire Judgmen...

Page 2908: ...frame data For test mode 02 Judgment Value Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value Catalyst damage misfire judgment value Refer to Map Map Intake air g oz rev 0 2 0 035 0 4 0 014 0 6 0 021 0 8 0 028 1 0...

Page 2909: ...tecting Criteria BQ DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC P0301 Ref to GD H6DO 106 DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MIS FIRE DETECTED Diagnost...

Page 2910: ...is continuously 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Abnormality Judgment Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 1 second or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 second M...

Page 2911: ...times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Knocking compensation When normal Learning ignition advance angle value knock F B advance angle entire learning advance angle value portional...

Page 2912: ...is continuously 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Abnormality Judgment Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 1 second or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 second M...

Page 2913: ...on advance value 6 CA 6 CA retard Knock F B advancing angle 0 CA Whole learning prohibited Portional learning prohibited 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02...

Page 2914: ...the starter was rotated 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION A Camshaft signal RH B Camshaft signal LH C Crankshaft signal 1 Crankshaft position sensor 2 Crank sprocket 3 Crankshaft half turn S...

Page 2915: ...meeting the malfunction criteria below is 3 seconds or more 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT...

Page 2916: ...or every revolution 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION A Camshaft signal RH B Camshaft signal LH C Crankshaft signal 1 Crankshaft position sensor 2 Crank sprocket 3 Crankshaft half turn Second...

Page 2917: ...ar the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR C...

Page 2918: ...rmal 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION A Camshaft signal RH B Camshaft signal LH C Crankshaft signal 1 Throttle 3 Detecting point 4 Camshaft one revolution Engine two revolutions 2 Camshaft p...

Page 2919: ...factor and variable amount of whole learning compensation factor when IG OFF and then make the whole learning incomplete Enter the initial value whole learning compensation factor 0 5 Variable amount...

Page 2920: ...C P0345 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT BANK 2 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC P0340 Ref to GD H6DO 120 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT PO SITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT BANK 1 OR...

Page 2921: ...ear oxygen sensor B Deterioration 3 Catalytic converter C Output waveform from the front oxygen A F sensor Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 5...

Page 2922: ...nction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory...

Page 2923: ...nge using the fuel tank pressure sensor When in 0 04 inch diagnosis perform in the order of mode Z mode A mode B mode C and mode D When in 0 02 inch diagnosis perform in the order of mode A mode B mod...

Page 2924: ...P2 calculation If the tank pressure does not become the value make advanced OK judgment 1 15 sec Mode D Negative pressure variation mea surement evaporation leakage diagnosis Calculate the tank press...

Page 2925: ...C Negative pressure maintained Wait until the tank pressure returns to the target start level of P2 calculation 0 20 sec Mode D Negative pressure change calcu lated Calculate the time it takes for the...

Page 2926: ...r pressure Normally the solenoid is set to OFF And the valve opens and closes mechanically in accordance with the pressure difference between tank and atmospheric air or tank and canister The valve is...

Page 2927: ...and the part below Y is charged with canister pressure If the atmospheric air pressure port is A tank pressure port is B and canister pressure port is C the air flows according to pressure difference...

Page 2928: ...cting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION When B C solenoid OFF When Solenoid is ON a Atmospheric pressure b Fuel tank c Canister 1 Valve a Atmospheric pressure b Fuel tank c Canister EN 01718 A B C a b c 1...

Page 2929: ...density 0 08 Engine speed 1050 6500 rpm Fuel tank pressure 4 0 kPa 30 mmHg 1 18 inHg Intake manifold relative vacuum relative pressure 26 7 kPa 200 mmHg 7 87 inHg Vehicle speed 32 km h 20 MPH Fuel le...

Page 2930: ...AGNOSIS DTC P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected Fuel Cap Loose Off 0 02 inch Diagnosis Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions At starting a diagnosis Evap diagnosis Incomplete Batt...

Page 2931: ...osis is performed by monitoring the tank pressure in mode Z Normality Judgment Make OK judgment 3 seconds after Mode Z starts and change to Mode A if OK 1 Engine 4 Drain valve 6 Fuel tank 2 Purge cont...

Page 2932: ...n 2 continuous driving cy cles When judgment for purge control solenoid valve stuck open NG is made end the evaporative diagnosis Cancel the evaporative diagnosis when the OK NG judgment for drain val...

Page 2933: ...for more than 40 seconds Judge as normal when all are established Leak Diagnosis DTC P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected Small Leak P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak...

Page 2934: ...e Monitor the tank pressure change amount when using mode D In this case the tank pressure increases nears atmospheric pressure because evaporation occurs However if any leakage exists the pressure in...

Page 2935: ...the tank pressure in mode D calculate P2 the pressure change in the tank and measure the time evpdset for the tank pressure to return when calculation of P2 is completed Shift to mode E when pressure...

Page 2936: ...0 seconds 50 seconds 100 seconds 160 seconds 200 seconds 10 L 2 6 US gal 2 2 Imp gal 0 kPa 0 mmHg 0 inHg 0 07 kPa 0 5 mmHg 0 020 inHg 0 23 kPa 1 7 mmHg 0 067 inHg 0 36 kPa 2 7 mmHg 0 106 inHg 0 36 kPa...

Page 2937: ...nds 30 seconds 50 seconds 100 seconds 160 seconds 200 seconds 10 L 2 6 US gal 2 2 Imp gal 0 13 kPa 1 0 mmHg 0 039 inHg 0 47 kPa 3 5 mmHg 0 138 inHg 0 56 kPa 4 2 mmHg 0 165 inHg 0 56 kPa 4 2 mmHg 0 165...

Page 2938: ...rs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Bobbin 8 Magnetic plate 14 Retainer 2 Coil 9 Shaft 15 D...

Page 2939: ...ear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Pressure control solenoid valve...

Page 2940: ...fers from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Bobbin 8 Magnetic plate 14 Retainer 2 Coil 9 Shaft 15...

Page 2941: ...lear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Pressure control solenoid valv...

Page 2942: ...PTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis continuously after 60 seconds or more have passed since the engine started Be sure to check the fuel level and fuel temperature 1...

Page 2943: ...us driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as OK when the criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNC...

Page 2944: ...S Detect the open or short circuit of the fuel tank pressure sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diag...

Page 2945: ...he OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory...

Page 2946: ...n 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Perform the diagnosis when purging 1 Connector A Output voltage C To fuel tank 2 Terminal B Input voltage Secondary Parameters Enab...

Page 2947: ...e freeze frame data For test mode 02 CI DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT ED VERY SMALL LEAK 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS For the detection conditions refer to DTC P0442 Evaporative...

Page 2948: ...e control solenoid valve Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis af...

Page 2949: ...ment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION...

Page 2950: ...ge control solenoid valve Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis a...

Page 2951: ...ment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION...

Page 2952: ...tions of the fuel level sensor output property If the fuel level does not vary in a particular driving condition engine condition where it should judge as NG 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION...

Page 2953: ...CATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE None 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For te...

Page 2954: ...r short circuit of fuel level sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine con...

Page 2955: ...ow are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is compl...

Page 2956: ...or short circuit of fuel level sensor Judge as NG if it is out of specification 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine co...

Page 2957: ...are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is complete...

Page 2958: ...ut voltage variation of the fuel level sensor is larger than the threshold value 2 ENABLE CONDITION 3 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously at idle speed Pay attention to the...

Page 2959: ...mulative values are not over the threshold value Otherwise when either of them is over the threshold value the diagnosis counter counts up Judge as NG if the counter indicated 4 counts Diagnosis condi...

Page 2960: ...completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE None 8 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 Judgment Value Malfunction Criteria Threshold...

Page 2961: ...s more than 5 minutes Time Needed for Diagnosis 5 minutes Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as OK an...

Page 2962: ...malfunction criteria below becomes 2 5 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Ju...

Page 2963: ...vehicle speed fuel cut performs on vehicle speed condition and engine speed but perform the fuel cut only on engine speed condition 4400 rpm or more ISC control Open loop compensation is set to 1 g 0...

Page 2964: ...and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criterion below be comes more than the time needed for diagnosis 10 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is c...

Page 2965: ...ATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE Judgment of heavy fuel Not allowed to make the judgment of heavy fuel 8 EC...

Page 2966: ...and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criterion below be comes more than the time needed for diagnosis 10 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is c...

Page 2967: ...ATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 FAIL SAFE Judgment of heavy fuel Not allowed to make the judgment of heavy fuel 8 EC...

Page 2968: ...hen malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy cles Normality Judgment Judge as ON OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is...

Page 2969: ...ey Use of unregistered key in body inte grated unit P1570 Antenna Faulty antenna P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility Reference code incompatibility between body integrated unit and ECM P1572 IMM Circ...

Page 2970: ...elow be comes more than the time needed for diagnosis 5 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIG...

Page 2971: ...s judged NG Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time when all of the following criteria are established is more than the predetermined time 1 s Time Needed for Diagnosis 1 time Malfunctio...

Page 2972: ...unction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Secondary Parameters Enable...

Page 2973: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 2974: ...Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine...

Page 2975: ...rcuit of throttle position sensor 1 is abnormal 6 When the cruise control cannot be canceled correctly 7 When the signal of brake SW1 and 2 is mismatched 8 When the directed angle from the main CPU is...

Page 2976: ...ke switch only with cruise control ON 7 None 8 Cruise control OFF 9 Ignition switch ON 10 Ignition switch ON Judgment Value Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value 1 Difference of CPU reading value of th...

Page 2977: ...ght Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT...

Page 2978: ...rol is operating 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis Target opening angle and actual opening angle 250 milliseconds F...

Page 2979: ...mory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped...

Page 2980: ...tecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle opening is fixed to 6 9 ECM OPERATION AT DTC SETTING Memorize the freeze frame da...

Page 2981: ...Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUN...

Page 2982: ...ity Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MAL...

Page 2983: ...s OK when the following conditions are not established and clear the NG Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 5 DTC...

Page 2984: ...nable Conditions All secondary parameters enable conditions 4 seconds or more Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 563 mmHg 22 2 inHg Rear oxygen sensor sub feedback Execution Rear oxy...

Page 2985: ...nuous driving cy cles 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cyc...

Page 2986: ...Enable Conditions All secondary parameters enable conditions 4 seconds or more Battery voltage 10 9 V Atmospheric pressure 75 1 kPa 563 mmHg 22 2 inHg Rear oxygen sensor sub feedback Execution Rear ox...

Page 2987: ...Front oxygen A F sensor main learning compensation Not allowed to calculate Rear oxygen sensor sub learning compensation Not allowed to calculate Correction when re starting at high temperature Norma...

Page 2988: ...rmality Judgment Judge as NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below becomes 1 6 seconds or more Time Needed for Diagnosis 1600 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light I...

Page 2989: ...hen Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with en...

Page 2990: ...the malfunction criteria below becomes more than time needed for diagnosis 2 5 seconds Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 secon...

Page 2991: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 2992: ...he malfunction criteria below becomes more than time needed for diagnosis 2 5 seconds Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are not met Time Needed for Diagnosis 2 5 seconds...

Page 2993: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed...

Page 2994: ...form the diagnosis continuously 1 Bobbin 8 Magnetic plate 14 Retainer 2 Coil 9 Shaft 15 Diaphragm 3 Diode 10 Plate 16 Movable core 4 Stator core 11 Valve 17 Spring 5 End plate 12 Housing 18 Cover 6 Bo...

Page 2995: ...is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 8 FAIL SAFE Pressure control solenoid valve control Op...

Page 2996: ...e as OFF OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 6 MALFUNCTION INDI...

Page 2997: ...s soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row...

Page 2998: ...etecting Criteria DS DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS For the detection standard refer to DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY Ref to GD H6DO 171 DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZ...

Page 2999: ...Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below be comes more than 2 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is co...

Page 3000: ...whole learning compensation factor when making a normality judgment abnormality judgment and then make the whole learning incomplete Ignition timing partial learning compensation Enter the initial va...

Page 3001: ...as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below be comes more than 2 seconds 5 DTC CLEAR CONDITION...

Page 3002: ...value 0 CA to the compensation value of partial learning zone when making a nor mality judgment abnormality judgment AVCS control Maximum timing retard learning is not complete or maximum timing retar...

Page 3003: ...llowing conditions are established is more than 5 sec onds Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time of the following conditions not being established is more than 5 seconds Time Needed fo...

Page 3004: ...completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When similar driving conditions are repeated 3 times and the result is OK When Clear Memory is...

Page 3005: ...following conditions are established is more than 5 sec onds Judge as OK and clear the NG when the continuous time when the following conditions are not established is more than 5 seconds Time Needed...

Page 3006: ...emorize the freeze frame data For test mode 02 EC DTC P2098 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO LEAN BANK 2 1 OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC P2096 Ref to GD H6DO 20...

Page 3007: ...CRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 1 Engine control module ECM 4 Drive circuit 6 Electronic throttle control relay 2 Detecting circuit 5 Temp...

Page 3008: ...cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When...

Page 3009: ...ontinuously 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 400 milliseconds For NG 2000 milliseconds For OK Malfunction Indicato...

Page 3010: ...Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Stop...

Page 3011: ...ets the electric throttle control relay to OFF 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE When ignition switch ON OFF Ignition switch OFF ON Only after clearing memory 1 Engine...

Page 3012: ...When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3...

Page 3013: ...Time Needed for Diagnosis None Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When...

Page 3014: ...ION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Stop the continuity to the electronic control throttle motor Throttle op...

Page 3015: ...G when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 100 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When...

Page 3016: ...When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttle...

Page 3017: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 32 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When...

Page 3018: ...When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttle...

Page 3019: ...G when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 100 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When...

Page 3020: ...When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttle...

Page 3021: ...NG when the malfunction criteria below are met Time Needed for Diagnosis 32 milliseconds Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When...

Page 3022: ...When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAFE Single malfunction Control with normal sensor Simultaneous failure Throttle...

Page 3023: ...CRIPTION 3 ENABLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 1 Throttle po...

Page 3024: ...formed Only with engine stopped 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed Only with engine stopped 8 FAIL SAF...

Page 3025: ...BLE CONDITION 4 GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE Always perform the diagnosis continuously 5 DIAGNOSTIC METHOD Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 1 Engine control module ECM...

Page 3026: ...K idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Clear Memory is performed 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT CLEAR CONDITION When the OK driving cycle is completed 3 times in a row When Clear Memory is...

Page 3027: ...lear the NG when the continuous time of completing the malfunction criteria below be comes more than 0 262 seconds 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is completed 40 times in a row When Cl...

Page 3028: ...Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is c...

Page 3029: ...Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When the OK idling cycle is...

Page 3030: ...nction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK when the following conditions are established and clear the NG 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When...

Page 3031: ...nction Indicator Light Illumination Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs Normality Judgment Judge as OK when the following conditions are established and clear the NG 6 DTC CLEAR CONDITION When...

Page 3032: ...GD H6DO 234 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria GENERAL DESCRIPTION asieps_tobira book 234...

Page 3033: ...ics Please peruse and utilize this manual fully to ensure complete repair work for satisfying our customers by keeping their vehicle in optimum condition When replacement of parts during repair work i...

Page 3034: ...asieps_tobira book 2...

Page 3035: ...2 AT Shift Lock Control System 6 3 Select Lever 19 4 Select Cable 23 5 AT Steering Shift Switch 28 6 AT Shift Lock Solenoid and P Range Switch 30 7 Body Integrated Unit 33 8 MT Gear Shift Lever 34 9 G...

Page 3036: ...Heater Control Circuit High Bank 1 Sensor 1 Ref to GD H6DO 20 DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH BANK 1 SENSOR 1 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Crite ria P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circu...

Page 3037: ...EMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Cir cuit High Ref to GD H6DO 51 DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH Diagnostic Trou...

Page 3038: ...d Bank2 Sensor2 Ref to GD H6DO 84 DTC P0160 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED BANK2 SENSOR2 Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P0171 System Too Lean Bank 1 Ref to GD H6DO 85 DTC P0171...

Page 3039: ...TC Detecting Criteria P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor A Cir cuit Range Performance Ref to GD H6DO 118 DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE PERFORMANCE Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Dete...

Page 3040: ...han Expected Ref to GD H6DO 166 DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Crite ria P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher Than Expected Ref to...

Page 3041: ...ouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P1570 Antenna Ref to GD H6DO 200 DTC P1570 ANTENNA Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility Ref to GD H6DO 200 DTC P1571 RE...

Page 3042: ...n Sensor Switch D Circuit High Input Ref to GD H6DO 219 DTC P2123 THROTTLE PEDAL POSITION SEN SOR SWITCH D CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Detecting Criteria P2127 Throttle Pedal Positi...

Page 3043: ...onnect the connector from ignition coil 6 Remove the ignition coil NOTE Turn the 5 ignition coil to remove it 7 Remove the spark plug with a spark plug socket 2 LH SIDE 1 Remove the collector cover 2...

Page 3044: ...ould be reduced by approx 1 3 of the specified torque in order to avoid over stressing 2 LH SIDE Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque Spark plug 21 N m 2 1 kgf m 15 2 ft lb Tighte...

Page 3045: ...ance between valve guides and stems 4 Overheating White or light gray insulator with black or brown spots and bluish burnt electrodes indicate engine overheating Moreover the appearance results from i...

Page 3046: ...nt ignition coil Manufacturer Diamond Electric Spark plug Manufacturer and type NGK ILFR6B Thread size diameter pitch length mm 14 1 25 26 5 Spark plug gap mm in 0 7 0 8 0 028 0 031 Electrode Iridium...

Page 3047: ...m dust and dirt Before removal installation or disassembly be sure to clarify the failure Avoid unnecessary re moval installation disassembly and replacement Vehicle components are extremely hot after...

Page 3048: ...ure Ref to IG H6DO 4 REMOVAL Spark Plug B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque 16 N m 1 6 kgf m 11 7 ft lb C INSPECTION For inspection procedure refer to Diagnostics...

Page 3049: ...IG H6DO 8 Ignition Coil IGNITION asieps_tobira book 8...

Page 3050: ...STARTING CHARGING SYSTEMS SC H6DO Page 1 General Description 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 3051: ...which installs the air intake duct on the front side of body 2 Remove the air intake duct B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal C INSPECTION 1 Check for cracks or loose connections 2...

Page 3052: ...side of air cleaner case 4 Pull the air cleaner case rear backward of the vehicle and remove the air cleaner element NOTE Be careful of the power steering hose fixed to the bottom of the air cleaner c...

Page 3053: ...fer to Air Clean er Case for removal procedure Ref to IN H6DO 5 REMOVAL Air Cleaner Case B INSTALLATION The resonator chamber and air cleaner case are in tegrated into one unit therefore refer to Air...

Page 3054: ...IN H6DO 10 Resonator Chamber INTAKE INDUCTION asieps_tobira book 10...

Page 3055: ...9 12 Preparation for Overhaul 40 13 Crank Pulley 41 14 Front Chain Cover 42 15 Timing Chain Assembly 44 16 Cam Sprocket 49 17 Crank Sprocket 50 18 Rear Chain Cover 51 19 Camshaft 53 20 Cylinder Head 5...

Page 3056: ...IN H6DO 2 General Description INTAKE INDUCTION 1 General Description A COMPONENT IN 02008 12 16 15 11 T1 6 6 5 5 9 9 8 18 7 4 17 3 2 1 T3 T3 13 T2 T2 14 13 14 T4 T5 10 T3 asieps_tobira book 2...

Page 3057: ...ter driv ing Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points Before d...

Page 3058: ...4 Remove the bolt C which secures air intake chamber to the stay 5 Disconnect the blow by hoses then remove the air intake chamber B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening tor...

Page 3059: ...ir flow and intake air temperature sensor 4 Loosen the clamps A which connect the air cleaner case and the intake duct 5 Remove the clip B securing the upper side of air cleaner case 6 Remove the air...

Page 3060: ...he reverse order of removal Tightening torque Bolt A 6 0 N m 0 6 kgf m 4 4 ft lb Nut B 7 5 N m 0 76 kgf m 5 5 ft lb NOTE Fasten with a clip after inserting the lower tab of case C INSPECTION Check for...

Page 3061: ...1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 B38 B21 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32...

Page 3062: ...pressure switch 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Measure the voltage of harness between oil pressure switch connector and chassis ground Connector terminal E11 No 1 Chassis ground Is the voltage mo...

Page 3063: ...draining of engine oil 4 Tighten the engine oil drain plug after draining engine oil NOTE Use a new drain plug gasket Tightening torque 44 N m 4 5 kgf m 33 ft lb 5 Using engine oil of proper quality a...

Page 3064: ...3 3 39 0 51 Tip clearance between inner and outer rotors mm in 0 04 0 14 0 0016 0 0055 Side clearance between inner rotor and pump case mm in 0 020 0 046 0 0008 0 0018 Case clearance between outer rot...

Page 3065: ...General Description LUBRICATION B COMPONENT LU 02097 4 3 T8 8 16 20 2 17 13 7 9 6 7 14 18 1 21 19 25 24 23 T1 T4 T4 T1 T4 T7 T6 T4 T5 T3 T8 T10 8 8 11 10 T9 12 T2 15 8 22 5 6 7 7 7 7 T1 6 asieps_tobi...

Page 3066: ...s of sensors or units be sure to disconnect the ground cable from battery D PREPARATION TOOL 1 SPECIAL TOOL 1 Oil pan lower 14 Outer rotor Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Magnet 15 Crank sprocket...

Page 3067: ...ening edge of crank shaft and install the inner rotor and then assemble the outer rotor 3 Install the oil pump cover 4 Tighten the bolts in the numerical order as shown in the figure CAUTION Make sure...

Page 3068: ...the clearance ex ceeds the standard value replace the outer rotor Case clearance Standard 0 110 0 175 mm 0 0043 0 0069 in 3 SIDE CLEARANCE Measure the clearance between oil pump inner ro tor and rear...

Page 3069: ...ss mm in A 15015AA250 12 993 13 006 0 51153 0 51205 No 15015AA300 12 980 12 993 0 51102 0 51153 C 15015AA310 12 967 12 980 0 51051 0 51102 Outer rotor Classification Part No Rotor thickness mm in A 15...

Page 3070: ...nd oil pan lower CAUTION Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool in place of oil pan cutter 6 Remove the oil pan lower 7 Remove the oil strainer B INSTALLATION CAUTION Before installing the oil pan w...

Page 3071: ...own in the figure Tightening torque 6 4 N m 0 65 kgf m 4 7 ft lb 4 Install the under cover 5 Refill the engine oil Ref to LU H6DO 7 IN SPECTION Engine Oil C INSPECTION Visually check that the oil pan...

Page 3072: ...COVER SIDE Oil pump relief valve is integrated into oil pump cov er as one unit therefore refer to Oil Pump for in stallation procedure Ref to LU H6DO 8 INSTALLATION Oil Pump 2 OIL PAN UPPER SIDE 1 I...

Page 3073: ...switch B INSTALLATION 1 Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch threads Liquid gasket Three bond 1324 Part No 004403042 or equivalent 2 Install the oil pressure switch Tightening torque 25 N m...

Page 3074: ...sing the ST Ref to LU H6DO 15 REMOVAL Engine Oil Filter ST 498547000 OIL FILTER WRENCH NOTE Set a container under the vehicle 8 Remove the oil cooler connector and remove oil cooler B INSTALLATION 1 I...

Page 3075: ...MENT Engine Oil 6 Fill engine coolant Ref to CO H6DO 10 FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT REPLACE MENT Engine Coolant 7 Check the engine oil level Ref to LU H6DO 7 INSPECTION Engine Oil C INSPECTION 1 Check t...

Page 3076: ...ce Malfunction of oil relief valve in oil pump Clean or replace Clogged oil passage Clean Excessive tip clearance and side clearance of oil pump rotor and gear Replace Clogged oil strainer or broken p...

Page 3077: ...SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS SP H6DO Page 1 General Description 2 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 3078: ...care ful not to damage the seal rubber 4 Tighten more approx 3 4 turn after the seal rubber contacts the oil cooler Do not tighten exces sively or oil may leak Tightening torque 14 N m 1 4 kgf m 10 3...

Page 3079: ...Oil Flow Control Solenoid Valve A REMOVAL Oil flow control solenoid valve is a unit with cam shaft cap Refer to Camshaft for removal procedure Ref to ME H6DO 53 REMOVAL Camshaft B INSTALLATION Instal...

Page 3080: ...NSTALLATION 1 Install the oil switching solenoid valve holder NOTE Always use new gaskets 1 Temporarily tighten the bolts by tightening torque of 5 10 N m 0 5 1 0 kgf m 3 7 7 4 ft lb in order shown in...

Page 3081: ...L 24 Intake and Exhaust Valve A SPECIFICATION Refer to Cylinder Head for removal and installa tion procedures of intake and exhaust valves Ref to ME H6DO 57 REMOVAL Cylinder Head Ref to ME H6DO 57 INS...

Page 3082: ...HANICAL 27 Crankshaft A SPECIFICATION Refer to Cylinder Block for removal and installa tion procedures of crankshaft Ref to ME H6DO 62 REMOVAL Cylinder Block Ref to ME H6DO 64 INSTALLATION Cylinder Bl...

Page 3083: ...tisfactory perfor mance and operation 6 Hold the compression gauge tightly against the spark plug hole NOTE When using a screw in type compression gauge the screw put into cylinder head spark plug hol...

Page 3084: ...auge indication Possible engine condition 1 Needle is steady but lower than normal position This ten dency becomes more evident as engine temperature rises Air leakage around intake manifold gasket di...

Page 3085: ...ME H6DO 51 REMOVAL Rear Chain Cover 7 Remove the camshaft Ref to ME H6DO 53 REMOVAL Camshaft 8 Remove the cylinder head Ref to ME H6DO 57 REMOVAL Cylinder Head 9 Using ST remove the drive plate ST1 4...

Page 3086: ...piston piston pin and cylinder 20 Similarly remove the piston pins from 3 4 5 and 6 pistons 21 Remove the bolts which secure cylinder block 22 Separate the cylinder block LH and RH NOTE When separatin...

Page 3087: ...of engine oil to the washer and bolt thread 5 Tighten all bolts in the numerical order as shown in the figure Tightening torque 1 11 13 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 18 ft lb 12 14 20 N m 2 0 kgf m 14 ft lb 6 Reti...

Page 3088: ...Assemble it so that R mark faces to top side of piston 15 Install the snap ring Install the snap rings in the piston holes located op posite to the service holes in cylinder block when positioning al...

Page 3089: ...33AA000 PISTON PIN SNAP RING PLI ERS NOTE Use new snap rings 4 Similarly install the 1 2 5 and 6 pis tons 18 Install the service hole plug and O ring NOTE Use new O rings 19 Apply liquid gasket to the...

Page 3090: ...oil pan lower Liquid gasket THREE BOND 1280B Part No K0877YA018 Applying liquid gasket diameter 5 0 1 0 mm 0 20 0 04 in 24 Tighten the oil pan lower installing bolts in the numerical order as shown in...

Page 3091: ...ALLATION Camshaft 30 Install the rear chain cover Ref to ME H6DO 51 INSTALLATION Rear Chain Cov er 31 Install the crank sprocket Ref to ME H6DO 50 INSTALLATION Crank Sprocket 32 Install the cam sprock...

Page 3092: ...ap and bearing in order to prevent confusion 3 Remove the piston rings using piston ring ex pander 4 Remove the oil ring by hand NOTE Arrange the removed piston rings in good order to prevent confusio...

Page 3093: ...during installation CAUTION Each connecting rod has its own mating cap Make sure that they are assembled correctly by checking their matching number When tightening the connecting rod bolts apply oil...

Page 3094: ...lines in selecting a standard piston Standard diameter A 89 205 89 215 mm 3 5120 3 5124 in B 89 195 89 205 mm 3 5116 3 5120 in 2 How to measure the inner diameter of each cyl inder Measure the inner d...

Page 3095: ...any of the cylinders needs reboring all other cylinders must be bored at the same time and use oversize pistons Do not perform bor ing on one cylinder only Nor use an oversize piston for one cylinder...

Page 3096: ...ing on the piston be careful of the direction of each rail 2 Squarely place the piston ring and oil ring in cyl inder and measure the piston ring gap with a thick ness gauge 3 Measure the clearance be...

Page 3097: ...not within the standard replace the defective bearing with a new part of standard size or under size as necessary See the table below Connecting rod oil clearance Standard 0 016 0 043 mm 0 0006 0 001...

Page 3098: ...ck the crankshaft for bend and repair or re place if needed Repair or replace if bended NOTE If a suitable V block is not available install 1 and 5 crankshaft bearing on cylinder block position the cr...

Page 3099: ...diameter 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 Standard Journal O D 63 992 64 008 2 5194 2 5200 51 984 52 000 2 0466 2 0472 Bearing size Thickness at center 1 992 2 005 0 0784 0 0789 1 996 2 009 0 0786 0 0791 1 490 1 506 0 0...

Page 3100: ...to ME H6DO 33 REMOVAL Engine Assembly 2 Remove the engine mounting from engine as sembly B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque Engine mounting 35 N m 3 6 kgf m 25 8...

Page 3101: ...iston and cylinder C 2 Initial combustion does not occur Starter Defective starter C Engine control system Ref to EN H6DO diag 2 Basic Diagnostic Procedure A Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay A...

Page 3102: ...valve lift has trouble in a past B 4 Engine stalls after initial combustion Engine control system Ref to EN H6DO diag 2 Basic Diagnostic Procedure A Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct B Lo...

Page 3103: ...ark plug or defective gasket B Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective gasket B Improper valve sealing B Defective valve stem C Worn or broken valve spring B Worn or stuck piston rings cylinder and p...

Page 3104: ...ect valve clearance B Loosened spark plug or defective gasket B Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective gasket B Improper valve sealing B Defective valve stem C Worn or broken valve spring B Worn or...

Page 3105: ...n valve spring C Worn or stuck piston rings cylinder and piston C Incorrect valve timing A Improper engine oil low viscosity B Trouble of valve lifter C Trouble of valve lifter In case noise occurs wi...

Page 3106: ...system Over cooling C Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction C 8 Knocking Engine control system Ref to EN H6DO diag 2 Basic Diagnostic Procedure A Intake system Loosened oil filler ca...

Page 3107: ...sket C Improper valve sealing B Defective valve stem C Worn or broken valve spring C Worn or stuck piston rings cylinder and piston B Incorrect valve timing B Trouble of valve lifter C Trouble of valv...

Page 3108: ...ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH 1 Clean the crank pulley thread using com pressed air 2 Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and thread 3 Tighten the crank pulley bolts Tightening torque 17...

Page 3109: ...CHANICAL 25 Piston A SPECIFICATION Refer to Cylinder Block for removal and installa tion procedures of pistons Ref to ME H6DO 62 REMOVAL Cylinder Block Ref to ME H6DO 64 INSTALLATION Cylinder Block as...

Page 3110: ...verse order of removal C INSPECTION 1 Replace the V belt if cracks fraying or wear is found 2 Make sure that the V belt automatic belt tension indicator A is within the range D 1 Power steering oil pu...

Page 3111: ...3 Disconnect the fuel delivery hose and connect fuel pressure gauge 4 Install the fuse of fuel pump to main fuse box 5 Start the engine 6 Measure the fuel pressure while disconnecting pressure regula...

Page 3112: ...lation keep these bolts on container individually B INSTALLATION NOTE When replacing the rear chain cover it is required to select the size For details refer to LU section Ref to LU H6DO 9 INSPECTION...

Page 3113: ...TION Cam Sprocket 10 Install the timing chain Ref to ME H6DO 45 INSTALLATION Timing Chain Assembly 11 Install the front chain cover Ref to ME H6DO 42 INSTALLATION Front Chain Cover 12 Install the cran...

Page 3114: ...me out the plunger A 4 Remove the chain guide RH between cams 5 Remove the chain guide RH 6 Remove the chain tensioner lever RH 7 Remove the timing chain RH 8 Remove the chain tensioner LH NOTE Be car...

Page 3115: ...ensioner installation 1 Insert the screw spring pin and tension rod into tensioner body 2 While depressing the tensioner onto rubber mat twist it to shorten tension rod Then insert the thin pin into t...

Page 3116: ...lb 7 Install the timing chain LH 1 Align the timing mark B on the crank sprocket with mark A on the timing chain LH 2 Install the timing chain LH to the idler sprocket lower water pump exhaust cam sp...

Page 3117: ...6 kgf m 12 ft lb 6 Install the chain tensioner lever LH Tightening torque 16 N m 1 6 kgf m 12 ft lb 7 Install the chain tensioner LH Tightening torque 16 N m 1 6 kgf m 12 ft lb 8 Install the timing ch...

Page 3118: ...ing torque 6 4 N m 0 65 kgf m 4 7 ft lb NOTE Use a new installing bolt 6 Install the chain tensioner RH Tightening torque 16 N m 1 6 kgf m 12 ft lb 7 Adjust the clearance between chain guide RH and ch...

Page 3119: ...NICAL 26 Connecting Rod A SPECIFICATION Refer to Cylinder Block for removal and installa tion procedures of connecting rod Ref to ME H6DO 62 REMOVAL Cylinder Block Ref to ME H6DO 64 INSTALLATION Cylin...

Page 3120: ...183 Compression ratio 10 7 Compression pressure 350 rpm and fully open throttle kPa kgf cm2 psi 1 275 1 471 13 0 15 0 185 213 Number of piston rings Pressure ring 2 Oil ring 1 Intake valve timing Min...

Page 3121: ...ge thickness mm in Intake Standard 1 0 0 039 Exhaust Standard 1 2 0 047 Stem outer diameter mm in Intake 5 455 5 470 0 2148 0 2154 Exhaust 5 445 5 460 0 2144 0 2150 Stem oil clearance Intake Standard...

Page 3122: ...pin and crank journal Out of roundness mm in 0 005 0 0002 Cylindricality mm in 0 006 0 0002 Crank pin outer diameter mm in Standard 51 984 52 000 2 0466 2 0472 0 03 0 0012 US 51 954 51 970 2 0454 2 0...

Page 3123: ...g torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Collector cover bracket 7 A C compressor stay T1 6 4 0 65 4 7 3 Belt tension adjuster ASSY 8 Idler pulley T2 20 2 0 14 4 Power steering pump bracket 9 Idler pulley cover T3...

Page 3124: ...gf m ft lb 2 O ring 6 Front chain cover T1 Ref to ME H6DO 41 Crank Pulley 3 Crank pulley 7 Rear chain cover 4 Sealing washer 8 Water pump gasket T2 Ref to ME H6DO 42 Front Chain Cover T3 Ref to ME H6D...

Page 3125: ...sprocket RH 18 Chain guide LH between cams T3 Ref to ME H6DO 49 Cam Sprocket 7 Exhaust cam sprocket RH 19 Timing chain LH 8 Chain guide RH between cams 20 Intake cam sprocket LH T4 16 1 6 12 9 Timing...

Page 3126: ...ANICAL 4 CYLINDER HEAD AND CAMSHAFT ME 02564 1 2 3 4 9 10 22 23 24 26 27 28 25 32 8 18 16 13 12 6 5 14 15 19 20 21 7 11 31 34 35 30 29 33 T5 T1 T6 T4 T4 T3 T2 T2 T1 T6 T4 T4 T7 T2 T2 T5 T8 T4 T8 T8 T8...

Page 3127: ...ME H6DO 57 Cylinder Head 7 Oil flow control solenoid valve RH 22 Cylinder head gasket LH 23 Cylinder head LH T2 Ref to ME H6DO 53 Cam shaft 8 Intake camshaft cap Center RH 24 Intake camshaft LH 9 Int...

Page 3128: ...Intake valve 8 Retainer 14 Valve spring 3 Intake valve guide 9 Retainer key 15 Valve lifter Exhaust 4 Valve spring seat 10 Shim 16 Cylinder head plug 5 Intake valve stem seal 11 Valve lifter Intake 1...

Page 3129: ...YLINDER BLOCK 5 6 7 9 5 8 19 19 10 19 19 21 22 23 T1 T2 T2 T2 T1 T2 T2 T5 T2 T9 ME 02782 T4 T6 T10 5 1 3 4 5 2 19 19 20 19 19 T1 T1 T8 T3 T5 T8 T8 5 18 17 13 14 13 16 13 14 13 15 13 13 11 12 14 T6 T1...

Page 3130: ...e hole cover 16 Oil cooler T3 25 2 5 18 4 5 O ring 17 Connector T4 16 1 6 12 6 Oil pan upper 18 Oil filter T5 37 3 8 27 7 Oil pressure switch 19 Plug T6 44 4 5 33 8 Oil strainer 20 Crankshaft position...

Page 3131: ...kshaft sensor plate 11 Connecting rod bearing 18 Crankshaft bearing 7 4 Top ring 12 Connecting rod bolt 5 Second ring 13 Connecting rod cap Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 6 Oil ring 14 Crankshaft T...

Page 3132: ...ME H6DO 14 General Description MECHANICAL 8 ENGINE MOUNTING 1 Front cushion rubber Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb T1 35 3 6 25 8 T2 75 7 6 55 3 1 T2 T1 T1 T2 ME 00445 asieps_tobira book 14...

Page 3133: ...prior to assem bly Be careful not to let oil grease or coolant contact the timing belt clutch disc and flywheel All removed parts if to be reused should be reinstalled in the original positions and di...

Page 3134: ...er 499585500 VALVE OIL SEAL GUIDE Used for press fitting of intake and exhaust valve guide oil seals 18253AA000 PISTON PIN GUIDE Used for installing piston pin piston and con necting rod 18350AA000 CO...

Page 3135: ...removing and installing exhaust cam sprocket 499587200 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL INSTALLER Used for installing crankshaft oil seal Used with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL GUIDE 499597100 499597100 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL...

Page 3136: ...guides 499765700 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER Used for removing valve guides 499765900 VALVE GUIDE REAMER Used for reaming valve guides 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH Used for stopping rotation of crank pulley...

Page 3137: ...lter 18482AA010 CARTRIDGE Troubleshooting for electrical system 22771AA030 SUBARU SELECT MONITOR KIT Troubleshooting for electrical system 18233AA000 PISTON PIN SNAP RING PLIERS Used for removing and...

Page 3138: ...ylinder head 498277200 STOPPER SET Used for installing automatic transmission assembly to engine 42099AE000 CONNECTOR REMOVER Used for disconnecting quick connector of the engine compartment 499057000...

Page 3139: ...e crank sprocket A B INSTALLATION 1 Install the crank sprocket A 2 Install the cam sprocket Ref to ME H6DO 49 INSTALLATION Cam Sprocket 3 Install the timing chain assembly Ref to ME H6DO 45 INSTALLATI...

Page 3140: ...f cylinder head and cylinder block 2 Tighten the cylinder head bolts 1 Apply a coat of engine oil to washers and cylinder head bolt threads 2 Install the cylinder head to cylinder block and then tight...

Page 3141: ...linder head on ST ST 18250AA010 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE 2 Coat the stem of each valve with engine oil and insert the valve into valve guide NOTE When inserting the valve into valve guide use spe cial care...

Page 3142: ...are re placed Valve seat width W Intake Standard 1 0 mm 0 039 in Exhaust Standard 1 5 mm 0 059 in 3 VALVE GUIDE 1 Check the clearance between valve guide and stem The clearance can be checked by meas...

Page 3143: ...it clock wise After reaming clean the valve guide to re move chips ST 499765900 VALVE GUIDE REAMER NOTE Apply engine oil to the reamer when reaming If the inner surface of valve guide is damaged the...

Page 3144: ...ension indicated in the figure using ST2 ST1 18250AA010 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE ST2 499585500 VALVE OIL SEAL GUIDE NOTE Apply engine oil to oil seal before press fitting When press fitting the oil seal do...

Page 3145: ...t Engine Control System in Selection Menu 9 Select Current Data Display Save in Engine Control System Diagnosis 10 Select Data Display in Data Display Menu 11 Start the engine and read the engine idle...

Page 3146: ...ion switch to OFF 4 Insert the cartridge to the Subaru Select Monitor 5 Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to the data link connector 6 Turn the ignition switch to ON and Subaru Select Monitor switch t...

Page 3147: ...n 1 000 and 2 000 rpms Sound is reduced when fuel injector connector of noisy cyl inder is disconnected NOTE Worn crankshaft main bearing Worn bearing at crankshaft end of connecting rod Knocking soun...

Page 3148: ...EXHAUST EX H6DO Page 1 General Description 2 2 Front Exhaust Pipe 4 3 Rear Exhaust Pipe 7 4 Muffler 9 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 3149: ...INSTALLATION 1 Remove the used liquid gasket from mating sur face and degrease it 2 Apply liquid gasket to the mating surface of front chain cover Liquid gasket THREE BOND 1280B Part No K0877YA018 App...

Page 3150: ...Install the crank pulley Ref to ME H6DO 41 INSTALLATION Crank Pulley C INSPECTION Check the cover surface for scratch and damage Check for oil leakage on cover mating surface and installation part of...

Page 3151: ...e the rear chain cover Ref to ME H6DO 51 REMOVAL Rear Chain Cover 7 Disconnect the oil pipe 8 Remove the rocker cover LH 9 Remove the plugs LH 10 Loosen the camshaft cap bolts equally a little at a ti...

Page 3152: ...ace and install the cap to camshaft 3 Tighten the rocker cover bolts in the numer ical order as shown in the figure Tightening torque 1 12 16 N m 1 6 kgf m 12 ft lb 13 16 9 75 N m 1 0 kgf m 7 2 ft lb...

Page 3153: ...11 Install the crank pulley Ref to ME H6DO 41 INSTALLATION Crank Pulley C INSPECTION 1 Measure the bend of camshaft Repair or re place if bended 2 Check the journal for damage and wear Re place if fa...

Page 3154: ...ce it Cam height H Standard Intake HIGH 42 09 42 19 mm 1 6571 1 6610 in LOW1 38 14 38 24 mm 1 5016 1 5055 in LOW2 34 94 35 04 mm 1 3756 1 3795 in Exhaust 41 65 41 75 mm 1 6398 1 6437 in Cam base circl...

Page 3155: ...4 kgf cm2 20 psi or more at 600 rpm 500 kPa 5 1 kgf cm2 73 psi or more at 5 000 rpm CAUTION If the oil pressure is out of specification check oil pump oil filter and lubrication line Ref to LU H6DO 18...

Page 3156: ...O 8 REMOVAL Air In take Duct Ref to IN H6DO 5 REMOVAL Air Cleaner Case 2 Remove the fuel tank protector RH 3 Disconnect the connector of oil pressure switch 4 Remove the ignition coil Ref to IG H6DO 7...

Page 3157: ...asure the valve clearances again 13 After inspection install the related parts in the reverse order of removal B ADJUSTMENT 1 INTAKE SIDE CAUTION Adjustment of valve clearance should be per formed whi...

Page 3158: ...3218AL150 2 25 0 0886 13218AL160 2 26 0 0890 13218AL170 2 27 0 0894 13218AL180 2 28 0 0898 13218AL190 2 29 0 0902 13218AL200 2 30 0 0906 13218AL210 2 31 0 0909 13218AL220 2 32 0 0913 13218AL230 2 33 0...

Page 3159: ...ckness mm in 13228AD180 4 32 0 1701 13228AD190 4 34 0 1709 13228AD200 4 36 0 1717 13228AD210 4 38 0 1724 13228AD220 4 40 0 1732 13228AD230 4 42 0 1740 13228AD240 4 44 0 1748 13228AD250 4 46 0 1756 132...

Page 3160: ...070 5 11 0 2012 13228AD080 5 12 0 2016 13228AD090 5 13 0 2020 13228AD100 5 14 0 2024 13228AD110 5 15 0 2028 13228AD120 5 16 0 2032 13228AD130 5 17 0 2035 13228AD140 5 18 0 2039 13228AD150 5 19 0 2043...

Page 3161: ...o IN H6DO 7 REMOVAL Air In take Chamber 9 Remove the radiator from vehicle Ref to CO H6DO 14 REMOVAL Radiator 10 Remove the V belts Ref to ME H6DO 32 REMOVAL V belt 11 Disconnect the A C pressure hose...

Page 3162: ...round cable 19 Remove the bolts and nuts which hold lower side of transmission to engine 20 Remove the nuts which install front cushion rubber onto front crossmember 21 Separate the torque converter c...

Page 3163: ...importance for facilitating reinstal lation CAUTION Before removing the engine away from trans mission check to be sure no work has been overlooked 26 Separation of engine and transmission 1 Remove th...

Page 3164: ...careful not to drop the ST into the converter case when removing the ST ST 498277200 STOPPER SET 8 Install the starter Ref to SC H4SO 6 IN STALLATION Starter 9 Install the torque converter clutch to...

Page 3165: ...ing torque 14 N m 1 4 kgf m 10 1 ft lb 2 Engine harness connectors 3 Generator connector and terminal 4 A C compressor connector 5 Power steering switch connector 20 Install the A C pressure hoses Ref...

Page 3166: ...30 Take off the vehicle from lift C INSPECTION 1 Check the pipes and hoses are installed firmly 2 Check the engine coolant and ATF are at speci fied levels 3 Start the engine and check for leaks of fu...

Page 3167: ...water pipe and hose 5 Disconnect the engine harness 6 Remove the spark plug Ref to IG H6DO 4 REMOVAL Spark Plug 7 Remove the camshaft position sensor Ref to FU H6DO 20 REMOVAL Camshaft Position Sensor...

Page 3168: ...o lock the camshaft use the ST Tightening torque 29 5 N m 3 0 kgf m 21 8 ft lb 2 Further tighten the bolt Tightening angle Intake 45 5 Exhaust 25 5 ST 499977500 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH ST 18231AA020 CAM S...

Page 3169: ...ral Description SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS 1 General Description A SPECIFICATION Specifications for the 3 0 L DOHC Non turbo model are the same as the SOHC model Ref to SP H4SO 2 General Description asieps...

Page 3170: ...IGNITION IG H6DO Page 1 General Description 2 2 Spark Plug 4 3 Ignition Coil 7 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 3171: ...escription STARTING CHARGING SYSTEMS 1 General Description A SPECIFICATION Specifications for the 3 0 L DOHC non turbo model are included in the SC H4SO section Ref to SC H4SO 2 General Description as...

Page 3172: ...ector 22 8 General Scan Tool 23 9 Subaru Select Monitor 27 10 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 35 11 Inspection Mode 36 12 Drive Cycle 41 13 Clear Memory Mode 45 14 Compulsory Valve Operation Check Mo...

Page 3173: ...ase and extension case section Ref to 4AT 69 REMOVAL Exten sion Case 10 Remove the reduction drive gear Ref to 4AT 78 REMOVAL Reduction Drive Gear 11 Remove the reduction driven gear Ref to 4AT 76 REM...

Page 3174: ...ef to 4AT 67 INSTALLATION Oil Charge Pipe 9 Insert the input shaft while rotating it lightly by hand and then check the amount of protrusion Normal protrusion A 50 55 mm 1 97 2 17 in 10 Install the to...

Page 3175: ...pivot holes of the cov er and then install the oil pump cover while being careful not to apply excessive force to the pivots Tightening torque 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 18 ft lb 3 After assembling turn the oi...

Page 3176: ...3 Install the oil seal being careful not to damage oil seal lip and secure it using three bolts Tightening torque 7 N m 0 7 kgf m 5 1 ft lb E INSPECTION 1 Check the seal ring and oil seal for breaks a...

Page 3177: ...Housing F ADJUSTMENT 1 Using the ST measure the length L from the mating surface of the transmission to the recessed portion of the high clutch drum ST 398643600 GAUGE 2 Using the ST measure the leng...

Page 3178: ...p housing assembly Be careful to avoid hitting the drive pinion against the inside of case 6 Install both parts with dowel pins aligned Make sure there is no clearance at the mating surface C Clearanc...

Page 3179: ...ch 2 Install the transfer clutch assembly to the case 3 Tighten the bolts to secure the case Tightening torque 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 18 ft lb 4 Install the transmission assembly to the vehicle Ref to 4AT 3...

Page 3180: ...aft to remove the transfer clutch piston D ASSEMBLY 1 Install the transfer clutch piston 2 Install the return spring to transfer clutch piston 3 Apply ATF to the lip of transfer clutch piston seal the...

Page 3181: ...LER 7 Install the driven plate drive plate pressure plate and snap ring 8 Apply compressed air to see if the assembled parts move smoothly 9 Check clearance between the snap ring and pressure gauge Re...

Page 3182: ...service limits re place the plate set drive plate and driven plate and select and adjust a pressure plate to be within the initial standard value Initial standard 0 7 1 1 mm 0 028 0 043 in Limit thick...

Page 3183: ...mes 3 95 Select a bearing thickness of 3 8 mm 0 150 in NOTE Calculation formula for T is applied when measur ing using ST 398643600 GAUGE 499577000 GAUGE When not using the ST T A 0 45 mm B H T A 0 01...

Page 3184: ...in plug NOTE Use a new gasket Tightening torque 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 18 ft lb 7 Remove the oil pan CAUTION Be sure to prevent the entering of dust and oth er foreign matters into oil pan 8 Remove the magn...

Page 3185: ...iquid gasket to the oil pan Liquid gasket THREE BOND 1217B Part No K0877YA020 7 Fill the 3 holes aside from the bolt holes in the transmission case with liquid gasket Liquid gasket THREE BOND 1217B Pa...

Page 3186: ...ontrol Valve 11 Check the ATF level Ref to 4AT 26 Automatic Transmission Fluid 12 Execute the learning control promotion Ref to 4AT diag 16 FACILITATION OF LEARNING CONTROL OPERATION Subaru Select Mon...

Page 3187: ...lange side B INSTALLATION 1 Apply ATF on a new O ring and install together with the oil charge pipe Tightening torque 41 N m 4 2 kgf m 30 4 ft lb 2 Install the air intake chamber Ref to IN H4SO 7 INST...

Page 3188: ...idling for a long time the differential gear oil is hot Be careful not to burn yourself Be careful not to spill the differential gear oil on exhaust pipe to prevent it from emitting smoke or causing f...

Page 3189: ...dure of the torque converter tur bine speed sensor refer to Front Vehicle Speed Sensor Ref to 4AT 50 REMOVAL Front Vehi cle Speed Sensor B INSTALLATION For installation procedure of the torque convert...

Page 3190: ...r hose B INSTALLATION 1 Install the air breather hose 2 Install the air intake chamber Ref to IN H4SO 7 INSTALLATION Air Intake Chamber C INSPECTION Make sure the hose is not cracked or clogged A Air...

Page 3191: ...REMOVAL Muf fler 6 Remove the heat shield cover 7 Remove the propeller shaft Ref to DS 10 RE MOVAL Propeller Shaft 8 Using the ST remove the oil seal ST 398527700 PULLER ASSY 9 Using the ST install th...

Page 3192: ...e spare fuse on the FWD mode switch If no oil pressure is produced or if it does not change in AWD mode the control valve body may be malfunctioning If oil pressure is produced in FWD mode there is th...

Page 3193: ...st conditions 2 Measure the line pressure when the select lever is in R or 2nd of manual mode with en gine under stall conditions 3 Measure the line pressure within 5 seconds after shifting the select...

Page 3194: ...he select lever to D range and wait for more than 3 seconds 14 Shift the select lever to N range and wait for more than 3 seconds 15 Slowly depress the accelerator pedal to full open 16 Slowly release...

Page 3195: ...1 The check is to be performed on a flat and straight road or on a free roller NOTE Slip lock up will not operate when the vehicle is lifted up off of its wheels since there is no surface resistance W...

Page 3196: ...694 Rev 2 272 Number of front sun gear teeth 33 Number of front pinion teeth 21 Number of front internal gear teeth 75 Number of rear sun gear teeth 42 Number of rear pinion teeth 17 Number of rear in...

Page 3197: ...mission fluid see above Cooling system Liquid cooler Inhibitor switch 12 poles Transmission harness 20 poles Transfer type Multi plate transfer MPT Number of transfer clutch drives driven plates 5 Con...

Page 3198: ...Input shaft 3 Differential oil level gauge 10 O ring Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 4 Stay 11 Torque converter ASSY T1 18 1 8 13 3 5 Seal pipe 12 Drain plug T2 41 4 2 30 4 6 Oil pump shaft 13 Gaske...

Page 3199: ...rque N m kgf m ft lb 4 Thrust needle bearing 14 Stud bolt T1 7 0 7 5 1 5 Drive pinion shaft 15 O ring T2 13 1 3 9 4 6 Roller bearing 16 O ring T3 18 1 8 13 3 7 Shim 17 Oil seal retainer T4 25 2 5 18 8...

Page 3200: ...TRANSMISSION 3 TRANSMISSION CASE AND CONTROL DEVICE AT 03373 T8 T4 T3 T10 T8 T1 T3 T7 T7 T8 T8 T9 T2 T5 T6 1 2 3 34 39 31 33 26 25 27 28 30 29 36 35 32 38 37 4 9 7 6 5 8 16 13 14 10 11 12 15 17 18 20...

Page 3201: ...pawl 24 Manual plate Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 8 Parking support 25 Spring pin T1 3 4 0 35 2 5 9 Bushing 26 Detention spring T2 5 0 5 3 6 10 Gasket 27 Ball T3 6 0 6 4 11 Inlet pipe 28 Spring T...

Page 3202: ...ring Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Transmission harness 7 Front vehicle speed sensor T1 7 0 7 5 1 3 O ring 8 O ring T2 8 0 8 5 8 4 O ring 9 Rear vehicle speed sensor 5 Torque converter turbine s...

Page 3203: ...en plate reverse clutch 3 D ring 10 Snap ring 17 Drive plate reverse clutch 4 Reverse clutch piston 11 Driven plate high clutch 18 Retaining plate reverse clutch 5 D ring 12 Drive plate high clutch 19...

Page 3204: ...21 2 4 brake piston 4 Snap ring 13 Washer 22 D ring 5 Front planetary carrier 14 Snap ring 23 D ring 6 Thrust needle bearing 15 Retaining plate 24 2 4 brake piston retainer 7 Rear sun gear 16 Drive p...

Page 3205: ...ring 5 Dish plate 16 Snap ring 27 Drive plate 6 Snap ring 17 Thrust needle bearing 28 Driven plate 7 Cover 18 Seal ring 29 Dish plate 8 Spring retainer 19 Needle bearing 30 Low reverse brake piston 9...

Page 3206: ...6 Snap ring 11 Lock nut 2 Ball bearing 7 Ball bearing 3 Reduction drive gear 8 Snap ring Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 4 Reduction drive shaft 9 Reduction driven gear T 100 10 2 73 8 5 Drive pinio...

Page 3207: ...on shaft 8 O ring 3 Differential case RH 9 Differential side retainer Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 4 Straight pin 10 Lock plate T1 25 2 5 18 5 Differential case LH 11 Washer T2 62 6 3 45 6 6 Tape...

Page 3208: ...drive shaft 21 Test plug 4 Driven plate Thick 13 Ball bearing 22 O ring 5 Drive plate 14 Seal ring 6 Driven plate Thin 15 Gasket Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 7 Retaining plate 16 Transfer clutch...

Page 3209: ...11 TRANSMISSION MOUNTING 1 Pitching stopper 3 Crossmember Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Rear cushion rubber 4 Stopper T1 35 3 6 26 T2 40 4 1 30 T3 50 5 1 37 T4 58 5 9 43 T5 75 7 6 55 AT 02983 2...

Page 3210: ...ary of receiving burns from heated parts Use SUBARU genuine gear oil grease or the equivalent Do not mix fluid grease etc of different grades or manufacturers Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts to the...

Page 3211: ...GE ASSY Used for measuring oil pressure 498897200 ADAPTER Used at the oil pump housing when measuring reverse clutch pressure and line pressure 498897700 ADAPTER SET Used for measuring transfer clutch...

Page 3212: ...d for removing the front differential side retainer bearing outer race Used for removing the front differential side retainer oil seal 498057300 INSTALLER Used for installing the extension oil seal 41...

Page 3213: ...with INSTALLER 499247400 18630AA010 WRENCH ASSY Used for removing and installing the differen tial side retainer WRENCH ASSY 499787000 can also be used 398437700 DRIFT Used for installing the converte...

Page 3214: ...ar 399893600 PLIERS Used for removing and installing the clutch spring 498247001 MAGNET BASE Used for measuring the gear backlash Used with DIAL GAUGE 498247100 498247100 DIAL GAUGE Used for measuring...

Page 3215: ...sfer clutch piston 499267300 STOPPER PIN Used for installing the inhibitor switch 499787700 WRENCH Used for removing and installing the drive pinion lock nut 499787500 ADAPTER Used for removing and in...

Page 3216: ...g when installing snap ring 499577000 GAUGE Used for measuring the mating surface of the transmission to the end face of the reduction gear 499737000 PULLER Used for removing the reduction driven gear...

Page 3217: ...nion lock nut 498677100 COMPRESSOR Used for installing the 2 4 brake snap ring 498437000 HIGH CLUTCH PISTON GUIDE Used for installing the high clutch piston 498437100 LOW CLUTCH PISTON GUIDE Used for...

Page 3218: ...8675AA000 DIFFERENTIAL OIL SEAL INSTALLER Used for installing the differential side retainer oil seal 398497701 SEAT Used for installing the needle bearing 899524100 PULLER SET Use only the bolt Used...

Page 3219: ...Used for measuring clearance of the clutch brake and oil pump Micrometer Used for measuring thickness of the drive pinion Spring balance Used for measuring the starting torque of the drive pinion Cir...

Page 3220: ...e If there is continuity in only one direction or in other points adjust the inhibitor switch Ref to 4AT 46 ADJUSTMENT Inhibitor Switch 4 Repeat the above checks If there are abnormal ities adjust the...

Page 3221: ...center exhaust pipes Ref to EX H4SO 4 REMOVAL Front Exhaust Pipe 8 Remove the snap pin and washer from the range select lever 9 Remove the plate assembly from the transmis sion case 10 Remove the thr...

Page 3222: ...the three inhibitor switch securing bolts using the ST ST 499267300 STOPPER PIN Tightening torque 3 5 N m 0 36 kgf m 2 6 ft lb 5 Install the select cable to the range select lever 6 Install the plate...

Page 3223: ...pe 9 Lower the vehicle 10 Install the inhibitor switch connector to the stay 11 Connect the inhibitor switch connector 12 Install the air intake chamber Ref to IN H4SO 7 INSTALLATION Air Intake Chambe...

Page 3224: ...ck does not touch the oil pan 6 Remove the transmission rear crossmember 7 Remove the rear cushion rubber B INSTALLATION 1 PITCHING STOPPER 1 Install the pitching stopper Tightening torque T1 50 N m 5...

Page 3225: ...ed 1 PITCHING STOPPER Make sure that the pitching stopper is not bent or damaged Check that there are no cracks harden ing or damage on rubber parts 2 TRANSMISSION REAR CROSSMEMBER AND REAR CUSHION RU...

Page 3226: ...king pawl return spring and shaft B INSTALLATION 1 Install the parking pawl return spring and shaft 2 Install the reduction drive gear Ref to 4AT 78 INSTALLATION Reduction Drive Gear 3 Install the rea...

Page 3227: ...e three measurements and take the average value 1 Fully apply the parking brake 2 Start the engine Check the idle speed A C OFF 3 Shift the select lever from N to D range Using a stop watch measure th...

Page 3228: ...he converter case alignment bolt and then separate the transmission case and converter case by lightly tapping with a plastic hammer NOTE Be careful not to damage the oil seal and bush ing in the conv...

Page 3229: ...Air Breather Hose 11 Install the oil cooler pipe Ref to 4AT 64 IN STALLATION ATF Cooler Pipe and Hose 12 Install the oil charge pipe with O ring Ref to 4AT 67 INSTALLATION Oil Charge Pipe 13 Insert t...

Page 3230: ...then lift the vehicle 2 Disconnect the connector from the rear vehicle speed sensor 3 Remove the rear vehicle speed sensor B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Replace O ring wi...

Page 3231: ...LATION 1 Set the range select lever to the P range 2 Using a plastic hammer install the reduction driven gear assembly and the new washer and tighten the new drive pinion lock nut Tightening torque 10...

Page 3232: ...nap ring from reduction driven gear D ASSEMBLY 1 Install the snap ring to reduction driven gear 2 Install the new ball bearing to reduction driven gear using press 3 Install the snap ring to reduction...

Page 3233: ...rear exhaust pipes and muffler Ref to EX H4SO 4 REMOV AL Front Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H4SO 8 REMOVAL Rear Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H4SO 10 REMOVAL Muffler 12 Remove the shield cover 13 Remove the prope...

Page 3234: ...arness assembly through the hole in transmission case 2 Connect the harness connector and transmis sion ground Tightening torque 8 N m 0 8 kgf m 5 8 ft lb 3 Apply proper amount of liquid gasket to the...

Page 3235: ...ft lb 10 Install the propeller shaft Ref to DS 11 IN STALLATION Propeller Shaft 11 Install the shield cover 12 Install the front center and rear exhaust pipes and the muffler Ref to EX H4SO 5 INSTALLA...

Page 3236: ...y and make sure the clip is secured on the groove 3 Apply ATF to the O ring and insert on the input shaft while rotating the shaft slowly by hand Normal protrusion A 50 55 mm 1 97 2 17 in 4 While hold...

Page 3237: ...new gasket Tightening torque Aluminum gasket 44 N m 4 5 kgf m 32 5 ft lb Copper gasket 70 N m 7 1 kgf m 51 6 ft lb 5 Separate the front drive shaft from the transmis sion Ref to DS 22 REMOVAL Front Dr...

Page 3238: ...0 Remove the differential side retainers using ST NOTE Hold the differential case assembly by hand to avoid damaging the retainer mounting hole of the converter case ST 499787000 WRENCH ASSY 11 Remove...

Page 3239: ...nverter assembly Ref to 4AT 68 INSTALLATION Torque Converter As sembly 13 Install the transmission assembly to the vehi cle Ref to 4AT 38 INSTALLATION Automatic Transmission Assembly C DISASSEMBLY 1 D...

Page 3240: ...4 Attach two claws to the outer race and set the ST to side retainer ST 398527700 PULLER ASSY 5 Restore the removed claws to original position and install the pin and split pin 6 Hold the shaft of ST...

Page 3241: ...ntial case Part No 38415AA070 AXLE SHAFT 2 Measure the gear backlash using ST1 and ST2 and then insert the ST2 though the access window of case ST1 498247001 MAGNET BASE ST2 498247100 DIAL GAUGE NOTE...

Page 3242: ...ST 499787000 WRENCH ASSY can also be used 2 Remove the oil pump housing 3 Remove the liquid gasket from the mating sur face completely 4 Install the oil pump housing assembly to the con verter case a...

Page 3243: ...rox 0 05 mm 0 0020 in 8 Install the axle shaft to both sides of the front dif ferential section Part No 38415AA000 Axle shaft 9 Turn the drive pinion several times using ST1 and check to see if the ba...

Page 3244: ...n Driven Gear 13 Remove the drive pinion shaft mounting bolt and remove the drive shaft assembly from oil pump housing B INSTALLATION 1 Assemble the drive pinion assembly to the oil pump housing NOTE...

Page 3245: ...using a press 4 Separate the front roller bearing from shaft using a press and ST ST 498517000 REPLACER D ASSEMBLY 1 Measure the dimension A of drive pinion shaft ST 398643600 GAUGE 2 Using a press pr...

Page 3246: ...he drive pin ion shim t 6 5 0 0625 B A 10 Select three or less shims from following table E INSPECTION Make sure that all component parts are free of scratches holes and other faults Adjust the tooth...

Page 3247: ...e teeth contact pattern If the teeth contact is inappropriate adjust the backlash or thickness of the shim Ref to 4AT 99 ADJUSTMENT Front Differential Assembly Correct tooth contact Check item Tooth c...

Page 3248: ...er according to the proce dures for moving the drive pinion away from the driven gear Toe contact inside end contact Check item Teeth contact area is too small Contact pattern Corrective action Reduce...

Page 3249: ...usting washer according to the proce dures for moving the drive pinion closer to the driv en gear 6 If tooth contact is correct mark the retainer posi tion and loosen it After fitting a new O ring and...

Page 3250: ...outlet pipes Ref to 4AT 63 REMOVAL ATF Cooler Pipe and Hose 9 Separate the converter case from the transmis sion case Ref to 4AT 81 REMOVAL Converter Case 10 Remove the oil pump housing Ref to 4AT 83...

Page 3251: ...move the 2 4 brake seal 19 Remove the snap ring 20 Take out the 2 4 brake return spring 21 Remove the 2 4 brake piston and piston retain er while taking care not to damage them 22 Pull out the leaf sp...

Page 3252: ...urn the transmission case upside down and then take out the socket bolts while holding the one way clutch inner race by hand 26 Remove the spring retainer 27 Take out the return spring 28 Apply compre...

Page 3253: ...and retaining plate neatly in this order on surface table 9 Set the micro gauge to retaining plate and read its scale NOTE The value which is read in the gauge at this time is zero point 10 Scale and...

Page 3254: ...en measure and record the clearance B NOTE Do not push in the shim down with force to a point where the waves on the drive plate will be crushed 17 Piston stroke calculation Calculate with A and B dim...

Page 3255: ...e rotating the low clutch and planetary gear assembly slowly paying special at tention not to damage the seal ring 23 Place the dish plate driven plate drive plate and retaining plate neatly in this o...

Page 3256: ...ions or more spaced by equal distances and take the average value NOTE If measuring in three locations measure every 120 If measuring in four locations measure every 90 29 Install the pressure plate d...

Page 3257: ...lled 35 Install the thrust needle bearing in the correct direction 36 Install the front sun gear and the thrust needle bearing 37 Install the high clutch hub Attach the thrust needle bearing to hub us...

Page 3258: ...r pipe Ref to 4AT 64 IN STALLATION ATF Cooler Pipe and Hose 47 Install the oil charge pipe together with an O ring Ref to 4AT 67 INSTALLATION Oil Charge Pipe 48 Insert the input shaft while rotating i...

Page 3259: ...OR ST2 498627100 SEAT 4 Take out the clutch cover spring retainer high clutch piston and reverse clutch piston 5 Remove the seal ring and lip seal from the high clutch piston and reverse clutch piston...

Page 3260: ...the snap ring from the low clutch drum using ST1 and ST2 ST1 498627100 SEAT ST2 398673600 COMPRESSOR 8 Remove the one way clutch Ref to 4AT 101 REMOVAL AT Main Case A Front planetary carrier B Low cl...

Page 3261: ...after taking out the snap ring 3 2 4 BRAKE Separate the 2 4 brake piston and piston retainer 4 ONE WAY CLUTCH INNER RACE 1 Remove the seal ring 2 Remove the needle bearing using ST ST 398527700 PULLER...

Page 3262: ...clutch piston to the reverse clutch piston 3 Install the reverse clutch piston to the high clutch drum Align the groove on reverse clutch piston with the groove on high clutch drum during installa ti...

Page 3263: ...g plate NOTE Use a stiff board which does not bend against load as a flat board to be put on retaining plate Use a flat board weighing less than 250 N 25 5 kgf 56 2 lb 11 Put the flat board on retaini...

Page 3264: ...ng plate and snap ring Initial standard 2 0 2 3 mm 0 079 0 091 in Limit thickness 2 6 mm 0 102 in 19 Place the dish plate driven plate drive plate and retaining plate neatly in this order on surface t...

Page 3265: ...Measure and record the clearance B between the retaining plate and snap ring Reverse clutch At this time do not press down the retaining plate 28 Piston stroke calculation Calculate with A and B dimen...

Page 3266: ...seal ST1 498627100 SEAT ST2 398673600 COMPRESSOR ST3 498437100 LOW CLUTCH PISTON GUIDE 6 Install the dish plate driven plate drive plate and retaining plate and then secure them with a snap ring 7 Che...

Page 3267: ...ear 10 Install the rear internal gear 11 Install the thrust needle bearing in the correct direction 12 Install the washer by aligning the protrusion of the washer with the hole of the rear planetary c...

Page 3268: ...tary carrier to the low clutch drum 18 Install the snap ring to the low clutch drum A Rear planetary carrier B Low clutch drum A Rear sun gear side B Rear planetary carrier side A Rear sun gear B Rear...

Page 3269: ...on re tainer 4 ONE WAY CLUTCH INNER RACE 1 Install the needle bearing to inner race using ST and a press ST 398497701 SEAT 2 Apply vaseline to the groove of the inner race and seal ring 3 Install two...

Page 3270: ...ge and spring retainer deformation Lip seal and D ring damage Piston check ball operation Measure the total end play and adjust it to be within specifications Ref to 4AT 87 ADJUST MENT Oil Pump Housin...

Page 3271: ...er tightening torque using fol lowing formula T2 L2 L1 L2 T1 T1 14 N m 1 4 kgf m 10 1 ft lb Required torque setting T2 Tightening torque L1 ST length 78 mm 3 07 in L2 Torque wrench length Example NOTE...

Page 3272: ...from TCM 4 Remove the TCM B INSTALLATION 1 Install the TCM Tightening torque 7 5 N m 0 76 kgf m 5 5 ft lb 2 Connect the connector to TCM 3 Install in the reverse order of removal 4 Execute the learnin...

Page 3273: ...he bottom of bearing shoulder com pletely 2 Install the reduction driven gear Ref to 4AT 76 INSTALLATION Reduction Driven Gear 3 Join the transmission case and the extension case and then install the...

Page 3274: ...r surface and shaft grooves 4 Apply ATF to new seal rings and install them E INSPECTION Rotate the bearing by hand and check that it ro tates smoothly Check parts for holes damage or adhesion of dust...

Page 3275: ...from the stay 7 Wrap vinyl tape around the nipple attached to the air breather hose 8 Remove the pitching stopper bracket 9 Remove the inhibitor switch 10 Remove the control valve body assembly Ref t...

Page 3276: ...ibitor switch and transmission con nector to the stay 10 Install the air breather hose Ref to 4AT 66 INSTALLATION Air Breather Hose 11 Insert the input shaft while rotating it lightly by hand and then...

Page 3277: ...4AT 124 Transmission Control Device AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION asieps_tobira book 124...

Page 3278: ...Select Monitor 14 7 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 17 8 Inspection Mode 18 9 Clear Memory Mode 19 10 SPORT Indicator Light Display 20 11 Diagnostic Procedure for Subaru Select Monitor Communication...

Page 3279: ...parate the torque converter assembly from the drive plate 1 Remove the V belt covers 2 Remove the service hole plug 3 Remove the bolts which hold the torque converter assembly to the drive plate 4 Pla...

Page 3280: ...H4SO 4 REMOVAL Front Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H4SO 8 REMOVAL Rear Ex haust Pipe Ref to EX H4SO 10 REMOVAL Muffler 22 Remove the heat shield cover 23 Remove the ATF drain plug to drain ATF 24 Disconnect...

Page 3281: ...he boot 30 Remove the bolts which hold the clutch hous ing cover 31 Remove the bolts which hold the lower side of transmission to the engine 32 Place the transmission jack under the transmis sion NOTE...

Page 3282: ...transmission jack gradual ly turn the screw of engine support and then tilt the engine forward 5 Install the transmission rear crossmember Tightening torque T1 35 N m 3 6 kgf m 26 ft lb T2 75 N m 7 6...

Page 3283: ...Install the V belt cover 12 Remove the ST 13 Install the engine harness bracket Tightening torque T1 16 N m 1 6 kgf m 11 6 ft lb T2 36 N m 3 6 kgf m 26 0 ft lb 14 Install the harness connector to engi...

Page 3284: ...ng on front crossmember side while aligning it with the paint mark on the stabiliz er Make sure the bushing and stabilizer are marked with the same identification colors paint mark when installing 27...

Page 3285: ...TALLATION Air Intake Chamber 40 Install the air intake duct Ref to IN H4SO 8 INSTALLATION Air Intake Duct 41 From the gauge hole add ATF until the fluid level is between the upper and lower level on t...

Page 3286: ...5 to 10 km 3 to 6 miles Otherwise idle the en gine to raise ATF temperature to 70 80 C 158 176 F on Subaru Select Monitor Ref to 4AT diag 15 READ CURRENT DATA OPERA TION Subaru Select Monitor 7 Check...

Page 3287: ...ssible cause Corrective action Large amount of metallic pieces are found Excessive wear of the internal of the transmission body Replace ATF and check if AT operates correctly Thick and varnish form f...

Page 3288: ...ging it and while turning with pliers pull straight out by hand 7 Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses from the pipes NOTE Do not use a screwdriver or other pointed tools If it is hard to remove the hose w...

Page 3289: ...ot folded over exces sively bent or twisted Insert the hose to the specified position 4 Connect the ATF cooler hose to the pipe on the radiator side NOTE Install so that the hose is not folded over ex...

Page 3290: ...s mission radiator pipes and hoses 2 Check the clamp for deformation 3 Lightly bend the hose and check for cracks in the surface or other damages 4 Pinch the hose with your fingers and check for poor...

Page 3291: ...C 158 to 176 F by idling the engine for approximate ly 30 minutes with select lever set to N or P 7 Place the wheel chocks at the front and rear of all wheels and apply the parking brake 8 Move the m...

Page 3292: ...ed lower than 1 200 rpm If the stall speed is higher than the specified range attempt to finish the stall test in as short a time as possible in order to prevent the automatic transmission from sustai...

Page 3293: ...the remaining liquid gasket on the transmission case and oil pan 11 Remove the control valve strainer tightening bolt and remove control valve strainer from the control valve body B INSTALLATION 1 Che...

Page 3294: ...equivalent 6 Install the oil pan by equally tightening the bolts Tightening torque 5 N m 0 5 kgf m 3 7 ft lb 7 Fill ATF from the oil charge pipe Recommended fluid Ref to 4AT 3 HYDRAULIC CONTROL AND LU...

Page 3295: ...he end sur face of the reduction drive gear NOTE Install the thrust needle bearing in the correct direc tion 2 Install a new gasket 3 Install the extension case to transmission case 4 Tighten bolts to...

Page 3296: ...er clutch pipe to the extension case while being careful not to deform the pipe 4 Install the transfer clutch assembly to the case NOTE Be careful not to damage the seal ring Press fit the clutch asse...

Page 3297: ...ging it and while turning with pliers pull straight out by hand 7 Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses from the pipes NOTE Do not use a screwdriver or other pointed tools If it is hard to remove the hose w...

Page 3298: ...e transmission side NOTE Install so that the hose is not folded over exces sively bent or twisted Insert the hose to the specified position 4 Connect the ATF cooler hose to the pipe on the radiator si...

Page 3299: ...ound in the inspection below 1 Check for ATF leaks in joints between the trans mission radiator pipes and hoses 2 Check the clamp for deformation 3 Lightly bend the hose and check for cracks in the su...

Page 3300: ...Non turbo Number of front internal gear teeth 106 Number of front carrier teeth 28 Number of front sun gear teeth 50 Number of mid internal gear teeth 78 Number of mid carrier teeth 18 Number of mid...

Page 3301: ...2 US qt Imp qt 9 6 10 0 10 1 10 6 8 4 8 8 Lubrication system Forced feed lubrication with oil pump Cooling system Liquid cooler incorporated in radia tor Transmission harness 20 8 poles Model 2 5 L 3...

Page 3302: ...fferential oil drain plug 20 Spring 34 Turbine speed sensor 1 7 Gasket 21 Union screw 8 Oil seal 22 ATF outlet pipe Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 9 Lock plate 23 ATF inlet pipe T1 5 0 5 3 7 10 Sid...

Page 3303: ...e 3 Oil pump housing 11 D ring Inner 18 Drive plate 4 Oil pump rotor 12 D ring Outer 19 Retainer plate 5 O ring 13 Front brake piston 20 Snap ring 6 Air breather hose 14 Return spring 21 Stator shaft...

Page 3304: ...un gear ASSY 9 Input clutch ASSY 16 Thrust bearing 3 Snap ring 10 Rear internal gear ASSY 17 Middle rear sun gear ASSY 4 Front carrier ASSY 11 Thrust bearing 18 Washer 5 Race bearing 12 Middle carrier...

Page 3305: ...5AT 7 General Description AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 4 DIRECT CLUTCH AND HIGH LOW REVERSE CLUTCH 1 Thrust bearing 2 High low reverse clutch ASSY 3 Direct clutch ASSY AT 02018 3 2 1 asieps_tobira book 7...

Page 3306: ...BRAKE 1 Snap ring 6 Dish plate 10 Reverse brake piston 2 Retainer plate 7 Snap ring 11 D ring Outer 3 Leaf spring 8 Retainer 12 D ring Inner 4 Drive plate 9 Leaf spring 13 AT main case 5 Driven plate...

Page 3307: ...5AT 9 General Description AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 6 SHORT AT ASSEMBLY 1 Short AT ASSY non disassembled 3 Seal ring 4 Thrust bearing 2 Thrust bearing 1 4 3 2 AT 04324 asieps_tobira book 9...

Page 3308: ...ISSION 7 CONTROL VALVE TRANSMISSION HARNESS 1 Transmission harness ASSY 4 Clip Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Front vehicle speed sensor 5 Control valve ASSY T1 7 0 7 5 2 3 Harness bracket 1 2 3...

Page 3309: ...Differential side retainer RH 7 Drive pinion shaft 12 Differential bevel gear 3 O ring 8 Pinion shaft 13 Washer 4 Oil seal 9 Straight pin 14 Differential bevel pinion 5 Taper roller bearing 10 Differe...

Page 3310: ...ATIC TRANSMISSION 9 TRANSFER CASE EXTENSION CASE REDUCTION GEAR AT 03533 45 47 48 46 43 44 10 12 13 15 14 4 3 6 5 7 8 9 11 2 18 20 34 33 32 35 37 36 38 40 42 41 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 19 17...

Page 3311: ...tension case 7 Spacer 24 Snap ring 40 Transmission hanger 8 Pinion gear 25 Clutch spring retainer 41 Oil seal 9 Washer 26 Return spring 42 Dust cover 10 Planetary carrier ASSY 27 Spring retainer 43 Ta...

Page 3312: ...king pawl shaft 17 Ball bearing 3 AT main case 11 Return spring 4 Range select lever 12 Parking pawl Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 5 Straight pin 13 Ball bearing T1 6 0 6 4 4 6 Detent spring 14 Sn...

Page 3313: ...UTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 11 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE 1 Transmission control module TCM 2 Relay Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 3 Lateral G sensor T1 7 5 0 76 5 5 T2 24 5 2 5 18 1 AT 03572 3 2 1 2 T1...

Page 3314: ...TRANSMISSION MOUNTING 1 Pitching stopper 3 Crossmember Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Rear cushion rubber 4 Stopper T1 35 3 6 26 T2 40 4 1 29 5 T3 50 5 1 36 9 T4 58 5 9 42 8 T5 75 7 6 55 3 AT 035...

Page 3315: ...SUBARU genuine gear oil grease or the equivalent Do not mix them of different grades or manufacturers Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the s...

Page 3316: ...installing the ATF filter 498277200 STOPPER SET Used for removing and installing automatic transmission assembly to engine 41099AA010 ENGINE SUPPORT BRACKET Used for supporting engine 41099AA020 ENGI...

Page 3317: ...ntial side retainer oil seal 498057300 INSTALLER Used for installing the extension oil seal 498077000 REMOVER Used for removing the differential taper roller bearing 18630AA010 WRENCH COMPL RETAINER U...

Page 3318: ...DIAL GAUGE 498247100 498247100 DIAL GAUGE Used for measuring the gear backlash Used with MAGNET BASE 498247001 498517000 REPLACER Used for removing the front roller bearing 499787700 WRENCH Used for...

Page 3319: ...ain case to pressure plate 499737100 PULLER SET Used for removing the reduction driven gear assembly 498077600 REMOVER Used for removing the ball bearing 18667AA010 HOLDER Used for removing and instal...

Page 3320: ...DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL INSTALLER Used for installing the differential side retainer oil seal 18654AA000 INSTALLER Used for removing and installing the ball bearing 28399SA010 OIL SEAL PROTEC TOR...

Page 3321: ...transmission 18676AA020 TORX WRENCH Used for disassembling torque converter case 18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE Used for tightening parking support Used for installing the drive plate 498497100 CRANKSHAFT STO...

Page 3322: ...e oil seal 499787500 ADAPTER Used for removing and installing drive pinion lock nut 499575400 GAUGE Used for measuring height of total end play 18762AA000 COMPRESSOR SPECIAL TOOL Used for disassemblin...

Page 3323: ...REMARKS Depth gauge Used for measuring the transmission end play Thickness gauge Used for measuring clearance of the clutch brake and oil pump Micrometer Used for measuring thickness of the drive pini...

Page 3324: ...Ref to IN H6DO 7 REMOVAL Air Intake Chamber 3 Disconnect the air breather hose B INSTALLATION 1 Connect the air breather hose 2 Install the intercooler Turbo model Ref to IN H4DOTC 12 INSTALLATION Int...

Page 3325: ...ue 41 N m 4 2 kgf m 30 4 ft lb 2 Install the converter case assembly to the trans mission case assembly Ref to 5AT 63 INSTAL LATION Torque Converter Assembly 3 Install the transmission harness connect...

Page 3326: ...to oil pump cover NOTE Install by aligning the mark on front brake pis ton surface with the oil pump cover rib 3 Install the retainer and return spring 4 Install the front brake piston assembly using...

Page 3327: ...ate used in measurement of clearance with the retainer plate and then reassemble 2 OIL PUMP 1 Apply ATF to oil pump assembly and then install it to oil pump housing 2 Install the O ring to oil pump co...

Page 3328: ...h rotor gears facing each other measure the crest to crest clearance Tip clearance 0 02 0 15 mm 0 0008 0 0059 in 2 Side clearance Set a depth gauge to oil pump housing then measure the oil pump housin...

Page 3329: ...ll the shaft to torque converter NOTE Make sure the clip is firmly inserted 2 Install the oil pump shaft to torque converter and then make sure that the clip is secured on groove 3 Apply ATF to the re...

Page 3330: ...fler 7 Remove the heat shield cover 8 Remove the propeller shaft Ref to DS 10 RE MOVAL Propeller Shaft 9 Using the ST remove the oil seal ST 398527700 PULLER ASSY 10 Using the ST install the oil seal...

Page 3331: ...lightly tapping with plastic hammer 11 Remove the differential assembly Ref to 5AT 89 REMOVAL Front Differential Assembly 12 Remove the oil seal from converter case B INSTALLATION 1 Check the appeara...

Page 3332: ...N Air Breather Hose 11 Install the ATF filter pipe Ref to 5AT 55 IN STALLATION ATF Filter 12 Install the oil charge pipe with O ring Ref to 5AT 62 INSTALLATION Oil Charge Pipe 13 Install the torque co...

Page 3333: ...lutch pressure test NOTE Do not perform the transfer clutch pressure test for more than 5 seconds at a time Doing so will make the engine oil and ATF deteriorate and the clutch and brake to be adverse...

Page 3334: ...ean the magnet 10 Completely remove the remaining liquid gasket on the transmission case and oil pan 11 Disconnect the control valve connector and front vehicle speed sensor connector 12 Remove the co...

Page 3335: ...as drained 8 Check the ATF level Ref to 5AT 26 Automatic Transmission Fluid 9 Perform Clear Memory 2 operation Ref to 5AT diag 18 CLEAR MEMORY MODE OPERA TION Subaru Select Monitor 10 Perform the insp...

Page 3336: ...Intake Chamber 4 Disconnect the turbine speed sensor 1 connec tor 5 Remove the turbine speed sensor 1 B INSTALLATION 1 Install the turbine speed sensor 1 Tightening torque 7 N m 0 7 kgf m 5 2 ft lb 2...

Page 3337: ...speed sensor Ref to 5AT 65 IN STALLATION Extension Case 5 Install the transmission assembly to the vehicle Ref to 5AT 37 INSTALLATION Automatic Transmission Assembly C DISASSEMBLY 1 Using a press remo...

Page 3338: ...erval between tests Make three measurements and take the average value 1 Fully apply the parking brake 2 Start the engine Check the idle speed A C OFF 3 Shift the select lever from N to D range Using...

Page 3339: ...X H4DOTC 13 REMOVAL Muffler 4 Remove the front exhaust pipe rear exhaust pipe and muffler Non turbo model Ref to EX H6DO 4 REMOVAL Front Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H6DO 7 REMOVAL Rear Exhaust Pipe Ref to...

Page 3340: ...e Ref to EX H4DOTC 13 INSTALLATION Muffler 6 Install the front exhaust pipe rear exhaust pipe and muffler Non turbo model Ref to EX H6DO 5 INSTALLATION Front Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H6DO 7 INSTALLATION...

Page 3341: ...Front Vehicle Speed Sensor 5 Remove the parking support actuator 6 Remove the parking pawl parking pawl shaft and return spring B INSTALLATION 1 Set the transmission to the N range 2 Install the parki...

Page 3342: ...erential carrier Ref to 5AT 74 INSTALLATION Center Differential Carri er 8 Install the extension case Ref to 5AT 65 IN STALLATION Extension Case 9 Install the transmission assembly to the vehicle Ref...

Page 3343: ...EX H4DOTC 8 REMOVAL Center Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H4DOTC 12 REMOVAL Rear Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H4DOTC 13 REMOVAL Muf fler 11 Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler Non turbo model Ref to EX H6DO 7...

Page 3344: ...3 Remove the control valve body 24 Remove the bolt securing harness of transmis sion main case 25 Remove the harness assembly B INSTALLATION 1 Pass the harness assembly through the hole in transmissio...

Page 3345: ...Ref to DS 11 IN STALLATION Propeller Shaft 12 Install the heat shield cover 13 Install the center rear exhaust pipes and the muffler Turbo model Ref to EX H4DOTC 9 INSTALLATION Center Exhaust Pipe Re...

Page 3346: ...mission case completely 7 Disconnect the front vehicle speed sensor con nector 8 Remove the front vehicle speed sensor securing bolt 9 Remove the front vehicle speed sensor through the hole of AT tra...

Page 3347: ...htening torque 7 N m 0 7 kgf m 5 2 ft lb 8 Install the transmission assembly to the vehicle Ref to 5AT 37 INSTALLATION Automatic Transmission Assembly 9 Pour ATF from the oil charge pipe Ref to 5AT 26...

Page 3348: ...tial gear oil drain plug NOTE Use a new gasket Tightening torque 44 N m 4 5 kgf m 32 5 ft lb 6 Separate the front drive shaft from the transmis sion Ref to DS 22 REMOVAL Front Drive Shaft 7 Remove the...

Page 3349: ...ch cannot be checked because the in hibitor switch is installed on control valve assembly When a malfunction occurs refer to 5AT diag section Ref to 5AT diag 32 DTC P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR CIR...

Page 3350: ...t the range select lever to the P range 2 Use a plastic hammer to install reduction driven gear assembly 3 Select the reduction gear shims Ref to 5AT 72 ADJUSTMENT Reduction Driven Gear 4 Join the tra...

Page 3351: ...h the same procedure as step 3 ST 18654AA000 INSTALLER E INSPECTION Make sure the ball bearing and gear is not de formed or damaged F ADJUSTMENT 1 Using the ST measure the height A from the AT main ca...

Page 3352: ...0 23 T in B A 0 0091 When clearances are 0 25 mm 0 0098 in T mm B A 0 03 T in B A 0 0011 T Shim clearance A Height from the mating surface of the AT main case to the ball bearing outer ring end surfac...

Page 3353: ...erator pedal 10 When the engine speed is stabilized quickly record the engine speed and release accelerator pedal 11 Shift the select lever to N range and cool down the engine by idling it for more th...

Page 3354: ...e pinion shaft assembly from oil pump cover 9 Remove the oil pump cover from AT main case Ref to 5AT 80 Oil Pump Cover B INSTALLATION 1 Assemble the drive pinion assembly to oil pump cover NOTE Be car...

Page 3355: ...ing from shaft using a press and ST ST 498517000 REPLACER D ASSEMBLY 1 Measure the dimension A of drive pinion shaft ST 398643600 GAUGE 2 Using a press press fit the new roller bearing into the specif...

Page 3356: ...6 38 1 N 0 776 3 88 kgf 1 7 8 6 lb 7 Crimp the locknut in 2 locations 8 Measure dimension B of the drive pinion shaft ST 398643600 GAUGE 9 Calculate the thickness t mm of the drive pin ion shim t 6 5...

Page 3357: ...on hypoid driven gear Rotate the drive pinion in the leftward and rightward for several times Remove the oil pump cover and check the tooth contact pattern If the teeth contact is inappropriate adjust...

Page 3358: ...ve pinion away from the driven gear side Heel contact outside end contact Check item Teeth contact area is too small Contact pattern Corrective action Increase thickness of pinion height adjusting was...

Page 3359: ...t to damage the inside of case particularly the differential side retainer mating surface 2 Install the O ring to left and right side retainer 3 Using the ST install the side retainer Ref to 5AT 89 RE...

Page 3360: ...acklash and tooth contact remove and install the oil seal and O ring 1 Remove the O ring 2 Remove the oil seal 3 Remove the split pin and then remove the claw ST 398527700 PULLER ASSY 4 Attach two cla...

Page 3361: ...N m 6 3 kgf m 45 6 ft lb 5 Measurement of backlash Selection of washer 1 Install the SUBARU genuine axle shaft to differential case Part No 38415AA070AXLE SHAFT 2 Measure the gear backlash using ST1...

Page 3362: ...t to be within specification Ref to 5AT 92 ADJUSTMENT Front Differential Assembly F ADJUSTMENT 1 Using the ST screw in the retainer until resis tance is felt NOTE Screw in the RH side slightly deeper...

Page 3363: ...e retainer RH further 1 3 4 notches This sets the preload Finally secure the retainer with its lock plate NOTE Turning the retainer by one tooth changes the backlash approx 0 05 mm 0 0020 in 8 Turn th...

Page 3364: ...e Ref to 5AT 65 REMOVAL Extension Case 8 Remove the center differential carrier Ref to 5AT 74 REMOVAL Center Differential Carrier 9 Remove the reduction driven gear Ref to 5AT 71 REMOVAL Reduction Dri...

Page 3365: ...utch 18 Remove the high low reverse clutch assem bly 19 Remove the direct clutch assembly 20 Remove the snap ring of reverse brake 21 Remove the retaining plate 22 Remove the leaf spring 23 Take out t...

Page 3366: ...65AA000 COMPRESSOR SUPPORT ST3 18763AA000 COMPRESSOR SHAFT 25 Remove the spring retainer 26 Remove the return spring 27 Apply compressed air 28 Remove the reverse brake piston 29 Remove the thrust bea...

Page 3367: ...PRESSOR SUPPORT ST3 18763AA000 COMPRESSOR SHAFT 4 Install the return spring 5 Install the spring retainer and snap ring ST1 18762AA000 COMPRESSOR SPECIAL TOOL ST2 18765AA000 COMPRESSOR SUPPORT ST3 187...

Page 3368: ...in 2 If it is out of specification select a suitable retainer plate from the following table and as semble it 12 Install the direct clutch assembly 13 Install the high low reverse clutch assembly 14 I...

Page 3369: ...rier assembly 18 Install the thrust needle bearing of middle carri er assembly 19 Measure the total end play and select the bearing Ref to 5AT 103 ADJUSTMENT AT Main Case 20 Install the impact clutch...

Page 3370: ...TALLATION Control Valve Body 27 Install the converter case assembly to the transmission case assembly Ref to 5AT 78 IN STALLATION Converter Case 28 Install the air breather hose Ref to 5AT 61 INSTALLA...

Page 3371: ...emove the front carrier 3 Remove the input clutch assembly from rear in ternal gear D ASSEMBLY 1 INPUT CLUTCH PACK ASSEMBLY 1 Assemble the input clutch assembly to rear inter nal gear 2 Install the fr...

Page 3372: ...lue 0 7 1 1mm 0 028 0 043 in 3 HIGH LOW REVERSE CLUTCH AS SEMBLY Check the clearance of the high low reverse clutch Measure the clearance L between snap ring and retaining plate using a thickness gaug...

Page 3373: ...mula E mm D 15 E in D 0 59 6 Calculation formula Select one thrust bearing from the table to adjust clearance within 0 25 0 55 mm 0 0098 0 022 in When clearances are 0 25 mm 0 0098 in T mm E C 0 03 T...

Page 3374: ...nting bolt Tightening torque 10 N m 1 0 kgf m 7 4 ft lb 2 Additionally tighten the drive plate mounting bolts Tightening torque 40 N m 4 1 kgf m 29 5 ft lb 3 While checking the tightening angle with t...

Page 3375: ...ng torque using fol lowing formula T2 L2 L1 L2 T1 T1 14 N m 1 4 kgf m 10 1 ft lb Required torque setting T2 Tightening torque L1 ST length 78 mm 3 07 in L2 Torque wrench length Example NOTE Align the...

Page 3376: ...oil CAUTION Immediately after the vehicle has been run ning or after idling for a long time the differen tial gear oil will be hot Be careful not to burn yourself Be careful not to spill differential...

Page 3377: ...l in the reverse order of removal 5 Perform Clear Memory 2 operation Ref to 5AT diag 18 CLEAR MEMORY MODE OPERA TION Subaru Select Monitor 6 Perform the inspection with driving the vehicle at the end...

Page 3378: ...18 ft lb 3 Install the rear vehicle speed sensor Tightening torque 7 N m 0 7 kgf m 5 2 ft lb 4 Install the transmission assembly Ref to 5AT 37 INSTALLATION Automatic Transmission Assembly C DISASSEMBL...

Page 3379: ...ST 18762AA000 COMPRESSOR SPECIAL TOOL 5 Install the transfer clutch Ref to 5AT 67 IN STALLATION Transfer Clutch 6 Install the multi plate hub assembly E INSPECTION Use compressed air to make sure the...

Page 3380: ...he center differential assembly with the shim s NOTE Press fit it to the bottom of bearing shoulder com pletely 2 Insert the rear driveshaft assembly Ref to 5AT 70 INSTALLATION Rear Drive Shaft 3 Join...

Page 3381: ...t the shaft into the center differential as sembly 5 Install the snap ring 6 Using a press install a new ball bearing into the center differential assembly ST 498077000 REMOVER 7 Apply vaseline onto t...

Page 3382: ...e air breather hose 6 Remove the pitching stopper bracket 7 Remove the control valve body assembly Ref to 5AT 53 REMOVAL Control Valve Body 8 Pull out the straight pin of manual plate 9 Remove the bol...

Page 3383: ...lb 7 Insert the transmission connector to the stay 8 Install the air breather hose Ref to 5AT 61 IN STALLATION Air Breather Hose 9 Install the torque converter assembly Ref to 5AT 63 INSTALLATION Torq...

Page 3384: ...5AT 106 Transmission Control Device AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION asieps_tobira book 106...

Page 3385: ...itor 16 7 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 19 8 Inspection Mode 20 9 Clear Memory Mode 21 10 Learning Control 22 11 SPORT Indicator Light Display 23 12 Diagnostic Procedure for Subaru Select Monitor C...

Page 3386: ...Non turbo model Ref to IN H6DO 5 REMOVAL Air Cleaner Case 8 Remove the air breather hose Ref to 5AT 61 REMOVAL Air Breather Hose 9 Remove the starter Ref to SC H4SO 6 RE MOVAL Starter 10 Disconnect th...

Page 3387: ...hrough the starter in stallation hole CAUTION Be careful not to drop bolts into converter housing 15 Attach the ST to the converter case ST 498277200 STOPPER SET 16 Remove the pitching stopper 17 Remo...

Page 3388: ...emove the ATF drain plug to drain ATF 28 Remove the oil charge pipe 29 Disconnect the connector from turbine speed sensor 1 30 Remove the turbine speed sensor 1 connector mounting bolt and rotate the...

Page 3389: ...n mounting bolt lower side 42 Remove the transmission NOTE Turn the engine support assembly from the vehi cle under body to the left to shorten the engine support length and lower the rear of the engi...

Page 3390: ...OPPER SET 9 Install the starter Ref to SC H4SO 6 IN STALLATION Starter 10 Install the torque converter to drive plate 1 Install the bolts which hold torque converter to drive plate 2 Install all four...

Page 3391: ...e the circlip of drive shaft with a new part 18 Install the front drive shaft into transmission re move the ST and insert the drive shaft securely ST 28399SA000 OIL SEAL PROTECTOR 19 Install the inlet...

Page 3392: ...ON Muffler 30 Install the front exhaust pipe rear exhaust pipe and muffler Non turbo model Ref to EX H6DO 5 INSTALLATION Front Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H6DO 7 INSTALLATION Rear Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H6...

Page 3393: ...EMORY MODE OPERA TION Subaru Select Monitor 1 Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to the data link connector 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF and turn Subaru Select Monitor switch to ON 3 Ens...

Page 3394: ...raise ATF temperature to 70 80 C 158 176 F on Subaru Select Monitor Ref to 5AT diag 16 READ CURRENT DATA OPERA TION Subaru Select Monitor 7 Check the ATF for leaks Visually check for leaks in the tra...

Page 3395: ...ble cause Corrective action Large amount of metallic pieces are found Excessive wear of the internal of the trans mission body Replace ATF and check if AT operates correctly Thick and varnish form flu...

Page 3396: ...g from flange side B INSTALLATION 1 Install the oil charge pipe with a new O ring Tightening torque 41 N m 4 2 kgf m 30 4 ft lb 2 Install the intercooler Turbo model Ref to IN H4DOTC 12 INSTALLATION I...

Page 3397: ...mission Assembly C INSPECTION Inspect the drive plate facing for wear and dam age Make sure the snap ring is not worn and the re turn spring has no permanent distortion damage or deformation Check tha...

Page 3398: ...0 0098 is applied T Shim thickness A Depth from end of extension case to ball bearing outer ring contact surface B Height from end of AT main case contact surface to the ball bearing outer ring contac...

Page 3399: ...he ST When clearances are 0 2 mm 0 008 in T mm A B 0 28 0 2 T in A B 0 011 0 008 When clearances are 0 6 mm 0 024 in T mm A B 0 28 0 6 T in A B 0 011 0 024 is applied T Thickness of driven plate No 3...

Page 3400: ...nu display screen select the Transmission and press the YES key 5 Press the YES key after the information of transmission type is displayed 6 On the Transmission Diagnosis display screen select the Cu...

Page 3401: ...Ref to EI 52 RE MOVAL Console Box 2 Disconnect the connector from the lateral G sen sor 3 Remove the lateral G sensor B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque T1 7 5 N...

Page 3402: ...while driving in 5th gear of manual mode 50 to 60 km h 31 to 37 MPH Check the 3rd gear engine brake when shifting down from 4th to 3rd range while driving in 4th gear of manual mode 50 60 km h 31 37...

Page 3403: ...red previously can also be identified through the memory function If the SPORT indicator light does not show a problem although a problem is occurring the problem can be determined by checking the per...

Page 3404: ...25 24 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 23 21 20 19 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 17 30 18 29 28 27 26 25 24 8 3 4 5 6 7 2 1 18 19 20 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 24 23 22 21 A B B352 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B352 B53 B53 i128 1 2 3...

Page 3405: ...Subaru Select Monitor Is the Diagnosis Light output signal ON Go to step 6 Replace the TCM Ref to 4AT 62 Transmission Con trol Module TCM 6 CHECK THE BODY INTEGRATED UNIT Display the current data of...

Page 3406: ...hland Suburbs Inner city Uphill Rough road Others Ambient air temperature Hot Warm Cool Cold Vehicle speed km h MPH AT warning light SPORT indicator light Blinks continuously Does not blink Select lev...

Page 3407: ...round Select lever P range Less than 1 Select lever except P range 8 or more N range switch B54 No 22 Chassis ground Select lever N range Less than 1 Select lever except N range 8 or more R range swit...

Page 3408: ...16 Engine idling after warm up D range 0 450 650 Engine idling after warm up N range More than 1 AC range Torque converter turbine speed sensor ground B54 No 16 Chassis ground Engine speed signal B54...

Page 3409: ...t gear on manual mode 15 km h 9 3 MPH or more 2 5 5 0 Range lock signal B55 No 18 Chassis ground Vehicle speed in D range 0 km h 0 MPH 10 5 or more 7 18 Vehicle speed in D range 20 km h 12 MPH Less th...

Page 3410: ...or Subaru Select Monitor or OBD II general scan tool 5 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF and Subaru Select Monitor switch ON 6 On the Main Menu display screen select the Each System Check and...

Page 3411: ...Accelerator pedal position sensor Throttle voltage V Gear position Gear Position Line pressure control duty ratio Line Pressure Duty Ratio Lock up clutch control duty ratio Lock Up Duty Ratio Transfe...

Page 3412: ...ear defogger and etc OFF 9 Wait for 30 seconds or more with the ignition key turned to OFF 10 When Communication Failed is displayed on Subaru Select Monitor press the brake pedal fully until the lear...

Page 3413: ...cuit Ref to 4AT diag 48 DTC P0724 TORQUE CON VERTER BRAKE SWITCH B CIRCUIT HIGH Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0725 Engine Speed Input Circuit Open or shorted engine speed out...

Page 3414: ...Rear Wheel Rear vehicle speed sensor is faulty or input signal circuit is open or shorted Ref to 4AT diag 73 DTC P1706 AT VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION REAR WHEEL Diagnostic Procedure with...

Page 3415: ...ode DTC A DTC P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR CIRCUIT PRNDL INPUT DTC DETECTING CONDITION Inhibitor switch is faulty More than 2 range signal is input TROUBLE SYMPTOM Shift characteristics are erroneo...

Page 3416: ...8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 BATTERY COMBINATION METER BODY INTEGRATED UNIT JOINT CONNECTOR JOINT CONNECTOR INHIBITOR SWITCH i128 i128 JOINT CONNECTOR TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT AMONG 1...

Page 3417: ...range indicator light on combination meter illu minate Even if the SPORT indicator light is blinking the cir cuit is in normal condition at this time A temporary poor contact of connector or har ness...

Page 3418: ...I 3 INSPECTION Combination Meter Sys tem Is the P range indicator light bulb OK Go to step 41 Replace the com bination meter assembly Ref to IDI 14 Combina tion Meter 19 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEE...

Page 3419: ...ctor terminal B54 No 14 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 41 Repair ground short circuit in R range circuit 27 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TCM AND INHIBITOR SWITCH 1 Turn t...

Page 3420: ...to step 35 Repair the open circuit of harness between TCM and inhibitor switch connector and poor contact of the connector 35 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR TCM 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect the...

Page 3421: ...hassis ground Connector terminal B54 No 4 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 41 Repair ground short circuit in D range circuit 41 CHECK POOR CONTACT Is there poor contact in the...

Page 3422: ...ETECTING CONDITION Input signal circuit to ATF temperature sensor is open or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM Excessive shift shock WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03406 B11 B54 AT11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 14 15 20 19 17 16 1...

Page 3423: ...ow 0 C 32 F drive the vehicle until the ATF reaches its oper ating temperature 5 Disconnect the connector from transmis sion 6 Measure the resistance between transmis sion connector terminals Connecto...

Page 3424: ...URE SENSOR Measure the resistance of harness between ATF temperature sensor and transmission con nector Connector terminal T4 No 15 AT11 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 9 Repair the open...

Page 3425: ...TC DETECTING CONDITION Input signal circuit to ATF temperature sensor is shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM Excessive shift shock WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03406 B11 B54 AT11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 14 15 20 19 17 16 10 11...

Page 3426: ...CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TCM AND ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from transmis sion 3 Measure the resistance of the harness between TCM conn...

Page 3427: ...resistance more than 1 M Go to step 8 Replace the trans mission harness 8 CHECK TRANSMISSION HARNESS Measure the resistance between transmission connector and transmission ground Connector terminal T4...

Page 3428: ...n or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM Excessive shift shock WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03407 5 10 B11 T4 TCM B54 7 B11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 14 15 20 19 17 16 10 11 12 18 B54 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15...

Page 3429: ...tor and chassis ground Connector terminal B54 No 16 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 5 Repair the short circuit of harness between TCM and transmission con nector 5 CHECK HARN...

Page 3430: ...GEMENT AMONG 8 18 AND 19 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT AMONG 9 10 AND 20 3 4 B159 2 1 3 4 8 9 7 6 5 B280 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 23 21 20 19 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 17 30 18 29 28 27 26 25 24 B281 8 7 6...

Page 3431: ...ess may be the cause Check the poor contact Replace the TCM Ref to 4AT 62 Transmission Con trol Module TCM 5 CHECK BODY INTEGRATED UNIT INPUT SIGNAL 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Disconnect the connecto...

Page 3432: ...9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 22 23 24 B53 15 B53 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 JOINT CONNECTOR FRONT VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR TEMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT AMONG 1...

Page 3433: ...step 6 Replace the front vehicle speed sen sor Ref to 4AT 50 Front Vehicle Speed Sensor 6 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR TCM USING SUBARU SELECT MONITOR 1 Connect all connectors 2 Connect the Subaru Select Mo...

Page 3434: ...GEMENT AMONG 8 18 AND 19 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT AMONG 9 10 AND 20 3 4 B159 2 1 3 4 8 9 7 6 5 B280 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 23 21 20 19 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 17 30 18 29 28 27 26 25 24 B281 8 7 6...

Page 3435: ...62 Transmission Con trol Module TCM 4 CHECK BODY INTEGRATED UNIT INPUT SIGNAL 1 Disconnect the harness connector of body integrated unit 2 Measure the voltage of harness between body integrated unit a...

Page 3436: ...al circuit is open or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM No lock up occurs After engine is warmed up SPORT indicator light remains ON when the vehicle speed is 0 WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03410 13 B136 ECM B54 TCM 22 B5...

Page 3437: ...pair the open circuit of harness between TCM and ECM connector 2 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TCM AND ECM Measure the resistance of the harness between TCM connector and chassis ground Connector te...

Page 3438: ...Procedure with Diagnostic Trou ble Code DTC 2 CHECK FRONT VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1 Lift up the vehicle and support with rigid racks 2 Start the engine 3 Shift the select lever to D range and slowly incr...

Page 3439: ...re any fault Repair or replace the ATF tempera ture sensor circuit Go to step 5 5 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to the data link connector 2 Turn the igni...

Page 3440: ...signal circuit of lock up duty solenoid is open or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM No lock up occurs After engine is warmed up WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03411 TCM LOCK UP DUTY SOLENOID TRANSMISSION B11 B55 AT12 1 2 3...

Page 3441: ...nector receptacle s terminals Connector terminal T4 No 12 No 20 Is the resistance between 2 0 6 0 Go to step 5 Go to step 8 5 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FROM TCM US ING SUBARU SELECT MONITOR 1 Connect the co...

Page 3442: ...ot drain ATF until it cools down 3 Remove the oil pan and disconnect the connector from control valve body 4 Measure the resistance between lock up duty solenoid and transmission ground Connector term...

Page 3443: ...ect the connector from transmis sion and TCM 3 Measure the resistance of the harness between TCM connector and transmission connector Connector terminal B55 No 19 B11 No 2 B55 No 20 B11 No 1 Is the re...

Page 3444: ...ssure linear solenoid and transmission connector Connector terminal T4 No 2 AT11 No 4 T4 No 1 AT11 No 2 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 6 Repair the open circuit of harness between line pres...

Page 3445: ...signal circuit of low clutch duty solenoid is open or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM Excessive shift shock WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03565 TCM LOW CLUTCH DUTY SOLENOID TRANSMISSION B11 B55 AT12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 13...

Page 3446: ...trans mission 2 Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to the data link connector 3 Start the engine and turn the Subaru Select Monitor power switch ON 4 Warm up the transmission until the ATF temperature...

Page 3447: ...re the resistance of harness between low clutch duty solenoid and transmission con nector Connector terminal T4 No 4 AT12 No 2 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 9 Repair the open circuit of har...

Page 3448: ...to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from TCM and transmission 3 Measure the resistance of the harness between TCM connector and transmission connector Connector terminal B55 No 6 B11 No 3 Is the resis...

Page 3449: ...US ING SUBARU SELECT MONITOR Shift the select lever to 2nd on manual mode Is the measured value 0 Even if the SPORT indicator light is blinking the cir cuit is in normal condition at this time A tempo...

Page 3450: ...on con nector 9 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN 2 4 BRAKE DUTY SOLENOID AND TRANS MISSION Measure the resistance of harness between transmission connector and transmission ground Connector terminal T4...

Page 3451: ...Disconnect the connectors from TCM and transmission 3 Measure the resistance of the harness between TCM connector and transmission connector Connector terminal B55 No 8 B11 No 7 Is the resistance les...

Page 3452: ...ht but this does not indicate a malfunction When AT con trol diagnosis is finished perform the ABS memory clearance procedure of on board diag nostics system Ref to ABS diag 25 Clear Memory Mode Is th...

Page 3453: ...SION Measure the resistance of harness between high clutch duty solenoid and transmission connector Connector terminal T4 No 7 AT12 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 9 Repair the open circ...

Page 3454: ...ch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from transmis sion and TCM 3 Measure the resistance of the harness between TCM connector and transmission connector Connector terminal B55 No 7 B11 No 6 Is the res...

Page 3455: ...e speed difference between front and rear wheels may light the ABS warning light but this does not indicate a malfunction When AT con trol diagnosis is finished perform the ABS memory clearance proced...

Page 3456: ...nector 9 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TRANSMISSION AND LOW REVERSE DUTY SOLENOID Measure the resistance of harness between transmission connector and transmission ground Connector terminal T4 No 6...

Page 3457: ...Yes No 1 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TCM AND SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from TCM and shift lock solenoid 3 Measure the resistance of harness...

Page 3458: ...ge 4 Measure the voltage between TCM and chassis ground Connector terminal B55 No 18 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 10 5 V Go to step 6 Go to step 7 6 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM 1 Lift up the...

Page 3459: ...al circuit of TCM is open or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM No lock up or tight corner braking phenomenon is occurred WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03418 23 24 B11 AT13 T4 9 17 13 3 1 2 B54 E MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 12 B11 AT...

Page 3460: ...or in harness between TCM and rear vehicle speed sensor connector 3 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION Measure the resistance of harness between TCM connector and rear vehicle speed...

Page 3461: ...CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR TCM USING OSCILLOSCOPE 1 Connect the connectors to TCM and trans mission 2 Lift up the vehicle and support with rigid racks NOTE Raise all wheels off the floor 3 Set the oscill...

Page 3462: ...SSION 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connectors from TCM and transmission 3 Measure the resistance of the harness between TCM connector and transmission connector Connector termina...

Page 3463: ...ss may be the cause Repair the harness or con nector in TCM and transmission Go to step 6 6 CHECK POOR CONTACT Is there poor contact in transfer duty solenoid circuit Repair the poor contact Replace t...

Page 3464: ...Connector terminal T4 No 8 Transmission ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Even if the SPORT indicator light is blinking the cir cuit is in normal condition at this time A temporary poor contact...

Page 3465: ...E2 37 52 35 36 1 3 2 10 19 B31 B22 B30 D1 D7 C15 A5 D2 E E B315 D3 34 B137 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 14 15 24 25 26 16 17 18 19 20 21 27 28 29 30 31 B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11...

Page 3466: ...sensor connector receptacle s terminals Connector terminal No 3 No 2 Is the resistance between 0 15 0 63 k Go to step 5 Replace the accel erator pedal posi tion sensor 5 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEE...

Page 3467: ...e data of Throttle Sensor Voltage using Subaru Select Monitor Accelerator pedal position sensor input signal is indicated Is the voltage more than 0 2 V Even if the SPORT indicator light is blinking t...

Page 3468: ...52 35 36 1 3 2 10 19 B31 B22 B30 D1 D7 C15 A5 D2 E E B315 D3 34 B137 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 14 15 24 25 26 16 17 18 19 20 21 27 28 29 30 31 B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13...

Page 3469: ...Is the resistance between 0 75 3 15 k Go to step 4 Replace the accel erator pedal posi tion sensor 4 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Measure the resistance between accelerator pedal position s...

Page 3470: ...data of Throttle Sensor Voltage using Subaru Select Monitor Accelerator pedal position sensor input sig nal is indicated Is the voltage less than 4 6 V Go to step 8 Even if the SPORT indicator light...

Page 3471: ...2 1 9 4 3 10 22 23 11 12 13 14 15 24 25 26 16 17 18 19 20 21 27 28 29 30 31 B134 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10 24 22 23 25 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 33 34 29 32 30 31 B136 5 6 7 8 2 1 9 4 3 10...

Page 3472: ...and ECM connector and poor contact of connector 4 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR AMONG TCM ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR AND ECM Measure the resistance of harness between TCM connector and chassis ground...

Page 3473: ...ics for Engine Starting Failure Ref to EN H4SO U5 diag 63 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE ECM Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure Ref to EN H4DOTC diag 59 CHECK POWER S...

Page 3474: ...26 B116 8 9 B280 B B281 C B20 B30 E 3 12 TCM B54 B352 B53 B53 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 BODY INTEGRATED UNIT JOINT CONNECTOR JOINT CONNECTOR SPORT MODE SWITCH SELECT LEVER TER...

Page 3475: ...lever Go to step 6 Adjust the inhibi tor switch and select cable Ref to 4AT 46 ADJUSTMENT Inhibitor Switch Ref to CS 27 ADJUSTMENT Select Cable 6 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FROM TCM 1 Shift the select lever...

Page 3476: ...13 12 11 5 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 23 21 20 19 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 34 35 33 32 17 30 18 31 29 28 27 26 25 24 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 23 21 20 19 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 17 18 28 27 26 25 24 F108 8 7 6 5 4 3...

Page 3477: ...en circuit of harness between FWD switch connector and chassis ground 6 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TCM AND FWD SWITCH Measure the resistance of harness connector between TCM and body to make sure...

Page 3478: ...tic Trouble Code DTC AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSTICS 11 CHECK POOR CONTACT Is there poor contact in FWD switch circuit Repair the poor contact Replace the TCM Ref to 4AT 62 Transmission Con trol Mo...

Page 3479: ...RANGEMENT AMONG 8 18 AND 19 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT AMONG 9 10 AND 20 3 4 B281 C B280 B B20 B30 C25 C15 3 12 B116 TCM B54 10 11 6 7 B280 B54 B281 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 23 21 20 19 16 15 14 13 12...

Page 3480: ...diag 12 OPERATION Subaru Select Monitor Is ON displayed Go to step 4 Go to step 5 4 CHECK THE BODY INTEGRATED UNIT Check DTC of body integrated unit Ref to LAN diag 12 OPERATION Subaru Select Monitor...

Page 3481: ...ted unit 11 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL TO BODY INTE GRATED UNIT 1 Shift and hold the select lever to up side 2 Check the signal voltage for body inte grated unit Connector terminal B281 No 15 Chassis ground I...

Page 3482: ...H Measure the resistance of harness between SPORT shift switch connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B116 No 11 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 19 Repair the short...

Page 3483: ...MINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT AMONG 1 2 3 4 5 AND 6 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT AMONG 7 8 9 10 11 AND 12 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 21 22 i10 A27 A26 B20 B30 i84 A B280 B 3 12 TCM B54 i10...

Page 3484: ...ing Subaru Select Monitor Is the gear position 2 Go to step 3 Replace the TCM Ref to 4AT 62 Transmission Con trol Module TCM 3 CHECK TCM 1 Down shift the select lever 2 Read the Gear Position data of...

Page 3485: ...0 18 29 28 27 26 25 24 8 3 4 5 6 7 2 1 18 19 20 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 24 23 22 21 MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 5 E BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH BODY INTEGRATED UNIT COMBINATION METER BUZZER A B B352 JOINT CONNECT...

Page 3486: ...aru Select Monitor switch to ON 5 Read the data of SPORT shift buzzer of body integrated unit using Subaru Select Moni tor Is the SPORT shift buzzer dis play ON Replace the TCM Ref to 4AT 62 Transmiss...

Page 3487: ...nd wait for 2 seconds or more Is the SPORT indicator light blinking Go to step 4 Go to step 3 3 CHECK SPORT INDICATOR LIGHT 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Check the SPORT indicator light Ref to 4...

Page 3488: ...to List of Diagnostic Trou ble Code DTC Ref to 4AT diag 27 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 2 Repair the trouble cause 3 Perform the Clear Memory Mode 4 Perform the Inspection Mode Ref to 4AT diag...

Page 3489: ...nsert a pin of more than 0 65 mm 0 026 in diameter B INSPECTION 1 BATTERY Measure the battery voltage and specific gravity of the electrolyte Standard voltage 12 V or more Specific gravity 1 260 or mo...

Page 3490: ...select lever C PREPARATION TOOL 1 SPECIAL TOOL 2 GENERAL TOOL AT 02048 ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 18482AA010 CARTRIDGE Troubleshooting for the electrical system 22771AA030 SUBARU SE...

Page 3491: ...N DIAGNOSTICS 4 Electrical Component Location A LOCATION 1 CONTROL MODULE 1 Engine control module ECM 3 Transmission control module TCM 4 Data link connector 2 SPORT indicator light AT warning light 5...

Page 3492: ...4AT diag 8 Electrical Component Location AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSTICS 1 AT 01874 AT 01470 2 AT 01875 3 AT 01877 4 AT 01876 5 asieps_tobira book 8...

Page 3493: ...2 SENSOR 1 Throttle position sensor 4 Rear vehicle speed sensor 6 ATF temperature sensor 2 Front vehicle speed sensor 5 Torque converter turbine speed sensor 3 Inhibitor switch 3 6 5 1 2 4 AT 02979 1...

Page 3494: ...ICS 3 SOLENOID 1 Line pressure linear solenoid 4 Low reverse duty solenoid 6 Transfer duty solenoid 2 High clutch duty solenoid 5 Low clutch duty solenoid 7 Lock up duty solenoid 3 2 4 brake duty sole...

Page 3495: ...while driving in D4 Final gear Low reverse brake Planetary gear Reduction gear Differential gear oil level too high or too low Vehicle moves when select lever is in N range Select cable Inhibitor swi...

Page 3496: ...way clutch Vehicle does not start in D range Engine stalls Reverse clutch Vehicle does not start in R range only Engine operates Control valve Acceleration during standing start is poor High rpm stall...

Page 3497: ...Lock up facing Engine speed signal Parking brake does not function Select cable Select lever Parking mechanism Shift lever cannot be moved or is hard to move from P range ATF spurts out ATF level too...

Page 3498: ...r 2 4 brake duty solenoid ATF temperature sensor Line pressure linear solenoid Control valve Low clutch duty solenoid 2 4 brake ATF deterioration Engine performance Slippage occurs when shifting from...

Page 3499: ...eed sensor Accelerator pedal position sensor ATF temperature sensor Control valve Transfer clutch Transfer valve Transfer pipe Transfer duty solenoid It is not set in FWD mode TCM Transfer clutch Tran...

Page 3500: ...4AT diag 106 Diagnostics with Phenomenon AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSTICS asieps_tobira book 106...

Page 3501: ...7 15 Rear Vehicle Speed Sensor 49 16 Turbine Speed Sensor 1 52 17 Control Valve Body 53 18 ATF Filter 55 19 Transmission Control Module TCM 56 20 Lateral G Sensor 57 21 ATF Cooler Pipe and Hose 58 22...

Page 3502: ...ICS 8 Inspection Mode A PROCEDURE WARNING Observe the traffic law when driving on public roads 1 Shift the select lever to D range and then drive the vehicle at 60 km h 37 MPH for at least 10 sec onds...

Page 3503: ...4 B55 B54 A B55 B136 B B11 T4 TCM ECM B40 E No 12 No 12 SBF 6 MAIN SBF B27 A8 A17 B31 B21 B12 B2 B3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 12 10 13 E E B11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 14 15 20 19 17 16 10...

Page 3504: ...ector and ground terminals 5 CHECK ENGINE GROUND CIRCUIT Check the engine ground circuit Ref to 4AT diag 79 DTC P1708 THROTTLE POSI TION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT Diag nostic Procedure with Diagnostic...

Page 3505: ...ATION OF TRANSMISSION HARNESS CONNECTOR Is the transmission harness connector connected to bulk head harness connector Go to step 13 Connect the bulk head harness con nector to transmission har ness c...

Page 3506: ...or Connector terminal B54 No 8 B11 No 19 B54 No 17 B11 No 19 B55 No 2 B11 No 20 B55 No 3 B11 No 20 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 19 Repair the open circuit of harness between TCM and transm...

Page 3507: ...N Refer to Subaru Select Monitor for information on how to display a DTC Ref to 4AT diag 14 OP ERATION Subaru Select Monitor For details concerning DTCs refer to List of Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC R...

Page 3508: ...AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSTICS 9 Clear Memory Mode A OPERATION Refer to Subaru Select Monitor for information about how to clear a DTC Ref to 4AT diag 16 CLEAR MEMORY MODE OPERATION Subaru Select...

Page 3509: ...ISSION DIAGNOSTICS 9 Clear Memory Mode A OPERATION Use Subaru Select Monitor to clear DTC Ref to 5AT diag 18 CLEAR MEMORY MODE OPERA TION Subaru Select Monitor NOTE DTC cannot be cleared without using...

Page 3510: ...o be identified through the memory function If the SPORT indicator light does not show a problem although a problem is occurring the problem can be determined by checking the perfor mance characterist...

Page 3511: ...i10 JOINT CONNECTOR i128 i84 A B280 B 8 2 A26 A27 B20 B30 4 3 TCM B54 BODY INTEGRATED UNIT SPORT BATTERY MAIN SBF SBF 6 IGNITION SWITCH No 5 E i10 i128 i84 B280 B54 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 1...

Page 3512: ...ng Subaru Select Monitor Is the Diagnosis Light output signal ON Go to step 6 Replace the TCM Ref to 5AT 56 Transmission Con trol Module TCM 6 CHECK BODY INTEGRATED UNIT Display the current data of bo...

Page 3513: ...icular position Lock up malfunction Noise or vibration Shift shock or slip Select lever does not move Others Frequency Continuous Intermittent times a day Weather Fine Cloudy Rainy Snowy Others Place...

Page 3514: ...ct the Subaru Select Monitor to the vehi cle 7 Drive the vehicle for 5 10 km 3 6 mile to warm up ATF temperature more than 70 C 158 F 8 While checking that the throttle opening angle on Subaru Select...

Page 3515: ...0 4 0 V PVIGN power supply B54 8 Ignition switch ON Power supply voltage 7 Ignition switch ON Power supply voltage I C oil pressure switch input B54 6 The condition of I C oil pressure switch cannot b...

Page 3516: ...ter ATF tempera ture sensor 2 input B54 11 Ignition switch ON 2 3 2 7 V ATF temperature 20 C 68 F 0 6 0 8 V ATF temperature 80 C 176 F 3 0 3 6 k ATF tempera ture 20 C 68 F 0 4 0 6 k ATF tempera ture 8...

Page 3517: ...55 18 While driving at 2nd and 20 km h 12 MPH of manual mode Approx 530 610 rpm Use the Subaru Select Monitor While driving at 4th and 80 km h 50 MPH of manual mode Approx 2160 2410 rpm Use the Subaru...

Page 3518: ...D range accelerator OFF brake ON Approx 2 0 3 0 V Turbine speed sensor 2 input B55 22 2nd of manual mode tur bine speed sensor is 2 000 rpm Read from Subaru Select Monitor Approx 1 300 1 500 rpm Use...

Page 3519: ...screen select the Transmission and press the YES key 8 Press the YES key after the information of transmission type is displayed 9 On the Transmission Diagnosis screen select DTC Display and then pres...

Page 3520: ...get oil pressure F B Solenoid Target Pressure kPa Input clutch solenoid target oil pressure I C Solenoid Target Pressure kPa Line pressure solenoid target oil pressure P L Solenoid Target Pressure kPa...

Page 3521: ...rmation of transmission type is displayed 5 On the Transmission Diagnosis display screen select the Clear Memory and press the YES key NOTE If Clear Memory 2 is selected and performed DTC are not clea...

Page 3522: ...N VERTER BRAKE SWITCH B CIRCUIT HIGH Diag nostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0725 Engine Speed Input Circuit Open or short engine speed out put signal circuit ECM malfunc tion CAN comm...

Page 3523: ...oid circuit malfunction or D C solenoid body malfunc tion Ref to 5AT diag 78 DTC P0768 SHIFT SOLENOID D ELECTRICAL Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P0771 Shift Solenoid E Per form...

Page 3524: ...on failure Ref to 5AT diag 115 DTC P1761 LATERAL ACCEL ERATION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW Diagnostic Proce dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC P1762 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Circuit High Lateral G sensor...

Page 3525: ...nostic Trouble Code DTC A DTC P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR CIRCUIT PRNDL INPUT DTC DETECTING CONDITION The inhibitor switch is open or short TROUBLE SYMPTOM Shift characteristics are erroneous Shif...

Page 3526: ...B B12 T3 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BATTERY MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 5 E E AT 03174 i84 B280 B12 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 23 21 20 19 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9...

Page 3527: ...H 1 Shift the select lever to D range 2 Check input signal of inhibitor SW 1 4 and inhibitor SW 3 monitor using Subaru Select Monitor Is all displayed Low Go to step 6 Go to step 5 5 CHECK HARNESS CON...

Page 3528: ...he connector from control valve body connector 7 Measure the resistance between transmis sion connector and control valve body connec tor Connector terminal T3 No 4 T5 No 6 T3 No 3 T5 No 5 T3 No 2 T5...

Page 3529: ...DETECTING CONDITION Input signal circuit to ATF temperature sensor 1 is open TROUBLE SYMPTOM Excessive shift shock WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03444 2 B54 B11 T4 T15 TCM 13 B54 B11 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19...

Page 3530: ...rive the vehicle until the ATF reaches its oper ating temperature 5 Disconnect the connector from transmis sion 6 Measure the resistance between transmis sion connector terminals Connector terminal T4...

Page 3531: ...s down 6 Remove the oil pan and disconnect the connector from control valve body connector 7 Measure the resistance between transmis sion connector and control valve body connec tor Connector terminal...

Page 3532: ...ETECTING CONDITION Input signal circuit to ATF temperature sensor 1 is shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM Excessive shift shock WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03444 2 B54 B11 T4 T15 TCM 13 B54 B11 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12...

Page 3533: ...C 32 F drive the vehicle until the ATF reaches its oper ating temperature 5 Disconnect the connector from transmis sion 6 Measure the resistance between transmis sion connector terminals Connector ter...

Page 3534: ...wn 6 Remove the oil pan and disconnect the connector from control valve body connector 7 Measure the resistance between chassis ground and control valve body connector Connector terminal T15 No 1 Chas...

Page 3535: ...horted TROUBLE SYMPTOM Excessive shift shock Does not shift to 5th WIRING DIAGRAM AT 02074 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 5 6 14 15 7 8 9 16 17 18 22 23 24 AT1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B54 B55 1 2 7 8 9 5...

Page 3536: ...Y OUTPUT 1 Connect the connector to TCM Transmis sion connector is disconnected 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF 3 Measure the voltage between transmission connector and chassis ground Conn...

Page 3537: ...ead the current data of turbine speed sen sor 1 using the Subaru Select Monitor Ref to 5AT diag 16 READ CURRENT DATA OPER ATION Subaru Select Monitor NOTE The speed difference between front and rear w...

Page 3538: ...l is not operated at SPORT mode WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03287 STOP LIGHT SWITCH B65 BODY INTEGRATED UNIT B280 A B281 B B23 A20 A30 B159 2 1 3 4 8 9 7 6 5 2 1 4 3 TCM B54 BATTERY MAIN SBF SBF 2 No 8 E 8 7 6...

Page 3539: ...TCM 4 CHECK BODY INTEGRATED UNIT INPUT SIGNAL 1 Disconnect the connector from body inte grated unit 2 Depress the brake pedal 3 Measure the voltage between body inte grated unit connector and chassis...

Page 3540: ...en TROUBLE SYMPTOM Deterioration of shifting quality Driving performance is poor WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03445 T7 3 2 1 TCM TRANSMISSION FRONT VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR B55 B B54 A B11 B7 A16 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 19...

Page 3541: ...UTPUT 1 Connect the connector to TCM Transmis sion connector is disconnected 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF 3 Measure the voltage between transmission connector and chassis ground Connect...

Page 3542: ...ansmission ground and control valve body connector Connector terminal T15 No 15 Transmission ground T15 No 14 Transmission ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 8 Repair the short circuit...

Page 3543: ...fted down when climbing a hill WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03287 STOP LIGHT SWITCH B65 BODY INTEGRATED UNIT B280 A B281 B B23 A20 A30 B159 2 1 3 4 8 9 7 6 5 2 1 4 3 TCM B54 BATTERY MAIN SBF SBF 2 No 8 E 8 7 6 5...

Page 3544: ...ntact Replace the TCM Ref to 5AT 56 Transmission Con trol Module TCM 4 CHECK BODY INTEGRATED UNIT INPUT SIGNAL 1 Disconnect the connector from body inte grated unit 2 Measure the voltage between body...

Page 3545: ...REVERSE INCORRECT RATIO Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC L DTC P0734 GEAR 4 INCORRECT RATIO NOTE Refer to DTC P0736 for diagnostic procedure Ref to 5AT diag 53 DTC P0736 REVERSE...

Page 3546: ...the VDC memory clearance procedure of on board diag nostics system Ref to VDC diag 20 CLEAR MEMORY MODE OPERATION Subaru Se lect Monitor Does the displayed value of the Subaru Select Monitor change a...

Page 3547: ...th the following conditions Ref to 5AT diag 20 PROCEDURE Inspection Mode 1 Read the current data of throttle open ing angle using Subaru Select Monitor Ref to 5AT diag 16 READ CURRENT DATA OPERATION S...

Page 3548: ...to 5AT diag 16 READ CURRENT DATA OPERATION Subaru Select Monitor 3 Read the current data of L U solenoid target pressure using Subaru Select Moni tor Ref to 5AT diag 16 READ CUR RENT DATA OPERATION Su...

Page 3549: ...TION The output signal circuit of lock up solenoid is open or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM No lock up occurs After engine is warmed up WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03446 B54 23 B11 T4 TCM B54 B11 1 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15...

Page 3550: ...valve body connector 7 Measure the resistance between transmis sion connector and control valve body connec tor Connector terminal T4 No 20 T16 No 6 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair...

Page 3551: ...NG CONDITION Output signal circuit of line pressure solenoid is open or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM Excessive shift shock WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03447 B54 E 5 14 9 B11 TCM B54 B11 1 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 9 10...

Page 3552: ...y connector 7 Measure the resistance between transmis sion connector and control valve body connec tor Connector terminal T4 No 19 T16 No 7 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open c...

Page 3553: ...oil pressure TROUBLE SYMPTOM Locked to 4th or 5th gear WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03448 A A24 B17 17 3 9 11 B11 B54 B11 1 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 3 4 17 18 19 20 TRANSMISSION 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 1...

Page 3554: ...al B55 No 17 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 3 Repair the short circuit of harness between TCM and transmission con nector 3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR TCM USING SUBARU SELECT MO...

Page 3555: ...s the resistance less than 1 Replace the con trol valve body Ref to 5AT 53 Control Valve Body Replace the trans mission harness assembly 6 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TRANSMISSION AND CONTROL VALV...

Page 3556: ...ke solenoid is open or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM Locked to 4th or 5th gear WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03449 A A24 B11 B54 B11 1 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 3 4 17 18 19 20 TRANSMISSION 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10...

Page 3557: ...alve body connector 7 Measure the resistance between transmis sion connector and control valve body connec tor Connector terminal T4 No 17 T16 No 9 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair th...

Page 3558: ...lue of input clutch solenoid and oil pressure does not match TROUBLE SYMPTOM Locked to 4th gear WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03450 B54 B11 TCM B54 B11 1 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 3 4 17 18 19 20 TRANSMISS...

Page 3559: ...B54 No 6 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 3 Repair the short circuit of harness between TCM and transmission con nector 3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR TCM USING SUBARU SELECT MONITO...

Page 3560: ...4 No 11 T15 No 8 Is the resistance less than 1 Replace the con trol valve body Ref to 5AT 53 Control Valve Body Replace the trans mission harness assembly 6 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TRANSMISSIO...

Page 3561: ...1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 22 23 24 T4 T16 1 2 5 8 6 9 10 11 3 4 12 T16 7 E 5 14 8 18 Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION 1 Turn the ign...

Page 3562: ...connector and control valve body connector 4 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TRANSMISSION AND CONTROL VALVE BODY Measure the resistance between chassis ground and control valve body connector Connecto...

Page 3563: ...pressure does not match TROUBLE SYMPTOM Locked to 4th gear WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03452 A B11 B54 B11 1 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 3 4 17 18 19 20 TRANSMISSION 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13...

Page 3564: ...ssis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 3 Repair the short circuit of harness between TCM and transmission con nector 3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR TCM USING SUBARU SELECT MONITOR 1 Connect...

Page 3565: ...T4 No 4 T15 No 12 Is the resistance less than 1 Replace the con trol valve body Ref to 5AT 53 Control Valve Body Replace the trans mission harness assembly 6 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TRANSMISSI...

Page 3566: ...6 17 18 22 23 24 T4 T16 1 2 5 8 6 9 10 11 3 4 12 T16 7 15 E A5 A14 12 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 5 6 14 15 7 8 9 16 17 18 22 23 24 B55 B B54 B55 A B TCM Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR B...

Page 3567: ...r and control valve body connector 4 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TRANSMISSION AND CONTROL VALVE BODY Measure the resistance of harness connector between control valve body connector and chassis gr...

Page 3568: ...e of direct clutch solenoid and oil pressure does not match TROUBLE SYMPTOM Locked to 4th gear WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03454 B54 B11 TCM B54 B11 1 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 3 4 17 18 19 20 TRANSMISSI...

Page 3569: ...Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 3 Repair the short circuit of harness between TCM and transmission con nector 3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR TCM USING SUBARU SELECT MONITOR 1 Conn...

Page 3570: ...T4 No 10 T15 No 9 Is the resistance less than 1 Replace the con trol valve body Ref to 5AT 53 Control Valve Body Replace the trans mission harness assembly 6 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TRANSMISSI...

Page 3571: ...7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 22 23 24 T4 T16 1 2 5 8 6 9 10 11 3 4 12 T16 7 E 5 14 10 16 Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TCM AND TRANSMISSION 1 Turn the ignit...

Page 3572: ...nector and control valve body connector 4 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TRANSMISSION AND CONTROL VALVE BODY Measure the resistance between chassis ground and control valve body connector Connector t...

Page 3573: ...and oil pressure does not match TROUBLE SYMPTOM Locked to 2nd gear Engine brake does not function at 1st or 2nd of manual mode WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03456 B54 B11 TCM B54 B11 1 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 9 10...

Page 3574: ...ound Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 3 Repair the short circuit of harness between TCM and transmission con nector 3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR TCM USING SUBARU SELECT MONITOR 1 Connect all con...

Page 3575: ...stance less than 1 Replace the con trol valve body Ref to 5AT 53 Control Valve Body Replace the trans mission harness assembly 6 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TRANSMISSION AND CONTROL VALVE BODY 1 T...

Page 3576: ...of low coast brake solenoid is open or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM Locked to 2nd gear Engine brake does not function at 1st or 2nd of manual mode WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03457 B54 15 B11 TCM B54 B11 1 2 5 6 7 8...

Page 3577: ...CONTROL VALVE BODY 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from transmis sion 3 Remove the transmission connector from bracket 4 Lift up the vehicle and place it on rigid racks NO...

Page 3578: ...tering foreign matter dam aging connector body Repair the poor contact Go to step 8 8 CHECK AFTER REPAIR 1 Perform the Clear Memory Mode 2 Drive for a while read the DTC and check that there is no fau...

Page 3579: ...ort reverse inhibitor control circuit TROUBLE SYMPTOM Gear is shifted from N range to R range during driving at 20 km h 12MPH or more Gear can not be shifted from N range to R range though the vehicle...

Page 3580: ...stance of harness between TCM and shift lock solenoid connec tor Connector terminal B55 No 15 B116 No 3 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open circuit of harness between TCM and sh...

Page 3581: ...y clearance procedure of on board diag nostics system Ref to VDC diag 20 CLEAR MEMORY MODE OPERATION Subaru Se lect Monitor 4 Measure the voltage between TCM and chassis ground Connector terminal B55...

Page 3582: ...n be started on other than P or N range Engine can not be started on P or N range WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03489 B137 B136 B A B55 A31 19 ECM TCM B9 NA TB B55 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 5 6 14 15 7 8 9 16...

Page 3583: ...harness between TCM and transmission con nector or poor contact of connec tor 5 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN TCM AND ECM Measure the resistance of harness between TCM connector and chassis ground...

Page 3584: ...ION Malfunction of PVIGN power supply relay or open short circuit of PVIGN power supply circuit TROUBLE SYMPTOM Gear is not changed WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03294 8 7 10 B54 B357 TCM B54 B357 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3...

Page 3585: ...TCM Measure the resistance between TCM connec tor and PVIGN relay connector Connector terminal B54 No 10 B357 No 1 B54 No 7 B357 No 4 B54 No 8 B357 No 4 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Rep...

Page 3586: ...ONDITION Short circuit of back up light relay output circuit TROUBLE SYMPTOM Back up light does not illuminate in R range WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03458 11 B55 B356 TCM B55 BATTERY MAIN SBF SBF 8 IGNITION RE...

Page 3587: ...B55 No 11 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 4 Repair the short circuit of harness between TCM and transmission con nector 4 CHECK TCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1 Turn the ignition switch...

Page 3588: ...pen short circuit in back up light relay output circuit TROUBLE SYMPTOM Back up light does not illuminate in R range Back up light always illuminate except in R range WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03458 11 B55 B3...

Page 3589: ...tor terminal B55 No 11 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 4 Repair the short circuit of harness between TCM and transmission con nector 4 CHECK TCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1 Turn the igni...

Page 3590: ...9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 22 23 24 B11 1 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 3 4 17 18 19 20 6 B11 12 21 11 9 10 T15 8 10 9 1 2 3 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 15 16 T15 7 TRANSMISSION St...

Page 3591: ...TOR AND CON TROL VALVE BODY CONNECTOR Measure the resistance between transmission connector and control valve body connector Connector terminal B11 No 9 T15 No 10 B11 No 10 T15 No 9 B11 No 11 T15 No 8...

Page 3592: ...54 B55 B A A B A B A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A16 A7 B11 B12 TCM B54 B55 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 22 23 24 B11 B12 B18 B5 1 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 3 4 17 18 19 20 E REA...

Page 3593: ...ness used for both of turbine speed sensor 1 rear vehicle speed sensor Is the ground connecting har ness installed to transmission body correctly or the harness and connector terminals not damaged Go...

Page 3594: ...open or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM Tight corner braking phenomenon occurs Drivability getting worse WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03459 A5 A14 E B23 B11 B54 B11 1 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 3 4 17 18 19 20 TR...

Page 3595: ...ody connector 7 Measure the resistance between transmis sion connector and control valve body connec tor Connector terminal T4 No 8 T16 No 11 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 4 Repair the open...

Page 3596: ...essive shift shock Does not shift to 5th WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03460 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 5 6 14 15 7 8 9 16 17 18 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B54 B55 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15 16...

Page 3597: ...to TCM Transmis sion connector is disconnected 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF 3 Measure the voltage between transmission connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B11 No 7 Chassis g...

Page 3598: ...the resistance between transmis sion connector and control valve body connec tor Connector terminal T3 No 6 T6 No 3 T4 No 7 T5 No 15 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 7 Repair the open circuit...

Page 3599: ...rcuit to ATF temperature sensor 2 is open or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM Excessive shift shock WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03461 11 B54 B11 T4 TCM 13 B54 B11 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 22...

Page 3600: ...F drive the vehicle until the ATF reaches its operating temperature 5 Disconnect the connector from transmis sion 6 Measure the resistance between transmis sion connector terminals Connector terminal...

Page 3601: ...emove the oil pan and disconnect the connector from control valve body connector 7 Measure the resistance between transmis sion connector and control valve body connec tor Connector terminal T4 No 12...

Page 3602: ...rcuit to ATF temperature sensor 2 is open or shorted TROUBLE SYMPTOM Excessive shift shock WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03461 11 B54 B11 T4 TCM 13 B54 B11 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 22...

Page 3603: ...32 F drive the vehicle until the ATF reaches its operating temperature 5 Disconnect the connector from transmis sion 6 Measure the resistance between transmis sion connector terminals Connector termi...

Page 3604: ...aise all wheels off floor 5 Drain the ATF CAUTION Do not drain ATF until it cools down 6 Remove the oil pan and disconnect the connector from control valve body connector 7 Measure the resistance betw...

Page 3605: ...ON SENSOR PERFORMANCE PROBLEM DTC DETECTING CONDITION Lateral G sensor output voltage fault WIRING DIAGRAM AT 01634 A13 B359 2 1 3 B5 B6 G SENSOR B54 TCM A B55 B 2 3 1 B54 B359 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 19 20...

Page 3606: ...splay Is the value on the display 3 3 4 3 V with the lateral G sen sor inclined 90 to right Go to step 6 Replace the lat eral G sensor Ref to 5AT 57 Lateral G Sensor 6 CHECK OUTPUT OF LATERAL G SENSOR...

Page 3607: ...rminal B359 No 3 No 2 Is the voltage 3 3 4 3 V when lateral G sensor is inclined 90 to right Go to step 13 Replace the lat eral G sensor Ref to 5AT 57 Lateral G Sensor 13 CHECK LATERAL G SENSOR Measur...

Page 3608: ...AGRAM AT 01634 A13 B359 2 1 3 B5 B6 G SENSOR B54 TCM A B55 B 2 3 1 B54 B359 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 5 6 14 15 7 8 9 16 17 18 22 23 24 B55 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 22...

Page 3609: ...GROUND HARNESS 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from TCM 3 Measure the resistance between TCM con nector terminals Connector terminal B54 No 13 B55 No 6 Is the resistance b...

Page 3610: ...t Go to step 13 Replace the lat eral G sensor Ref to 5AT 57 Lateral G Sensor 13 CHECK TCM 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect all connectors 3 Perform the Clear Memory Mode 4 Perform the Inspe...

Page 3611: ...17 18 22 23 24 B55 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 22 23 24 A B Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK VEHICLE CONDITION Is the vehicle a model with VDC which has the VDC OFF switch on the in...

Page 3612: ...rom TCM 3 Measure the resistance between TCM con nector terminals Connector terminal B55 No 5 No 1 Is the resistance between 4 3 and 4 9 k Go to step 10 Repair the har ness connector between the later...

Page 3613: ...tion switch to ON 4 Measure the voltage between lateral G sensor connector terminals Connector terminal B359 No 3 No 2 Is the voltage 2 3 2 7 V when lateral G sensor is in hor izontal position Go to s...

Page 3614: ...TC P0756 3 DRIVING CHECK 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 After starting the engine again perform a drive check based on the Inspection Mode with the following conditions Ref to 5AT diag 20 PROCEDU...

Page 3615: ...NATION METER i10 i84 A B280 B B281 C A27 A26 B20 B30 4 3 TCM B54 BODY INTEGRATED UNIT SPORT BATTERY MAIN SBF SBF 6 IGNITION SWITCH No 5 E E i84 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 22 23 21 20 19 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 34...

Page 3616: ...aru Select Monitor Is OFF displayed Go to step 5 Replace the select lever assembly Ref to CS 19 Select Lever 5 CHECK DTC OF TCM Is DTC of Transmission Range Sensor Circuit PRNDL Input and AT CAN commu...

Page 3617: ...procedure Ref to 5AT diag 65 DTC P0756 SHIFT SOLENOID B PERFORMANCE OR STUCK OFF Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC AV DTC P1843 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR SWITCH D CIR CUIT...

Page 3618: ...ure WIRING DIAGRAM AT 03173 B40 B54 B55 B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 A B 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 10...

Page 3619: ...on Subaru Select Monitor Go to step 6 Go to step 5 5 CHECK COMMUNICATION OF SUBARU SE LECT MONITOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect the TCM connector 3 Disconnect the connector from ECM 4 T...

Page 3620: ...r the short cir cuit of harness between fuse No 12 and TCM Go to step 15 15 CHECK IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIR CUIT 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON engine OFF 2 Measure the ignition power supply voltage...

Page 3621: ...indicator light illuminate Go to step 4 Go to step 3 3 CHECK SPORT INDICATOR LIGHT 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Check the SPORT indicator light Ref to 5AT diag 24 INSPECTION SPORT Indicator Li...

Page 3622: ...e Code DTC Ref to 5AT diag 29 List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 2 Repair the trouble cause 3 Perform the Clear Memory Mode 4 Perform the Inspection Mode Ref to 5AT diag 20 Inspection Mode 5 Display...

Page 3623: ...vehicle with changing the gear from 1st to 5th 2 When driving the vehicle at 5th speed of D range set the gear to manual mode and drive the vehicle by downshifting using of the select lever from 5th 4...

Page 3624: ...ual mode Accelerator pedal position sensor Throttle position sensor Control cable adjustment Oil pressure switch 4 and direct clutch solenoid valve CAN communication signal Engine speed signal Turbine...

Page 3625: ...2 Fluid level and condition Excessive shock at lock up Accelerator pedal position sensor Throttle position sensor Control cable adjustment Engine speed signal CAN communication signal Turbine speed s...

Page 3626: ...l mode Fluid level and condition Vehicle speed sensor 1 and vehicle speed sensor 2 Oil pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve Line pressure Down switch signal CAN communication signal Accele...

Page 3627: ...Down switch signal CAN communication signal Accelerator pedal position sensor TCM power supply PVIGN relay Gear does not shift down to 2nd on D range or manual mode Fluid level and condition Vehicle s...

Page 3628: ...t clutch solenoid valve Line pressure Accelerator pedal position sensor Throttle position sensor Engine skids when shifting 4th of D range 3rd of D range or 4th of manual mode 3rd of manual mode Or sl...

Page 3629: ...ensor 1 2 Engine skids when start driving 1st the vehicle Or slip ping occurred Fluid level and condition Line pressure Accelerator pedal position sensor Throttle position sensor CAN communication sig...

Page 3630: ...t Vehicle can drive on P range Inhibitor switch Fluid level and condition Control cable adjustment Line pressure Vehicle can drive on N range Inhibitor switch Fluid level and condition Control cable a...

Page 3631: ...ed signal Turbine speed sensor 1 and turbine speed sensor 2 Lock up solenoid valve Line pressure Engine stalls when shifting to N D and R range Fluid level and condition Engine speed signal Turbine sp...

Page 3632: ...5AT diag 142 General Diagnostic Table AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSTICS asieps_tobira book 142...

Page 3633: ...Harness 33 8 Preparation for Overhaul 35 9 Transfer Case and Extension Case Assembly 36 10 Transfer Drive Gear 40 11 Transfer Driven Gear 42 12 Center Differential 44 13 Reverse Check Sleeve 45 14 Tr...

Page 3634: ...o not insert a pin of more than 0 65 mm 0 026 in diameter B INSPECTION 1 BATTERY Measure the battery voltage and specific gravity of the electrolyte Standard voltage 12 V or more Specific gravity 1 26...

Page 3635: ...of the select lever C PREPARATION TOOL 1 SPECIAL TOOL 2 GENERAL TOOL AT 02048 ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 18482AA010 CARTRIDGE Troubleshooting for electrical system 22771AA030 SUBARU...

Page 3636: ...N DIAGNOSTICS 4 Electrical Component Location A LOCATION 1 CONTROL MODULE 1 Engine control module ECM 3 Transmission control module TCM 4 Data link connector 2 SPORT indicator light AT warning light 5...

Page 3637: ...5AT diag 8 Electrical Component Location AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSTICS 1 AT 02051 AT 01470 2 AT 02053 3 4 AT 02052 5 AT 02054 asieps_tobira book 8...

Page 3638: ...1 Accelerator pedal position sensor 4 Rear vehicle speed sensor 7 Lateral G sensor 2 Front vehicle speed sensor 5 Turbine speed sensor 1 8 Turbine speed sensor 2 3 Inhibitor switch 6 ATF temperature...

Page 3639: ...5AT diag 10 Electrical Component Location AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSTICS 1 AT 00375 AT 03281 2 AT 01445 3 AT 03282 4 5 AT 01446 6 7 AT 01475 AT 01759 8 AT 01760 9 asieps_tobira book 10...

Page 3640: ...CS 3 SOLENOID 1 High low reverse clutch solenoid 4 Input clutch solenoid 7 Transfer solenoid 2 Direct clutch solenoid 5 Line pressure solenoid 8 Low coast brake solenoid 3 Front brake solenoid 6 Lock...

Page 3641: ...4 TCM 4 3 A20 A30 7 11 6 10 B15 B25 E B68 2 7 8 E 4 2 3 ST4 BODY INTEGRATED UNIT B280 B281 B A SELECT LEVER B116 ROLL CONNECTOR LH RH STEERING SHIFT SWITCH B54 1 2 7 8 9 5 6 3 4 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 1...

Page 3642: ...ND CIRCUIT OF MANUAL MODE SWITCH 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from manual mode switch 3 Measure the resistance of harness between manual mode switch connector and chass...

Page 3643: ...AL MODE SWITCH 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from manual mode switch 3 Measure the resistance of harness between manual mode switch connector and chassis ground Connecto...

Page 3644: ...nect the connector from the steering roll connector 3 Measure the resistance of harness between steering roll connector and chassis ground Connector terminal ST4 No 3 Chassis ground Is the resistance...

Page 3645: ...integrated unit connector and steering roll connector Connector terminal B281 No 25 B68 No 6 Is the resistance less than 1 Go to step 26 Repair the open circuit of harness between the body integrated...

Page 3646: ...AGRAM AT 03464 3 4 21 1 22 7 COMBINATION METER SPORT INDICATOR i10 JOINT CONNECTOR i28 2 8 A27 A26 B20 B30 BODY INTEGRATED UNIT i84 A B280 B 4 3 TCM B54 i10 i28 i84 B280 B54 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 2...

Page 3647: ...Shift the select lever to manual mode side and then shift down the select lever 6 Read the indicator Is gear position 1 and dis played Go to step 4 Replace the TCM Ref to 5AT 56 Transmission Con trol...

Page 3648: ...84 A B280 B 2 8 A26 A27 B20 B30 4 3 TCM B54 BODY INTEGRATED UNIT SPORT SHIFT BUZZER i10 i28 i84 B280 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1...

Page 3649: ...Ref to 5AT 56 Transmission Con trol Module TCM Go to step 4 4 CHECK BODY INTEGRATED UNIT 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to the data link connector 3 Turn the ig...

Page 3650: ...DIAGNOSTICS 7 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC A OPERATION Refer to Subaru Select Monitor for information about how to obtain and understand DTC Ref to 5AT diag 16 OPERATION Subaru Select Moni tor NOT...

Page 3651: ...he ST into the clutch disc and attach to the flywheel by inserting the ST end into pilot bear ing NOTE When installing the clutch disc be careful to attach in the correct direction ST 499747100 CLUTCH...

Page 3652: ...f clean ing fluid 2 Hardened facing Replace the clutch disc 3 Oil soakage on facing Replace the clutch disc and inspect the transmis sion front oil seal transmission case mating sur face engine rear o...

Page 3653: ...defective 1 Loose thrust rivet 2 Damaged or worn bearing contact area at the center of diaphragm spring 3 Damaged or worn disc contact surface of the pressure plate 4 Loose strap plate installation ar...

Page 3654: ...et 6 Disconnect the hose from the operating cylinder 7 Remove the bracket B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Bleed air from the clutch fluid Ref to CL 22 Clutch Fluid Air Blee...

Page 3655: ...s the brake pedal and clutch pedal and remove the pedal assembly B INSTALLATION 1 Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque T 18 N m 1 8 kgf m 13 0 ft lb CAUTION Always use a new clevi...

Page 3656: ...ove the clutch pedal pads in the lateral direction with a force of approximately 10 N 1 kgf 2 lbf to check that the clutch pedal deflection is within the service limit If it exceeds the service limit...

Page 3657: ...the direction that will shorten the push rod arrow direction shown in figure by 270 8 Check that the clevis pin moves smoothly by moving it in the left and right directions 9 Tighten the push rod lock...

Page 3658: ...e hydraulic clutch is properly adjusted if the fluid level does not increase or the push rod does not retract replace the master cylin der Ref to CL 18 Master Cylinder 14 Push the release lever until...

Page 3659: ...N 1 Install the master cylinder to the vehicle body and connect the clutch pipe to the master cylinder NOTE Check that the pipe is routed properly Tightening torque T1 15 N m 1 5 kgf m 10 8 ft lb T2 1...

Page 3660: ...and piston before installation Grease SILICONE GREASE G40M Part No 004404003 3 Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly Tightening torque 10 N m 1 0 kgf m 7 ft lb E INSPECTION If any damage defor...

Page 3661: ...0 992 Depth of rivet head mm in Standard 1 3 1 9 0 051 0 075 Limit of sinking 0 3 0 012 Deflection limit mm in 0 7 0 027 at R 110 4 33 1 0 0 039 at R 110 4 33 Clutch release lever ratio 1 6 Release be...

Page 3662: ...model 1 Dust cover 5 Release bearing Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Lever spring 6 Clutch cover T1 16 1 6 11 8 3 Pivot 7 Clutch disc T2 72 7 3 52 8 4 Release lever 8 Dual mass flywheel CL 00293 1...

Page 3663: ...r cylinder ASSY 5 Clutch hose Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Clutch pipe 6 Washer T1 8 0 8 5 8 3 Clamp 7 Operating cylinder T2 15 1 5 10 8 4 Bracket 8 Clip T3 18 1 8 13 0 T4 37 3 8 27 5 T5 25 2 5...

Page 3664: ...12 Cylinder boot 2 Reservoir tank 8 Return spring 3 Oil seal 9 Piston Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 4 Straight pin 10 Push rod ASSY T1 10 1 0 7 5 Master cylinder 11 Piston stop ring T2 46 6 4 75 3...

Page 3665: ...STEM 4 OPERATING CYLINDER 1 Push rod 5 Piston spring Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Boot 6 Operating cylinder T 8 0 8 5 8 3 Piston Non turbo model 7 Bleeder screw 4 Piston Turbo model CL 00491 T...

Page 3666: ...nder bracket 5 Brake pedal pad 16 Assist bushing 26 Lever 6 Brake pedal 17 Assist rod B 27 Clutch switch Clutch start 7 Clevis pin 18 Spring S 8 Brake pedal spring 19 Rod S Tightening torque N m kgf m...

Page 3667: ...of receiving burns from heated parts Use SUBARU genuine fluid grease etc or equivalent Do not mix fluid grease etc of different grades or manufacturers Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts an...

Page 3668: ...g tightening bolts etc 499747100 CLUTCH DISC GUIDE Used for installing the clutch disc to the flywheel 499057000 TORX PLUS Used for removing the flywheel dual mass fly wheel type TOOL NAME REMARKS Cir...

Page 3669: ...NOTE During bleeding operation keep the clutch reser voir tank filled with brake fluid to prevent entry of air Clutch pedal must be operated very slowly For convenience and safety it is advisable to h...

Page 3670: ...e air bleeder for 1 or 2 seconds Next with the bleeder closed slowly release the clutch pedal CAUTION Cover the bleeder with cloth to prevent brake fluid from being splashed on surrounding parts when...

Page 3671: ...achment bolts gradually Each bolt should be tightened to the specified torque in crisscross order Tightening torque 72 N m 7 3 kgf m 52 8 ft lb 3 Install the clutch disc and cover Ref to CL 10 INSTALL...

Page 3672: ...symptom of this trouble a harsh scratching noise occurs and control becomes difficult when shifting gears The symptom becomes more apparent when shifting into the 1st gear However because most trouble...

Page 3673: ...orrective action Insufficient pedal play Adjust the free play of the pedal Insufficient clutch pedal free play Adjust the free play of the pedal Excessively worn and damaged pedal shaft and or bushing...

Page 3674: ...ir work for satisfying our customers by keeping their vehicle in optimum condition When replacement of parts during repair work is needed be sure to use SUBARU genuine parts All information illustrati...

Page 3675: ...asieps_tobira book 2...

Page 3676: ...eneral Description 2 2 Wheel Alignment 6 3 Front Crossmember Support Plate 13 4 Front Stabilizer 14 5 Front Ball Joint 15 6 Front Arm 17 7 Front Strut 20 8 Front Crossmember 24 9 General Diagnostic Ta...

Page 3677: ...er and bearing Transmission main shaft spline Use grease con taining molybdenum disulphide 1 While pushing the release lever to the pivot and twisting it to both sides fit the lever spring onto the ra...

Page 3678: ...radial direction Radial direction stroke 1 6 mm 0 063 in 2 While applying force to the bearing in the rota tional direction check the bearing for smooth rota tion 3 Check for wear and damage at the be...

Page 3679: ...f the clutch pedal stroke is out of specification adjust the stroke Ref to CL 24 ADJUSTMENT Clutch Pedal 4 Connect the clutch switch connector 2 CLUTCH SWITCH CLUTCH START 1 Fully depress the clutch a...

Page 3680: ...or 2 Measure the resistance between terminal 1 and 2 of the switch Clutch switch Clutch start Clutch switch Cruise control D ADJUSTMENT 1 Loosen the lock nut of clutch switch clutch start 2 Fully depr...

Page 3681: ...ase KOPR KOTE Part No 003603001 to the contact point of the release lever and operating cyl inder Tightening torque T1 18 N m 1 8 kgf m 13 0 ft lb T2 37 N m 3 8 kgf m 27 5 ft lb 2 After bleeding air f...

Page 3682: ...on spring onto the piston NOTE The illustration below is for a non turbo model 2 Insert the piston into the operating cylinder 3 Attach the push rod to the boot 4 Attach the boot and push rod to the o...

Page 3683: ...AT Shift Lock Control System A LOCATION 1 TCM P range 4 Key cylinder with built in key warning switch 6 P range switch 2 Body integrated unit 7 Key lock solenoid 3 Stop light switch 5 Shift lock solen...

Page 3684: ...CS 7 AT Shift Lock Control System CONTROL SYSTEMS CS 00514 1 CS 00515 2 3 CS 00270 CS 00359 7 4 CS 00543 6 5 asieps_tobira book 7...

Page 3685: ...en select lever is in other positions than P range Shift lock solenoid signal i84 6 8 5 16 V when shift lock is released 0 V when shift lock is operating Key warning switch signal B281 7 9 16 V when k...

Page 3686: ...STEMS C WIRING DIAGRAM 1 Ignition switch 4 Body integrated unit 7 Shift lock solenoid 2 Stop light switch 5 TCM P range 8 P range switch 3 Key warning switch 6 Key lock solenoid 9 Battery CS 00363 OFF...

Page 3687: ...3 CHECK KEY INTERLOCK When the select lever is set to other than P range can the ignition switch turned to the LOCK position Go to step 4 Go to step 5 4 CHECK BACKUP POWER SUPPLY CIR CUIT Inspect the...

Page 3688: ...2 3 4 5 AND 6 Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK DTC OF BODY INTEGRATED UNIT Check DTC of body integrated unit Ref to LAN diag 12 OPERATION Subaru Select Monitor Is the DTC of power line dis played on body int...

Page 3689: ...20 21 CS 00675 Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF BODY INTE GRATED UNIT USING SUBARU SELECT MONITOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to the data link connec...

Page 3690: ...sure the resistance of harness between stop light switch and chassis ground Connector terminal B65 No 3 Chassis ground Is the resistance less than 1 Repair the short circuit of harness between the bod...

Page 3691: ...10 22 23 11 12 13 14 15 24 25 26 27 16 17 18 28 29 19 20 21 30 B280 C B352 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 8 B53 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 No 8 E B281 B B280 C C23 C1 B6 B ACC IG ACC OFF ON A1...

Page 3692: ...rake pedal 2 Measure the voltage between body inte grated unit and chassis ground Connector terminal B281 No 23 Chassis ground Is the voltage more than 9 V Go to step 5 Repair the open or short circui...

Page 3693: ...15 24 25 26 27 16 17 18 28 29 19 20 21 30 B CS 00677 B38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 B75 1 2 B76 1 2 i84 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26...

Page 3694: ...f harness between key warning switch and chassis ground Connector terminal B350 No 3 Chassis ground Is the voltage 9 16 V Go to step 5 Repair the open or short circuit of har ness between bat tery and...

Page 3695: ...switch 12 CHECK P RANGE SWITCH 1 Shift the select lever to other than P range 2 Measure the resistance between P range switch connector terminals Terminals No 2 No 1 Is the resistance more than 1 M G...

Page 3696: ...DOHC 3 0 L model Ref to EX H6DO 7 REMOVAL Rear Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H6DO 9 REMOVAL Muffler 6 Remove the heat shield cover 7 Remove the cable from arm assembly 8 Raise the pawl of clamp to remove th...

Page 3697: ...ns 12 Install the heat shield cover 13 Install the rear exhaust pipe and muffler SOHC model Ref to EX H4SO 8 INSTALLATION Rear Ex haust Pipe Ref to EX H4SO 10 INSTALLA TION Muffler DOHC turbo model Re...

Page 3698: ...ide plate upper from plate lower 8 Remove the connector from the guide plate up per 9 Remove the sheet and remove the shift lock so lenoid assembly 10 Remove the switch assembly 11 Remove the check pl...

Page 3699: ...htening torque Ref to CS 2 AT SELECT LEVER COM PONENT General Description Connect the switch terminal to the connector 4 After completing installation shift the select le ver from P range to D range t...

Page 3700: ...Remove the steering wheel Ref to PS 14 RE MOVAL Steering Wheel 5 Remove the cover from steering wheel 6 Remove the AT steering shift switch mounting screws from the left and right side one on each si...

Page 3701: ...t switch 2 SHIFT DOWN SWITCH CONTINUITY CHECK 1 Press the shift down switch 2 Measure the resistance between the shift switch connector terminals Terminals No 3 No 2 Is the resistance less than 10 Go...

Page 3702: ...L Muffler DOHC 3 0 L model Ref to EX H6DO 4 REMOVAL Front Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H6DO 7 REMOVAL Rear Ex haust Pipe Ref to EX H6DO 9 REMOVAL Muffler 6 Remove the center and rear exhaust pipes and the m...

Page 3703: ...t the cable from arm assembly 11 Raise the pawl of clamp to remove the cable from bracket 12 Remove the select cable from plate assembly A Select cable B Plate ASSY C Bracket A Select cable B Plate AS...

Page 3704: ...18 1 ft lb 4AT 5AT 4 Install the washer and snap pin to range select lever 4AT 5AT 5 Install new clamp paying attention to the install ing direction A Select cable B Plate ASSY A Select cable B Plate...

Page 3705: ...ter rear exhaust pipes and the muffler DOHC turbo model Ref to EX H4DOTC 9 INSTALLATION Center Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H4DOTC 12 IN STALLATION Rear Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H4DOTC 13 INSTALLATION Muffler...

Page 3706: ...the select lever pushed towards the rear of the vehicle turn the adjustment nut B until it just contacts the connector Then loosen the nut for 1 2 turn 6 Set a spanner wrench to adjusting nut B so tha...

Page 3707: ...from the vehicle body 9 Lift up the vehicle 10 Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler SOHC model Ref to EX H4SO 8 REMOVAL Rear Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H4SO 10 REMOVAL Muf fler DOHC turbo model Ref to...

Page 3708: ...smission and secure with a spring pin 2 Insert the gear shift lever from the room side NOTE Insert the rod and the stay and then temporarily set them onto the transmission mount 3 Lift up the vehicle...

Page 3709: ...Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H4DOTC 13 IN STALLATION Muffler DOHC 3 0 L model Ref to EX H6DO 7 INSTALLATION Rear Ex haust Pipe Ref to EX H6DO 9 INSTALLA TION Muffler 9 Install the plate assembly to the vehi...

Page 3710: ...stay 5 Separate the gear shift lever and the stay 6 Remove the boot bushing and snap ring from gear shift lever 7 Remove the spring pin and then remove the bushing and snap ring A Lock wire A Rod B Le...

Page 3711: ...KOTE Part No 003603001 or equivalent to each part 1 Mount the bushing and cushion rubber to the stay 2 Install the bushing and spacer to boss 3 Using new self locking nuts install the boss to the joi...

Page 3712: ...ever 6 Apply sufficient grease into boss and then install the gear shift lever to the stay 7 Install the washer and snap ring 8 Insert the gear shift lever and rod into boot hole 9 Install the rod Tig...

Page 3713: ...replace faulty parts Compare the removed parts with new parts to judge if there are damages or not 2 Check the swing torque of rod linked with the gear shift lever If the torque exceeds the specifica...

Page 3714: ...tor bulb 4 Remove the grip 5 Remove the indicator cover 6 Disconnect the connector from the guide plate upper 7 Shift the select lever to the N range and then re move the detent spring 8 Remove the sw...

Page 3715: ...er with a thin tip B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal NOTE Refer to COMPONENT for each tightening torque Ref to CS 2 AT SELECT LEVER COM PONENT General Description Connect the P ra...

Page 3716: ...the solenoid Terminals No 3 No 4 Does the shift lock solenoid operate normally Go to step 3 Replace the shift lock solenoid 3 CHECK P RANGE SWITCH 1 Move the select lever to P range 2 Measure the resi...

Page 3717: ...auge 2 Lift up the vehicle 3 Drain transmission gear oil completely CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself because trans mission gear oil becomes extremely hot after running NOTE Tighten the drain pl...

Page 3718: ...es from the extension case and transfer case B INSTALLATION 1 Install the bearing outer races to extension case and transfer case 2 Install the transfer driven gear 3 Install the transfer case and the...

Page 3719: ...ton 2 Using ST install the roller bearing transfer case side ST 499757002 INSTALLER NOTE Do not apply pressure in excess of 10 kN 1 ton 1 1 US ton 1 0 Imp ton E INSPECTION 1 Bearing Replace the bearin...

Page 3720: ...EX H4SO 8 REMOVAL Rear Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H4SO 10 REMOVAL Muf fler 4 Remove the heat shield cover If equipped 5 Remove the propeller shaft Ref to DS 10 RE MOVAL Propeller Shaft 6 Using the ST remo...

Page 3721: ...on a Defective pitching stopper adjustment Adjust b Loose engine mounting bolts Tighten or replace c Worn fork shifter broken shifter fork rail spring Replace d Worn or damaged ball bearing Replace e...

Page 3722: ...es Troubles of the differential and hypoid gear always appear as noise problems Therefore noise is the first indication of trouble However noises from the engine muffler tire exhaust gas bearing body...

Page 3723: ...5MT 80 General Diagnostic Table MANUAL TRANSMISSION AND DIFFERENTIAL asieps_tobira book 80...

Page 3724: ...Cover 10 3 Flywheel 13 4 Release Bearing and Lever 14 5 Operating Cylinder 16 6 Master Cylinder 18 7 Clutch Pipe and Hose 20 8 Clutch Fluid 21 9 Clutch Fluid Air Bleeding 22 10 Clutch Pedal 23 11 Clut...

Page 3725: ...ase knock pin into the knock pin hole of the needle bearing outer race NOTE Align the end face of the seal with surface A when installing the oil seal 3 Install the drive pinion assembly Ref to 5MT 57...

Page 3726: ...e mark the en gaging points on the splines beforehand Do not reuse the ball bearing ST1 499757002 INSTALLER ST2 498077400 SYNCHRO CONE REMOV ER 6 Using ST1 and ST2 remove the rest of the parts NOTE Wh...

Page 3727: ...ing race onto trans mission main shaft using ST1 ST2 and press NOTE Do not apply pressure in excess of 10 kN 1 ton 1 1 US ton 1 0 Imp ton ST1 899714110 REMOVER ST2 499877000 RACE 4 5 INSTALLER 4 Insta...

Page 3728: ...on Face the thrust washer in the correct direction ST1 899714110 REMOVER ST2 499877000 RACE 4 5 INSTALLER 7 Install the bearing onto the synchro cone 8 Install the baulk ring and scynchro cone onto th...

Page 3729: ...or abnor mally worn When the inner wall is abnormally worn 3 Gear Replace gear with new part if its tooth surfaces are broken damaged or excessively worn Correct or replace if the cone that contacts t...

Page 3730: ...in case sur face and select a suitable plate in the following ta ble NOTE Before measuring tap the end of main shaft with a plastic hammer lightly in order to make the clear ance zero between the main...

Page 3731: ...t to damage the oil seal of retainer 7 Remove the differential side retainers using ST ST 499787000 WRENCH ASSY B INSTALLATION 1 Install the differential side retainers using ST ST 499787000 WRENCH AS...

Page 3732: ...assem bly toward hypoid driven gear side ST 899904100 REMOVER 3 Pull out the pinion shaft and remove the differ ential bevel pinion bevel gear and washer 4 Using the ST remove the roller bearing ST 8...

Page 3733: ...ent gear teeth during measurement ST1 498247001 MAGNET BASE ST2 498247100 DIAL GAUGE Standard backlash 0 13 0 18 mm 0 0051 0 0071 in 3 Align the pinion shaft and differential case with each hole and d...

Page 3734: ...tial gear in the follow ing cases When the hypoid drive gear and drive pinion shaft tooth surfaces are damaged excessively worn or seized When the roller bearing on the drive pinion shaft is worn or d...

Page 3735: ...TE If the backlash is outside the specified range ad just it by turning the side retainer in the right side case 3 TOOTH CONTACT OF HYPOID GEAR Check tooth contact of hypoid gear as follows Ap ply a t...

Page 3736: ...ace is slightly shifted toward the toe side under a no load con dition When driving it moves towards the heel side Face contact Checking item Backlash is too large Contact pattern Corrective action Re...

Page 3737: ...ight adjusting washer according to the proce dures for moving the drive pinion closer to the driv en gear Heel contact outside end contact Check item Teeth contact area is too small Contact pattern Co...

Page 3738: ...st Pipe 4 Remove the center exhaust pipe Turbo mod el Ref to EX H4DOTC 8 REMOVAL Center Exhaust Pipe 5 Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler 6 Remove the heat shield cover If equipped 7 Set the tra...

Page 3739: ...LATION Front Ex haust Pipe 6 Install the center exhaust pipe Turbo model Ref to EX H4DOTC 9 INSTALLATION Center Exhaust Pipe 7 Install the rear exhaust pipe and muffler 8 Lower the vehicle 9 Connect t...

Page 3740: ...r Hypoid Gear ratio 3 900 4 111 4 111 4 444 Front differential Type and number of gear Straight bevel gear Bevel pinion 2 Bevel gear 2 Center differential Type and number of gear Straight bevel gear B...

Page 3741: ...washer No 2 Part number Thickness mm in 803025059 3 850 0 1516 803025054 4 000 0 1575 803025058 4 150 0 1634 Reverse shifter lever Part number Mark Remarks 32820AA070 7 Further from case wall 32820AA0...

Page 3742: ...Arm stops closer to 5th gear 32189AA010 1 31 Arm stops closer to 5th gear 33189AA020 2 34 Arm stops in the cen ter 32189AA030 3 37 Arm stops closer to reverse gear 32189AA040 4 40 Arm stops closer to...

Page 3743: ...uter 30 to ball bearing clearance 0 01 0 15 mm 0 0004 0 0059 in Washer 38 1 50 t Part number Thickness mm in Part number Thickness mm in 803038021 0 925 0 950 0 0364 0 0374 803038023 1 025 1 050 0 040...

Page 3744: ...que N m kgf m ft lb 2 Gasket 7 Pitching stopper bracket T1 44 4 5 33 Aluminum gasket 3 Drain plug 8 Oil level gauge Non turbo model 70 7 1 51 Copper gasket 4 Harness bracket Non turbo model 9 Oil leve...

Page 3745: ...ANSMISSION AND DIFFERENTIAL Transmission case tightening torque Bolt No Bolt size mm Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 5 15 8 25 2 6 18 5 1 4 10 39 4 0 28 9 16 17 MT 00003 9 5 7 16 17 3 4 11 1 2 6 8 1...

Page 3746: ...hing 33 Inner baulk ring Turbo model 7 Key 21 3rd 4th driven gear 34 Synchro cone Turbo model 8 Woodruff key 22 Driven pinion shim 35 Outer baulk ring Turbo model 9 Drive pinion collar 23 Roller beari...

Page 3747: ...5 Straight pin 8 Outer baulk ring 21 Main shaft rear plate 36 Reverse idler gear 9 3rd 4th coupling sleeve 22 5th drive gear 37 Washer 10 3rd 4th synchronizer hub 23 5th baulk ring 38 Taper roller bea...

Page 3748: ...raight pin 10 Interlock plunger 17 Reverse fork rod arm 4 Reverse fork rod 11 1st 2nd fork rod 18 Reverse shifter lever 5 Checking ball plug 12 3rd 4th shifter fork 6 Gasket 13 1st 2nd shifter fork Ti...

Page 3749: ...seal 23 Back up light switch 9 Snap ring Inner 24 Roller bearing Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 10 Reverse check plate 25 Transfer driven gear T1 6 4 0 65 4 7 11 Reverse check spring 26 Roller bea...

Page 3750: ...ner lock plate 2 Hypoid driven gear 8 Roller bearing 3 Pinion shaft 9 Differential case Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 4 Straight pin 10 Oil seal T1 25 2 5 18 1 5 Washer 11 Differential side retain...

Page 3751: ...cer 8 Center crossmember T1 7 5 0 76 5 5 3 Cushion rubber 9 Rear plate T2 35 3 6 26 4 Front plate 10 Front crossmember T3 50 5 1 37 5 Rear cushion rubber 11 Dynamic damper T4 58 5 9 43 6 Rear crossmem...

Page 3752: ...grades or manufacturers Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points Apply gear oil onto sliding or revolving...

Page 3753: ...DIFFER ENTIAL BEARING REMOVER Used for removing the center differential cover ball bearing 498147001 DEPTH GAUGE Used for adjusting the main shaft axial end play 498247001 MAGNET BASE Used for measur...

Page 3754: ...37000 TRANSMISSION HOLDER Used for removing and installing the lock nut of the transmission main shaft 499277100 BUSHING 1 2 INSTALLER Used for installing the 1st driven gear thrust plate and the 1st...

Page 3755: ...erential side retainer 499827000 PRESS Used for installing the speedometer oil seal when attaching the speedometer cable to the transmission 499857000 5TH DRIVEN GEAR REMOVER Used for removing the 5th...

Page 3756: ...ANSMISSION STAND SET Used for disassembling and assembling the transmission 499987003 SOCKET WRENCH 35 Used for removing and installing the driven pin ion lock nut and main shaft lock nut 499987300 SO...

Page 3757: ...transmission main shaft and drive pinion parts 899884100 HOLDER Used for tightening the lock nut on the sleeve 899904100 REMOVER Used for removing and installing the straight pin 899988608 SOCKET WREN...

Page 3758: ...ven gears to the driven shaft 498057300 INSTALLER Used for installing the extension oil seal 498255400 PLATE Used for measuring backlash 498077400 SYNCHRONIZER CONE REMOVER Used for removing the synch...

Page 3759: ...ion end play and drive pinion height 398177700 INSTALLER Used for installing the bearing cone of transfer driven gear transfer case side Used for installing the ball bearing of the trans fer drive gea...

Page 3760: ...LLER Used for installing the differential side retainer oil seal 398791700 STRAIGHT PIN REMOVER Used for installing and removing the straight pin TOOL NAME REMARKS Circuit tester Used for measuring re...

Page 3761: ...ansfer case together with the ex tension case assembly 4 Remove the shifter arm 5 Remove the extension case assembly B INSTALLATION 1 Install the center differential and transfer driven gear into the...

Page 3762: ...E ST thickness 15 mm 0 59 in 12 Calculate the space U using the following equation U S T 30 mm 1 18 in Thickness of ST 13 Select a suitable washer in the following table Standard clearance 0 15 0 35 m...

Page 3763: ...nstall the extension assembly into the transfer case Tightening torque 40 N m 4 1 kgf m 29 7 ft lb 17 Attach the shifter arm to transfer case 18 Hang the shifter arm on 3rd 4th fork rod 19 Install the...

Page 3764: ...al D ASSEMBLY 1 EXTENSION CASE 1 Using the ST install the oil seal to the extension case Ref to 5MT 31 Oil Seal NOTE Use a new oil seal 2 Install the shift bracket to extension case Tightening torque...

Page 3765: ...on turbo model 6 Remove the intercooler Turbo model Ref to IN H4DOTC 12 REMOVAL Intercooler 7 Disconnect the connector back up light switch and neutral position switch Non turbo model Turbo model 8 Re...

Page 3766: ...uipped 18 Remove the propeller shaft Ref to DS 10 REMOVAL Propeller Shaft 19 Remove the gear shift rod and the stay from the transmission 1 Disconnect the stay from the transmission 2 Remove the rod f...

Page 3767: ...ubber B INSTALLATION 1 Install the rear cushion rubber to the transmis sion assembly Tightening torque 35 N m 3 6 kgf m 26 ft lb 2 Install the transmission onto the engine 1 Lift up the transmission g...

Page 3768: ...tall the front drive shaft into the transmis sion 11 Replace the differential side retainer oil seal Ref to 5MT 32 REPLACEMENT Differential Side Retainer Oil Seal ST 18675AA000 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL S...

Page 3769: ...ATION Cen ter Exhaust Pipe 21 Install the operating cylinder Tightening torque 37 N m 3 8 kgf m 27 5 ft lb 22 Connect the following connectors 1 Transmission ground cable Tightening torque 13 N m 1 3...

Page 3770: ...e 44 N m 4 5 kgf m 33 ft lb Aluminum gas ket 70 N m 7 1 kgf m 51 ft lb Copper gasket 3 Attach the transmission to ST ST 499937100 TRANSMISSION STAND 4 Apply oil to rotating parts before assembly 5 All...

Page 3771: ...ral Also when pulling out the straight pin remove it to ward the inside of case so that it does not hit against the case ST 398791700 STRAIGHT PIN REMOVER 11 Drive out the straight pin by tapping with...

Page 3772: ...main shaft assembly Ref to 5MT 51 INSTALLATION Main Shaft As sembly for Single range 12 Install the drive pinion shaft assembly Ref to 5MT 57 INSTALLATION Drive Pinion Shaft As sembly 13 Install the t...

Page 3773: ...3 mm 0 020 0 051 in Clearance B 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 0 4 1 4 mm 0 016 0 055 in A 3rd drive gear B Coupling sleeve C 4th drive gear 3rd 4th shifter fork Part number Mark Remarks 32810AA061 1 Approaches 4th...

Page 3774: ...harness B INSTALLATION 1 BACK UP LIGHT SWITCH AND NEU TRAL POSITION SWITCH 1 Install the back up light switch and neutral posi tion switch with the harness Tightening torque 32 3 N m 3 3 kgf m 23 8 ft...

Page 3775: ...ht System 2 NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector of neutral position switch 3 Measure the resistance between neutral posi tion switch terminals 4 Replac...

Page 3776: ...ans mission main case RH without shim and tighten the bearing mounting bolts 4 Inspection and adjustment of ST NOTE Loosen the two bolts and adjust so that the scale indicates 0 5 correctly when the p...

Page 3777: ...se and Extension Case Assembly 13 Install the manual transmission assembly to the vehicle Ref to 5MT 24 Manual Transmission Assembly C DISASSEMBLY NOTE Attach a cloth to the end of driven shaft on the...

Page 3778: ...6 Remove the woodruff key 7 Remove the roller bearing and 3rd 4th driven gear using ST1 and ST2 ST1 499757002 INSTALLER ST2 899714110 REMOVER 8 Remove the key 9 Remove the 2nd driven gear inner baulk...

Page 3779: ...INSTALLER ST2 899714110 REMOVER D ASSEMBLY 1 Install the sleeve and hub assembly by matching the alignment marks NOTE Use the new gear and hub assembly if replacing the gear or hub 2 Install the washe...

Page 3780: ...499277200 INSTALLER ST2 499587000 INSTALLER 6 Install the 2nd driven gear inner baulk ring syn chro cone and outer baulk ring and insert them onto driven shaft 7 After installing key on driven shaft...

Page 3781: ...ations Using a spring balancer check that starting torque of the roller bearing is 0 1 to 1 5 N 0 01 to 0 15 kgf 0 02 to 0 33 Ibf 11 Install the roller bearing onto drive pinion NOTE When installing t...

Page 3782: ...ation be fore the drive pinion assembly is disassembled In this case because a preload is working on the bearing its rotation feels like it is slightly dragging unlike other bearings When bearing has...

Page 3783: ...eal if the lip is deformed hard ened worn or defective in any way 7 O ring Replace the O ring if the sealing face is deformed hardened damaged worn or defective in any way F ADJUSTMENT 1 THRUST BEARIN...

Page 3784: ...arting torque 6 Recheck that the starting torque is within the specified range then crimp the lock nut at four po sitions A Adjusting washer No 1 B Adjusting washer No 2 Adjusting washer No 2 Part num...

Page 3785: ...l NOTE Be sure to replace the differential side retainer oil seal with a new part after the procedure for remov ing the front drive shaft from transmission When removing the part by prying with a flat...

Page 3786: ...3 Install the extension case assembly 4 Install the transfer case and the extension case assembly Ref to 5MT 36 INSTALLATION Transfer Case and Extension Case Assembly 5 Install the back up light switc...

Page 3787: ...ation 2 Drive gear If the drive gear tooth surface and shaft are exces sively broken or damaged replace the drive gear 3 Measure the clearance between snap ring and inner race of ball bearing with a t...

Page 3788: ...ure them with the straight pin NOTE Be sure to install the reverse idler shaft from rear side 2 Check and adjust clearance between the re verse idler gear and the timing case wall surface Ref to 5MT 7...

Page 3789: ...r and shaft for dam age Replace if it is damaged D ADJUSTMENT 1 Select the appropriate reverse shifter lever from the table below and adjust until the clearance be tween the reverse idler gear and tra...

Page 3790: ...mbly Ref to 5MT 36 INSTALLA TION Transfer Case and Extension Case Assembly 5 Install the back up light switch and the neutral position switch Ref to 5MT 33 INSTALLATION Switches and Harness 6 Install...

Page 3791: ...k ball 5 Remove the reverse check sleeve B INSTALLATION 1 Install the reverse check sleeve Tightening torque 6 4 N m 0 65 kgf m 4 7 ft lb 2 Install the ball spring washer and plug to the transfer case...

Page 3792: ...to the reverse check sleeve NOTE Be sure to position the bent section of reverse check spring to fit in the groove of the check cam 2 Hook the curved section of the reverse check spring over the reve...

Page 3793: ...ween the sleeve assembly and the case to adjust the clearance CAUTION Be careful not to damage the O ring when plac ing shims NOTE When the shim is removed the neutral position will move closer to rev...

Page 3794: ...bolt 5 Remove the main shaft rear plate 6 Separate the transmission case into the right and left cases by loosening the coupling bolts and nuts 7 Remove the drive pinion shaft assembly from the left s...

Page 3795: ...25 N m 2 5 kgf m 18 1 ft lb 10 mm bolt 39 N m 4 0 kgf m 28 9 ft lb 7 Tighten the ball bearing mounting bolts Tightening torque 30 N m 3 1 kgf m 22 1 ft lb 8 Backlash adjustment of the hypoid gear and...

Page 3796: ...nd adjust backlash and tooth contact of the hypoid gear Ref to 5MT 69 INSPECTION Front Differential Assembly 17 After checking the tooth contact of the hypoid gears remove the lock plate Then loosen t...

Page 3797: ...inate Adjust the select cable and inhibitor switch or inspect the circuit AT shift lock system does not operate normally Adjust the select cable and inhibitor switch or inspect the circuit Manual mode...

Page 3798: ...CS 42 General Diagnostic Table CONTROL SYSTEMS asieps_tobira book 42...

Page 3799: ...ear Vehicle Speed Sensor 53 16 Torque Converter Turbine Speed Sensor 54 17 Control Valve Strainer 55 18 Control Valve Body 57 19 Air Bleeding of Control Valve 60 20 ATF Filter 61 21 Transmission Contr...

Page 3800: ...CS 33 Body Integrated Unit CONTROL SYSTEMS 7 Body Integrated Unit A NOTE Refer to Body Integrated Unit for removal and in stallation procedure Ref to SL 55 Body Integrat ed Unit asieps_tobira book 33...

Page 3801: ...COMPONENT 1 AT SELECT LEVER Item Specification Swing torque of rod against lever N kgf lb 3 7 0 38 0 84 or less CS 00685 36 35 39 37 38 30 3 4 5 8 34 17 16 14 15 13 10 9 11 12 18 6 7 1 2 T1 T4 T3 T1 T...

Page 3802: ...e 6 Indicator bulb 22 Shaft 38 Clamp 7 Valve harness 23 Washer 39 Nut A 8 Blind 24 Bushing A 40 Bushing 9 Detent spring 25 Arm ASSY 10 Spring washer 26 Bushing plate Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb...

Page 3803: ...tor assembly 14 O ring 4 24 Boss 5 Plate ASSY 15 Boot 25 Bushing 6 Lever 16 Spring pin 26 Self locking nut 7 Bushing 17 Joint 8 Lock wire 18 Rod Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 9 Snap ring 19 Spacer...

Page 3804: ...nt grades or manufacturers Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points Apply grease onto sliding or revolving...

Page 3805: ...sensor Do not apply excessive force to the sensor harness B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION Be careful not to damage the sensor Tightening torque Sensor 7 5 N m 0 76 kgf...

Page 3806: ...t panel lower cover 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON 3 Set the Subaru Select Monitor switch to ON 4 Set the Subaru Select Monitor to Brake Control mode 5 When the Function check sequence is select ed...

Page 3807: ...NTROL ABS00561 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 24 25 28 27 26 V max 4 km h 2 5 MPH OFF 16 17 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 21 19 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 15 19 18 19 V max 10...

Page 3808: ...pletion of ABS sequence control 4 When a malfunction is detected 1 All wheel speed 11 RR compression valve 20 0 6 seconds 2 Ignition key 12 RL decompression valve 21 0 4 seconds 3 ABS warning light 13...

Page 3809: ...or gap for reference Front 0 77 1 43 mm 0 030 0 056 in Rear 0 64 1 56 mm 0 025 0 061 in Identifications of har ness marks color Front RH K1 White LH K2 Yellow Rear RH K5 White LH K6 Yellow G sensor G...

Page 3810: ...ENSOR 1 G sensor 4 Rear ABS wheel speed sensor LH Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Front ABS wheel speed sensor LH 5 Hub unit bearing T1 7 5 0 76 5 5 3 Front housing 6 Magnetic encoder T2 33 3 3 24...

Page 3811: ...moval installation disassembly and replacement Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv ing Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts t...

Page 3812: ...r the electrical system 22771AA030 SUBARU SELECT MONITOR KIT Troubleshooting for the electrical system TOOL NAME REMARKS Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance voltage and current Pressure gauge...

Page 3813: ...Bearing for installation because the rear magnetic encoder is integrated with rear hub unit bearing Ref to DS 20 INSTALLATION Rear Hub Unit Bearing C INSPECTION Visually check the magnetic encoder pa...

Page 3814: ...to the BRAKE CONTROL mode 4 Set the display in the Current Data Display Save mode 5 Read the G sensor output value Is the value 1 2 1 2 m s2 when the vehicle is in horizon tal position Go to step 2 R...

Page 3815: ...trol Module I O Signal 12 6 Subaru Select Monitor 15 7 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 23 8 Inspection Mode 24 9 Clear Memory Mode 25 10 ABS Warning Light Brake Warning Light Illumination Pattern 26...

Page 3816: ...ness bracket 5 Remove the bolts which secure the sensor har ness to the front strut 6 Remove the front ABS wheel speed sensor from housing CAUTION Be careful not to damage the sensor Do not apply exce...

Page 3817: ...PEED SENSOR IN SPECTION Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor 2 ABS WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 1 Check the tip of the ABS wheel speed sensor for foreign particles or damage If necessary clean the tip or replace the AB...

Page 3818: ...o not drop or bump the ABSCM H U Do not turn the ABSCM H U upside down or place it sideways for storage Be careful not to let foreign matter enter into ABSCM H U Be careful that no water enters the co...

Page 3819: ...an dard values Depress the brake pedal and check that the kick back is normal and tightness is nor mal 8 Disconnect the pressure gauges from FL and FR caliper bodies 9 Install the air bleeder screws o...

Page 3820: ...ollowing work sequence 1 The FL wheel performs decompression hold and compression in sequence and subse quently the FR wheel repeats the cycle 2 The RR wheel performs decompression hold and compressio...

Page 3821: ...ing TORX BIT E5 remove the four screws of ABSCM NOTE These screws cannot be reused 5 Slowly pull out the ABSCM upward from the H U NOTE To prevent damaging of coil section remove the ABSCM straight up...

Page 3822: ...earing for installation be cause the front magnetic encoder is integrated with front hub bearing Ref to DS 18 INSTALLATION Front Hub Unit Bearing C INSPECTION Visually check the magnetic encoder for a...

Page 3823: ...otor and remove the rotor B INSTALLATION 1 Install in the reverse order of removal 2 Adjust the parking brake Ref to PB 8 AD JUSTMENT Parking Brake Assembly Rear Disc Brake C INSPECTION 1 Check the re...

Page 3824: ...and then measure the disc rotor thickness If the thickness of disc ro tor exceeds the service limit replace with a new disc rotor A B BR 00036 Standard Limit Disc outer dia Disc rotor thickness A Soli...

Page 3825: ...the booster is dropped replace it Use special care when handling the operating rod If excessive force is applied to the operating rod the angle may change by 3 and it may result in damage to power pi...

Page 3826: ...AUTION Be careful not to rotate the stop light switch Stop light switch clearance A 0 3 mm 0 012 in 9 Apply grease to the operating rod connecting pin to prevent it from wear 10 Bleed air from brake s...

Page 3827: ...3 As the engine starts the brake pedal should move slowly toward the floor If the pedal height does not change the brake booster is faulty NOTE If faulty check precisely with gauges Loaded air tightne...

Page 3828: ...the vacuum pressure drop within 15 seconds af ter stopping the engine is less than 3 3 kPa 25 mmHg 0 98 inHg the function of brake booster is normal If defective refer to AIR TIGHTNESS CHECK Ref to B...

Page 3829: ...replace the rear brake and cable system 3 Excessive pedal stroke 1 Entry of air into the hydraulic mechanism Bleed air 2 Excessive play in the master cylinder push rod Adjust 3 Fluid leakage from the...

Page 3830: ...PARKING BRAKE PB Page 1 General Description 2 2 Parking Brake Lever 4 3 Parking Brake Cable 5 4 Parking Brake Assembly Rear Disc Brake 6 5 General Diagnostic Table 9 asieps_tobira book 1...

Page 3831: ...5 8 ft lb C INSPECTION 1 If the stop light switch does not operate properly or if it is not secured at the specified position re place with a new part Specified position L 2 mm 0 079 in 2 Measure the...

Page 3832: ...3 mm 0 012 in Then tighten the lock nut Tightening torque 8 N m 0 8 kgf m 5 8 ft lb NOTE Tighten lock nut B until the threaded end of switch contacts the stopper Hold the switch so that it does not r...

Page 3833: ...Ref to DI 44 REMOVAL Rear Differential VA type 2 Remove the rear differential side oil seal using a screwdriver wrapped with vinyl tape to prevent the side retainer from scratches 3 Using the ST insta...

Page 3834: ...4AT model refer to 4AT section Ref to 4AT 95 Front Differential Assem bly 5AT For front differential of 5AT model refer to 5AT section Ref to 5AT 89 Front Differential Assem bly 2 MT MODEL For front d...

Page 3835: ...bo MT AT MT AT Rear differential type T type VA1 type T type VA2 type Identification T1 XJ JP XU LSD type Viscous coupling Type of gear Hypoid gear Gear ratio Number of gear teeth 3 900 39 10 4 111 37...

Page 3836: ...icable temperature DI 00397 1 MT 00001 1 4 GL 5 3 2 C F 30 26 15 15 90 85W 80W 75W 90 25 30 5 0 22 15 23 32 86 59 77 5 Drive pinion bearing pre load For new bearing Measure with spring measure ment Me...

Page 3837: ...t No Thickness mm in Pinion height adjusting washer 383495200 3 09 0 1217 383505200 3 12 0 1228 383515200 3 15 0 1240 383525200 3 18 0 1252 383535200 3 21 0 1264 383545200 3 24 0 1276 383555200 3 27 0...

Page 3838: ...e N kgf lb 17 7 38 8 1 8 4 0 4 0 8 7 Measure with torque wrench N m kgf m ft lb 0 67 1 47 0 068 0 15 0 49 1 08 Side gear backlash mm in 0 1 0 2 0 0039 0 0079 Hypoid driven gear to drive pinion backlas...

Page 3839: ...1 688 0 0665 38336AA080 1 700 0 0669 38336AA200 1 713 0 0674 38336AA090 1 725 0 0679 38336AA210 1 738 0 0684 38336AA100 1 750 0 0689 38336AA220 1 763 0 0694 38336AA110 1 775 0 0699 Pinion height adju...

Page 3840: ...38336AA530 1 625 0 0640 38336AA540 1 638 0 0645 38336AA550 1 650 0 0650 38336AA560 1 663 0 0655 38336AA570 1 675 0 0659 38336AA580 1 688 0 0665 38336AA590 1 700 0 0669 38336AA600 1 713 0 0674 38336AA...

Page 3841: ...5 Bearing preload adjusting washer 19 Side gear 6 Differential carrier 20 Pinion mate gear Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 7 Front bearing 21 Pinion mate gear washer T1 10 5 1 1 7 7 8 Collar 22 Pini...

Page 3842: ...ollar 15 Side bearing retainer shim Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 5 Bearing preload adjusting washer 16 Side bearing retainer T1 10 5 1 1 7 7 6 Differential carrier 17 Side oil seal T2 29 5 3 0 21...

Page 3843: ...g preload adjusting washer 18 Side gear thrust washer 30 Gasket 6 Differential carrier 19 Side gear 7 Front bearing 20 Pinion mate gear Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 8 Collar 21 Pinion shaft lock...

Page 3844: ...preload adjusting collar 15 O ring 5 Bearing preload adjusting washer 16 Axle shaft holder Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 6 Differential carrier 17 Side oil seal T1 25 2 5 18 4 7 Front bearing 18 D...

Page 3845: ...TING SYSTEM 1 Rear differential front member 4 Sub frame Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Rear differential member plate 5 Self locking nut T1 65 6 6 48 3 Rear differential ASSY T2 70 7 1 51 6 T3 1...

Page 3846: ...ly hot after driv ing Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts Use SUBARU genuine gear oil grease or the equivalent Do not mix fluid grease etc of different grades or manufacturers Be sure to tigh...

Page 3847: ...ng the front and rear bearing cones 398477702 DRIFT Used for press fitting the bearing cone of dif ferential carrier front For T type 398217700 ATTACHMENT SET Stand for rear differential carrier disas...

Page 3848: ...ne For T type and VA1 type 399780104 WEIGHT Used for installing the front bearing cone and the pilot bearing companion flange 899580100 INSTALLER Used for press fitting the front bearing cone and pilo...

Page 3849: ...d pinion and hypoid gear Used with MAGNET BASE 498247001 398507704 BLOCK Used for adjusting pinion height and preload For T type and VA1 type 398177700 INSTALLER Used for installing the rear bearing c...

Page 3850: ...seal For T type and VA2 type 398507702 DUMMY SHAFT Used for adjusting pinion height and preload For T type 398507703 DUMMY COLLAR Used for adjusting pinion height and preload For T type 398517700 REPL...

Page 3851: ...for removing front oil seal Used for removing side bearing cup T type 28099PA090 OIL SEAL PROTEC TOR Used for installing the rear drive shaft to the rear differential For oil seal protection 28099PA1...

Page 3852: ...498077000 REMOVER Used for removing the differential side bearing cone For VA2 type 899864100 REMOVER Used for removing the differential side bearing 499277200 INSTALLER Used for installing the front...

Page 3853: ...Y SHAFT Used for adjusting pinion height and preload For VA2 type 18831AA010 DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER GAUGE Used for adjusting pinion height For VA2 type 18630AA010 WRENCH ASSY Used for removing and insta...

Page 3854: ...der For VA1 type 498447100 INSTALLER Used for installing the oil seal For VA1 type and T type 399520105 SEAT Used for removing the side bearing cone Used with PULLER SET 899524100 For VA type 49848540...

Page 3855: ...rential carrier For VA1 type 498447150 DUMMY SHAFT Used for adjusting pinion height and preload For VA1 type 899524100 PULLER SET Used for removing the differential side bearing cone 1 Puller 2 Cap 49...

Page 3856: ...side bearing race Used together with SEAT 499705404 For VA type TOOL NAME REMARKS Transmission jack Used for assembly disassembly of the rear differential Puller Used for removing the side bearing re...

Page 3857: ...pe Use a new metal gasket for VA2 type Liquid gasket THREE BOND 1105 Part No 004403010 or equivalent Tightening torque T type 49 N m 5 0 kgf m 36 2 ft lb VA1 type 34 N m 3 5 kgf m 25 1 ft lb VA2 type...

Page 3858: ...d new self locking nut seat SEAL MATERIAL THREE BOND 1324 Part No 004403042 or equivalent 15 Tighten the self locking nut within the specified torque range so that the rotating resistance of com panio...

Page 3859: ...bolts and nuts such as hypoid driven gear bolt Retighten 5 Damage due to overloading Replace 4 Noises when starting or shifting gears NOTE Noises may be caused by differential as sembly universal join...

Page 3860: ...Assembly 3 3 Transfer Clutch 4 4 Extension Case 5 5 Oil Seal 6 6 Transfer Drive Gear 7 7 Transfer Driven Gear 8 8 Reduction Drive Gear 9 9 Center Differential Carrier 10 10 Reduction Driven Gear 11 11...

Page 3861: ...nd filler plug and drain the gear oil CAUTION Be careful not to burn your hands because gear oil becomes extremely hot after running Except for VA2 type VA2 type 3 Tighten the oil drain plug NOTE Appl...

Page 3862: ...US qt 0 7 Imp qt Except for VA2 type VA2 type 5 Install the filler plug NOTE Apply liquid gasket to the filler plug for the T type Liquid gasket Three bond 1105 Part No 004403010 or equivalent Use a...

Page 3863: ...2 Rear Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H4DOTC 13 Muffler 3 0 L DOHC Ref to EX H6DO 7 Rear Exhaust Pipe Ref to EX H6DO 9 Muffler 6 Remove the heat shield cover 7 Remove the propeller shaft Ref to DS 10 REMOVAL...

Page 3864: ...ear drive shaft should not come into contact with the lateral link bolt 18 Pull out the axle shaft from rear differential NOTE If it is difficult to remove the axle shaft from rear dif ferential remov...

Page 3865: ...o rear cross member bushing properly 8 After inserting the rear differential stud bolt into the rear crossmember bushing lift up the transmis sion jack and align the rear differential to its attach me...

Page 3866: ...t and backlash between hypoid driv en gear and drive pinion Hypoid driven gear runout on its back surface Total preload of drive pinion 1 Set the ST on vise and install the differential as sembly to S...

Page 3867: ...RH and LH us ing screwdriver NOTE Perform this operation only when changing oil seal 10 Extract the bearing cone with ST1 and ST2 NOTE Do not attempt to disassemble the parts unless necessary Set the...

Page 3868: ...kept separated right and left and front and rear as well as thrust washers 14 Remove the self locking nut while holding the companion flange with ST ST 498427200 FLANGE WRENCH 15 Extract the companion...

Page 3869: ...case using a brass bar 2 VA2 TYPE To detect the real cause of trouble inspect the fol lowing items before disassembling Tooth contact and backlash between hypoid driv en gear and drive pinion Hypoid...

Page 3870: ...against the case 7 Remove the bearing race from holder RH and LH with ST and the press ST 18758AA000 PULLER NOTE Make sure the bolt of puller turn manually Set the puller so that its claws catch the g...

Page 3871: ...ST 498427200 FLANGE WRENCH 12 Extract the companion flange with a puller 13 Removes the drive pinion shaft 14 Remove the rear bearing cone from drive pin ion by supporting the cone with ST NOTE Place...

Page 3872: ...aring preload between front and rear bearings with collar and washer Pinion height ad justing washer is not affected by this adjustment The adjustment must not be carried out with oil seal inserted 1...

Page 3873: ...cified preload is obtained when nut is tight ened to the specified torque NOTE Use a new self locking nut Be careful not to give excessive preload When tightening the self locking nut lock ST1 with ST...

Page 3874: ...0 1 525 0 0600 38336AA130 1 538 0 0606 38336AA020 1 550 0 0610 38336AA140 1 563 0 0615 38336AA030 1 575 0 0620 38336AA150 1 588 0 0625 38336AA040 1 600 0 0630 38336AA160 1 613 0 0635 38336AA050 1 625...

Page 3875: ...er and install the preselected bearing preload adjust ing collar and washer 5 Press fit the front bearing cone into the carrier with ST1 ST2 and ST3 ST1 32285AA000 DUMMY COLLAR ST2 399780104 WEIGHT ST...

Page 3876: ...WEIGHT 9 Apply seal material on the drive pinion shaft thread and new self locking nut seat SEAL MATERIAL THREE BOND 1324 Part No 004403042 or equivalent 10 Attach the nut and use the ST to fix the c...

Page 3877: ...ooth surfaces and thrust sur faces 4 After inserting the pinion shaft lock pin into differential case stake the both sides of the hole to prevent pin from falling off 13 Install the hypoid driven gear...

Page 3878: ...r and drive pinion and preload adjustment of differential side bearing 1 Turn the drive pinion with ST for better fitting of differential side bearing ST 498427200 FLANGE WRENCH 2 Screw in the side ho...

Page 3879: ...Replace them in the original position after inserting an O ring and applying grease to the threaded por tion 18 Tighten the bolt of lock plate to specified torque Tightening torque 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 1...

Page 3880: ...ness of drive pin ion height adjusting washer in order to bring drive pinion close to hypoid driven gear Flank contact Check item Backlash is too small Contact pattern Corrective action Reduce the thi...

Page 3881: ...he new gasket and rear cover to the dif ferential carrier and tighten the bolts to specified torque Tightening torque 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 18 4 ft lb 2 VA2 TYPE NOTE Assemble in the reverse order of disas...

Page 3882: ...the pinion height adjusting washer and rear bearing cone fitted onto it NOTE Use new rear bearing cone 6 Install the preload adjusting collar washer front bearing cone collar companion flange and wash...

Page 3883: ...1 600 0 0630 38336AA520 1 613 0 0635 38336AA530 1 625 0 0640 38336AA540 1 638 0 0645 38336AA550 1 650 0 0650 38336AA560 1 663 0 0655 38336AA570 1 675 0 0659 38336AA580 1 688 0 0665 38336AA590 1 700 0...

Page 3884: ...temporarily installed washer with this one NOTE Adjust it using the 1 3 washers T To N 0 05 mm 0 0020 in Example of calculation To 0 15 mm 0 0020 in N 0 1 mm 0 0039 in T 0 15 mm 0 0020 in 0 1 mm 0 00...

Page 3885: ...T NOTE Press fit until the oil seal end comes 1 mm 0 04 in inward from end of carrier Apply grease to the oil seal lips ST 499277200 INSTALLER 8 Press fit the companion flange with ST NOTE Be careful...

Page 3886: ...torque 0 48 1 22 N m 0 049 0 124 kgf 0 35 0 9 ft lb 12 Install the hypoid driven gear to differential case NOTE Tighten diagonally while tapping the bolt heads Set a cushioning such as wooden block al...

Page 3887: ...gear and drive pinion and preload adjustment of differential side bearing 1 Turn the drive pinion with ST for better fitting of differential side bearing ST 498427200 FLANGE WRENCH 2 Screw in the sid...

Page 3888: ...Replace them in the original position after inserting an O ring and applying grease to the threaded por tion 17 Tighten the bolt of lock plate to specified torque Tightening torque 25 N m 2 5 kgf m 1...

Page 3889: ...ness of drive pin ion height adjusting washer in order to bring drive pinion close to hypoid driven gear Flank contact Check item Backlash is too small Contact pattern Corrective action Reduce the thi...

Page 3890: ...ease thickness of drive pin ion height adjusting washer in order to bring drive pinion close to hypoid driven gear 20 If proper tooth contact is not obtained once again adjust the drive pinion height...

Page 3891: ...s assembling 6 Differential carrier Replace if the bearing bores are worn or damaged 7 Differential case Replace if its sliding surfaces are worn or cracked 8 Companion flange Replace if the oil seal...

Page 3892: ...ck the runout 6 If the runout exceeds the limit after replacing the companion flange the drive pinion may be assem bled incorrectly or bearing is faulty F ADJUSTMENT 1 SIDE GEAR BACKLASH Adjust the si...

Page 3893: ...C 13 Muffler 6 Remove the heat shield cover 7 Remove the propeller shaft Ref to DS 10 REMOVAL Propeller Shaft 8 Prepare the transmission jack and band 9 Loosen the self lock nuts which hold the rear d...

Page 3894: ...rear differential NOTE If it is difficult to remove the axle shaft from the rear differential remove it using a ST ST 28099PA100 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVER 18 Lower the transmission jack 19 Secure the rear...

Page 3895: ...mber bushing properly 8 After inserting the rear differential stud bolt into the rear crossmember bushing lift up the transmis sion jack and align the rear differential to its attach ment position 9 T...

Page 3896: ...m 5 0 kgf m 36 2 ft lb C DISASSEMBLY To detect the real cause of trouble inspect the fol lowing items before disassembling Tooth contact and backlash of hypoid driven gear and drive pinion Hypoid dri...

Page 3897: ...bearing remove the bearing cup from the side bearing retainer using ST ST 398527700 PULLER ASSY 8 Remove the bearing cone with ST NOTE Do not attempt to disassemble the parts unless necessary Set the...

Page 3898: ...aft and extract it together with rear bearing cone pinion height ad justing washer and washer NOTE Hold the drive pinion so as not to drop it ST 398467700 DRIFT 15 Remove the rear bearing cone from dr...

Page 3899: ...d for front and rear bearings Adjust the bearing preload between front and rear bearings with collar and washer Pinion height ad justing washer is not affected by this adjustment The adjustment must n...

Page 3900: ...nge ST1 398507702 DUMMY SHAFT ST2 398507704 BLOCK Tightening torque 181 N m 18 5 kgf m 134 ft lb Initial load 17 7 38 8 N 1 8 4 0 kgf 4 0 8 7 lb Initial torque 0 67 1 47 N m 0 068 0 15 kgf m 0 49 1 08...

Page 3901: ...6 in 1 20 mm 0 0472 in 3 40 mm 0 1339 in N 0 23 mm 0 0091 in H 1 T 3 40 mm 0 1339 in 0 23 mm 0 0091 in 0 01 mm 0 0004 in 0 20 mm 0 0079 in 3 42 Result Thickness 3 42 mm 0 1346 in Therefore use part nu...

Page 3902: ...T2 ST1 399780104 WEIGHT ST2 899580100 INSTALLER 7 Fit a new oil seal with ST NOTE Press fit until the oil seal end comes 1 mm 0 04 in inward from end of carrier Apply grease to the oil seal lips ST 49...

Page 3903: ...of the washer and on the side gear shaft before installing Insert the pinion mate shaft into the differential case by aligning the lock pin holes 1 Measure the side gear backlash Side gear backlash 0...

Page 3904: ...ainer shim thickness 2 Install the differential assembly into differen tial carrier in the reverse order of disassembly 3 Install the side bearing retainer shims to re tainers RH and LH from which the...

Page 3905: ...a time Total preload 20 7 54 4 N 2 1 5 5 kgf 4 7 12 2 lb 17 Recheck the hypoid driven gear to pinion back lash Backlash 0 10 0 20 mm 0 0039 0 0079 in 18 Check the hypoid driven gear runout on its back...

Page 3906: ...small Contact pattern Corrective action Reduce the thickness of pinion height adjusting washer according to the procedure for bringing drive pinion away from hypoid driven gear Toe contact inside con...

Page 3907: ...sing the ST install oil seals to side bearing re tainers of both sides ST 398437700 DRIFT 24 Align the arrow mark on differential carrier with the mark on side retainer during installation 25 Apply li...

Page 3908: ...is assembling 6 Differential carrier Replace if the bearing bores are worn or damaged 7 Differential case Replace if its sliding surfaces are worn or cracked 8 Companion flange Replace if the oil seal...

Page 3909: ...e of companion flange and drive pinion 90 each and find the point where the runout is within the limit 5 If the runout exceeds the limit after changing the phase replace the companion flange and reche...

Page 3910: ...r differ ential front member Tightening torque T1 65 N m 6 6 kgf m 48 ft lb T2 110 N m 11 2 kgf m 81 ft lb C INSPECTION 1 Check the rear differential front member for damage bend and corrosion If dama...

Page 3911: ...tor or support It need not be removed when servicing the caliper body assembly 6 Remove mud and foreign matter from the caliper body assembly and the support 2 17 INCH TYPE Refer to 16 inch type Ref t...

Page 3912: ...880N Part No K0779YA010 to the three contact surfaces be tween inner shim and outer shim of outer pads 5 Install the pad to support NOTE Install the pad indicator in proper direction CAUTION Be sure t...

Page 3913: ...er body cylin der CAUTION Do not damage the cylinder and piston seal groove 6 Remove the guide pin and boot from caliper body 2 17 INCH TYPE Refer to 16 inch type Ref to BR 19 16 INCH TYPE DISASSEMBLY...

Page 3914: ...pin and guide pin boot into the support 2 17 INCH TYPE Refer to 16 inch type Ref to BR 19 16 INCH TYPE ASSEMBLY Front Disc Brake Assembly E INSPECTION 1 Repair or replace the faulty parts 2 Check the...

Page 3915: ...heels C INSPECTION 1 Check the front wheel bearing play and axle hub runout before the inspection of disc rotor runout limit Ref to DS 16 INSPECTION Front Axle 2 Secure the disc rotor by tightening th...

Page 3916: ...the operation keep the reservoir tank filled with brake fluid to eliminate entry of air Operate the brake pedal slowly For convenience and safety two people should work together The required amount o...

Page 3917: ...NSTALLATION 1 Install the support to the housing Tightening torque 53 N m 5 4 kgf m 39 1 ft lb 2 Apply a thin coat of Molykote M7439 Part No 003602001 to the pad clip 3 Apply a thin coat of Molykote A...

Page 3918: ...2 Part No K0779GA102 5 Insert the piston into cylinder CAUTION Do not force the piston into cylinder 6 Position the boot in the grooves on piston and cylinder 7 Apply a coat of specified grease to the...

Page 3919: ...ameter mm in 238 9 37 254 10 0 Disc thickness Diameter mm in 10 274 0 39 10 79 18 290 0 71 11 42 Effective cylinder diameter mm in 38 1 1 500 Pad dimensions Length Width Thickness mm in 92 0 33 0 9 0...

Page 3920: ...10 0 39 8 5 0 335 Ventilated disc 18 0 71 16 0 63 Disc runout mm in 0 05 0 0020 Parking brake Inside diameter mm in 170 6 69 171 6 73 Lining thickness mm in 3 2 0 126 1 5 0 059 Lever stroke 5 6 notch...

Page 3921: ...rt 17 Bushing 1 Caliper body 10 Pad clip 2 Air bleeder screw 11 Outer shim Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 3 Guide pin Green 12 Inner shim T1 8 0 8 5 8 4 Pin boot 13 Pad Outside T2 27 2 8 19 9 5 Pis...

Page 3922: ...ake 7 Piston boot 21 Parking brake shoe Secondary 35 Bolt For ventilated disc brake 8 Support 22 Parking brake shoe Primary 9 Lock pin Yellow 23 Strut Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 10 Bushing 24 S...

Page 3923: ...LINDER 1 Cap 6 Secondary piston 11 O ring 2 Filter 7 Cylinder body 3 Reservoir tank 8 Cylinder pin Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 4 C ring 9 Seal T 13 1 3 9 6 5 Primary piston 10 Pin BR 00371 T 1 2...

Page 3924: ...nd hydraulic control unit ABSCM H U T2 18 1 8 13 0 T3 19 1 9 14 0 1 Front brake pipe ASSY 8 Bracket T4 33 3 4 24 3 2 Two way connector 9 Master cylinder 3 Front brake hose RH 10 VDC control module and...

Page 3925: ...o way connector 8 Rear brake hose rear RH T1 15 1 5 10 8 3 Rear brake pipe ASSY 9 Rear brake hose rear LH T2 18 1 8 13 0 4 Rear brake hose RH 10 Clamp T3 33 3 4 24 3 5 Rear brake hose LH 11 Gasket 6 R...

Page 3926: ...BR 9 General Description BRAKE 6 BRAKE BOOSTER 1 Brake booster BR 00443 1 asieps_tobira book 9...

Page 3927: ...L MT model 1 Brake pedal ASSY 4 Clutch pedal Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Stop light switch 5 Clutch pedal pad T1 8 0 8 5 8 3 Brake pedal pad 6 Clutch switch T2 18 1 8 13 0 T2 5 4 3 2 6 1 T2 T2...

Page 3928: ...1 General Description BRAKE AT model 1 Brake pedal ASSY 3 Brake pedal pad Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Stop light switch T1 8 0 8 5 8 T2 18 1 8 13 0 BR 00338 T2 T1 T2 T1 1 2 3 asieps_tobira boo...

Page 3929: ...SUBARU genuine grease etc or equivalent Do not mix grease etc of different grades or man ufacturers Before securing a part in a vise place cushioning material such as wood blocks aluminum plate or clo...

Page 3930: ...Install the pad to support 4 Install the caliper body to the support Tightening torque Solid disc brake model 27 N m 2 8 kgf m 19 9 ft lb Ventilated disc brake model 37 N m 3 7 kgf m 27 2 ft lb C INSP...

Page 3931: ...bolt 2 REAR BRAKE HOSE 1 Remove the union bolt from the rear brake cali per 2 Separate the brake pipe from brake hose using a flare nut wrench 3 Remove the clamp and then remove the brake hose 1 Brak...

Page 3932: ...1 5 kgf m 10 8 ft lb 7 Bleed air from brake system 2 REAR BRAKE HOSE 1 Route the brake hose through the hole of bracket and lightly tighten the flare nut to connect brake pipe 2 Insert the clamp to s...

Page 3933: ...these circuits Be careful not to damage the airbag system wiring harness when servicing the center brake pipe When installing the brake pipe do not bend After installing the brake pipe and hose per fo...

Page 3934: ...m 14 0 ft lb CAUTION Be sure to use recommended brake fluid 3 Bleed air from brake system Ref to BR 33 PROCEDURE Air Bleeding C REPLACEMENT 1 Remove mud and dirt from the surface of brake master cyli...

Page 3935: ...install the cylinder pin 11 While pushing in the primary piston install the C ring to the groove using pliers CAUTION Make sure the C ring is installed to the groove securely 12 Install the seal to re...

Page 3936: ...stic bag 8 Install the brake pipe to the master cylinder Tightening torque Model with ABS 15 N m 1 5 kgf m 10 8 ft lb Model with VDC 18 N m 1 8 kgf m 13 0 ft lb 9 Bleed air from the brake line Ref to...

Page 3937: ...tion there is a possibility of air being caught in the brake line Bleed the brake line of all air until the pedal stroke meets the specification 12 Operate the hydraulic control unit in the se quence...

Page 3938: ...cures the ped al bracket 2 AT MODEL 1 Remove the steering shaft 2 Disconnect the connector stop light switch etc from the pedal bracket 3 Remove the clevis pin which secures the lever and push rod 4 R...

Page 3939: ...brake pedal Limit 5 0 mm 0 197 in or less 2 Check the position of the pedal pad Pedal height L 150 160 mm 5 91 6 30 in Brake pedal free play A 0 5 2 mm 0 02 0 08 in When pulling the brake pedal upwar...

Page 3940: ...e support between wooden blocks in the vise 4 Attach a rod of less than 12 mm 0 47 in di ameter to the shaded area of the brake pad and strike the rod with a hammer to drive brake pad out 2 17 INCH TY...

Page 3941: ...M7439 Part No 003602001 to the pad clip 2 Apply a thin coat of Molykote AS880N Part No K0779YA010 to the contact surface between the pad and pad inner shim 3 Apply a thin coat of Molykote AS880N Part...

Page 3942: ...f m 19 9 ft lb C INSPECTION 1 16 INCH TYPE Check the pad thickness A NOTE Always replace the pads of both sides as a set Replace pad clips if they are twisted or worn Replace the pad if there is oil o...

Page 3943: ...disc brake caliper from back plate and suspend it from the stabilizer using a wire 8 Remove the disc rotor from the hub NOTE Mark the mating surface of hub and disc rotor be fore removing the disc rot...

Page 3944: ...four bolts to the back plate Tightening torque 65 N m 6 6 kgf m 47 9 ft lb 3 Remove the axle nut 4 Draw the rear drive shaft into specified position 5 Tighten the new axle nut temporarily CAUTION Use...

Page 3945: ...push out the hub bolts ST 28399AG000 HUB STAND CAUTION Be careful not to hammer the hub bolts This may deform the hub Do not reuse the hub bolt NOTE Since the hub unit bearing can not be disassem bled...

Page 3946: ...LLER PLATE 10 Using a bar remove the front drive shaft from transmission CAUTION Be careful not to allow the bar to damage holder area B INSTALLATION 1 Using the ST replace the differential side retai...

Page 3947: ...0 Fill the transmission gear oil MT model 11 Fill the differential gear oil AT model C DISASSEMBLY 1 Place alignment marks on the shaft and outer race 2 Remove the PTJ boot band and boot CAUTION Be ca...

Page 3948: ...thin coat of specified grease to the roller kit and trunnion 6 Align alignment marks on roller kit and trunnion and install the roller kit CAUTION Be careful with the roller kit position 7 Align the...

Page 3949: ...h is not damaged 15 Cut off the band with an allowance of about 10 mm 0 39 in left from the clip and bend this allow ance over the clip CAUTION Make sure that the end of the band is in close contact w...

Page 3950: ...center exhaust pipe 6 Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler 7 Remove the heat shield cover 8 Make alignment marks on the flange yoke and rear differential before removal 9 Remove the three bolts h...

Page 3951: ...ransmission and attach center bearing to body Tightening torque 52 N m 5 3 kgf m 38 3 ft lb 2 Align the alignment marks and connect the flange yoke and rear differential Tightening torque 31 N m 3 2 k...

Page 3952: ...Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler 3 Remove the heat shield cover 4 Turn the propeller shaft by hand to see if abnor mal free play exists at splines Also move yokes to see if abnormal free play...

Page 3953: ...ECTION Wheel Alignment Rear wheel alignment Check the rear wheel alignment Ref to RS 7 INSPECTION Wheel Alignment Front strut Check the front strut Ref to FS 22 INSPEC TION Front Strut Rear shock abso...

Page 3954: ...BS Control Module and Hydraulic Control Unit ABSCM H U 6 3 ABS Sequence Control 10 4 Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor 13 5 Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor 15 6 Front Magnetic Encoder 16 7 Rear Magnetic Encode...

Page 3955: ...iper from the housing and suspend it from strut using a wire 7 Remove the disc rotor from the hub NOTE If it is difficult to remove the disc rotor from the hub drive the 8 mm of bolt into the threaded...

Page 3956: ...a new self locking nut Tightening torque 152 N m 15 5 kgf m 112 1 ft lb 2 Install the front drive shaft Ref to DS 22 IN STALLATION Front Drive Shaft 3 Install the front arm ball joint to the housing T...

Page 3957: ...rque Do not overtighten it as this may dam age the wheel bearing 12 After tightening the axle nut lock it securely 13 Install the wheel and tighten the wheel nuts to specified torque Tightening torque...

Page 3958: ...hich charged magnetism to magnetic encoder Be careful not to damage the magnetic en coder E INSPECTION 1 Moving the front tire up and down by hand check there is no backlash in bearing and check the w...

Page 3959: ...ATION 1 Insert the BJ or EBJ into the rear hub splines CAUTION Be careful not to damage the magnetic en coder Do not get closer the tool which charged magnetism to magnetic encoder 2 Draw the rear dri...

Page 3960: ...e out the ball bear ings CAUTION The grease is a special grease grease for con stant velocity joints Do not mix with other greases NOTE Disassemble exercising care not to lose balls 6 pcs 8 To remove...

Page 3961: ...and fix the snap ring in place with pliers NOTE Confirm that the snap ring is completely fitted in the shaft groove 5 Install the cage to inner race fixed upon shaft NOTE Fit the cage with the protru...

Page 3962: ...ot is appropriate 15 Tighten the band using the ST ST 925091000 BAND TIGHTENING TOOL NOTE Tighten the band until it cannot be moved by hand 16 Tap the clip with the punch provided at the end of the ST...

Page 3963: ...er shaft type EDJ Propeller shaft length L mm in 1 483 58 39 1 423 56 02 1 310 51 57 Front propeller shaft Joint to joint length L1 mm in 735 28 9 675 26 6 562 22 1 Rear propeller shaft Joint to Joint...

Page 3964: ...iameter D mm in Axle length L mm in All models EBJ PTJ 26 1 0 349 6 13 76 A Axle diameter B Axle length Model Type of drive shaft Axle diameter D mm in Axle length L mm in 2 5 i AT BJ DOJ 22 0 87 366...

Page 3965: ...ENT 1 PROPELLER SHAFT 1 Propeller shaft 4 Rear differential T type Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Bushing 5 Rear differential VA2 type T1 31 3 2 23 1 3 Rear differential VA1 type T2 52 5 3 38 3 D...

Page 3966: ...b unit bearing 2 Baffle plate 8 Boot PTJ 14 Axle nut 3 Outer race PTJ 9 Boot EBJ 4 Snap ring 10 EBJ shaft ASSY Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 5 Trunnion 11 Housing T1 220 22 4 162 6 Snap ring 12 Hu...

Page 3967: ...OJ 14 Axle nut olive color 3 Snap ring 10 Boot BJ 4 Inner race 11 BJ shaft ASSY 2 5 i AT model EBJ shaft ASSY Except for 2 5 i AT model Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 5 Ball T1 65 6 6 47 9 6 Cage T...

Page 3968: ...ix grease etc of different grades or man ufacturers Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points Apply grease o...

Page 3969: ...placed with the plate of the AXLE SHAFT PULLER 926470000 before used 28099PA090 OIL SEAL PROTEC TOR Used for installing the rear drive shaft to the rear differential For protecting the oil seal 28399S...

Page 3970: ...ESCRIPTION REMARKS Puller Used for removing the ball joint from knuckle arm Dial gauge Used for inspecting the propeller shaft run out Extension cap Used for preventing leakage of gear oil or ATF Bar...

Page 3971: ...d suspend it from strut using a wire 6 Remove the disc rotor from the hub NOTE If it is difficult to remove the disc rotor from the hub drive the 8 mm bolt into the threaded end of rotor and then remo...

Page 3972: ...ge the wheel bearing 7 After tightening the axle nut lock it securely 8 Install the wheel and tighten the wheel nuts to specified torque Tightening torque 110 N m 11 2 kgf m 81 1 ft lb C DISASSEMBLY U...

Page 3973: ...to the tapered portion of ball stud 2 Install the ball joint into front arm Tightening torque Castle nut Front arm aluminum type 30 N m 3 1 kgf m 22 ft lb Front arm steel type 39 N m 4 0 kgf m 28 8 f...

Page 3974: ...in the figure measure the length 22 3 Determine free play using the following for mula S 22 21 4 Replace with a new part if the play exceeds specification Front ball joint Specification for replaceme...

Page 3975: ...d from the wheel arch point A in the figure below and affix at a position directly above the center of wheel 5 Measure the distance between the point A and the center of wheel 1 Wheel arch height 4 Fr...

Page 3976: ...he front lower section of the strut NOTE When the adjusting bolt needs to be loosened or tightened hold its head with a wrench and turn the self locking nut 3 Turn the camber adjusting bolt so that th...

Page 3977: ...then set the wheel alignment gauge 3 Measure the caster angle in accordance with the operation manual for wheel alignment gauge To increase camber Rotate the left side counterclockwise Rotate the rig...

Page 3978: ...TE Be sure to rotate the tires in the forward direction 4 Measure the distance B between the left and right marks Find toe in using the following equa tion A B Toe in ADJUSTMENT When adjusting the toe...

Page 3979: ...ng nut on the inner side of rear link NOTE When loosening or tightening the adjusting bolt hold the bolt head and turn the self locking nut 2 Turn the adjusting bolt until toe in is within the specifi...

Page 3980: ...ear wheel is adjusted in a toe in di rection adjust the other rear wheel equally in toe out direction in order to make the thrust angle ad justment 3 When the left and right adjusting bolts are turned...

Page 3981: ...tall the stud bolt ST 20299AG020 STUD BOLT SOCKET Tightening torque 110 N m 11 2 kgf m 81 1 ft lb 2 Using new bolts and self locking nuts temporari ly tighten the front arm to crossmember 3 Secure the...

Page 3982: ...position on bushing installation 2 Using the ST and a press remove the rear bush ing ST1 20299AG000 REMOVER ST2 20299AG010 BASE D ASSEMBLY 1 FRONT BUSHING Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly...

Page 3983: ...n the front arm 3 Using the ST and a press install the rear bush ing ST1 20299AG000 REMOVER ST2 20299AG010 BASE E INSPECTION 1 Check the front arm for damage or cracks and correct or replace if defect...

Page 3984: ...a new bolt and self locking nut For parts which are not reusable refer to COMPONENT Ref to FS 3 COMPONENT General Descrip tion Always tighten the stabilizer bushing in the state where the vehicle is a...

Page 3985: ...or replace the coil springs with new parts 4 Fault in operation of damper strut or shock absorber Replace 5 Damage or deformation of strut mount or shock absorber mount Replace 6 Unsuitable length max...

Page 3986: ...FS 26 General Diagnostic Table FRONT SUSPENSION asieps_tobira book 26...

Page 3987: ...on 2 2 Wheel Alignment 7 3 Rear Stabilizer 8 4 Rear Arm 9 5 Upper Link 13 6 Rear Shock Absorber 15 7 Front Link 17 8 Rear Link 18 9 Sub Frame Support Arm 20 10 Rear Sub Frame 21 11 Helper 22 12 Genera...

Page 3988: ...mount at the upper side of strut to body and tighten it with new self locking nuts Tightening torque 20 N m 2 0 kgf m 14 5 ft lb 2 Align alignment marks on the camber adjusting bolt and strut Using n...

Page 3989: ...10 mm 0 39 in in the former step purge air from the strut 3 Air purging procedure 1 Place the strut vertically with the piston rod facing up 2 Fully extend the piston rod 3 With the piston rod fully e...

Page 3990: ...hout any hitch 3 Piston rod play Measure the play as follows Fix the outer shell in place and fully extend the rod Set a dial gauge at the end of rod L 10 mm 0 39 in and then read the dial gauge indic...

Page 3991: ...12 in dia drill make holes in areas shown in the figure 2 BILSTEIN STRUT CAUTION Before handling struts filled with gas be sure to wear goggles to protect eyes from gas oil and metal shavings Do not d...

Page 3992: ...er of removal NOTE Tighten the small type crossmember support plate together with stabilizer bracket After installing the stabilizer bracket to the cross member tighten the crossmember support plate t...

Page 3993: ...a new self locking nut Ensure the stabilizer bushing and stabilizer have the same identification colors Install the stabilizer bushing front crossmember side while aligning it with the paint mark on s...

Page 3994: ...1 15 0 439 17 3 Tolerance 12 mm 24 mm 0 47 in 0 94 in mm in Camber Tolerance 0 45 Differences between RH and LH 45 or less 0 15 0 40 0 15 0 40 Caster Referential Value 5 55 4 55 5 40 4 55 Steering ang...

Page 3995: ...5 1 36 9 8 Stud bolt 22 Coil spring T7 55 5 6 41 9 Stabilizer link 23 Damper strut T8 60 6 1 44 3 10 Bracket 24 Adjusting bolt T9 95 9 7 70 1 11 Bushing 25 Castle nut T10 110 11 2 81 1 12 Stabilizer...

Page 3996: ...on a vise place cushion ing material such as wood blocks aluminum plate or cloth between the part and the vise Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque Place shop...

Page 3997: ...strut mount TOOL NAME REMARKS Alignment gauge Used for measuring wheel alignment Alignment gauge adapter Used for measuring wheel alignment Turning radius gauge Used for measuring wheel alignment Toe...

Page 3998: ...d excessive play of suspension parts Check adjust and measure the wheel alignment in accordance with the procedures indicated in the figure Wheel arch height front and rear wheels Ref to FS 7 WHEEL AR...

Page 3999: ...ive action Brake drag Parking brake lever not adjusted correctly Adjust Parking brake cable does not move Correct or replace Parking brake shoe clearance is maladjusted Adjust Return spring is faulty...

Page 4000: ...PB 10 General Diagnostic Table PARKING BRAKE asieps_tobira book 10...

Page 4001: ...1 General Description 2 2 Steering Wheel 14 3 Universal Joint 15 4 Tilt Steering Column 17 5 Steering Gearbox 19 6 Pipe Assembly 39 7 Oil Pump 45 8 Reservoir Tank 53 9 Power Steering Fluid 54 10 Gene...

Page 4002: ...e 9 Remove the clamp from the rear brake 10 Remove the cable clamp from the rear arm bracket 11 Remove the cable clamp from rear floor 12 Remove the cable assembly B INSTALLATION 1 Install in the reve...

Page 4003: ...body Tightening torque 13 N m 1 32 kgf m 9 6 ft lb 2 Connect the hose to the reservoir tank H4 model H6 model 3 Replenish power steering fluid up to the speci fied level Ref to PS 54 Power Steering Fl...

Page 4004: ...per forming service on the airbag modules Ref to AB 6 CAUTION General Description 1 Align the center position of the roll connector Ref to AB 26 ADJUSTMENT Roll Connector 2 Install in the reverse orde...

Page 4005: ...N m 2 4 kgf m 17 4 ft lb CAUTION Excessively large tightening torque of univer sal joint bolts may lead to heavy steering wheel operation 4 Align the center position of the roll connector Ref to AB 26...

Page 4006: ...m load 3 8 N 0 39 kgf 0 86 lb or less Service limit Maximum load 7 3 N 0 74 kgf 1 64 lb or less Service limit Maximum load 7 3 N 0 74 kgf 1 64 lb or less 1 Yoke Gearbox side 1 Yoke Steering column sid...

Page 4007: ...ully clockwise and counterclockwise Dis charge the fluid similarly from other pipes 4 Remove the clamp E from return hose and pres sure hose 5 Disconnect the pipe D from return hose and pipe C from pr...

Page 4008: ...the oil cooler from the oil cooler bracket H4 model H6 model 9 Remove the hose bracket and take out the hose assembly from vehicle 1 Suction hose 2 Pressure hose 1 Reservoir tank 2 Suction hose 3 Ret...

Page 4009: ...nect the suction hose and return hose to the reservoir tank Install the oil cooler to the oil cooler bracket CAUTION Firmly insert the plastic clip of return hose to the bracket H4 model H6 model 1 Ho...

Page 4010: ...Refer to COMPONENT of General Descrip tion Ref to PS 4 POWER ASSISTED SYS TEM COMPONENT General Description 9 Install the front crossmember support plate and jack up plate 10 Lower the vehicle 11 Tig...

Page 4011: ...us discharge of the relief valve for over 5 seconds will reduce the service lives of hoses oil pump fluid etc due to over heating Part Maintenance parts Corrective action Pipe O ring fitting surface d...

Page 4012: ...through 13 in the figure Crack or damage in hose Replace with a new part Crack or damage in hose hardware Replace with a new part Leakage from surrounding of cast iron portion of oil pump 14 and 15 i...

Page 4013: ...eering wheel slowly from lock to lock until the bubbles stop appearing on oil surface 6 If the steering wheel is turned in a low fluid level condition air will be sucked into the pipe If air has enter...

Page 4014: ...bottom Poor revolution of pulleys except oil pump pulley Poor revolution of oil pump pulley Adjust or replace 2 Tire and wheel Improper tire out of specifications 1 Improper wheel out of specificatio...

Page 4015: ...from the oil pump CAUTION Do not allow fluid to come into contact with the pulley belt To prevent foreign matter from entering the hose and pipe cover the open ends with clean cloth Non turbo model Tu...

Page 4016: ...to flow from the hose end and contact the pulley belt To prevent foreign objects from entering the hose cover the hose openings with a clean cloth 7 Remove the bolts which holds the power steer ing p...

Page 4017: ...ts which hold the oil pump to the bracket Tightening torque 15 7 N m 1 6 kgf m 11 6 ft lb Tightening torque 37 3 N m 3 8 kgf m 27 5 ft lb 2 Attach the installation bolts of the power steering pump bra...

Page 4018: ...4 Power Steering Fluid CAUTION Never start the engine before filling with fluid otherwise the vane pump may become seized 2 H6 MODEL 1 Install the oil pump to bracket 1 Place the oil pump bracket in a...

Page 4019: ...hen installing If the hose is twisted it may come into contact with other parts 4 Connect the power steering pressure switch connector 5 Install the tensioner adjuster 6 Install the V belts 7 Install...

Page 4020: ...ve action 1 Oil pump Exterior 1 Crack damage or oil leakage Replace the oil pump with a new part 2 Play of pulley shaft Measure the radial play and axial play If any of these exceeds the service limit...

Page 4021: ...pressure gauge closed or hold the steering wheel at lock for 5 seconds or more in any case this can damage the oil pump Before attaching a pressure gauge place cloth at locations where fluid is expec...

Page 4022: ...4099AC010 ADAPTER HOSE A Service limit H4 model 7 350 8 050 kPa 75 82 kg cm2 1 067 1 165 psi H6 model 8 300 9 000 kPa 85 92 kg cm2 1 204 1 305 psi 4 If it is not within the specification replace the o...

Page 4023: ...castle nut use a puller to remove the tie rod end from the knuckle arm 8 Remove the front crossmember support plate jack up plate and front stabilizer Ref to FS 14 REMOVAL Front Stabilizer Large type...

Page 4024: ...ert the gearbox into crossmember being careful not to damage gearbox boot 2 Install the gearbox and bracket Temporarily tighten the bolts 3 Insert bolts through the clamp to temporarily tighten the ge...

Page 4025: ...Stabilizer 10 Install the front crossmember support plate and jack up plate 11 Install the front exhaust pipe assembly Non turbo model Ref to EX H4SO 5 INSTALLA TION Front Exhaust Pipe 12 Install the...

Page 4026: ...s a unit 2 Secure the gearbox removed from vehicle in a vise using ST ST1 926200000 STAND ST2 34199AG000 BOSS D CAUTION Secure the gearbox in a vise using ST as shown in the figure Do not secure the g...

Page 4027: ...valve assem bly 11 Carefully draw out the input shaft and remove the valve assembly 12 Using a drill release the crimping of holder CAUTION Make a hole of 2 mm 0 08 in depth using a drill with 3 mm 0...

Page 4028: ...ox installation portion 2 CONTROL VALVE 1 Disconnect the pipes A and B from gearbox 2 Secure the gearbox removed from vehicle in a vise using ST ST1 926200000 STAND ST2 34199AG000 BOSS D CAUTION Secur...

Page 4029: ...the spline portion and slide the dust cover to remove 9 Using a press remove the pinion valve as sembly from valve housing 10 Using the ST and a press remove the bushing and oil seal from the valve ho...

Page 4030: ...form the seal ring properly ST1 34199AG080 FORMER PISTON ST2 34199AG050 GUIDE G 24 5 Fit the ST over toothed portion of rack assembly and insert the oil seal to rack ST 926390001 COVER REMOVER 6 Remo...

Page 4031: ...34199FE000 INSTALLER REMOVER 13 Using a press press fit until the mark on the ST is aligned to the end surface of the holder 14 Remove the ST and the holder 15 Insert the outer side oil seal to the r...

Page 4032: ...embly Insert the valve assembly into place while facing the rack teeth toward pinion 23 Tighten the bolts alternately to secure the valve assembly Tightening torque 20 N m 2 0 kgf m 14 8 ft lb CAUTION...

Page 4033: ...adjusting screw Ref to PS 36 TURNING RESISTANCE OF GEARBOX INSPECTION Steering Gearbox 31 Apply liquid gasket to lock nut and install it into adjusting screw While holding the adjusting screw with wr...

Page 4034: ...the boot is installed without unusual inflation or deflation 36 Install a new boot band Using band clamp pli ers crimp it so that the clearance of crimping por tion becomes 2 mm 0 079 in or less 37 Fi...

Page 4035: ...gearbox from ST ST1 926200000 STAND ST2 34199AG000 BOSS D 42 Install the four pipes on gearbox 1 Connect the pipes A and B to the four pipe joints of gearbox Tightening torque Refer to the component p...

Page 4036: ...34199AG020 GUIDE 9 Remove the ST GUIDE and form the seal ring properly using ST FORMER ST 34199AG070 FORMER 10 Put vinyl tape around pinion shaft spline to pro tect oil seal from damage 11 Install the...

Page 4037: ...f valve assembly 17 Install new O ring to valve assembly 18 Insert the valve assembly into place while fac ing the rack teeth toward pinion 19 Tighten the bolts alternately to secure the valve assembl...

Page 4038: ...GEARBOX INSPECTION Steering Gearbox 25 Apply liquid gasket to lock nut and install it into adjusting screw While holding the adjusting screw with wrench tighten the lock nut using ST Liquid gasket TH...

Page 4039: ...uniformly and smoothly with each other Refer to Ser vice limit 2 Pull out the entire rack to allow viewing of the teeth and check for damage Even if abnormality is found in either 1 or 2 replace the e...

Page 4040: ...teering Service limit 0 12 mm 0 005 in or less On condition Weighting point L1 10 mm 0 39 in P 98 N 10 kgf 22 lb Measuring point L2 25 mm 0 98 in 4 INPUT SHAFT PLAY In radial direction Service limit 0...

Page 4041: ...th the gearbox mounted to the vehicle and remove fluid from surrounding portions Then turn the steering wheel from lock to lock about thirty to forty times with the engine running and make comparison...

Page 4042: ...wheels are set in the straight ahead position or error is more than 5 on the periphery of the steering wheel correctly re install the steering wheel 4 If the steering wheel spokes are not horizontal w...

Page 4043: ...tion ATF DEXRON III or equivalent Capacity 2 US qt Imp qt Oil tank 0 2 0 2 0 2 Whole system 0 7 0 7 0 6 Steering wheel Free play mm in 17 0 67 Steering shaft Clearance between the steering wheel and c...

Page 4044: ...L AND COLUMN 1 Bushing 5 Steering wheel Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Steering shaft 6 Airbag module T1 1 2 0 12 0 9 3 Steering roll connector 7 Steering wheel lower cover T2 25 2 5 18 1 4 Colum...

Page 4045: ...ening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Hose 9 Oil pump T1 7 5 0 76 5 53 3 Eye bolt gasket 10 Suction hose T2 10 1 02 7 4 4 Clip 11 Hose bracket T3 13 1 32 9 6 5 Clamp E 12 Clip T4 18 1 84 13 3 6 Cap 13 Clip T...

Page 4046: ...ye bolt gasket 12 Return hose T2 10 1 02 7 4 4 Clip 13 Return pipe T3 13 1 32 9 6 5 Clamp E 14 Return hose T4 15 1 5 10 8 6 Cap 15 Hose bracket A T5 18 1 84 13 3 7 Reservoir tank 16 Hose bracket B T6...

Page 4047: ...1 7 12 5 11 Pinion valve ASSY 30 Tie rod T5 20 2 0 14 8 12 Oil seal 31 Pipe B T6 24 2 4 17 4 13 Back up washer 32 Pipe A T7 25 2 5 18 1 14 Ball bearing 33 Steering body T8 27 2 75 19 9 15 Snap ring 34...

Page 4048: ...ER STEERING 3 OIL PUMP H4 model 1 Oil pump 3 Bracket Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Pulley 4 Belt tension nut T1 8 0 8 5 8 T2 15 7 1 6 11 6 T3 22 2 2 15 9 T4 25 2 5 18 1 T5 37 3 3 8 27 5 PS 00480...

Page 4049: ...heated parts Use SUBARU genuine power steering fluid grease etc or the equivalent Do not mix fluid grease etc of different grades or manufacturers Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nut...

Page 4050: ...RE GAUGE Used for measuring oil pressure 926200000 STAND Used when inspecting characteristic of gear box assembly and disassembling it Used with BOSS D 34199AG000 34099AC010 ADAPTER HOSE A Used with P...

Page 4051: ...ssembly 926420000 PLUG When fluid leaks from pinion side of gearbox assembly remove pipe B from valve housing attach this tool and check fluid leaking points 926250000 GUIDE Used for installing the ho...

Page 4052: ...lling the rack oil seal outer inner 34199AG000 BOSS D Used when inspecting characteristic of gear box assembly and disassembling it Used with STAND 926200000 34199AG030 GUIDE Used for installing seal...

Page 4053: ...oil seal 34199AG090 INSTALLER REMOVER Used for installing oil seal of valve housing Used with SEAL INSTALLER 34099FA130 Used for installing ball bearing of valve hous ing Used for removing oil seal an...

Page 4054: ...eneral Description POWER ASSISTED SYSTEM POWER STEERING 34199AG010 INSTALLER Used for pressing fit oil seal of gearbox cylinder ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS ST34199AG010 asieps_tobira...

Page 4055: ...der instrument panel securing the steering column 7 Pull out the steering shaft assembly from the hole on toe board CAUTION Be sure to remove the universal joint before removing steering shaft assembl...

Page 4056: ...end of steering wheel sur face to prevent damage C DISASSEMBLY Remove the two screws securing the upper steer ing column covers and the two screws securing the combination switch and then remove rela...

Page 4057: ...om slow to rapid step by step Trouble Possible cause Corrective action Hiss noise continuous While engine is running Relief valve emits operating sound when steering wheel is completely turned in eith...

Page 4058: ...place the oil pump or hose if the noise can be heard when vehicle is running as well as being stopped Torque converter growl air conditioner compression growl Remove the power steering pulley belt and...

Page 4059: ...ering effort between right and left less than 20 Go to step 5 Check adjust and replace if neces sary 5 CHECK UNIVERSAL JOINT Measure the swing torque of the joint yoke of steering column side Ref to P...

Page 4060: ...with ABS 10 0 39 14 Front suspension bracket to Return hose 5 0 20 15 Front wheel apron to Return hose 5 0 20 16 VDC H U bracket to Suction hose Model with vehicle dynamics control VDC 5 0 20 17 Air...

Page 4061: ...PS 60 General Diagnostic Table POWER ASSISTED SYSTEM POWER STEERING PS 00772 4 1 6 15 20 21 22 23 29 30 32 33 24 25 26 27 5 8 9 13 14 28 31 10 11 16 3 12 19 18 17 7 2 asieps_tobira book 60...

Page 4062: ...hicle in optimum condition When replacement of parts during repair work is needed be sure to use SUBARU genuine parts All information illustration and specifi cations contained in this manual are base...

Page 4063: ...asieps_tobira book 2...

Page 4064: ...UAL QUICK REFERENCE INDEX G2391BE8 BODY SECTION EXTERIOR BODY PANELS EB CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM CC CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS CC diag IMMOBILIZER DIAGNOSTICS IM diag LAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS LAN di...

Page 4065: ...asieps_tobira book 4...

Page 4066: ...Model 28 11 Heater Core 29 12 Control Panel Auto A C Model 30 13 Control Unit Manual A C Model 31 14 Control Unit Auto A C Model 32 15 Compressor 33 16 Condenser 35 17 Heater and Cooling Unit 36 18 E...

Page 4067: ...nut self locking nut 3 Be sure to adjust the lever stroke Ref to PB 4 ADJUSTMENT Parking Brake Lever C INSPECTION 1 Operate the parking brake lever 3 to 4 times and fully return the lever 2 While slow...

Page 4068: ...learance adjustment Manual adjustment Lever stroke notches N kgf lb 5 6 200 20 4 45 1 Back plate 7 Strut spring 13 Adjuster 2 Retainer 8 Strut 14 Shoe hold down cup 3 Spring washer 9 Shoe guide plate...

Page 4069: ...etc of different grades or man ufacturers Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points Before securing a part...

Page 4070: ...s seized on the hub drive the disc rotor out by pushing two 8 mm bolts in holes B on the rotor 5 Remove the shoe return spring from the parking brake assembly 6 Remove the front shoe hold down spring...

Page 4071: ...n and cup 4 Install the plate to the anchor pin then install the primary return spring 5 Install the parking brake cable to the lever 6 Install the strut and adjuster then secure the secondary side br...

Page 4072: ...turn the parking brake lever fully 2 Remove the adjusting hole cover from the back plate 3 Turn the adjusting screw using a flat tip screw driver until the brake shoe is in close contact with the disc...

Page 4073: ...move the sub frame support arm B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque Sub frame support arm to Rear arm bracket 125 N m 12 7 kgf m 92 ft lb Sub frame support arm to R...

Page 4074: ...e the rear wheels 2 Remove the helper using the ST ST 20099AE030 HELPER SOCKET WRENCH B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal Tightening torque 32 N m 3 3 kgf m 24 ft lb C INSPECTION Ch...

Page 4075: ...bolt head in place when loosening the nut B INSTALLATION 1 Support the rear arm horizontally using a trans mission jack 2 Using new self locking nuts install the rear link NOTE Tighten the self lockin...

Page 4076: ...ASSEMBLY Using the ST A and ST B press fit the bushing ST A 20099AE000INSTALLER REMOVER ST B 20099AE000INSTALLER REMOVER E INSPECTION Visually check the rear link for damage and defor mation RS 00083...

Page 4077: ...rmation and replace with new parts as required Model Sedan Wagon 2 5 i 2 5 GT OUTBACK 2 5 i 2 5 GT OUTBACK Wheel arch height Tolerance 12 mm 24 mm 0 47 in 0 94 in mm in 365 14 4 438 17 2 375 14 8 438...

Page 4078: ...g outer side T5 60 6 1 44 7 Rear link 20 Front link T6 65 6 6 48 8 Adjusting bolt 21 Rear sub frame T7 120 12 2 89 9 Rear link bushing 22 Sub frame support arm T8 125 12 7 92 10 Adjusting washer 23 Su...

Page 4079: ...bly and replacement Use SUBARU genuine grease etc or equivalent Do not mix grease etc of different grades or man ufacturers Before securing a part on a vise place cushion ing material such as wood blo...

Page 4080: ...VER Used for replacing the rear link bushing 20099AE010 INSTALLER REMOVER Used for replacing the upper link bushing 20099AE020 INSTALLER REMOVER SET Used for replacing the rear arm front bushing 20099...

Page 4081: ...removal of DOJ TOOL NAME REMARKS Alignment gauge Used for measuring wheel alignment Alignment gauge adapter Used for measuring wheel alignment Turning radius gauge Used for measuring wheel alignment T...

Page 4082: ...ON 2 Wheel Alignment A INSPECTION NOTE Measure and adjust the front and rear wheel align ment at a time Refer to FS section for measure ment and adjustment of wheel alignment Ref to FS 6 INSPECTION Wh...

Page 4083: ...vehicle equipped jack upside down be tween the rear link and sub frame Adjust the posi tion of the jack and align the attachment position of the rear shock absorber and rear arm Using new self locking...

Page 4084: ...t Strut F DISPOSAL CAUTION Before handling the shock absorber be sure to wear goggles to protect eyes from gas oil and cutting powder Do not disassemble the shock absorber or place it into a fire Dril...

Page 4085: ...e Ref to RS 13 REMOVAL Upper Link 10 Remove the sub frame support arm 11 After removing the bolt remove the sub frame from the vehicle B INSTALLATION 1 Install in the reverse order of removal 2 Follow...

Page 4086: ...g brake cable clamp to the rear arm bracket 6 Remove the bolt which holds the brake hose bracket and ABS wheel speed sensor bracket to the rear arm 7 Remove the bolts which secure the brake hose brack...

Page 4087: ...tighten the bolts which hold the rear arm to the link 3 Install the bearing unit Ref to DS 20 INSTALLATION Rear Hub Unit Bearing 4 Install the bolts which secure the ABS wheel speed sensor to rear ar...

Page 4088: ...tion for the tightening torque Ref to RS 3 REAR SUSPENSION COMPONENT General Description C DISASSEMBLY 1 FRONT BUSHING 1 Set the ST A with the larger side of its inner di ameter turned upward 2 Set th...

Page 4089: ...EMOVER SET ST B 20099AE020INSTALLER REMOVER SET 2 REAR BUSHING 1 Insert the bushing into the bore of ST D 2 Set the ST C ST D and bearing puller in the specified positions as shown in the figure and t...

Page 4090: ...ce the coil springs with new parts 4 Fault in operation of damper strut or shock absorber Replace 5 Damage or deformation of strut mount or shock absorber mount Replace 6 Unsuitable length maximum or...

Page 4091: ...RS 24 General Diagnostic Table REAR SUSPENSION asieps_tobira book 24...

Page 4092: ...IRE SYSTEM WT Page 1 General Description 2 2 Tire 5 3 Steel Wheel 6 4 Aluminum Wheel 7 5 Wheel Balancing 8 6 T type Tire 10 7 Tire Pressure Monitoring System 11 8 General Diagnostic Table 13 asieps_to...

Page 4093: ...paint mark end of stabilizer to the end of stabilizer bush ing The stabilizer bracket has a set orientation In stall it with the arrow mark facing the upper side of the vehicle 2 Always tighten the st...

Page 4094: ...NSTALLATION 1 Support the rear arm horizontally using a trans mission jack 2 Using new self locking nuts install the upper link NOTE Inspect the wheel alignment and adjust it if neces sary Tightening...

Page 4095: ...de bushing has an orientation Assem ble it with the longer protrusion faced to the rear side of vehicle E INSPECTION 1 Visually check the upper link for damage and de formation 2 Visually check the bu...

Page 4096: ...N 1 Support the rear arm horizontally using a trans mission jack 2 Using new self locking nuts install the front link CAUTION Install the front link with the protruding side facing the front side of t...

Page 4097: ...ion 2 Tire pressure warning light output When malfunction occurs or tire pres sure decreases System failure blinks Tire pressure decreases turns on 4 Speed sensor signal While driving Pulse signal Cha...

Page 4098: ...ery power supply 4 Antenna 8 Vehicle speed signal 2 Ignition power supply 5 Ground 9 Subaru Select Monitor 3 Tire pressure Monitoring control module 6 Transmitter 10 Body integrated unit 7 Combination...

Page 4099: ...E PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS 3 Electrical Component Location A LOCATION 1 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING CONTROL MODULE 2 Tire pressure warning light 3 Transmitter 1 4 TPM00001 2 1 3 3 1 TPM0000...

Page 4100: ...pressure warning light blinks Tire pressur monitoring system has malfunction Air pressure sensor malfunction Air pressure sensor is out of battery Tire pressure monitoring control module is faulty Def...

Page 4101: ...r Oil 24 3 Front Differential Assembly 26 4 Rear Differential T type 27 5 Rear Differential VA type 44 6 Rear Differential Front Oil Seal 74 7 Rear Differential Side Oil Seal 76 8 Rear Differential Fr...

Page 4102: ...ble Code DTC TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS 6 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC A OPERATION For details about reading of DTCs refer to Subaru Select Monitor Ref to TPM diag 8 Subaru Se lec...

Page 4103: ...gnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 23 No RR Transmitter Data Data cannot be received from RR sen sor Ref to TPM diag 30 DTC 23 NO RR TRANSMITTER DATA Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnost...

Page 4104: ...OW VOLT AGE Diagnostic Procedure with Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC 52 FR Transmit Battery Low Voltage Transmitter battery voltage is low Ref to TPM diag 35 DTC 52 FR TRANSMIT BATTERY LOW VOLT AGE Diag...

Page 4105: ...ory Mode TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS 8 Clear Memory Mode A OPERATION For details concerning DTC clear operation refer to Subaru Select Monitor Ref to TPM diag 8 Subaru Select Monitor a...

Page 4106: ...Press the YES key after the Model Year is displayed 9 On the Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnosis screen select the DTC Display and then press the YES key NOTE For details concerning the operation procedu...

Page 4107: ...control module Ref to WT 11 TIRE PRES SURE MONITORING CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL Tire Pressure Monitoring System Ref to WT 12 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING CONTROL MODULE INSTALLATION Tire Pres sure Monitoring...

Page 4108: ...de wall area near the transmitter When registration of each tire is completed the hazard light will blink and ID registration complet ed is displayed on the Select Monitor screen If registration proce...

Page 4109: ...munication is impossible between the tire pressure monitoring control module and the Subaru Select Monitor WIRING DIAGRAM TPM00007 B40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SBF 1 SBF 8 No 4 B40 R211...

Page 4110: ...DATA LINK CONNECTOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the tire pressure monitoring control module 3 Measure the resistance between data link connector and chassis ground Connector termin...

Page 4111: ...Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from the tire pressure monitoring control module 3 Measure the resistance of harness between tire pressure monitoring control mod ule and ch...

Page 4112: ...NO TROUBLE CODE is displayed on Subaru Select Mon itor the system is in a normal condition WIRING DIAGRAM TPM00008 TO POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FB 36 F B FUSE NO 5 IG 2 6 COMBINATION METER A i10 B i11 A3 B...

Page 4113: ...Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys tem Go to step 2 2 CHECK WIRING HARNESS Measure the resistance between tire pressure monitoring control module and combination meter connector Connector terminal i11 No 6...

Page 4114: ...ESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS 7 Inspection Mode A PROCEDURE Reproduce the malfunction occurrence condition as much as possible Drive the vehicle at a speed more than 40 km h 25 MPH for at least...

Page 4115: ...iag 30 DTC 24 NO RL TRANSMITTER DA TA Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC F DTC 22 NO FR TRANSMITTER DATA NOTE Refer to DTC 24 for the diagnostic procedure Ref to TPM diag 30 DTC 24...

Page 4116: ...ter to check Latest Received ID Is Latest Received ID updated Go to step 4 Replace the front right transmitter 4 CHECK FR TRANSMITTER ID Check the ID displayed in the updated ID dis play and the FR re...

Page 4117: ...Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC J DTC 32 FR TRANSMIT PRES DATA ABNORMAL NOTE Refer to DTC 34 for the diagnostic procedure Ref to TPM diag 32 DTC 34 RL TRANSMIT PRES DATA ABNORMAL Diagnosti...

Page 4118: ...transmitter 4 CHECK FR TRANSMITTER ID Check the ID displayed in the updated ID dis play and the FR registered ID Are the two IDs same Go to step 5 Record the received ID update as the FR trans mitter...

Page 4119: ...Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC N DTC 42 FR TRANS FUNCTION CODE ABNORMAL NOTE Refer to DTC 44 for the diagnostic procedure Ref to TPM diag 34 DTC 44 RL TRANS FUNCTION CODE ABNORMAL Diagnost...

Page 4120: ...displayed in the updated ID dis play and the FR registered ID Are the two IDs same Go to step 5 Record the received ID update as the FR trans mitter Go to step 5 5 START RR TRANSMITTER Use the transm...

Page 4121: ...OTE Refer to DTC 54 for the diagnostic procedure Ref to TPM diag 35 DTC 54 RL TRANSMIT BATTERY LOW VOLTAGE Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC T DTC 54 RL TRANSMIT BATTERY LOW VOLTAG...

Page 4122: ...2 9 TPM CONTROL MODULE i102 1 2 3 8 9 10 4 11 12 13 14 15 16 5 6 7 A i10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 19 20 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 22 R211 18 B301 B310 MICRO COMPUTER SPEEDOMETER FB 17 F BB FUSE NO 7 B TO...

Page 4123: ...le speed signal at that time Is the vehicle speed being input Replace the tire pressure monitor ing control module Ref to WT 11 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys tem Go to step 2 2 CHECK HARNESS 1 Disconne...

Page 4124: ...A INSPECTION 1 Ignition switch 8 Tire pressure warning light 14 Tire pressure warning light 2 OFF 9 Light OFF 15 Light OFF 3 ON 10 Light ON 16 Blink 4 Start 11 System status 17 1 second 5 Tire pressu...

Page 4125: ...toring control module warning light circuit and the combination meter circuit Ref to TPM diag 23 TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT COME OFF Tire Pressure Warning Light Trouble Indicator Light Illum...

Page 4126: ...ire pressure warning light does not come on for approximately 2 seconds WIRING DIAGRAM TPM00008 TO POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FB 36 F B FUSE NO 5 IG 2 6 COMBINATION METER A i10 B i11 A3 B6 TIRE PRESSURE WAR...

Page 4127: ...the tire pressure warning light lit Go to step 4 Replace the tire pressure monitor ing control module Ref to WT 11 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING CONTROL MOD ULE REMOVAL Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys tem 4 C...

Page 4128: ...Tire pressure warning light does not go off after engine starts WIRING DIAGRAM TPM00008 TO POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FB 36 F B FUSE NO 5 IG 2 6 COMBINATION METER A i10 B i11 A3 B6 TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LI...

Page 4129: ...4 4 CHECK HARNESS 1 Disconnect the tire pressure monitoring control module connector 2 Connect the tester to the terminal No 2 of the tire pressure monitoring control module connector R211 3 Turn the...

Page 4130: ...ssure warning light blinks continuously after engine starting WIRING DIAGRAM TPM00008 TO POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FB 36 F B FUSE NO 5 IG 2 6 COMBINATION METER A i10 B i11 A3 B6 TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT...

Page 4131: ...the terminal No 2 of the tire pressure monitoring control module connector R211 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON and mea sure the voltage Connector terminal R211 No 2 Chassis ground Is the voltage 10...

Page 4132: ...NSPECTION Sub aru Select Monitor 4 Read the DTC Ref to TPM diag 16 OPERATION Read Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Is DTC displayed Go to step 4 Go to step 3 3 PERFORM GENERAL DIAGNOSTICS 1 Perform the ins...

Page 4133: ...ide Once the car is outside where the temperature is lower the air pressure in the tires will drop causing the tire pressure warning light to come on even if the pressure in the tires was adjusted to...

Page 4134: ...CARTRIDGE Troubleshooting for the electrical system 22771AA030 SUBARU SELECT MONITOR KIT Troubleshooting for the electrical system TOOL NAME REMARKS Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance voltag...

Page 4135: ...TC 9 Reduction Drive Gear TRANSFER CASE 8 Reduction Drive Gear A NOTE For removal installation and inspection refer to the 4AT section Ref to 4AT 78 Reduction Drive Gear asieps_tobira book 9...

Page 4136: ...ction 4AT model Ref to 4AT 44 Extension Case Oil Seal Ref to 4AT 45 Differential Side Retainer Oil Seal 5AT model Ref to 5AT 44 Extension Case Oil Seal Ref to 5AT 45 Differential Side Retainer Oil Sea...

Page 4137: ...nsion Case Assembly TRANSFER CASE 2 Transfer Case and Extension Case Assembly A NOTE For removal installation and inspection refer to the 5MT section Ref to 5MT 36 Transfer Case and Extension Case Ass...

Page 4138: ...Test TRANSFER CASE 12 Transfer Clutch Pressure Test A NOTE For inspection refer to 4AT or 5AT section 4AT model Ref to 4AT 34 Transfer Clutch Pressure Test 5AT model Ref to 5AT 33 Transfer Clutch Pres...

Page 4139: ...TC 14 Transfer Clutch Pressure Test TRANSFER CASE asieps_tobira book 14...

Page 4140: ...DS Page 1 General Description 2 2 Propeller Shaft 10 3 Front Axle 13 4 Front Hub Unit Bearing 17 5 Rear Hub Unit Bearing 19 6 Front Drive Shaft 22 7 Rear Drive Shaft 26 8 General Diagnostic Table 30 a...

Page 4141: ...E 1 General Description A NOTE For general description refer to 4AT 5AT or 5MT section 4AT model Ref to 4AT 2 General Description 5AT model Ref to 5AT 2 General Description 5MT model Ref to 5MT 2 Gene...

Page 4142: ...TC 8 Transfer Driven Gear TRANSFER CASE 7 Transfer Driven Gear A NOTE For removal installation and inspection refer to the 5MT section Ref to 5MT 42 Transfer Driven Gear asieps_tobira book 8...

Page 4143: ...enter Differential Carrier TRANSFER CASE 9 Center Differential Carrier A NOTE For removal installation and inspection refer to the 5AT section Ref to 5AT 74 Center Differential Carrier asieps_tobira b...

Page 4144: ...TC 12 Center Differential TRANSFER CASE 11 Center Differential A NOTE For removal installation and inspection refer to the 5MT section Ref to 5MT 44 Center Differential asieps_tobira book 12...

Page 4145: ...on Case TRANSFER CASE 4 Extension Case A NOTE For removal installation and inspection refer to 4AT or 5AT section 4AT model Ref to 4AT 69 Extension Case 5AT model Ref to 5AT 65 Extension Case asieps_t...

Page 4146: ...TC 7 Transfer Drive Gear TRANSFER CASE 6 Transfer Drive Gear A NOTE For removal installation and inspection refer to the 5MT section Ref to 5MT 40 Transfer Drive Gear asieps_tobira book 7...

Page 4147: ...Clutch TRANSFER CASE 3 Transfer Clutch A NOTE For removal installation and inspection refer to 4AT or 5AT section 4AT model Ref to 4AT 71 Transfer Clutch 5AT model Ref to 5AT 67 Transfer Clutch asieps...

Page 4148: ...TRANSFER CASE 10 Reduction Driven Gear A NOTE For removal installation and inspection refer to 4AT or 5AT section 4AT model Ref to 4AT 76 Reduction Driven Gear 5AT model Ref to 5AT 71 Reduction Driven...

Page 4149: ...sor Signal Front ABS wheel speed sensor LH sig nal malfunction Ref to VDC diag 47 DTC C0024 FRONT ABS WHEEL SPEED SENSOR LH SIGNAL MALFUNCTION Diagnos tic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC C0...

Page 4150: ...n Rear inlet solenoid valve RH malfunction in VDCCM H U Ref to VDC diag 53 DTC C0035 REAR INLET SOLE NOID VALVE RH MALFUNCTION IN VDCCM H U Diag nostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC C0036...

Page 4151: ...peed sen sor power malfunction Ref to VDC diag 60 DTC C0042 ABS WHEEL SPEED SENSOR POWER MALFUNCTION Diagnostic Proce dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC C0044 9A0XH TCM communication circuit CAN co...

Page 4152: ...re with Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC 5A0XH Motor and motor relay OFF failure Motor motor relay OFF malfunction Ref to VDC diag 76 DTC C0052 MOTOR MOTOR RELAY OFF MALFUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure with...

Page 4153: ...E SENSOR POWER SUPPLY MALFUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC C0072 184XH 188XH 18EXH Abnormal yaw rate sensor output Yaw rate sensor output Ref to VDC diag 93 DTC C0072 YAW...

Page 4154: ...L G SEN SOR POWER OUTPUT Diagnostic Procedure with Diag nostic Trouble Code DTC C0074 118XH Pressure sensor test failure Pressure sensor test malfunction Ref to VDC diag 107 DTC C0074 PRESSURE SEN SOR...

Page 4155: ...wheels Brake pedal play Defective steering angle sen sor or improper neutral position Defective yaw rate lateral G sensor or improper installation Brake pad Brake pipe Long brake pedal stroke Aeration...

Page 4156: ...sion play or fatigue poor damping Axle and wheels Tire specifications tire wear and air pressures Noise inside pas senger seat VDCCM H U Defective steering angle sen sor or improper neutral position D...

Page 4157: ...or gap Defective steering angle sensor or improper neutral position Defective yaw rate lateral G sensor or improper installation Incorrect wiring or piping connections Power steering system Brake cali...

Page 4158: ...VDC diag 118 General Diagnostic Table VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL VDC DIAGNOSTICS asieps_tobira book 118...

Page 4159: ...Brake Assembly 17 5 Rear Brake Pad 21 6 Rear Disc Rotor 22 7 Rear Disc Brake Assembly 24 8 Master Cylinder 26 9 Brake Booster 28 10 Brake Fluid 32 11 Air Bleeding 33 12 Brake Hose 35 13 Brake Pipe 37...

Page 4160: ...rting engine START ON after starting engine engine is running ON after starting engine engine is at a standstill Timing Immediately after turning the ignition switch to ON Immediately after turning th...

Page 4161: ...ART ON after starting engine engine is running ON after starting engine engine is at a standstill Timing Immediately after turning the ignition switch to ON Immediately after turning the ignition swit...

Page 4162: ...engine engine is running ON after starting engine engine is at a standstill Timing Immediately after turning the ignition switch to ON Immediately after turning the ignition switch to START When acce...

Page 4163: ...iny Snowy Others b Ambient temperature C F c Road Inner city Suburbs Highway Local street Uphill Downhill Paved road Gravel road Muddy road Sandy place Straight road Sharp curve Gentle curve S curve R...

Page 4164: ...nt RH tire kPa Front LH tire kPa Rear RH tire kPa Rear LH tire kPa e Degree of wear Front RH tire Front LH tire Rear RH tire Rear LH tire f Steering wheel Sharp turning Gentle turning Straight forward...

Page 4165: ...erminal numbers in VDCCM H U connector are shown in the figure When the connector is removed from VDCCM H U the ABS warning light VDC warning light and VDC OFF indicator light illuminate VDC00211 B310...

Page 4166: ...sensor 1 16 2 1 2 9 V Test 2 16 5 1 V cycle for 40 ms pulse signal Ref to VDC diag 16 WAVEFORM MEASUREMENT Control Module I O Signal Ground 16 CAN communication line 13 2 5 1 5 V pulse signal CAN comm...

Page 4167: ...g angle sensor 7 Motor 22 Combination meter 35 Yaw rate lateral G sensor 8 Front inlet solenoid valve LH 23 VDC indicator light 36 Pressure sensor 9 Front outlet solenoid valve LH 24 VDC warning light...

Page 4168: ...YNAMICS CONTROL VDC DIAGNOSTICS C MEASUREMENT Measure input and output signal voltage 1 WAVEFORM 1 Yaw rate sensor 2 Terminal No 3 Vehicle is at a standstill VDC00212 28 16 20 ms V 3 2 1 0 5 0 V 2 1 2...

Page 4169: ...L VDC DIAGNOSTICS 8 Inspection Mode A PROCEDURE Reproduce the malfunction occurrence condition as possible Drive the vehicle at least ten minutes NOTE Make sure the vehicle is not dragged to one side...

Page 4170: ...PECIAL TOOL PREPARATION TOOL General Description 2 Connect the diagnosis cable to the Subaru Se lect Monitor 3 Insert the cartridge to the Subaru Select Monitor Ref to VDC diag 10 SPECIAL TOOL PREPA R...

Page 4171: ...upply etc the DTC suffixed with a question mark is displayed on Subaru Se lect Monitor display screen This shows it may be an unreliable reading 10 If VDC and Subaru Select Monitor cannot com municate...

Page 4172: ...played deg Yaw Rate Sensor Vehicle angular speed detected by yaw rate sensor is displayed deg s Pressure Sensor Brake fluid pressure detected by pressure sensor is displayed bar Lateral G Sensor Vehic...

Page 4173: ...yed Lateral G Sensor Vehicle lateral acceleration detected by lateral G sensor is displayed Pressure Sensor Brake fluid pressure detected by pres sure sensor is displayed Vehicle Speed Vehicle speed c...

Page 4174: ...1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14 27 28 29 30 15 16 17 18 31 32 33 34 19 20 21 22 35 36 37 38 23 24 25 26 39 40 41 42 5 6 7 8 9 10 BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH DATA LINK CONNECTOR...

Page 4175: ...sis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 7 Repair the har ness and connec tor between each control module and data link con nector 7 CHECK THE VDCCM H U OUTPUT SIG NALS 1 Turn the ignitio...

Page 4176: ...ground Connector terminal B310 No 6 Chassis ground Is the resistance less than 0 5 Go to step 12 Repair the open circuit in harness between VDCCM H U and inhibitor side con nector and poor contact of...

Page 4177: ...IGHT VDC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT AND VDC INDICATOR LIGHT DO NOT COME ON Warning Light Illumination Pattern 3 When ABS warning light does not go off check the combination meter circuit Ref to VDC diag 31 A...

Page 4178: ...this case this is not a malfunction Perform the Clear Memory Mode B VDC WARNING LIGHT VDC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT AND VDC INDICATOR LIGHT DO NOT COME ON DETECTING CONDITION Defective combination meter Def...

Page 4179: ...1 R4 A3 A4 5 1 2 1 2 B229 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 16 11 15 14 13 12 17 19 18 23 25 24 20 22 21 26 28 27 i10 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16...

Page 4180: ...r B310 from the VDCCM H U 3 Disconnect the connector i10 from combi nation meter 4 Measure the resistance between VDCCM H U connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B310 No 35 Chassis ground Is...

Page 4181: ...1 2 1 2 B229 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 16 11 15 14 13 12 17 19 18 23 25 24 20 22 21 26 28 27 i10 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20...

Page 4182: ...between VDCCM H U and combination meter 3 CHECK POOR CONTACT IN CONNECTOR Check poor contact in all connectors Is there poor contact Repair the con nector Go to step 4 4 CHECK VDCCM 1 Connect the conn...

Page 4183: ...p 2 2 CHECK ENGINE Does the malfunction indicator light illuminate Repair the engine Go to step 3 3 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA TURE Warm up the engine and check if VDC warning light and VDC OFF indi...

Page 4184: ...E No 5 B16 B97 R1 R4 A3 A4 5 1 2 1 2 B229 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 16 11 15 14 13 12 17 19 18 23 25 24 20 22 21 26 28 27 i10 2 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1...

Page 4185: ...Measure the resistance between parking brake switch terminal and chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 6 Replace the park ing brake switch 6 CHECK GROUND SHORT OF HARNESS 1 Disconn...

Page 4186: ...heel speed sensor 7 VDC warning light and VDC OFF indicator light 12 Yaw rate lateral G sensor 2 Pressure sensor 13 Data link connector 3 Engine control module ECM 8 Steering angle sensor 14 Transmiss...

Page 4187: ...VDC diag 12 Electrical Component Location VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL VDC DIAGNOSTICS 1 2 VDC00231 VDC00251 6 7 5 4 8 VDC00235 VDC00234 11 10 10 12 VDC00250 VDC00242 13 asieps_tobira book 12...

Page 4188: ...le Code DTC B DTC C0023 FRONT ABS WHEEL SPEED SENSOR LH POWER SUPPLY MALFUNCTION NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC C0027 REAR ABS WHEEL SPEED SENSOR LH POWER SUP PLY MALFUNCTION Ref to VD...

Page 4189: ...NCTION DTC DETECTING CONDITION Defective ABS wheel speed sensor TROUBLE SYMPTOM ABS does not operate VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00405 MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 33 B310 B310 E E 6 14 VDCCM H U BATT...

Page 4190: ...H INPUT OF REAR ABS WHEEL SPEED SENSOR LH Ref to VDC diag 45 DTC C0027 OPEN HIGH INPUT OF REAR ABS WHEEL SPEED SENSOR LH Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK...

Page 4191: ...NG DIAGRAM VDC00406 38 23 25 41 40 24 6 B98 R72 R2 E 1 2 15 14 6 5 R73 1 2 1 2 1 2 B6 B15 21 22 B310 VDCCM H U TWISTED PAIR LINE TWISTED PAIR LINE TWISTED PAIR LINE TWISTED PAIR LINE TWISTED PAIR LINE...

Page 4192: ...1 B310 No 40 R73 No 2 Is the resistance less than 0 5 Go to step 3 Repair the har ness connector between VDCCM H U and ABS wheel speed sensor 3 CHECK GROUND SHORT OF HARNESS Measure the resistance be...

Page 4193: ...re with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 5 CHECK THE VDCCM H U POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the VDCCM H U connector 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON 4 Measure the vol...

Page 4194: ...NG DIAGRAM VDC00406 38 23 25 41 40 24 6 B98 R72 R2 E 1 2 15 14 6 5 R73 1 2 1 2 1 2 B6 B15 21 22 B310 VDCCM H U TWISTED PAIR LINE TWISTED PAIR LINE TWISTED PAIR LINE TWISTED PAIR LINE TWISTED PAIR LINE...

Page 4195: ...ol Unit VDCCM H U Go to step 6 6 CHECK OTHER DTC DETECTION Is any other DTC displayed Perform the diag nosis according to DTC It results from a temporary noise interference 7 CHECK INSTALLATION OF ABS...

Page 4196: ...the VDCCM H U Ref to VDC 7 VDC Control Mod ule and Hydraulic Control Unit VDCCM H U Go to step 13 13 CHECK OTHER DTC DETECTION Is any other DTC displayed Perform the diag nosis according to DTC It res...

Page 4197: ...e warning light comes on as well as ABS warning light when EBD does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00406 38 23 25 41 40 24 6 B98 R72 R2 E 1 2 15 14 6 5 R73 1 2 1 2 1 2 B6 B15 21 22 B310 VDCCM H U TWIST...

Page 4198: ...ned 7 5 N m 0 76 kgf m 5 5 ft lb For four wheels Go to step 6 Tighten the ABS wheel speed sen sor installation bolts 6 CHECK ABS WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIG NAL 1 Install the ABS wheel speed sensor 2 Prepa...

Page 4199: ...PRIMARY SUCTION VALVE MALFUNCTION IN VDC CM H U Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Q DTC C0034 FRONT OUTLET SOLENOID VALVE LH MALFUNCTION IN VDC CM H U NOTE For the diagnostic proce...

Page 4200: ...MALFUNCTION IN VDC CM H U Ref to VDC diag 55 DTC C0064 PRIMARY SUCTION VALVE MALFUNCTION IN VDC CM H U Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC V DTC C0061 SECONDARY CUT VALVE MALFUNCTIO...

Page 4201: ...N Defective harness connector Defective VDCH U solenoid valve TROUBLE SYMPTOM ABS does not operate EBD does not operate VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00405 MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 33 B310 B310 E E...

Page 4202: ...the resistance between VDCCM H U connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B310 No 6 Chassis ground Is the resistance less than 0 5 Go to step 3 Repair the VDCCM H U ground harness 3 CHECK POOR...

Page 4203: ...MODULE MALFUNCTION DTC DETECTING CONDITION Defective VDCCM H U TROUBLE SYMPTOM ABS does not operate EBD does not operate VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00217 VDCCM H U 6 B310 B310 E 1 2 3 4 1...

Page 4204: ...r Go to step 3 3 CHECK CAUSE OF SIGNAL NOISE Is the car telephone or the radio properly installed Go to step 4 Install the car phone or radio properly 4 CHECK CAUSE OF SIGNAL NOISE Is there a noise so...

Page 4205: ...ower supply voltage TROUBLE SYMPTOM ABS does not operate EBD may not operate VDC does not operate NOTE Warning lights go off if voltage returns WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00405 MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 33 B310 B310 E...

Page 4206: ...such as headlights air conditioner defogger etc which produce much electrical loading 4 Measure the voltage between VDCCM H U connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B310 No 14 Chassis ground...

Page 4207: ...ng to DTC for LAN sys tem Go to step 2 2 CHECK POOR CONTACT IN CONNECTORS Is there poor contact in TCM connector Repair the con nector Go to step 3 3 CHECK TCM Is the TCM normal Go to step 4 Replace t...

Page 4208: ...fication of TCM same as vehicle specification Go to step 3 Replace the TCM Ref to 4AT 62 Transmission Con trol Module TCM Ref to 5AT 56 Transmis sion Control Mod ule TCM 3 CHECK AT SYSTEM 1 Start the...

Page 4209: ...ECK AT SYSTEM 1 Start the engine 2 Check the DTC in AT system Is DTC of AT system dis played Repair the AT sys tem Go to step 2 2 CHECK THE VDCCM H U 1 Connect all the connectors 2 Erase the memory 3...

Page 4210: ...G DIAGRAM VDC00410 B310 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14 27 28 29 30 15 16 17 18 31 32 33 34 19 20 21 22 35 36 37 38 23 24 25 26 39 40 41 42 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 B231 30 29 13 B231 B355 B234 B352 E 2 4 1 3 B310 VD...

Page 4211: ...tem Perform the diag nosis according to DTC for LAN sys tem Go to step 2 2 CHECK POOR CONTACT IN CONNECTORS Is there poor contact in VDCCM H U connector Repair the con nector Go to step 3 3 CHECK THE...

Page 4212: ...VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00407 B310 B310 E 5 6 VDCCM H U 14 PUMP MOTOR M FL INLET MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 1 No 33 E BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH SOLENOID VALVE FR INLET RL INLET RR INLET FL OUTLET...

Page 4213: ...OFF 2 Measure the resistance between VDCCM H U connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B310 No 6 Chassis ground Is the resistance less than 0 5 Go to step 3 Repair the VDCCM H U ground harnes...

Page 4214: ...C does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00407 B310 B310 E 5 6 VDCCM H U 14 PUMP MOTOR M FL INLET MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 1 No 33 E BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH SOLENOID VALVE FR INLET RL INLET RR INLET FL OUTLET FR...

Page 4215: ...he ignition switch to OFF 2 Measure the resistance between VDCCM H U connector and chassis ground Connector terminal B310 No 6 Chassis ground Is the resistance less than 0 5 Go to step 4 Repair the VD...

Page 4216: ...VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00407 B310 B310 E 5 6 VDCCM H U 14 PUMP MOTOR M FL INLET MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 1 No 33 E BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH SOLENOID VALVE FR INLET RL INLET RR INLET FL OUTLET...

Page 4217: ...ground Is the resistance less than 0 5 Go to step 3 Repair the VDCCM H U ground circuit 3 CHECK THE VDCCM H U VALVE RELAY Measure the resistance between VDCCM H U connector terminals Connector termin...

Page 4218: ...EBD may not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00407 B310 B310 E 5 6 VDCCM H U 14 PUMP MOTOR M FL INLET MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 1 No 33 E BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH SOLENOID VALVE FR INLET RL INLET RR INLET FL OUTLET F...

Page 4219: ...Unit VDCCM H U 2 CHECK POOR CONTACT IN CONNECTORS Is there poor contact in con nector between generator bat tery and VDCCM H U Repair the con nector Go to step 3 3 CHECK THE VDCCM H U 1 Connect all th...

Page 4220: ...does not operate EBD may not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00408 B310 E 9 6 VDCCM H U 14 PUMP MOTOR M FL INLET MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 33 E BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH SOLENOID VALVE MOTOR RELAY VALVE RELAY FR INLE...

Page 4221: ...esistance less than 0 5 Go to step 4 Repair the VDCCM H U ground harness 4 CHECK VDCCM H U MOTOR RELAY Measure the resistance between VDCCM H U connector terminals Terminals No 9 No 10 Is the resistan...

Page 4222: ...CTING CONDITION Defective motor relay Defective harness connector TROUBLE SYMPTOM ABS does not operate VDC does not operate EBD may not operate NOTE For the diagnostic procedure refer to DTC C0052 MOT...

Page 4223: ...s not operate EBD may not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00408 B310 E 9 6 VDCCM H U 14 PUMP MOTOR M FL INLET MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 33 E BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH SOLENOID VALVE MOTOR RELAY VALVE RELAY FR INLET R...

Page 4224: ...terminals Terminals No 9 No 10 Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 2 Replace the VDCCM H U Ref to VDC 7 VDC Control Mod ule and Hydraulic Control Unit VDCCM H U 2 CHECK THE VDCCM H U 1 Connect...

Page 4225: ...tive stop light switch TROUBLE SYMPTOM ABS does not operate VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00409 MAIN SBF SBF 2 No 8 B310 B159 E 37 VDCCM H U B65 B65 B310 B159 5 9 3 2 9 4 7 6 2 1 5 3 8 1 2 3...

Page 4226: ...the stop light circuit 4 CHECK OPEN CIRCUIT OF HARNESS 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Disconnect the connector from the VDCCM H U 3 Depress the brake pedal 4 Measure the voltage between VDCCM H U...

Page 4227: ...ctive stop light switch TROUBLE SYMPTOM ABS does not operate VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00409 MAIN SBF SBF 2 No 8 B310 B159 E 37 VDCCM H U B65 B65 B310 B159 5 9 3 2 9 4 7 6 2 1 5 3 8 1 2 3...

Page 4228: ...rm the Inspection Mode 4 Read the DTC Is the same DTC displayed Replace the VDCCM H U Ref to VDC 7 VDC Control Mod ule and Hydraulic Control Unit VDCCM H U Go to step 4 4 CHECK OTHER DTC DETECTION Is...

Page 4229: ...VDC00410 B310 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14 27 28 29 30 15 16 17 18 31 32 33 34 19 20 21 22 35 36 37 38 23 24 25 26 39 40 41 42 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 B231 30 29 13 B231 B355 B234 B352 E 2 4 1 3 B310 VDCCM H U TW...

Page 4230: ...2 Perform the cen tering adjustment of steering wheel 2 CHECK THE VDCCM H U 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect all the connectors 3 Erase the memory 4 Perform the Inspection Mode 5 Read the...

Page 4231: ...IAGRAM VDC00410 B310 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14 27 28 29 30 15 16 17 18 31 32 33 34 19 20 21 22 35 36 37 38 23 24 25 26 39 40 41 42 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 B231 30 29 13 B231 B355 B234 B352 E 2 4 1 3 B310 VDCCM...

Page 4232: ...ctors 3 Erase the memory 4 Perform the Inspection Mode 5 Read the DTC Is the same DTC displayed Replace the VDCCM H U Ref to VDC 7 VDC Control Mod ule and Hydraulic Control Unit VDCCM H U Go to step 2...

Page 4233: ...B310 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14 27 28 29 30 15 16 17 18 31 32 33 34 19 20 21 22 35 36 37 38 23 24 25 26 39 40 41 42 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 B231 30 29 13 B231 B355 B234 B352 E 2 4 1 3 B310 VDCCM H U TWISTED PAI...

Page 4234: ...urface which does not mean a dirt road Go to step 3 3 CHECK OUTPUT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR WITH SUBARU SELECT MONI TOR 1 Select Current Data Display Save in Subaru Select Monitor 2 Read the steering...

Page 4235: ...2 4 1 3 B310 VDCCM H U TWISTED PAIR LINE B355 TWISTED PAIR LINE TWISTED PAIR LINE TWISTED PAIR LINE B234 B352 1 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT AMONG 1 2 5 AND 6 2 TERMINAL No OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT A...

Page 4236: ...istance between steering angle sensor and chassis ground Connector terminal B231 No 1 Chassis ground B231 No 2 Chassis ground Is the resistance more than 1 M Go to step 7 Repair the har ness between t...

Page 4237: ...ed The ABS and VDC operate normally if voltage returns WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00410 B310 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14 27 28 29 30 15 16 17 18 31 32 33 34 19 20 21 22 35 36 37 38 23 24 25 26 39 40 41 42 5 6 7 8 9 10...

Page 4238: ...s ground Is the resistance less than 0 5 Go to step 5 Repair ground cir cuit in the steering angle sensor 5 CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect all the connectors 3...

Page 4239: ...CONDITION Defective yaw rate sensor TROUBLE SYMPTOM VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00411 28 2 1 30 3 16 6 B312 B347 4 2 1 3 5 6 B230 1 B230 B310 VDCCM H U 1 3 4 5 6 2 B312 1 2 B310 E 1 2 3 4...

Page 4240: ...rate lateral G sensor 4 CHECK OUTPUT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR WITH SUBARU SELECT MONI TOR 1 Drive the vehicle on a flat road 2 Park the vehicle straight 3 Select Current Data Display Save in Subaru S...

Page 4241: ...B312 1 2 B310 E 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14 27 28 29 30 15 16 17 18 31 32 33 34 19 20 21 22 35 36 37 38 23 24 25 26 39 40 41 42 5 6 7 8 9 10 YAW RATE LATERAL G SENSOR Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK YAW RATE LATERA...

Page 4242: ...Measure the resistance between VDCCM H U and yaw rate lateral G sensor Connector terminal B310 No 28 B230 No 4 Is the resistance less than 0 5 Go to step 8 Repair the har ness between yaw rate lateral...

Page 4243: ...1 2 B310 E 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14 27 28 29 30 15 16 17 18 31 32 33 34 19 20 21 22 35 36 37 38 23 24 25 26 39 40 41 42 5 6 7 8 9 10 YAW RATE LATERAL G SENSOR Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR YA...

Page 4244: ...tween VDCCM H U and yaw rate lateral G sensor Connector terminal B310 No 1 B230 No 1 Is the resistance less than 0 5 Go to step 7 Repair the har ness between yaw rate lateral G sensor and VDCCM H U 7...

Page 4245: ...U 1 3 4 5 6 2 B312 1 2 B310 E 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14 27 28 29 30 15 16 17 18 31 32 33 34 19 20 21 22 35 36 37 38 23 24 25 26 39 40 41 42 5 6 7 8 9 10 YAW RATE LATERAL G SENSOR Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK...

Page 4246: ...IT Measure the resistance between VDCCM H U and chassis ground Connector terminal B310 No 16 Chassis ground Is the resistance less than 0 5 Repair the har ness between yaw rate lateral G sensor and VD...

Page 4247: ...Is the oscilloscope pattern the same waveform as shown in the figure Go to step 12 Replace the yaw rate lateral G sensor 12 CHECK YAW RATE LATERAL G SENSOR 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect...

Page 4248: ...TING CONDITION Lateral G sensor malfunction TROUBLE SYMPTOM VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00411 28 2 1 30 3 16 6 B312 B347 4 2 1 3 5 6 B230 1 B230 B310 VDCCM H U 1 3 4 5 6 2 B312 1 2 B310 E 1...

Page 4249: ...Select Monitor 4 Read the lateral G sensor output displayed on screen When the yaw rate lateral G sensor is inclined 90 to the right is the indicated value 6 8 12 8 m s2 Go to step 4 Replace the yaw...

Page 4250: ...ONDITION Lateral G sensor malfunction DTC DETECTING CONDITION VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00411 28 2 1 30 3 16 6 B312 B347 4 2 1 3 5 6 B230 1 B230 B310 VDCCM H U 1 3 4 5 6 2 B312 1 2 B310 E...

Page 4251: ...and VDCCM H U Go to step 5 5 CHECK POOR CONTACT OF CONNECTOR Is there poor contact in con nector Correct or replace the connector Go to step 10 6 CHECK OPEN CIRCUIT IN LATERAL G SEN SOR OUTPUT HARNESS...

Page 4252: ...con nector Go to step 10 10 CHECK THE VDCCM H U 1 Connect all the connectors 2 Erase the memory 3 Perform the Inspection Mode 4 Read the DTC Is the same DTC displayed Replace the VDCCM H U Ref to VDC...

Page 4253: ...UNCTION DTC DETECTING CONDITION Defective pressure sensor TROUBLE SYMPTOM ABS does not operate VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00412 12 11 27 B348 B348 1 2 3 B310 VDCCM H U B310 1 2 3 4 11 12 1...

Page 4254: ...istance between VDCCM H U and chassis ground Connector terminal B310 No 12 Chassis ground Is the resistance less than 0 5 Repair the har ness between the pressure sensor and VDCCM H U Go to step 6 6 C...

Page 4255: ...PUT OFFSET DTC DETECTING CONDITION Defective pressure sensor TROUBLE SYMPTOM ABS does not operate VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00412 12 11 27 B348 B348 1 2 3 B310 VDCCM H U B310 1 2 3 4 11 1...

Page 4256: ...c Trouble Code DTC Step Check Yes No 1 CHECK STOP LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT Check stop light switch open circuit Is the stop light switch circuit OK Go to step 2 Repair the stop light switch circuit 2 CHEC...

Page 4257: ...UT DTC DETECTING CONDITION Defective pressure sensor TROUBLE SYMPTOM ABS does not operate VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00412 12 11 27 B348 B348 1 2 3 B310 VDCCM H U B310 1 2 3 4 11 12 13 14...

Page 4258: ...resistance less than 0 5 Go to step 8 Go to step 6 6 CHECK THE VDCCM H U GROUND CIR CUIT Measure the resistance between VDCCM H U and chassis ground Connector terminal B310 No 12 Chassis ground Is th...

Page 4259: ...DTC DETECTING CONDITION Defective pressure sensor TROUBLE SYMPTOM ABS does not operate VDC does not operate WIRING DIAGRAM VDC00405 MAIN SBF SBF 6 No 33 B310 B310 E E 6 14 VDCCM H U BATTERY GENERATOR...

Page 4260: ...V Go to step 3 Check the power supply circuit in VDCCM H U 3 CHECK THE VDCCM H U 1 Connect all the connectors 2 Erase the memory 3 Perform the Inspection Mode 4 Read the DTC Is the same DTC displayed...

Page 4261: ...Code DTC VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL VDC DIAGNOSTICS 7 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC A OPERATION For details concerning DTC reading procedure re fer to Subaru Select Monitor Ref to VDC diag 17 Subaru...

Page 4262: ...o to step 2 Repair or replace each component 2 CHECK INDICATION OF DTC 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF 2 Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to the data link connector 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON...

Page 4263: ...iag 36 LIST List of Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 2 Correct the cause of trouble 3 Perform the Clear Memory Mode Ref to VDC diag 26 OPERATION Clear Memory Mode 4 Perform the Inspection Mode Ref to VDC d...

Page 4264: ...tening torque of ground GB 7 bolt of VDC Tightening torque 13 N m 1 3 kgf m 9 6 ft lb 3 BRAKE FLUID 1 Check the brake fluid level 2 Check the brake fluid for leaks 4 HYDRAULIC UNIT Check the hydraulic...

Page 4265: ...OL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS 18482AA010 CARTRIDGE Troubleshooting for electrical system 22771AA030 SUBARU SELECT MONITOR KIT Troubleshooting for electrical system TOOL NAME REMARKS Circuit tester Use...

Page 4266: ...mory Mode VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL VDC DIAGNOSTICS 9 Clear Memory Mode A OPERATION For details concerning DTC clear operation refer to Subaru Select Monitor Ref to VDC diag 17 Subaru Select Monitor as...

Page 4267: ...not to spill the brake fluid on the vehicle body CAUTION If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle body wash it off immediately with water and wipe clean 7 Remove the clips and then remove the VDC CM...

Page 4268: ...om FL and FR caliper bodies 3 Connect two pressure gauges to FL and FR cal iper bodies CAUTION Use a pressure gauge used exclusively for brake fluid measurement Do not use a pressure gauge used for th...

Page 4269: ...tween de compression and compression meets specifica tion 8 After the inspection depress the brake pedal and check that it is not abnormally hard and tight ness is normal D ADJUSTMENT When the followi...

Page 4270: ...Speed Sen sor A NOTE Vehicles equipped with VDC have the same ABS wheel speed sensor as installed on vehicles equipped with ABS Refer to Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor for removal installation and inspe...

Page 4271: ...S 10 ABS SEQUENCE CONTROL WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR OPERA TION ABS Sequence Control 2 CONDITIONS FOR ABS SEQUENCE CONTROL Ref to ABS 11 CONDITIONS FOR ABS SE QUENCE CONTROL OPERATION ABS Se quence Co...

Page 4272: ...sensor ABS wheel speed sensor gap for reference Front 0 77 1 43 mm 0 030 0 056 in Rear 0 64 1 56 mm 0 025 0 061 in Identifications of harness marks color Front RH K1 White LH K2 Yellow Rear RH K5 Whit...

Page 4273: ...NENT 1 ABS WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 1 Front ABS wheel speed sensor 4 Hub unit bearing Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb 2 Front housing 5 Magnetic encoder T1 7 5 0 76 5 5 3 Rear ABS wheel speed sensor T2 33...

Page 4274: ...YNAMICS CONTROL VDC 2 YAW RATE AND LATERAL G SENSOR 3 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 1 Yaw rate lateral G sensor 2 Bracket Tightening torque N m kgf m ft lb T 7 5 0 76 5 5 VDC00195 1 T T 2 1 Steering angle sen...

Page 4275: ...m battery Before removal installation or disassembly be sure to clarify the failure Avoid unnecessary re moval installation disassembly and replacement Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv...

Page 4276: ...A010 CARTRIDGE Troubleshooting for the electrical system 22771AA030 SUBARU SELECT MONITOR KIT Troubleshooting for the electrical system TOOL NAME REMARKS Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance v...

Page 4277: ...ing column lower cover 6 Remove the two screws securing the steering column upper cover 7 Unlock the harness band and disconnect the connector of the steering angle sensor 8 Remove the screws which se...

Page 4278: ...ule WARNING Always refer to Airbag System before per forming the service operation Ref to AB 6 CAUTION General Description 17 Connect the ground cable to battery CAUTION After completion of installati...

Page 4279: ...Magnetic Encoder A NOTE Vehicles equipped with VDC have the same mag netic encoder as installed on vehicles equipped with ABS Refer to Rear Magnetic Encoder for re moval installation and inspection pr...

Page 4280: ...Speed Sen sor A NOTE Vehicles equipped with VDC have the same ABS wheel speed sensor as installed on vehicles equipped with ABS Refer to Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor for removal installation and inspec...

Page 4281: ...and then remove the VDC OFF switch B INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal C INSPECTION Measure the resistance between the VDC OFF switch terminals If NG replace the VDC OFF switch Swit...

Page 4282: ...ponent Location 11 5 Control Module I O Signal 13 6 Subaru Select Monitor 17 7 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 24 8 Inspection Mode 25 9 Clear Memory Mode 26 10 Warning Light Illumination Pattern 27...

Page 4283: ...agnetic Encoder A NOTE Vehicles equipped with VDC have the same mag netic encoder as installed on vehicles equipped with ABS Refer to Front Magnetic Encoder for re moval installation and inspection pr...

Page 4284: ...ELECT MONITOR NOTE In the event of any trouble sequence control will not operate 1 Connect the Subaru Select Monitor to data link connector under the driver s side instrument panel lower cover 2 Turn...

Page 4285: ...ENCE CONTROL 20 ON ON 23 23 23 4 5 19 32 3 2 1 22 22 22 22 V max 4 km h 2 5 MPH V max 10 km h 6 MPH OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON VDC 21 27 28 25 26 24 29 30 31 25 24 8 7 9 10 OFF 11 OFF 12 OFF 14 OFF 15 OFF...

Page 4286: ...d 13 FR decompression valve 25 1 second 2 Ignition key 14 FR compression valve 26 1 6 seconds 3 ABS warning light 15 RR decompression valve 27 Point A 4 VDC warning light 16 RR compression valve 28 Re...

Page 4287: ...the arrow on the yaw rate lateral G sensor pointed towards the front fo the vehicle Tightening torque 7 5 N m 0 76 kgf m 5 5 ft lb CAUTION After completion of installation set the follow ing two posi...

Page 4288: ...e console box 2 Remove the yaw rate lateral G sensors from vehicle Do not disconnect the connec tor 3 Read the display of Subaru Select Monitor NOTE When the yaw rate lateral G sensor is moved with it...

Page 4289: ...place the grommet with a new part when reusing transmitter 2 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING CON TROL MODULE 1 Remove the driver s seat Ref to SE 9 RE MOVAL Front Seat 2 Turn up the floor mat in the driver s...

Page 4290: ...ID to the tire pressure monitoring control module Ref to TPM diag 9 REGISTER TRANSMITTER ID OPERATION Subaru Select Monitor 2 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING CON TROL MODULE Install in the reverse order of r...

Page 4291: ...2 5 GT spec B 215 45 R18 89Y 18 7JJ 55 2 17 230 2 3 33 220 2 2 32 OUTBACK 3 0 R P225 55 R17 95V 17 7JJ 48 1 89 230 2 3 33 220 2 2 32 Wagon 2 5 i LTD P205 50 R17 88V 55 2 17 220 2 2 32 210 2 1 30 2 5 G...

Page 4292: ...1B 7 5 g 0 26 oz 28101AE02B 10 g 0 35 oz 28101AE03B 12 5 g 0 44 oz 28101AE04B 15 g 0 53 oz 28101AE05B 17 5 g 0 62 oz 28101AE06B 20 g 0 71 oz 28101AE07B 22 5 g 0 79 oz 28101AE08B 25 g 0 88 oz 28101AE09...

Page 4293: ...m kgf m ft lb 2 Grommet 5 Tire pressure monitoring control module T1 7 5 0 76 5 53 3 Nut T2 8 0 8 5 8 WT 00069 4 3 2 1 T1 T2 T2 5 TOOL NAME REMARKS Air pressure gauge Used for measuring tire air press...

Page 4294: ...ACEMENT Refer to Steel Wheels for removal and installation procedures of the T type tire Ref to WT 6 RE MOVAL Steel Wheel CAUTION The T type tire is only for temporary use Re place with a conventional...

Page 4295: ...ction to the specified torque Use a wheel nut wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 110 N m 11 2 kgf m 81 1 ft lb CAUTION Tighten the wheel nuts in two or three steps by gradually increasing the torque o...

Page 4296: ...wheels Ref to WT 6 INSPECTION Steel Wheel Rim runout D CAUTION Aluminum wheels are easily scratched To main tain their appearance and safety be careful of the following 1 Do not damage the aluminum wh...

Page 4297: ...to Abnormal tire wear in this table carry out the procedure and replace the tire Front stabilizer Inspect the front stabilizer Ref to FS 14 INSPEC TION Front Stabilizer Front wheel alignment Check the...

Page 4298: ...WT 14 General Diagnostic Table WHEEL AND TIRE SYSTEM asieps_tobira book 14...

Page 4299: ...odule I O Signal 6 5 Subaru Select Monitor 8 6 Read Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC 16 7 Inspection Mode 17 8 Clear Memory Mode 18 9 Tire Pressure Warning Light Trouble Indicator Light Illumination Patter...

Page 4300: ...0 g 1 41 oz 23141GA542 45 g 1 59 oz 23141GA552 50 g 1 76 oz 23141GA562 55 g 1 94 oz 23141GA572 60 g 2 12 oz Balance weight part number Adhesive type weight for alumi num wheel Weight 28101AE00B 5 g 0...

Page 4301: ...ght on models with transmitters tire pressure sensor is to be 120 g 4 23 oz or less 5 Using the wheel balancer measure the wheel balance again Check that wheel balance is cor rectly adjusted NOTE Knoc...

Page 4302: ...nd 2 When the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread 3 When a crack on tire valve is found replace the tire valve 1 TIRE ROTATION Rotate the tires periodically 12 500 km 7 500 m...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for 2006 Legacy

ZAPTEC Go Quick Manual preview
Go
Brand: ZAPTEC Pages: 64
ZAPTEC Go Installation Manual preview
Go
Brand: ZAPTEC Pages: 24
Pacbrake 10475 Installation Manual preview
10475
Brand: Pacbrake Pages: 9
Harken Hoister SUP Manual preview
SUP
Brand: Harken Hoister Pages: 12
Yamaha Raptor Instruction Supplement preview
Raptor
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 2
Fabbri BICI OK 2 Quick Start Manual preview
BICI OK 2
Brand: Fabbri Pages: 4
Kolpin 25-9250 Owner'S And Operator'S Manual preview
25-9250
Brand: Kolpin Pages: 25
TATA Motors nano genX Owner'S Manual preview
nano genX
Brand: TATA Motors Pages: 156
Cadillac 2007 CTS Owner'S Manual preview
2007 CTS
Brand: Cadillac Pages: 518
Opel OPEL INSIGNIA Infotainment Manual preview
OPEL INSIGNIA
Brand: Opel Pages: 141
Nav TV W204PGM Operation Instructions preview
W204PGM
Brand: Nav TV Pages: 3
Dodge 8W-30 Wiring Diagram preview
8W-30
Brand: Dodge Pages: 24
iArmor EDGE IA-N098 Quick Start Manual preview
EDGE IA-N098
Brand: iArmor Pages: 4
Cadillac 1999 DeVille Owner'S Manual preview
1999 DeVille
Brand: Cadillac Pages: 368
Luverne 205760 Installation Instructions preview
205760
Brand: Luverne Pages: 3
Navman B2+ User Manual preview
B2+
Brand: Navman Pages: 27
ULTIMATE SPEED 94600 Assembly And Safety Advice preview
94600
Brand: ULTIMATE SPEED Pages: 21
Xblitz Mirror 2016 User Manual preview
Mirror 2016
Brand: Xblitz Pages: 30

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands